Post on 24-Jun-2018
ED 064 145
TITLEINSTITUTIM
REPORT NOPUB DATENOTE
EDRS PaIcEDESCRIPTORS
IDENTIFIERS
DOCUMENT RESUME
SE 014 116
Mathematics, Vol. 2.Department of the Navy, Washington, D.C. Bureau ofNaval Personnel.NavPers-10071-B68276p.
MF-$0.65 HC-$9.87*Calculus; *College Mathematics; Geometry;*Instructional Materials; *Mathematics; Physics;TrigonometryLogarithms; Vectors
ABSTRACTThe second of three volumes of a mathematics training
course for Navy personnel, this document contains material primarilyfound at the college level. Beginning with logarithms andtrigonometry, the text moves into vectors and static equilibrium(physics). Coordinate geometry, conic sections, and the tangents,normals, and slopes of curves follow. Four chapters are devoted tolimits, differentiation, and integration; the text concludes with twochapters on combinations, permutations, and probability. Relateddocuments are SE 014 115 and SE 014 117. (JM)
4
U S DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH.EDUCATION Et WELFAREOFFICE OF EDUCATION
THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN REPRODUCED EXACTLY AS RECEIVED FROMTHE PERSON OR ORGANIZA:IONINATING IT POINTS OF VIEW OR OPINIONS STATED DO NOT NECESSARILYREPRESENT OFFICIAL OFFICE OF EDUCATION POSITION OR POLICY
:.:.
0.:0. .
:::
t .
MA.HERIA.I,S VOL..
f
BUREAU OF NAVAL PERSONNELNAVY TRAINING COURSE NAVPERS 10071-B
PREFACE
2
The purpose of this Navy Training Course is to aid those personnelwho need an extension of the knowledge of mathematics gained fromMathematics Vol. 1, NavPers 10069-C. To serve the wide varietyof needs, the text is general in nature and is not directed, therefore,toward any one specific specialty.
The definitions and notations of logarithms followed by computationswith logarithms occur early in the text. Trigonometric ratios andanalysis and applications along with aids to computations occur next.Vectors and static equilibrium are followed by trigonometric identitiesand equations.
Straight lines, conic sections, tangents, normals, and slopes precedethe introduction to differential and integral calculus.
The introduction to calculus is intended as a survey course priorto a more rigorous study of the subject. The limit concept is followedby a discussion of derivatives and integration. Basic integration .irnrilasfollow this discussion.
The last chapter of the course covers combinations and permu-tations, and gives an introduction to probability.
Numerous examples and practice problems are given throughout thetext to aid the understanding of the subject matter.
This training course was prepared by the Navy Training PublicationsCenter, Memphis, Tennessee, for the Bureau of Naval Personnel.
1968 Edition
Stock Ordering Number0500-025-0100
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 2:0102 - Prise $1.76
0:0i'../
THE UNITED STATES NAVY
GUARDIAN OF OUR COUNTRYThe United States Navy is responsible for maintaining control of the seaand is a ready force on watch at home and overseas, capable of strongaction to preserve the peace or of instant offensive action to win in war.
It L upon the maintenance of this control that our country's gloriousfuture depends; the United States Navy exists to make it so.
WE SERVE WITH HONOR
Tradition, valor, and victory are the Navy's heritage from the past. Tothese may be added dedication, discipline, and vigilance as the watchwordsof the present and the future.
At home or on distant stations we serve with pride, confident in the respectof our country, our shipmates, and our families.
Our responsibilities sober us; our adversities strengthen us.
Service to God and Country is vir special privilege. We serve with honor.
THE FUTURE OF THE NAVY
The Navy will always employ new weapons, new techniques, andgreater power to protect and defend the United States on the sea, unc'erthe sea, and in the air.
Now and in the future, control of the sea gives the United States hergreatest advantage for the maintenance of peace and for victory in war.
Mobility, surprise, dispersal, and offensive power are the keynotes ofthe new Navy. The roots of the Navy lie in a strong belief in thefuture, in continued dedication to our tasks, and in reflection on ourheritage from the past.
Never have our opportunities and our responsibilities been greater.
CONTENTS
Chapter
1. Logarithms
2. Computation with logarithms
3. Trigonometric measurements
4. Trigonometric analysis
5. Oblique triangles
6. Vectors
7. Static equilibrium
8. Trigonometric identities and equations
9. Straight lines
10. Conic sections
11. Tangents, normals, and slopes of curves
12. Limits and differentiation
13. Derivatives
14. Integration .
15. Integration formulas
16. Combinations and permutations
17. Probability
Appendix
I. Logarithms of trigonometric functions
U. Common logarithms of numbers
III. Natural sines and cosines
IV. Natural tangents and cotangents
Index
1
Page
1
9
17
31
55
77
92
103
122
135
165
179
193
206
220
234
244
257
258
259
264
270
iii
ACTIVE DUTY ADVANCEMENT REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS*
-
El to E2 E2 to E3#t E3
to E4#E4to ES
t E5
to E6 t E6 to E7 t E7 to E8 t (8 to E9
SERVICE
4 mos.service--
Orample,tion ofrecruit
training.
6 mos.as E-2.
6 mos.as E-3.
12 mos.as E-4.
24 mos.as (-5.
36 mos.as E-6.8
we!'
enlisted
"Mk.'
36 mos.as E-7.8 of 11yearstotal
servicemust beenlisted.
I
24 mos.as E-8.10 of 13
yearstotal
servicemust beenlisted..
SCHOOLRecruit
Training. ,DT3,
Class Afor PR3,
P13.AME 3,HM 3
Class 8
for AGCMUC,
MNC.
PRACTICAL
FACTORS ,
Locally
PreParidchock-
Records of Practical Factors, NavPers 1414/1, must be
completed for E-3 and all PO advancements.
PERFORMANCE
TEST
,
, -
Specified ratings must completeapplicable performance tests be-fore taking examinations. ,
ENLISTED
PERFORMANCE
EVALUATION
As used by COwhen approving
advancement.
Counts toward performance factor credit in ad-vancement multiple.
EXAMINATIONS**
Locally__A
P "Phtests." See
below,
Navy-wide excaninations required
for all PO advancements,
Navy-wide, ,
selection board.
7
NAVY TRAININGCOURSE (INCLUD-
ING MILITARY
REQUIREMENTS)
.Required for E-3 and all PO advancements
e, '- unless waived because school comple-<., <,:,
. , Non, but need not be repeated if identicalcourse has already beer. completed. See:
< -, y ,,:, NavPers 10052 (current edition).,
Correspondencecourses andrecommendedfeeding. see
NavPers 10052(current edition).
AUTHORIZATION
,
CommandingOfficer
US. Naval ExaminingCenter
Bureau of Naval Personnel
* All advancements require commanding officer's recommendation .t 1 year obligated service required kr E-5 and E-6; 2 years for E-6, (-7, E-8 and E-9.
* Military leadership exam required for E-4 and E-5.** For E-2 to E-3, NAVEXAMCEN exams or locally prepared tests may be used.
iv
4
INACTIVE DUTY ADVANCEMENT REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS* El to E2 E2 to E3 E3 to E4 E4 to ES ES to E6 E6 to E7 ES E9
TOTAL
TIME
IN
GRAD:
4 mos. 6 mos. 15 mos. 1 i mos. 24 mos. 36 mos. 36 mos. 24 mos.
TOTAL
TRAINING
DUTY IN
GRADE t
14 days 14 days 14 days 14 days 28 days 42 days 42 days 26 days
PERFORMANCE
TESTS
Spetilled ratings must complete apOmealeperformance tests before taking exami-nation.
DRILL
PARTICIPATION Satisfactory par4dpation as a member of a drill unit.
PRACTICAL FACTORS
(INCLUDING MILITARY
REQUIREMENTS)
Record of Practical Factors, NavPers 1414/1, must be completedfor all advancements.
NAVY TRAINING
COURSE (INCLUDING
MILITARY REQUIRE-
MENTS)
Completion of applicalge course or courses must be enteredin service record.
EXAMINATION Standard
Exam
Standard
Exam
or
Rating
Training.
Standard Exam
required for all PO
Advancements.
Standard Exam,
Selection Board.
Aka Pass MILeadership
Exam for (-4and E-S. 4P4
AUTHORIZATION CommandingOfficer
U.S. Naval Examining
CenterBureau of Naval
Personnel
Recommendation by commanding officer required for all advancements.t Active duty periods may be substituted for training duty.
5
CHAPTER 1
LOGARiTHMS
The basic definitions and terminology as-sociated with the study of logarithms were dis-cussed in Mathematics, Vol. 1, NavPers10069-C. Some of these basic topics are re-viewed in the fcllowing paragraphs, followed bydiscussion of the use of log tables and naturallogarithms.
REVIEW OF DEFINITIONS
The most important definition to remember,concerning logarithms, is that everylogarithm isan exponent. For example, since 3' is equal to9, the logarithm of 9 to the base 3 is 2. In orderto state a logarithmic relationship, a base mustbe stated or implied; the various exponents whichdesignate powers of the base are logarithms tothat base.
The usual method of expressing the basicdefinition oi logarithms in symbols is as follows:
If bx = a, then x = logb a
The two forms shown in the foregoing expres-sion are defined as follows:
EXPONENTIAL FORM: bx = a
LOGARITHMIC FORM: x = logs aEXAMPLE: Change the expression 23 = 8 to
logarithmic form.SOLUTION: If bX = a, then logs a = x.
Let b = 2, x = 3, a = 8Substituting,
log2 8 = 3
EXAMPLE: Change the expression logn 100= 2 to exponential form.
SOLUTION: If logs a = x, then bx = aSubstituting,
102 = 100
1
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:1. Change 103 = 1,000 to logarithmic form.2. Change ex = N to logarithmic form.3. Change log2 4 = 2 to exponential form.4. Change log10 3.16 = 1/2 to exponential
form.ANSWERS:1. log10 1,000 = 3
2. loge N = x3. 22 = 44. 101/2 = 3.16
RULES FOR CALCULATION
Numerical calculation by means of loga-rithms is performed by using 10 as the base.Therefore, in the discussion which follows, nobase designation is used. The expression log Ais understood to mean the base 10 logarithm ofA.
Two important abilities are necessary forlogarithmic calculation, as follows:
1. Recognition of logarithms as exponents.2. Knowledge of the rules for exponents in
multiplication and division of algebraic quan-tities.
The first of these abilities was discussedin the foregoing section. The second is the sub-ject of the following paragraphs.Multiplication
Suppose that we wish to multiply A and B, andwe know the following:
A = 10m
B = lOn
The product AB then isAB = 10m x 10n
= 10(m +
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
In logarithmic form,
log A = m
log B = n
log AB m + n
Assuming that we can find AB if we know itslugarithm, the procedure then may be stated asfollows:
To multiply two numbers by means of log-arithms, add their logarithms and find the num-ber whose logarithm is the sum.
EXAMPLE: Multiply 100 times 1,000 bylogarithms.
SOLUTION:
100 = 102 :. log 100 = 2
1,000 = 103:. log 1,000 = 3
log (100 x 1,000) = 2 + 3
= 5
:.100 x 1,000 = 105
= 100,000
Divioion
If A is to be divided by B, and A and B arethe same numbers as in the foregoing discus-sicn4 then we have
A 10mB n 10(1n
10
In logarithmic form,
log A = m
log B nAlogs=m-n
This may be stated in words as follows:To divide B into A by logarithms, subtract
log B from log A and find the number whoselogarithm is the difference.
EXAMPLE: Divide 1,000 by 100 by log-arithms.
2
SOLUTION:
log 1,000 = 3
log 100 = 2
log 112° = 1
14000 1
100 10
= 10
Powers
In order to calculatc a power such as A3 bylogarithms, we observe that
A3 =AxAxA
:. log A3 = log A + log A + log A
= 3 log A
Stated in words, the power rule is as follows:
To find An by logarithms, first express logAn as n log A. The number whose logarithm isn log A is the desired power, An.
EXAMPLE: Find the value of 1002 by usinglogarithms.
SOLUTION:
log 1002 = 2 log 100
= 2(2)
= 4
Therefore,
1002 = 104
= 10,000
Boots
The calculation of roots by logarithms iseasily accomplished by first changing the formof the expression to a fractional power. Thenthe power rule is used.
=AMPLE: Find 11100 by logarith.ns.
Chapter 1LOGARITHMS
SOLUTION:
loo1/21log 1001/2 = 1- log 100
4 (2)
USING LOG TABLES
Tables of logarithms could be constructedusing any number as a base. For purposes ofcalculation, the most logical numuer for a baseis 10, the base of the decimal number system.Logarithms to the base 10 are called COMMONLOGARITHMS.
COMMON LOGARITHMS
Most of the numbers encountered in variouscalculations are not integral (whole number)powers of 10. For example, the number 316can be expressed as a power of 10 only if weresort to fractional powers. We find that
316 = 105/2
= 102 1/2 (approximately)
= 102'5
(The exact value of105 is very close to 316.23.)
Therefore, in logarithmic form,
log 316 = 2.5 (approximately)
Every logarithm consists of an integral partand a fractional part. Thus the logarithm of 316is
2.5 = 2 + 0.5
The integral part is the CHARACTERISTIC; inthis example, the characteristic is 2. The frac-tional part is the MANTISSA; in this example,the mantissa is 0.5.
3
Integers
The characteristic for the logarithm of aninteger may be determined by inspection. Forexample, if the integer is between 1 and 10, itis equal to a power of 10 behveen 0 and 1. Thisconcept is explained fully in Mathematics, Vol-ume 1, NavPers 10069-C.
The numbers in the following list serve toillustrate how the characteristic is determinedby the size of the number:
log 3,6 = 0.5563
log 36 = 1.5563
log 360= 2.5563
log 3,600= 3.5563
Since log 1 is 0 and log 10 is 1, we expect thelogaritlun of 3.6 to be a numberbetween 0 and 1.Therefore, its characteristic is 0. On the otherhand, 3,600 is greater than 1,000 and less than10,000. Therefore its logarithm is between log1,000 and log 10,000, and its characteristic is 3.In the foregoing tabulation, we find that thecom-plete logarithm of 3,600 is 3;5563.
Scientific notation provides a convenientmethod for determining the characteristic. Forexample, 3,600 is written as 3.6 x 103 in scien-tific notation. Thus we have
log 3,600 = log (3.6 x 103)
= log 3.6 + log 103
The characteristic pf log 3.6 is 0, told the char-acteristic of log 10 is 3. Therefore, the char-acteristic of log 3,600 is 3, the sum of thecharacteristics of the two separate logarithms.Any expression written in scientific notationconsists of a number between 1 and 10, multi-plied by a power of 10. Since the characteristicof a number between 1 and 10 is 0, the power of10 determines the characteristic of the log-arithm.
The exponent that we obtain as the powerof 10 in scientific notation is indicated by thenumber of digits between the actual position ofthe decimal point in the original number andthe standard position of the decimal point. Thestandard position is immediately after the firstnonzero digit in the number. For example, inthe number 3,600, the decimal point is understood
8
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
to be after the second 0 in the original number.This is 3 digits to the right of standard position,so that the exponent of 10 for scientific notationis 3. This exponent is also the characteristic forlog 3,600. If the decimal point in the originalnumber had been to the left of standard position,the exponent of 10 (and therefore the character-istic) would have been negative.
Fractions
When the logarithm of a fraction is obtained,a negative characteristic occurs. For example,
log 04036 = log (3.6 x 104)
= log 3.6 + log 10-2
= log 3.6 + (-2)
The mantissa for log 3.6 is 0.5563. There-fore,
log 0.036 = 0.5563 - 2
Since logarithm tables do not list negativemantissas, we do not subtract 2 from 0.5563to obtain the final form of log 0.036.
Some tables handle the problem of negativecharacteristics by placing a negative sign abovethe characteristic as follows:
log 0.036 =1-.5563
Observe that an entry such as
-2.5563
would be misleading. It would be interpreted asif the mantissa, as well as the characteristic,were negative.
Perhaps the most universal form for nega-tive characteristics is as follows:
log 0.036 = 8.5563 - 10
This form is numerically equal to
0.5563 - 2
but it has the advantage of presenting the char-acteristic, as well as the mantissa, as a posi-tive number.
Negative numbeis and 0 do not have loga-rithms. In the case of 0, none is needed for
purposes of calculation. However, it is oftennecessary to multiply and divide negative quan-tities using logarithms. In order to use log-arithms for this purpose, we first determinethe sign of the final answer. Then all numbersare treated as positive, and the predeterminedsign is affixed.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:Determine the characteristic of the loga-
rithm for each of the following numbers:1. 322. 4763. 0.254. 0.0074ANSWERS:1. 1
2. 23. -1 or 9 - 104. -3 or 7 - 10
MantissaTables of logarithms normally contain only
mantissas. Since these are understood tobe thedecimal parts of the logarithms which theyrepresent, the decimal points are often omittedin the printed table. Appendix ll of this courseis constructed in this way, and the user is ex-pected to supply the characteristic and the deci-mal point with each mantissa. Table 1-1 is anexcerpt from appendix II.
Observe that the table of logarithms hasheadings consisting of the abbreviationNo. (rep-resenting Number) and the digits 0 thrm ,h 9.The first two digits of any number whose loga-ritlun we seek are found in the No. column. Thethird digit is found as one of the column head-ings, 0 through 9. The mantissa for the loga-rithm of any three-digit number is found op-posite the first two digits, which are located inthe No. column, and below the third digit.
EXAMPLE: Find the mantissa for the loga-rithm of 124.
SOLUTION:1. In the No. column, table 1-1, find the
number 12.2. Move to the right, staying in the row of
mantissas opposite 12, until you reach the columnwith the digit 4 as a heading.
3. Read the mantissa, .0934. NO% thatwe supply the decimal point.
EXAMPLE: Find the complete logarithm Gf13.7.
4-.
9
Chapter 1-LOGARIltIMS
Table 1-1. -Example of common logarithm table.
No. 0.
1,
2 3 4 5 6 7 8.
9
10 0000 0043
_
0086 0128 0170 0212 0253 0294 0334 0374
11 0414 0453 0492 0531 0569 0607 0645 0682 0719 0755
12 0792 0828 0864 0899 0934 0969 1004 1038 1072 1106
13 1139 1173 1206 1239 1271 1303 1335 1367 1399 1430
14 1461 1492 1523 1553 1584 1614 1644 1673 1703 1732
SOLUTION: Always determine the char-acteristic before entering the table.
1. The characteristic of 13.7 is 1. Wemay now disregard the decimal point and enterthe table with just the digits 137.
2. In the No. column, table 1-1, find thenumber 13.
3. Move to the right, staying in the 13 row,until you reach the 7 column.
4. The mantissa is .1367.5. The logarithm of 13.7 is 1.1367.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:
Find the logarithms of the following num-bers:
1. 1182. 342 (See appendix II.)3. 14.64. 5.48ANSWERS:
10
NUMBERS MANTISSAS
r-- 1120 .04925
1125
1130 .0531
.0039
We analyze the foregoing tabulation in termsof the difference between the numbers and thedifference between the mantissas. The largebracket on the numbers indicates a differenceof 10, and the small bracket shows that our
5number is 10of the way between the two num-
bers in the table. Therefore, the mantissa cor-a
responding to our number should be 10of the
way between the mantissas in the table.
1.2.3.4.
2.07192.53401.16440.7388
5 (.0039) = .00195
=I .0020 (to 4 places)10--
INTERPOLATION
Interpolation is the process of calculatingthe mantissa for the logarithm of a numberhaving one more digit than the table entries, Forexample, to find the logarithm' of 1125 it wouldbe necessary to interpolate in table 1-1.
The logarithm of 1125 is halfway betweenthe logarithms of 1120 and 1130. Therefore,we find the mantissas for the logarithms ofthese two numbers and then determine themantissa that is halfway between them. Thework is arranged as follows:
Adding .0020 to .0492, we obtain the mantissacorresponding to 1125; it is .0512. Therefore,
log 1125 = 3.0512
EXAMPLE: Find log 25.67.
SOLUTION:
1. The characteristic is 1.
2. The number lies between 2580 and 2570.Therefore the mantissa lies between .4082 and.4099.
jo
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
3. Tabilate:
10
[2560
2567
.4082
.0017
2570 .4099
74. Our number is fr) of the way between2560 and 2570. Therefore, the mantissa is-1-1 of the way between .4082 and .4099.10
5. j (.0017) = .00119
= .0012 (to 4 places)6. .4082 + .0012 = .4094
:.log 25.67 = 1.4094PRACTICE PROBLEMS:Find the logarithms of the following numbers:1. 0.23452. 5.4323. 473.64. 9817ANSWERS:1. 9.3702 - 102. 0.73523. 2.67544. 3.9919
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNC TIONS
Logarithms of trigonometric functions maybe obtained by first looking up the decimal valueof the natural function and then finding the loga-rithm of this decimal number. However, theprocess is laborious, and it is rendered unneces-sary by the existence of tables of logarithms ofthe trigonometric functions.
Appendix I of this training course is a samplepage from a typical tale of trigonometric log-aritiuns. Its construction is similar to that ofappendix II, except that 10 is added to eachmantissa. Thus the entry for log cot 38° is10.10719, with the quantity "4 0" understood.The complete logarithm is then
log cot 38° = 10.10719 - 10
log sin 380 = 9.78934 - 10
ANTILOGARITHMS
The procedure of finding a number when weknow its logarithm is called "finding the anti-logarithm.° The word "antilogarithm" is ab-breviated "antilog," and a symbol sometimesused to indicate the antilog is log-1. The -1 ina symbol of this kind tends to be confusing, sinceit is not an exponent. It is an indicator whichemphasizes the INVERSE relationship betweenlogs and antilogs.
The antilogarithm is easily found when thecorresponding mantissa is an exact table entry.
EXAMPLE: Find the antilogarithm of1.1271.
SOLUTION:1. Find the mantissa .1271 in appendix II.
(The decimal point is understood.)2. The column in which .1271 is found de-
termines the third digit of the antilog. The thirddigit is 4.
3. The row in which .1271 is located de-termines the first two digits of the antilog. Inthat row, and in the No. column, we find thedigits 13. Thus the digits of the antilog are 134.
4. Since the characteristic of the originallogarithm is 1, the antilogarithm must be anumber between 10 and 100. Thus the decimalpoint must be placed between the 3 and the 4.
5. We conclude that
antilog 1.1271 = 13.4
Interpolation must be used when the mantissawhose antilogaritim we seek is not an exactentry in the table.
EXAMPLE: Find the antilogarithm of8.5124 - 10.
SOLUTION:1. Find the mantissas nearest to .5124 in
appendix I. These are .5119 and .5132. Since.5124 is between .5119 and .5132, its antilog isbetween the antilogs corresponding to these twomantissas.
2. Tabulating the results of step 1, andletting N represent the antilog corresponding to
22 0.10719
The addition of 10 to each table entry makesthe correct form automatic in those cases wherea "9 - 1 " type of format is involved. For ex-ample, the character stic for log sin 38° is -1,with the following result:
.5124, we have
NUMBER
.0325
.0326
MANTISSA
.5119
.5124 J
.5132
.0005 .0013
6
Chapter 1-LOGARITHMS
(The numbers .0325 and .0326 are decimalsbe-cause of the -2 characteristic.)
3. Our tabulation shows that we use .0005parts out of .0013 ingoingfrom.0325to N. Thisis the same as 5 out of 13, so that we use5 of the total difference inthe mantissa. Thus,
5N should be 15 of the way from .0325 to .0326.
4. Multiplying to findAof the difference
between the numbers, we have
1 x . 0001 = .384 x .000113
= .00004 (approximately)
5. The difference between .0325 and N isadded to .0325 to obtain N.
N = .0325 + .00004
= .03254
O. We conclude that
antilog 8.5124 - 10 = .03254
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:Find the antilogarithms of the following log-
arithms:1. 2.70302. 9.3830 - 103. 1.84514. 0.3842ANSWERS:1. 504.72. 0.23103. 70.004. 2.422
NATURAL LOGARITHMS
Natural logarithms are so named because thenumber.e, the base of the natural logarithm sys-tem, is involved in the law of nature governinggrowth and decay. This law is stated in symbolsas follows:
A = A ert
In the foregoing equation?, A represents thetotal amount after a perioc! of growth, and Aorepresents the amount at the beginning of the
7
growth period. The letter r represents thecontinuous rate of growth, and t represents thetime period during which growth occurs. Thesame remarks apply for a period of decay.
By means of higher mathematics, the num-ber e is found to have the value
e = 2.71828 (approximately)
This number is the base of the natural loga-rithm system.
CHANGING BASES
The relationship between the common loga-rithm of a number and its natural logarithm isas follows:
In N 2.3028 log N
Observe that the special abbreviation, In N, isused to represent loge N.
The derivation of the foregoing equation isdescribed in the following paragraphs.
Let ex = N, where N is any annber. Takingthe natural logarithms of both sides, we have
xlne=1,01
Since ln e means loge e, In e is the same as 1.Therefore,
x = In N
This result is also obtainable from the basicdefinition of logarithms.
Taking common logarithms on both sides inthe expression
ex N
we have the following:
log ex = log N
x log e =logN
=08 e
Equating the two expressions which we haveobtained for x, we have
In N isaLtiog e
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
From the table of common logarithnis, we findthat log 2.71828 is 0.4343. Finally,
70 log N111 = 6.4343
1. 152. 803. 294. 35
Since the raciprocal of 0.4343 is 2.3026,ln N = 2.3026 log N
ANSWERS.
1. 2.7080PRACTICE PROBLEMS: 2. 4.3820Find the natural logarithms of the following 3. 3.3673
numbers: 4. 3.5553
.1=
8
CHAPTER 2
COMPUTATION WITH LOGARITHMS
The use of log tables and an introduction to Exponential solution:natural logarithms were discussed in chapter 1.Included in that chapter were the rules for nu-merical calculations involving logarithms anda review of the laws of exponents.
Additional mention of the laws of exponentswill be given in the following paragraphs followedby discussions of the useof logarithms in numer-ical computations.
Six rules of exponents are shown in table 2-1for reference and review.
The purpose of the study of logarithms is toenable us to shorten computations with numbers.In many computations involving multiplication,division, powers, roots, or combinations ofthese, the solutions may be reached more easilyby replacing ordinary arithmetical processeswith logarithmical processes.
Appendix II gives the common (base 10) loga-rithms of numbers to four places. All calcula- INTERPOLATION:tions by means of logarithms in this chapter use10 as the base. In accordance withthe convention NUMBERestablished in chapter 1 the expression log A isunderstood to mean the base 10 logarithm of A. 980
386 x 254 = 102.5866 x 102.4048
= 102.5866 + 2. 4048
= 104. 9914
Logarithmic solution:
log (386 x 254) = log 386 + log 254
= 2.5866 + 2.4048
= 4.9931
Antilog 4.9914 = 980 + (interpolation correc-tion)
MULTIPLICATION
The logarithm of the product of two or more 981
members is the sum of the logarithms of theseparate numbers.
EXAMPLE: Use logarithms to find the prod-uct:
386 x 254
SOLUTION:
Logarithmicequation
Exponentialequation
log 386 = 2. 5866 386 = 102. 5866
log 254 = 2.4048 254 = 102. 4048
MANTISSA
. 9912. 0002
1 . 9914
. 9917
. 0002. 4
. 0005x 1 =
Antilog of .9914 = 980 + .4 = 980.4
. 0005
When combined with the characteristic of 4 toplace the decimal
Antilog 4.9914 * 984040:.386 x 254 =
The exponential solution shown in the exampleis not a part of normal calculations involvinglogarithms. It was shown in this first exampleproblem solely for the purpose of reemphasizing
9
14
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Table 2-1. Laws of exponents.
OPERATION ALGEBRAIC NUMERIC
MULTIPLICATION
DIVISION
POWER OF A
POWER
POWER OF A
PRODUCT
POWER OF A
QUOTIENT
TRANSPOSING
NEGATIVE
EXPONENTS
aman= am+ n
-nam= am
a
(am) n = amn
(ab)m = ambm
(On1 = m
a-m a
-n 1a =an
42.43
o-7-r . 35
(123) 2
= 42+3
7-3= 5
= 123°
=45
4= 5
2 = 126
2)4 54 34 24
2 2
=412"
1 =525-2
A-3 1- 34
the relationship between exponents and loga- antilog 3.7236= - 5,291rithms.EXAMPLE: Use logarithms to find the prod- Therefore,uct of (126) x (-42).SOLUTION: Recall from chapter 1 that nega-
tive numbers do not have logarithms. In usinglogarithms to solve problems that involve nega-tive numbers, we first determine the sign of uct of 1.73 x 0.0024 x 0.08.the final answer. After this sign is determined,the indicated operations are performed treat-ing all numbers as positive quantities, and thepredetermined sign is affixed to the answer.
In our example, dealing first withonly signs,we determine the answer to be negative. Thatis, (+) x (-) results in (-) answer. At this pointthe problem can be restateduse logarithms tofind the product of
(126) x (-42) = - 5,291
EXAMPLE: Use logarithms tofind the prod-
- (126 x 42)
- log (126.42) -(log 126 + log 42)
= - (2. 1004 + 1. 6232)
3.7236
10
15
SOLUTION:
log (1.73 x 0.0024 x 0.08)
log 1.73 + log 0.0024 + log 0.08
log 1. 73 = 0. 2380
log 0.0024 7.3802 - 10
log 0.08 = 8.9031 - 10
sum = 16.5213 - 20this can be adjusted to
sum = 6.5213 - 10
Chapter 2-COMPUTATION WITH LOGARITHMS
or
log (1.73 x 0.0024 x 0.08) = 6.5213 - 10
antilog 6. 5213 - 10 = .0003322
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:
Use logarithms to find the product of thefollowing:
1.73 x 0.0024 x 0.08 = .00033221. 53 x 76 x 0.021 x 153
2. 1.02 x 109 x 4.76 x 10-3
It is in problems such as this example thatthe relationships of logarithms, exponents, andthe scientific notation can be used. Go back tothe step where
3.
4.
0.00432 x 0.00106 x 15
0.102 x 103.5 x 76.2
log (1.73.0.0024.0.08) = 6.5213 - 10
Perform the calculations required to go from thisstep to the next one in which
antilog 6.5213 - 10 = 0.0003322Proper decimal placement is often more diffi-cult in a problem of this type than in a problemwhich does not involve a negative characteristic.The difficulty may be reduced if the relation-ships of logarithms, exponents, and scientificnotation are utilized. After the step
log (1.73.0.0024.0.08) = 6.5213 - 10reference to the tables shows that the antilogof the mantissa is between 332 and 333. Inter-polation and rounding off produces the digits3322 as the antilog of the mantissa.
In chapter 1 it was shown that a character-istic could be determined by expressing a num-ber as a number between 1 and 10, multipliedby a power of 10. An antilog can be deter-mined by the converse of this procedure if thedigits which represent the antilog of the man-tissa are written as a number between 1 and 10and multiplied by a power of 10. The particularpower of 10 to be used is equal to the character-istic of the logarithm in question.
Apply this to the example problem where thedigits are 3322 and the logarithm is 6.5213 -10.The power of 10 is -4 since the characteristicis 6 - 10 or -4. Expressing the digits as anumber between 1 and 10 multiplied by thispower of 10 yields 3.322 x 10-4, and the anti-log of 6.5213 -10 equals 3.322 x 10-4. In-spection of the example problem indicates theantilog is 0.0003322 and since
0.0003322 = 3.322 x 10-4
the results of both methods are the same.
ANSWERS:
1. 12,942
2. 4,855,555
3. 6.87 x 10-5
4. 804.4
DIVISION
The logarithm of the quotient of two numbersis the logarithm of the dividead minus the loga-rithm of the divisor. As with multiplication,this rule is simply an application of the law ofexponents. For example,
105 4- 103 = 105-3 = 102
EXAMPLE: Find the quotient of 344 by useof logarithms.
11
SOLUTION:
log (37. 4 1.7) = log 37.4 - log 1.7
log 37.4 = 1. 5729
- log 1.7 = 0.2304
1. 3425
log (37.4 + 1.7) = 1.3425
antilog 1.3425 22 22
37. 41.7 = 22
16.3EXAMPLE: Find the quotient of
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
SOLUTION:
log (16.3 4- 0.008) = log 16.3 - log 0.008
log 16.3 = 1. 2122
log 0.008 = 7.9031 - 10
In order to prevent the complication of sub-tracting the characteristic, 7, from the smallercharacteristic, 1, we add 10 to and subtract 10from, the logarithm of the dividend. Note thatthis does not change the value of the logarithm.Thus,
log 16.3 = 11.2122 - 10
- log 0.008 = 7.9031 - 10
3.3091
antilog 3.3091 = 2037
16.32037=
0. 008
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Use logarithms tosolve the following problems:
1. 635.6 4. 25.4
2. 0.26 0.061
3. 0.126 4- 0.00542
4. 874 .÷- 26.3
ANSWERS:
1. 25.03
2. 4.263
3. 23.25
4. 33.23
COLOGARITHMS
Dividing one number by another may beaccomplished logarithmically by addition ratherthan subtraction, if the cologarithm is employed.The cologarithm of a number is the logarithmof the reciprocal of the number. The reasonthat the cologarithm may be added is explainedin the following example:
Evaluate 1512
log 1-1 = log 15 (IQ12
Thus,
1= log 15 + log (T)
15log - = log 15 + colog 1212
The cologarithm may be easily derived bysubtracting the logarithm of the numberfrom thelogarithm of 1. Thus,
colog 12 = log (A)
= log 1 - log 12
but log 1 = 0
Therefore,
colog 12 = 0 - log 12
= 0 - 1. 0792
Writing 0 as 10 - 10, we have
colog 12 = (10.0000 - 10) - log 12
colog 12 = (10.0000 - 10) - (1.0792)
= 8.9208 - 10
Since writing the colgarithm is almost as simpleas writing the logarithm, it is sometimes advan-tageous to use cologarithms in complicated prob-lems and thus make the problem one of addition.
Returning to the original problem
15log i-2 = log 15 + colog 12
15 1. 1761log D = 8. 9208 - 1010. 0969 - 10
15log yi = O. 0969
antilog 0. 0969 = 1. 25
Chapter 2-COMPUTATION WITH LOGARITHMS
15and 1. 25 = D
EXAMPLE: Evaluate the following by use oflogarithms and colgarithms.
343. 8592 x O. 76
or
SOLUTION:
343. 8log 592 x O. 76
= log 343. 8 - log 592 - log O. 76
= log 343. 8 + colog 592 + colog 0. 76
log 343. 8 = 2. 5363
colog 592 = 7. 227 - 10
colog 0. 76 = O. 1192
antilog
.
9. 8832 - 10
343. 8
9. 8832 - 10
= O. 7642.
= 0' 7642592 x O. 76
It should be understood that this problemcould be solved without using cologarithms byfinding the logarithms of the two numbers in thedenominator, adding them and then subtractingtheir sum from the logarithm of the number inthe numerator. Since both methods are equallyaccurate, the selection of either method becomesone of convenience.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:
Evaluate the following numbers by use oflogarithms and cologarithms:
210 x 4. 11. 33 x O. 8754 x 1. 7
14 x 0.27 x 36.162' 11 x 8 x 17 x 6. 76
ANSWERS:
1. 17.54
2, O. 0135
-..
RAISING TO A POWER
To find the log of the power of a number,multiply the logarithm of the number by theexponent of the power. This rule is based onthe law of exponents for finding the power of apower. For instance,
3 2 3 3 3+3 6(4 ) = 4 x 4 = 4 = 4
(43)2 = 43x2= 46
(102. 8)2 = (102.01205)2
= 104.02410
13
18
or
Also
EXAMPLE: Find the value of (18. 53)5.
SOLUTION:
log (18. 53)5 = 5 log 18. 53
5 log 18. 53 = 1.2679 x 5
= 6. 3395
antilog 6. 3395 = 2,185,263
(1ft. 53)5 = 2,185,263
TAKING A ROOT
To find the log of the root of a number,divide the logarithm of the number by the indexof the root.
We recall the law of exponents for taking aroot. For instance,
Also,
3[8-i= (82)1/3 82/3
5 Ir.bili(5-0- =51405.0126
5 0126 1/5= (10-* )
= 101.0025
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
EXAMPLE: Find the value of 5(521.1
SOLUTION:
log 5N1i27.I = log 327. 6
log 327.6 = 2.5153
1 log 327. 6 = 2. 5153 55
= 0.5031
antilog O. 5031 = 3. 185
. 51/521-776- = 3.185
1.
2.
3.
4.
ANSWERS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
(3.276)3
(0.00468)2
64:T0867
5;11177
35.15
0. 0000219
0.4532
2.987
ROOTS OF QUANTITIES WITHNEGATIVE CHARACTERISTICS
When a logarithm with a negative charac-teristic is to be divided, it is advisable to addand subtract a number that will, after dividing,leave a minus 10 at the right. This is done tokeep the logarithm in standard form. Forexample, if the problem were 51r0-ar-018, we wouldhave
I 1log 5V O. 0018 = 5 log 0. 0018
1= -5- (7.2553 - 10)
Here, to keep a minus 10 in the final logarithm,we must add and subtract 40 before dividing.Thus,
1log
5 ((DMZ = 5 (47.2553 - 50)
47. 2553 - 05log54(T0T.8
= -I--
log5Nrea018 = 9. 4511 - 10
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Evaluate the fol-lowing by the use of logarithms,
14
ALGEBRAIC OPERATIONS
This chapter has demonstrated the use oflogarithms in numerical calculations. Practicalapplications in many fields involve calculationsincluding algebraic expressions in which loga-rithms are useful. In these problems both thelaws of algebra and the laws of exponents orlogarithms hold true and the use of logarithms inalgebraic operations is valid. For example:log [ (x+ 2)(x + 5)] = log (x + 2) + log (x + 5)
EXAMPLE: Simplify the following.
x2 - 5x - 6x + 1
SOLUTION: (Using only laws of logarithms.)2
"5 x- 5x
1- 6 log (x2 - 5x - 6) - log (x + 1)
+
SOLUTION: (Using logarithms and laws ofalgebra.)
x2log - 5x - 6X + = log
= log
- 6) (x +Cx + 1)
6EtVl.= log (x- 6)
EXAMPLE: Solve for x.
23x = 250
19
Chapter 2COMPUTATION WITH LOGARITHMS
SOLUTION: Take the logarithmof both sidesof the equation.
log 23x log 250
Then, x log 23 = log 250
log 250x log 23
2. 39791. 3617
= 1. 761
In complicated problems it may not be pos-sible to solve for the unknown as directly as wedid in the example. In that case we can continueto use our knowledge of logarithms. Return to
2.3979the step where x = 1.3617. Againtake the loga-
rithm of both sides of the equation.
log x = log 21: 33697197
= log 2. 3979 - log 1. 3617
= O. 3798 - 0. 1341
= 0. 2457
Take the antilog of both sides of the equation.
x = antilog 0. 2457
x = 1. 761
EXAMPLE: Solve for x.
x2 = 729
3
log x = log 729
3 log x = log 729
3 log x = 2 log 729
log x 22 2 lo 729
15
20
2(2. 8627)
5. 72543
log x = 1. 9084
x = antilog 1. 9084
x = 81
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Use logarithms tosolve for x in the following problems.
1. 17x = 31
ANSWERS:
1. O. 000121
8
2. x = 6. 3496
2. 2. 0
APPLICATIONS
The use of logarithms can simplify the solu-tion of many problems encountered in mathe-matics, science, andengineering. By applicationof the operations described in this chapter, manycomplicated equations can be reduced to additionand subtraction problems.
EXAMPLE: Find the volume of a circularcone having a height of 3.71 units and a baseradius of 2.71 units.
SOLUTION: The formulatorvolume of a cir-17r2 hcular cone is v = , where v = volume, r =
radius, and h = height.Take the logarithm of both sides of the equa-
tion as the first step in the solution.
log v = log (21-2--U)3
32 log IT + log r2 + log h - log 3
= log ir + 2 log r + log h - log 3
= O. 4972 + 2(0. 4330) + O. 5694 - O. 4771
= 1. 4555
v = antilog 1. 4555
v = 28. 5
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
For simplicity, physical units of measure-ment were not included in the example. Whenproblems involving physical units are solved,it is often simpler to solve the problem sepa-rately for the units and attach the proper unitsto the answer. For example, if the base andheight in the example problem were given ininches, solution for the proper units in theanswers could be as follows:
nr2hv =
3
Since pi and 3 are not involved with physicalunits they are ignored in this solution and theproblem is expressed as
v = inches squared x inches
= inches cubed
Therefore, in the solution; v will be expressedin cubic inches.
Many electronic problems can be simpli-fied by using logarithms, and other elec-tronic problems include common logarithmsin the basic formulas. An example of a formulathat includes a logarithmic expression is theformula for finding gain in decibels where
P1decibels = 10 log
Engineering and electronic problems fre-quently deal with numbers in the millions anddecimal fractions in the millionths. Thesevalues are easily expressed as exponentiP:!: tothe base ten and common logarithms are tivma natural and convenient means of simplifyingthese problems.
EXAMPLE: Find the numerical value of 'CCin a circuit where f = 22,000,000 cycles per
second, C = .0000000015 farads, and 'CC =1
2/71C'
16
SOLUTION: The formula is X =C 22rfC
1
Taking logs on both sides,
log Xc = log 1 + colog (277fC)
= 0 + colog 6. 28 + colog (2. 2 x107) (+ colog 1.5 x 10-9)
= (9. 2020 - 10) + (2. 6576 - 10) +(8.8239)
= 20. 6835 - 20 = O. 6835
Xc = antilog O. 6835
Xc = 4. 825
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Use logarithms tosolve for the numerical value of the unlaiown inthe following problems.
1. Find the volume (v) of a sphere having aradius of 7.59. The formula for the volume ofa sphere is
47rr3v = 3
2. Find the value of I in the formula
P = I2R
when P = 217 and R = 550,000,
ANSWERS:
1. 1830 2. 0.0198
CHAPTER 3
TRIGONOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
This is the first of several chapters in thiscourse which deals with the subject of trigo-nometry. Reference to the table of contentsshows that chapters 4, 5, and 8 also dealdirectly with triangles and trigonometry. Ad-ditionally, chapters 6 and 7 deal with vectorsand their application to statics. The study ofvectors is so closely related to trigonometrythat it is normally included in a trigonometrycourse, and in this course it is included in thesame area.
Mathematics, Vol. 1, NavPers 10069-C, in-troduces numerical trigonometry and some ap-plications in problem solving. However, trig-onometry is not restricted to solving problemsinvolving triangles; it also forms a foundationfor some advanced mathematical concepts andsubject areas. Trigonometry is both.algebraicand geometric in nature, and in this courseboth of these qualities will be utilized.
MEASURING ANGLES
In Mathematics, Vol. 1, it was pointed outthat angles are formed when two straight linesintersect. Before proceeding with measure-ment of angles, an extension of the concept ofangles is required. In this courze, an angle isconsidered to be generated when a line havinga set direction is rotated about a point. Figure3-1 depicts the generation of an angle.
Lay out the line AO, as shown in figure 3-1,as a reference line having a set direction. Useone end of the line as a pivot point and rotatethe line from its initial position OA to anotherposition OB, as in opening a door. As the lineturns on a pivot point, it is generating the angleAOB. Some of the terminology used in this andsubsequent chapters is given in the following:
1. Radius vectorthe line which is rotatedto generate the angle.
17
2. Initial positionthe original position ofthe radius vector; corresponds to line OA infigure 3-1. (Also called the initial side of theangle.)
3. Terminal sidethe final position of theradius vector; corresponds to line OB in figure3-1.
4. Positive anglean angle generated byrotating the radius vector counterclockwisefrom the initial position.
5. Negative anglean angle generated byrotating the radius vector clockwise from theinitial position.
The convention of identifying angles by useof Greek letters is followed in this text. Whenonly one angle is involved it will be calledtheta (0). Other Greek letters will be usedwhen more than one angle is involved. The ad-ditional symbols normally used will be phi (),alpha (a), and beta (13).
One unit of angular measure familiarto mostpeople is the revolution. However, this unit istoo large for many uses, and three other unitsare discussed in following paragraphs.
DEGREE SYSTEM
This is the most common system of angularmeasurement. In this system a completerevolution is divided into 360 equal parts calleddegrees (360°). For accurate work each degreeis divided into 60' (minutes), and each minuteinto 60" (seconds). In many cases degreemeasurements are expressed in degrees andtenths of a degree.
For convenience in working with angles,the 360° is divided into four parts of 90° each,similar to the rectangular coordinate system.The 900 sectors (calledquadrants) are numberedaccording to the convention shown in figure 3-2.
When the radius vector (the line gener-ating the angle) has traveled less than 90°from its starting point in a counterclockwise
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
0 A
Figure 3-1.Generation of an angle.
2 mdQUADRANT
letQUADRANT
3rd
QUADRANT4th
QUADRANT
Figure 3-2. Quadrant positions.
direction (or, as we conventionally call it, in apositive direction), the angle is in the firstquadrant. When the radius vector lies between90° and 1800, the angle is inthe second quadrant.Angle between 180° and 2700 are said to lie inthe third quadrant, while anglesgreater than 2700and less than 360° are in the fourth quadrant.
When the line generating the angle passesthrough more than 360°, the quadrant in whichthe angle lies is found by subtracting from theangle the largest multiple of 360 that the anglecontains, and determining the quadrant in whichthe remainder falls. The original angle liesin the same quadrant in which the remainderangle falls.
EXAMPLE: In which quadrant is the angle850°?
SOLUTION: The largest multiple of 360°contained in 850° is 720°. Then 850° - 720°= 130°. Since 130° is in quadrant 2, 850° alsolies in the second quadrant. This relationshipis shown in figure 3-3.
RADIANS
There is another and even more fundamentalmethod of measuring angles. The unit for thistype of measurement is the radian. It has cer-tain advantages over the degree method, for itrelates the length of arc generated to the size
18
+11111I
of the angle. Radian measurement also greatlysimplifies work with trigonometric functions incalculus. Assume that an angle is generated, asshown in figure 3-4. It we impose the conditionthat the length of the arc (s) described by theextremity of the line segment generating theangle must equal the length of the line (r), thenwe would describe an angle exactly one radianin size; that is, for 1 radian, s = r.
Recall from plane geometry that the circum-ference of a circle is related to the radius bythe formula
C = 2:rr
This says that the length of the circumferenceis 2ir times the length of the radius. From therelationship of arc length, radius, and radiansin the preceding paragraph, this can be extendedto say that a circle contains 2ir radians.
Since the arc length of the circumference is21 radians and the circumference encompasses3600 of rotation, it follows that
2ir radians = 360°
ir radians = 180°
By dividing both sides of this equation by ir wefind that
180°1 radian = = 57.2959°IT
In this course we shall use the followingconversion factors:
1. 1 radian = 57°17'45" 57.3° (approxi-mately)
2. 10 = 0.017453 radians (approximately)If absolute accuracy is desired in a con-
version, use the following:1. To
v., 180°
2. To
bY 1110°It is customary to indicate degrees by the
symbol (° ) and to indicate radians as a purenumber with no name or symbol attached. Forexample, sin 3 should be understood to re-present sine of 3 radians, whereas the sine of3 degrees would be written sin 3°.
Certain angles occur so frequently in trig-onometric problems that it is worthwhile to
convert radians to degrees multiply
convert degrees to radians multiply
Chapter 3TRIGONOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
( A ) (8)
Figure 3-3.Angle generation. (A) 1300; (B) 850°.
learn the degree and radian equivalences. These MILSare shown in the following list:
Radians Degrees
v/6 30
v/4 45
v/3 60
r/2 90
180
3v/2 270
2 7r 360
Figure 3-4. Radian measure.
19
24
The mil is a unit of angular measurementwhich is not widely used but has some militaryapplications in ranging and sighting. A mil isdefined as 1/6400 of the circumference of acircle. This is equavalent to 3'22.5" or 0.00098radians.
The importance of the mil in practical ap-proximation is due to the fact that it is ap-proximately 1/1000 of a radian. A circulararc whose length is 1/1000 of the radius willsubtend an angle of 1 mil. For very smallangles the arc (a) and the chord (c) are nearlyequal as shown in figure 3-5.
Since the arc and chord are very nearlyequal (ratio of chord to arc nearly 1) for verysmall angles, we shall consider them as equalfor our purposes and develop a method of ap-proximating range (R) to a target of known size(c). Recall from the previous section that aradian is the ratio of arc length to length ofradius. In figure 3-5 (with c essentially equalto a), we will consider c as arc length and r aslength of radius. Then the size of angle m inradians is
m = rThen the length (r) is expressed as
r = --m
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 3-5.Relationship of arc, chord, and radius.
If we express the angle m in mils (1/1000 of aradian), the formula for range is
cm
r 1000
r = 1000c111
If the range is known and it is desirable to findthe length (c) of a target, this formula can betransposed to
rmc 1000
These formulas yield good approximationsfor angles up to several hundred mils and makerapid estimates of range to an object of knownsize possible.
EXAMPLE: A building known to be 80 feetlong, perpendicular to the line of sight, sub-tends an arc of 100 mils. What is the approxi-mate range to this building?
SOLUTION:
1000 x 80 ftr = 100
r = 800 ft
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:Determine the quadrant in which each of the
following angles lies.1. 260°2. 290°3. 800°4. 1,930°Express the following angles in degrees; the
angles are expressed in radians.5. 20vjpg 5iru
6
-
7. A tower 500 feet away subtends a verticalangle of 250 mils. What is the height of thetower?
ANSWERS:1. 3rd2. 4th3. 1st4. 2nd5. 3,600°6. 150°7. 125 ft
MEASURES WITH RADIANS
The radian measure of an angle was intro-duced in previous paragraphs. It was pointedout that radian measure of angles was of par-ticular use when working with trigonometricfunctions in calculus.
Because of the relationship of the radian toarc length, it has some special applications inmeasurements of angular velocity and sectorarea. It was pointed out earlier that in the anglesho in figure 3-4, 0 = 1 radian when s = r.This relationship can be generalized by theformula
s = r0
when 0 is expressed in radians. This relation-ship is convenient for solving many types ofproblems. A few sample problems are includedin this section.
EXAMPLE: The human eye cannot clearlydistinguish objects if they subtend less than0.0002 radians at the eye. What is the maximumdistance at which a submarine periscope 6inches in diameter can be picked out from itssurroundings? (Of course, this problem dis-regards the wake made by the periscope).
Chapter 3TRIGONOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
SOLUTION:From this information we know that 0 = 0.0002
radian and s = 6 in. = 0.5 ftSubstituting in
s = r0
0.5 = 0.0002r
5000 2 500 feet
ANGULAR VELOCITY
gives
or
Another type of problem which radian mea-surement simplifies is that which connects therotating motion of the wheels of a vehicle to itsforward motion. Here we will not be dealingwith angles alone but also with angular velocity.Let us analyze this type of motion.
Let us consider the circle at the left infigure 3-6 to indicate the original position of awheel. xs,s the wheel turns it rolls so that thecenter moves along the line CC' where CI is thecenter of the wheel at its final position. Thecontact point at the bottom of the wheel movesan equal distance PP'; but as the wheel turnsthrough angle 0, the arc s is made to coincidewith line PP', so that
s = PP'
(,$) /j/Z///// / ff,e/71
or the length of arc is equal to the forwarddistance the wheel travels. But since
= rO
the forward distance d that the wheel travels is
d = r0
Dividing both sides of the equation (2) by t,we have
d=
0
The forward velocity v of the vehicle is
equal to and the angular velocity w is equalt
to the angle divided by the time required todescribe the angle. Thus,
v = rw
if w is measured in radians per unit time.
EXAMPLE: Determine the distance a truckwill travel in 1 minute if the wheels are 3 feetin diameter and are turning at the rate of 5revolutions per second.
SOLUTION: In this problem, first convertangular velocity from revolutions per secondto radians per second by multiplying the
- NOM, M=1=0 111M.M.1=Mli
Figure 3-6.Angular rotation.
21
26
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
revolutions by Mr. (There are 2w radians in onerevolution (3600).)
2r = 6.2832
5 rev x 6.2832 = 31.416 rad/sec
3, 520 ft/minw 4 ft
w = 410560
3
Then, radians per second are converted to w = 2,640 radians per minuteradians per minute as follows:
rad/min = rad/sec x 60
rad/min = 31.416 x 60
rad/min = 1,884.96
Thus, after 1 minute 0 = 1,884.96 radians and
d = r 03d = y ft x 1,884.96
d = 2,827.44 ft
EXAMPLE: A car is traveling 40 milesper hour. If the wheel radius is 16 inches,what is the angular velocity of the wheels (a)in radians per minute and (b) in revolutionsper minute?
SOLUTION:(a) First, convert miles per hour to feet
per minute.
Thus,
ft/min mph x 528060
4040 mph = .1-6 x 5,280 ft/min
40 mph = 3,520 ft/min
Then change the radius to feet and1r = 13
ft
Then,
r = 4 ft3
v = rw
22
radians per minute(b) rpm2w
2840 rad/minw -2w
w = 420. 1 rpm
AREA OF A SECTOR
From plane geometry we find that the areaof the sector of a circle is proportional to theangle enclosed in the sector.
Consider sector AOB of the circle shown infigure 3-7, If 8 is increased to a full 360° (or2r radians), it encoMpasses the entire circleand the area (A) of the sector equals the areaof the circle which is given by the formula
A = ir r2
Multiplying both sides of the equation by 0 gives
AO = eirr2
We are dealing with a complete circle where0 = 2w. Thus, we can substitute 2w for 9 in theleft member, obtaining
2ir A = 8ir r2
Simplifying this by dividing both sides by 2wgives
n 2 1A =
2 2
Therefore, the area of a sector of a circle canbe found by the formula
1A = -i- r20
with 8 expressed in radians.
Chapter 3TRIGONOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
Figure 3-7.Sector of a circle.
if the radius and arc length are known, thearea can be found directly by the formula
1A = r s
This formula is found by the following process:
1A = r29
1A = y rr9
Since s = rO, we substitute in the formulaabove and have
1A = rs
Of course, if r and s are given, the area couldbe found by computing 0 and using the formulafor area in terms of r and O.
EXAMPLE: Find the area of a sector of acircle with radius of 6 inches having a centralangle of 600.
SOLUTION: First convert 60° to radians:
radians = degress x 1800
= 60° x 180°ff
9 =3
1 irA = x (6 inches)
2 x
36v inches2A 6
A = 6r sq in.
.
This answer can be converted by multiplying6 by 3.14159. However, in trigonometry and
higher mathematics the conversion is, in manycases, not carried out. In many instances it isless cumbersome to carry n through computa-tions rather than convert it to a decimal number.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:1. How far does a car travel in 1 minute if
the radius of the wheels is 18 inches and theangular velocity of the wheels is 1,000 radiansper minute?
2. A car travels 2,000 feet in 1 minute. Theradius of the wheels is 18 inches. What is theangular velocity of the wheels in radians perminute?
3. What is the diameter of a circle if asector of this circle has an arc length of 9inches and an area of 18 square inches?
ANSWERS:1. 1,500 feet per minute2. 1,333 radians per minute3. 8 inches
PROPERTIES OF TRIANGLES
Mathematics Vol. 1 contains information onthe trigonometric ratios and other properties oftriangles. This section reviews the trigono-metric functions for acute angles and restatessome of the properties of triangles for reviewand reference.
PYTHAGORLAN THEOREM
This theorem states that in any right tri-angle, the sum of the squares of the aides ad-jacent to the right angle is equal to the squareof the hypotenuse (side opposite the right angle).In the triangle shown in figure 3-8 this rela-tionship is expressed as
X2 + y2 = r2
This relationship is useful in solving many
A = 1 r2 problems and in developing other trigonometric
2 concepts. The following are examples of the
23
28
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
application of this relationship as applied to thetriangles in figures 3-9 and 3-10.
EXAMPLE: The legs of a right triangle,shown in figure 3-9, which are adjacent to theright angle are 3 and 4 inches in length. Howlong is the hypotenuse?
SOLUTION:
r2 = X2 + y2
r2 = 42 (inches2) + 32 (inches2)
r2 = 16 (inches2) + 9 (inches2)
r2 = 25 (inches2)
r = V25 (inches2)
r = 5 inches
This, as pointed out in Mathematics, Vol. 1,is the 3-4-5 triangle, whose side relationshipshold also for multiples of 3,4, and 5.
EXAMPLE: Figure 3-10 shows a plot ofground in the shape of a right triangle. Thelongest side of the plot is 40 feet. One of the
Figure 3-8.Pythagorean relationship.
Is
Figure 3-9.--Right triangle withhypotenuse unknown.
other sides is 10 feet long. Howremaining side (x)?
SOLUTION:
2 2 2x + y = r2 2 2x = r - y
x2 =.40 2 (ft2) - 102 (ft2)
x2 = 1,600 (ft2) - 100 (ft2)
x2 = 1,500 (ft2)
x =1/ 1,500 (ft2)
x = 38.7 ft
SIMILAR TRIANGLES
long is the
Another relationship of triangles that isuseful in trigonometry concerns similar tri-angles. Whenever the angles of one triangleare equal to the corresponding angles in an-other triangle, the two triangles are said tobe similar.
For example, triangle (A) in figure 3-11 issimilar to triangle (B). Since the two triangles
et yal0feet
Figure 3-10.Right triangle with oneside unknown.
24 .
(A)
Figure 3-11.--Similar triangles.
Chapter 3TRIGONOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
are similar by definition, the following propor-tion involving the lengths of the sides is true:
a b ca' b' c'
This relationship can be used to find thelength of unknown sides in similar triangles.The following is an example of this methodusifig the triangles shown in figure 3-12.
EXAMPLE: Triangles (A) and (B) iii figure3-12 are similar with lengths as shown. Findthe length of side b' and side c'.
SOLUTION:
a b ca' b'
10 11.18 57 b' c'
Solve the first two of the equal ratios for W.
10 11.18'7 b'
b' = 11' 18 x10
78.26b' 10
b' = 7.826
Solve for side c' using the first and third of theequal ratos.
10 5c'
5 x 7c' - 10
c' = 3.5
NOTE: Side c' could have been determinedby using the second and third of the equal ratios,and the reader should verify this. The selec-tion of the first and third ratios in the examplewas only because it was obvious thatthe numer-ical calculations would be simpler withoutdecimals.
25
30
( A)
10
(8)
Figure 3-12.Similar triangles,solution example.
Similar Right Triangles
Recall from plane goemetry that the sum ofthe interior angles of any triangle is equal to180°. Using this fact it follows that two trianglesare similar if two angles of one are equal totwo angles of the other. The remaining anglein any triangle must be equal to 1800 minus thesum of the other two angles. Keep theseprinciples in mind during the following dis-cussion of similar right triangles.
Two RIGHT TRIANGLES are similar if anacute angle of one triangle is equal to an acuteangle of the other triangle. If these angles areequal, the triangles are similar because the rightangles in the two triangles are also equal toeach other. Whenever one acute angle of aright triangle is given, the other acute anglemay easily be found. Assuming that the acuteangle given is 25 degrees, the other acute anglewill be
180° - 90° - 25° = 65°But 65° and 25° are complements of each other.Thus, if one acute angle of a right triangle isequal to 0, the other acute angle will be (90° - 0).
Many of the practical uses of trigonometryare based on the fact thattwo right triangles aresimilar if one acute angle of one triangle isknown to be equal to one angle of the othertriangle.
Thus, in figure 3-13, we have two similarright triangles, so we may write
x y
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
(A) ( B )Figure 3-13.Similar right triangles.
or interchanging the mean terms in the propor-tion, we have
and in like manner
Z. .4 x'r r' a'a'4 r r'
This is one of the main principles of numericaltrigonometry.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Refer to figure3-14 in solving the following problems.
1. Use the Pythagorean theorem to cal-culate the missing sides in triangles (A) and (B).
2. Find sides a and b of triangle (D), as-suming that triangles (C) and (D) are similartriangles.
ANSWERS:
1. (a)4(b)
2. (a) 3 3/4(b) 1 1/2
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONSAND TABLES
The properties of triangles given in theprevious section provide a means for solvingmany practical problems. Certain practicalproblems, however, require knowledge of righttriangle relationships other than the Pythagoreantheorem or the relationships of similar triangles
26
before solutions can be found. Rumples of twoof the problems which require this additionalknowledge are as follows:
1. Find the value of the missing sides andangles in a right triangle when the value of oneside and one acute angle are given.
2. Find the value of the missing side and thevalue of the angles in a right triangle when twosides are known.
The additional relationships, between thesides and angle's-of-a right triangle, are calledtrigonometric functions or trigonometric ratios.These ratios were introduced in Mathematics,Vol. 1, and are reviewed in the following para-graphs. The basic foundations of trigonometryrest upon these functions.
RATIOS FOR ACUTE ANGLES
There are six ratios of the sides of a righttriangle; these ratios form the six trigono-metric functions. We use the acute angle 0 infigure 3-15 and define the trigonometric ratios.
In figure 3-15 the three sides x, y, and r areused two at a time to form six ratios. Theseratios and the trigonometric function name as-sociated with each are as follows:
1. -Y- is the sine of 0, written sin 0
2. 7( is the cosine of 0, written cos 0
3. Y is the tangent of 0, written tan 0
4. is the cosecant of 0, written csc 9
5. - is the secant of 0, written sec 0
6. is the cotangent of 0, written cot 0
The functions of a right triangle in any posi-tion are made easier to remember by the con-vention of naming the sides, as in figure 3-16,and defining the functions by means of thesenames.
In any right triangle the side y is the sideopposite the angle whose function we are seeking.The side x is always adjacent to the angle. Thus,we can summarize the information in this section
Chapter 3TRIGONOMETR1C MEASTIREMENTS
(A) (B)4
(C)
Figure 3-14.Triangles for practice problems.
Firmre 3-15.Right triangle fordetermining ratios.
in the following manner by reference to figure3-16:
opposite sidesin hypotenuse
x adjacent sidecos 0 r hypotenuse
y opposite sidetan 0 x adjacent side
. hypotenusecsc 0 y opposite side
=r = hypotenusesec 0 x adjacent side
cot = x - adjac ent side0 y opposite side
W-aen the lengths of the sides of a right tri-angle are known, as in figure 3-17 (A), the sixtrigonometric ratios can be computed directly.
The values of all the trigonometric functionsof the angle 0 in the triangle in figure 3-17 (A)are as follows:
27
: .
3(D)
Is
4441
'41
411 la
SIDE ADJACENT TOCABsX
Figure 3-16.Names of sides of aright triangle.
3sin 0 = rx 4cos 9 = 5
3
= 0.600
= 0.800
tan 0 = = = 0.750
= 1.2505sec 0 = =x 4
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
4
(A)
3(8)
Figure 3-17.-Practice triangles.
csc
cot 0
5
43
= 1.667
= 1.333
EXAMPLE: Give the values of all thetrigonometric functions of the angle 0 in thetriangle of figure 3-17 (B).
SOLUTION: Here only two sides are given.To find the third side, use the Pythagoreantheorem.
X2 + y2 = r2
2 2 2y = r x
y2 = 62 - 32 = 36 - 9 = 27
y = = Nr9-573 = 3 VS. = 5.196
Now, using these values of x, y, and r
sin
cos e
tan
csc 0
sec
cot = -Y
5.196 = 0.88606
3= - = 0.5006
5.196 = 1.732
5.1966
1.1547
6 = 2.000
35. 196
28
TABLES
Trigonometric tables are lists of the numer-ical values of the ratios of sides of right tri-angles. If we desire to know the ratio of twosides of a right triangle containing a knownacute angle 0, we look for the angle ti in atable and thus find the desired ratio. The ta. lein appendix III provides the sine and cosine ofangles from 0° to 90°. Appendix IV gives naturaltangents and cotangents of angles from 0° to90°.
The tables in the appendixes give the tri-gonometric functions in degrees and minutes.The format used in these tables is fairly standardfor trigonometric tables. Refer to appendix IIIand the first page of values. Tofind the sine orcosine of angles less than 5°, enter the table atthe appropriate degree value listed at the top ofthe table. The minute columnwhichisused withthese values is the first column at the left of thetable and is read from top to bottom.
Values of the functions between 85° and 90°are also listed on this page. To determine thesine or cosine of an angle in this range, enterthe table at the degree value at the bottom of thepage. The minute values which correspond tothese angles are found in the last column of thetable, and are read from bottom to top. Thecolumn headings (sin and cos) are seen tochange from the top to the bottom of the column.The correct name of the function is the onewhich appears at the degree value in use. Thetables of the tangent and cotangent ratios inappendix IV are laid out in the same formatas the sine and cosine tables.
Most tables list the sine, cosine, tangent,and cotangent of angles from 0° to 90°. Veryfew give the secant and cosecant since theseare seldom used. When needed, they may befound from the values of the sine and cosine.The reciprocal of the sine gives the value ofthe cosecant.
r 1 1csc v = - = -y y sin 0
The reciprocal of the cosine gives the value ofthe secant.
33
sec 0 = = I =x x cos 0
Chapter 3TRIGONOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
The other functions, the tangent and co-tangent, can also be expressed in terms of sineand cosine as follows:
r= sillx x cos 9
cot 9 r cos 9Y Y sin 9
In addition, the cotangent can be determineddirectly as the reciprocal of the tangent.
cot 9 = = - 1Y y- tan
TE
These relationships are the fundamentaltrigonometric identities and will be used ex-tensively in solving the more complex iden-tities which are the topic of chapter 8.
PRACTICAL USE OF THETRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS
Proper use of the trigonometric ratios andthe other principles of triangles furnish power-ful tools for use in problem solving. The knowl-edge of when (and how) to use which of the ratiosis an important part of the problem. This knowl-edge comes with experience and practice; how-ever, each of the functions is more applicable tocertain type problems than to others. Thissection points out some of the situations in whicha specific function is used most advantageously.
20(A)
Tangent of an Angle
1 opposite. sideThe ratio . of be usedx adjacent side `"1"whenever one of these sides and an acute angleare given and it is desired to find the otherside.
EXAMPLE: Find the length of side y infigure 3-18 (A).
SOLUTION: From the figure
tan 35° =
From the tables
tan 35° = 0.70021
are two expressions for tan 350, soHere therethat
= 0.70021
= 14.0042
Sine of an Angle
To find y or r, when either of these and anacute angle are given, use the sine to find theunknown.
EXAMPLE: Fine the value of r in figure3-18 (3).
SOLUTION: From the figure
(E)
Figure 3-18.Practical use of ratios.
29'
5sin 65° =
(C)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
From the tables
sin 65° = 0.90631
Thus,
5 = 0.90631
r = 5.517
Cosine of an Angle
To find x or r, when either of these and anacute angle are given, use the cosine to findthe desired part of the triangle.
EXAMPLE: Find the value of x in thetriangle of figure 3-18 (C).
SOLUTION:
(C)
= cos 66°5
x = 5 cos 66°
= 5(0.40674)
= 2.0335
526
(S)
(
15
Figure 3-19.Triangles for practiceproblems.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Refer to figure3-19 in working problems 1 through 4.
1. a. Find the values of the sine, cosine,and tangent of 0 in triangle (A).
b. What is the value of 0 to the nearestdegree?
2. Using the sine function, find the value ofy in triangle (B).
3. Using the cosine, find the value of x intriangle (C).
4. Using the tangent, find the value of y intriangle (D).
5. A navigator on a ship notes that twopoints on either side of a strait are 5 milesapart and subtend an angle of 40° as shown infigure 3-20. How far from the strait is theship- if it is equidistant from both points?NOTE: The 40° angle can be divided into two20° angles, and this will form two righttriangles.
ANSWERS:
1. a. sin 0 = 3/5 = 0.60000cos 0 = 4/5 = 0.80000tan 0 = 3/4 = 0.75000
b. 0 = 36°2. 294::. 12.124. 8.48665. 6.87 miles
5 MILES
MI
Figure 3-20.Ship approaching strait.
CHAPTER 4
TRIGNOMETRIC ANALYSIS
This chapter is a continuation of the broadtopic of trigonometry introduced in chapter 3.The subject is expanded in this chapter to allowanalysis of angles greater than 900. The chap-ter is intended as a foundation for analysis ofthe generalized angle, an angle of any numberof degrees. Additionally, the chapter introducesthe concept of both positive and negative angles.
RECTANGULAR COORDINATES
The rectangular or Cartesian coordinatesystem introduced in Mathematics, Vol. 1,NavPers 10069-C, is used here. In Vol..1 thecoordinate system was used in solving equations;in this chapter it is used for analyzing the gen-eralized angle. The following is a brief reviewof important facts about the coordinate system:
1. The vertical axis (Y axis in fig. 4-1) isconsidered positive above the origin and nega-tive below the origin.
2. The horizontal axis (X axis) is positiveto the right of the origin and negative to the leftof the origin.
3. A point anywhere in the plane may belocated by two numbers, one showing the dis-tance of the point from the Y axist and the othershowing the distance of the point from the Xaxis. These points are called coordinates.
4. In notation used to locate points, it isconventional to place the coordinates in paren-theses and separate them with a comma. TheX coordinate is always written first. Thus,point P in figure 4-1 would have the notationP(4,-5). The general form of this notation isP(x,y).
5. The X coordinate is positive in the firstand fourth quadrants negative in the second andthird. The Y coordinate is positive in the firstand second quadrants negative in the third andfourth, The signs of tlie coordinates are shownin parentheses in figure 4-1. The algebraic
31-
36
0 7
6
5
4
3
2
X-AXIS X
-8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 I 4 5
-2
-3
-4
-5-6-7
P(41-5)
p-,-) 0072
Figure 4-1.Rectangular coordinate system.
signs of the coordinates of a point are used inthis chapter for determining the algebraic signsof trigonometric functions.
6. The quadrants are numbered in the man-ner shown in chapter 3 of this course. Thequadrant numbers are shown with the signs ofkhe coordinates in the figure.
ANGLES IN STANDARD POSITION
An angle is said to be in standard positionwhen certain conditions are met. To constructan angle in standard position, first lay out arectangular coordinate system. The angle (8)is then drawn with the vertex at the origin ofthe coordinate system, and the original sidelying along the positive X axis as shown in fig-ure 4-2. In standard position, the terminal side
4
i
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 4-2.Standard position.
(radius vector) of the angle may lie in any ofthe quadrants, or on one of the axes which sep-arate the quadrants. When the terminal sidefalls on an axis a special case exists, in whichthe angles are called quadrantal angles and arediscussed separately later in this chapter.
The quadrant in which an angle lies is de-termined by the terminal side. When an angleis placed in standard position the angle is saidto lie in the quadrant which contains the tenni-ral side. For example, the negative angle 0,shown in standard position in figure 4-3, issaid to lie in the second quadrant.
Coterminal Angles
When two or more angles in standard posi-tion have their terminal sides located at thesame position they are said to be coterminatIf 0 is any general angle then 0 plus or minusan integral multiple of 3500 yields a coterminalangle. For example, the angles 9, 0, and a infigure 4-4 are said to be coterminal angles. If0 is 450 then
= e - 360°
= 45 - 360°
= - 315°
32
Figure 4-3.Negative angle in quadrant U.
Figure 4-4.Coterminal angles.
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
and,
a = 8 + 3600
a = 450 + 3600
a = 405°
The relationship of coterminal angles canbe stated in a general form. For any generalangle 09 measured in degrees, the angles 0 co-terminal with 0 can be found by the following
= 0 + n(360° )
where n is any integer, positive, negative orzero; that is,
n = 0, *1, *2, *3,...
The principle of coterminal angles is usedin developing other trigonometric relationshipsand in other phases of trigonometric analysis.An expansion of this principle states that thetrigonometric functions (ratios) of coterminalangles have the same value. This fact is thebasis for part of a discussion in a later sectionof this chapter.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Which of the fol-lowing sets of angles are coterminal?
1. 60°, -300°, 420°.2. 735°, -345°, -705°.3 450, -450, 34504. 0°, 360°, 180°.
ANSWERS:
I. Coterminal2. Coterminal3. Not coterminal4. Not coterminal
Definition Of Functions
The trigonometric functions (ratios) are de-fined in chapter 3 of this course in two formsas follows:
I. By means of the sides labeled x, y, and r.2. By means of the names of the sides: op-
posite side, adjacent side, and hypotenuse.In this chapter a third form is introduced,
using the nomenclature of the coordinate sys-tem. The three systems are not different sys-tems, they merely define the same functions byusing different terminology. Defining the same
33
38
ratios in three different sets of terms no doubthas the appearance of complicating a relativelysimple operation. However, as progress ismade through this course and in advance mathe-matics courses, particular problems or situa-tions arise where it is natural to think of theratios in the specific terms used in one of thedefinitions. It is the intention of this course tointroduce the three terminology groups andshow that the three definitions are synonymousand interchangeable.
"o arrive at the definitions, construct anangle in standard position in respect to a co-ordinate system as shown in figure 4-5 (A).Choose a point P with coordinates (x,y) as apoint on the radius vector. The distance OP isdenoted by the positive number r (radius vector).
NOTE: In this chapter the conventionaldesignation of the radius vector as alwayspositive is followed.
The trigonometric functions of the generalangle 0 in figure 4-5 (A) are defined as follows:
sin e ordinater radius vector
x abscissacos 0 - -r radius vector
tan 0 = ordinatex abscissa
The remaining functions are reciprocals of theones given and can be written in this terminol-ogy by inverting the given functions.
CSC 0 =1 radius vector
sin- ordinate
1 radius vectorsec e = cos e abscissa
1 abscissacot e = tan e ordinate
The values of the functions are dependent onthe angle 8 alone and are not dependent uponthe selection of a particular point P. If a dif-ferent point is chosen, the length of r, as wellas the values of the X and Y coordinates, willchange proportionally and the ratio will beunchanged.
Comparing (A) and (B) in figure 4-5 it isseen that the X and Y values of the point P in(A) correspond to the lengths of sides xand y in
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
(A)Figure 4-5.Functions of general angles.
(B). Therefore, the ratios defined here are thesame ratios defined in chapter 3 of this course;the only change is in terminology. The proce-dure given here allows for finding the functionsof an angle when only a point on the radius vec-tor is given.
EXAMPLE: Find the sine and cosine of theangle shown in figure 4-5 (A) when the point P(x,y) has the value P(3,4).
SOLUTION: To determine the sine and co-sine it is necessary to find the value of r.Since the values of the X and Y coordinatescorrespond to the lengths of the sides x and yin figure 4-5 (B), we can determine the lengthof r by use of the Pythagorean theorem or byrecalling from Mathematics, Vol. 1 the 3-4-5triangle. In either case, the length of r is 5units. Then,
sin 0
sin 0
cos o
cos 0 =
ordinateradius vector
45
abscissaradius vector
34
(B)
NOTE: In the remainder of this chapter allangles are understood to be in standard position,unless specifically stated to the contrary.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Without using ta-bles, find the sine, cosine, and tangent of theangles whose radius vectors pass through thepoints given below.
1. P(5,12)2, P(1,1)3. P(1, Ira)4. P(3,2)NOTE: In problems such as these it is often
helpful to construct a graphic illustration of theproblem similar to figure 4-5.
ANSWERS:
121.
5cos =
12tan = -5-
2. sin =1 If
2
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
itC 0 S = -2-
tan = 1
153. sin = -2-
tan = I-3-
4. sin = 2 24513
cos = 3-Ts-
, 2Lan
QUADRANT SYSTEM
The quadrants formed in the rectangularcoordinate system are used to determine thealgebraic signs of the trigonometric functions.The quadrants in figure 4-6 show the algebraic
ISINE (+)COS ()TAN ()
ISINE (4)CAS (4)TAN (+)
ILE
SINE ()COS (i.)TAN (+)
33C
SINE ()COS (4)TAN ()
Figure 4-8.Signs of functions.
4035
signs of the sine, cosine, and tangent in thevarious quadrants.
A ready recall of the algebraic signs of thefunctions in particular quadrants will be of as-sistance in many problems. It is not manda-tory, however, that the information in figure4-6 be memorized. The information will belearned in some cases by extensive usage and,in addition, the following section on referencetriangles supplies a means for rapidly deter-mining the algebraic signs of all of the func-tions for any angle in standard position.
The algebraic signs of the remaining func-tions, while not shown on the figure, can be de-termined from the signs of the given functions.In all quadrants the cosecant has the same signas the sine, the secant has the same sign as thecosine, and the cotangent has the same sign asthe tangent.
The last group of practice problems in-volved angles in the first quadrant only, whereall of the functions are positive. When thesigns that the functions take on in each quad-rant are known, more complicated problems ofthis type can be solved.
EXAMPLE: Find all of .the trigonometricfunctions of 0 if tan 0 = i , sin 0 < 0, andr = 13,
SOLUTION:
Reference to figure 4-6 shows that an anglewith a positive tangent and a negative sine canoccur only in the third quadrant.
Then, since
and
ordinate y,tan 0 =1-Ficria x
5tan e = 12
it is possible to determine a point P(x,y) whichlies on the radius vector of this angle. Thevalue of the Y coordinate is the value of theordinate and the value of the X coordinate is thevalue of the abscissa. Thus, it appears that thepoint is P(12,5). However, L 44e Cartesiancoordinate system, both of the coordinates arenegative in the third quadrant so the point isP(-12,-5). This does not conflict with the valueof the tangent that was given, however, since
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
-5 = 5-12 12
and the tangent is positive in a quadrant whereboth coordinates are negative.
Figure 4-7 shows the angle 8 constructedusing the following information which was de-rived from an analysis of the previous para-graph. The point
P(x,y) = P(-12,-5)
lies on a radius vector in the third quadrantwith r = 13.
Now the functions can be read from thefigure.
sin 8
COS 8
tan
cot e
ordinate -5 5radivs vector T5
abscissaradius vector
-12 1213
ordinate -5 5abscissa
--12 12
abscissaordinate
-13 12-5 5
0taA
14-12,-5)
Figure 4-7.Finding the trigonometricfunctions for a third-quadrant angle.
36
radius vector 13 13sec 8 abscissa 7-11 12
radius vector 13 13csc 0 = ordinate -5
Reference to figure 4-6 shows that the func-tions have the correct algebraic signs for thethird quadrant. The solution also meets thespecifications of the problem for tan 8 = it andand sine 0 < 0 as the sine of 0 is .
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Without using ta-bles, find the sine, cosine, and tangent of 0 un-der the following conditions:
31. tan 0 = , r = 5, and 0 is not in the firstquadrant.
-212. tan 0 r = 29, and cos 0 > 0.20
ANSWERS:
1.
2.
sin =
cos =
tan 0 =
sin =
-3
-4
3
-2121
20cos 8 =
-21tan 0 =
Reference Angle
The reference angle for any angle 0 instandard position is the smallest positive anglebetween the radius vector of 0 and the X axis,In general the reference angle for 0 is nir ± 0,where n is an integer. Expressed in anotherform 0' = n(180°) * 0, where O'is the referenceangle for 0 and again n is some integer.
In trigonometric analysis the reference an-gle is used to form a reference triangle. Thistriangle is used to find the functions of an anglewhen less information is given than was avail-able in the problems of the previous section.
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
For a geometrical explanation of the ref-erence triangle construct an angle in standardposition, such as the angle 9 in figure 4-8. IfP(x,y) is any pout on the radius vector a per-pendicular from P to the point A on the X axisforms a right triangle with sides OA, OP, andAP. Then the X coordinate equals * the dis-tance OA, the Y coordinate equals ± the dis-tance AP, and r equals the distance OP. Thesigns of x and y depend on the quadrant in whichthe radius vector falls. The distances OA andAP are not only the X and Y coordinates, theyare also the lengths of the sides of the refer-ence triangle AOP.
In the previous section it was possible tofind the functions if the tangent, value of r, andsome means of determining the quadrant wereknown. Using the reference triangle, the rangeof solvable problems of this type is extended.
EXAMPLE: Find the sin, cos, and tan of 017when csc 0 = - 15 , cos 0 < 0.
SOLUTION: The cosecant is negative wherethe sine is negative; i.e., quadrants 3 and 4.The cosecant and cosine are both negative onlyin quadrant 3. Construct an angle in standardposition in the third quadrant as in figure 4-9.Drop a perpendicular to the negative X axis andlabel the angle formed by the X axis and theradius vector 0'.
P(x,y)
A
Figure 4-8.Reference triangle.
X= 1,517Ri
-1517
Figure 4-9.Reference triangle in quadrant 3.
It can be seen in figure 4-9 that angles 0 and9' have the same terminal side. Therefore, thefunctions of 9 and0' are identical, and csc 0'=
r hypotenuseSince cscy opposite 'the hypotenuse is
labeled 17 and the opposite side is labeled -15.17NOTE: The fraction - indicates that15
either the numerator or denominator is nega-tive, but not both. In this case, we know thatthe denominator is the negative member fromthe following:
1. By convention, r is always positive.2. The Y coordinate is negative in quadrant
3.X From the PythagorPan theorem the value of
x is found to be 8 and the negative x value is -8.From this information (y = -15, x = -8, r = 17)the functions can be written as follows:
42
37
sin 9 =sin17
8cos 9 = cos 0' =
-tan o = tan 0 = 15=
15-8 8
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
EXAMPLE: Find the value of the six trigo- 7
nometric functions of 0 if sec 9° = - and25..;0 < 0 < Ir. 24
rants 2 and 3; since 0 must lie between 0 I nd 7
cos 0 . - ,SOLUTION: The secant is negative in mad- c5
radians, or 00 and 1800, the angle must lie in - 7tan 0 =quadrant 2. Construct and label the reference 24triangle as shown in figure 4-10 (A). Use thePythagorean theorem to determine the y value, 24cot 0
y = Jr2 - x2
y = 1/252 - (-24)2
y = 114-25
y =
7
25sec 0 z4
25csc 0 =7
EXAMPLE: Find the sine, cosine, and tan-gent of 0 when cot 0 = 1.
SOLUTION: This example requires analysisof two points that were not encountered in pre-
= 7 vious examples. First, with only the cotangentgiven, how is it possible to determine which of
With the reference triangle labeled as in two quadrants (where the cotangent is positive)figure 4-10 (B), the functions can be read will contain the angle? The cotangent is posi-directly from the figure. tive in quadrants one and three; from the given
25
-24 X
(A) (B)
Figure 4-10.Reference triangles in quadrant 2.
38
X
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
information it is not possible to determine inwhich quadrant the angle falls, In this examplewe are dealing with two angles. The relation-ships of the functions of these two angles shouldbe observed when they are determined.
The second new point to consider is thevalueof the function. There are an infinite number ofside lengths that give a value of 1 for the co-tangent. Any right triangle which has equal ad-jacent and opposite sides will result in thissituation. This does not really present a prob-lem, however, because the angle with a cotan-gent of 1 has the same value whether the sidesare 1 and 1, 14 and 14, or any other equal sidelengths. For simplicity, we consider the func-
1tion to be the ratio of y in this problem andconstruct reference triangles as in figure 4-11.
From the figure the functions of 01, and 02can be written directly.
1sin 01
=-7"
cos 9 =-2-
1/2
Figure 4-11.--45° reference angles.
44
and
1tan 91
= = 1
1 Ifsi.n.
2
-1cos 02 =
v2
-a
A ." 1tan u == 12 -1
It is shown here that the functions for theseangles are identical, or differ only by algebraicsign. This is as expected, for the angle 01the reference angle 03 are equal. The solutiot,to this problem would normally consider thegeneral angle 0 and be given in the followingform:
sin 0 =
cos0=± 2
tan 0 = 1
Use of Tables
The tables of trigonometric functions nor-mally contain only values for the functions ofangles between 00 and 900. Use of referenceangles provide a means of using the tables tofind the values of the functions for anglesgreater than 90°. The principle involved here.
X is the following: Consider 0 as any angle and9' as its reference angle. Any trigonometricfunction of 0 is equal to the same function of 0,with the sign of the quadrant in which 9 termi-nates attached.
This is shown geometrically in the followingmanner. Construct the angle 0 and the refer-ence triangle with inclosed angle 9' as shownin figure 4-12. The triangle AOB is the refer-ence triangle and it can be seen that the point Bis also a point on the radius vector of 0. Wederive the functions of the two angles to showthat they are equal except perhaps for thealgebraic sign.
39
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
8=145°
Figure 4-12.-Angles 0 and '.
X
First, consider the triangle AOB. The lengthsof the sides of this triangle are OA and AB, andthe length of the hypotenuse is OB. If we dis-regard any signs and treat the angle 61' as anypositive acute angle the sine function is deter-mined as follows.
si opposite ABn 9hypotenuse OB
Considering angle 0, we determine the co-.o-dinates of point B to be x = OA and y = OB (ifwe disregard signs). Considering the signs, itshould be clear that the coordinates of B aregiven by x = *OA and y = i0B, where the signsare determined by the quadrant in which 8 ter-minates. This allows the sine of 0, for any sizeof 0, tc., be determined as
sth Z= tAB ABr OB OB
By definitiort; :he radius vector OB is alwayspositive.
Hence, we have determined the sine of 9 toOA ABbe * and the sine of 0' to be 0--B- . TheseOB
functions values differ only by algebraic sign asstated earlier.
4540
EXAMPLE: Find the six trigonometricfunctions of 145°.
SOLUTION: The angle 145° in standard po-sition is shown in figure 4-13. The referenceangle is the smallest positive angle between theterminal side (or ray) and the X axis or, in thiscase, an angle of 35°. Since 145° lies in thesecond quadrant the sine and cosecant are posi-tive and all other functions are negative.
Referring to the tables in appendixes III andIV, and utilizing the principle explained in thischapter we have
sin 145° = sin 35° = 0.57358cos 145° = - cos 350 = -0,81915tan 145° = - tan 350 = -0.70021cot 145° = - cot 350 = -1.42815
Recall that earlier in this chapter it waspointed out that certain functions were recipro-cals of other functions. Using this we can de-termine
1csc 145° = csc 350 = sin135°
0.57358 - 1'7434
1sec 145° = -sec 350= -cos 35" -0.81915
-1.2208
Figure 4-13.-14V angle and reference angle.
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
EXAMPLE: Find the sine and cosine of an 4. In which quadrant must 0 fall when:angle of 690°.
SOLUTION: An angle of 6900 is coterminal a. sin 0>0, col 0<0with an angle of 3300
b. cos 0<0, tan 0<06900 - 360° = 330°
c. sec 0>0, csc 0<0and both have a reference angle of 30° as shownin figure 4-14.
The angle terminates in the third quadrantso the sine is negative and the cosine positiveand
sin 6900 = - sin 30° = -0.5000
cos 690° = cos 30° = 0.86603
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Without using ta-bles, find the six trigonometric functions of 0under the conditions given in problems 1, 2,and 3.
1. cos 0 = - 3, 0 not in quadrant 2.
52. sin
83. tan 0 = ir<0<217.15 '
Figure 4-14.-690° angle.
4641
5. Use tables to find the sine, cosine, andtangent of 281°.
ANSWERS:
41. sin =
3cos a = -
tan 8 =
cot 0
3
4
A 5sec 17 =
5csc 9 = -
52. sin
12cos 0 = 13
5tan 0 =
12cot 0 = -3-
13sec 0 = *T2
CSC 0 = - 135
83. sin
15cos 0 =
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
8tan 9 =
cot 0 =.
17sec 0 = - rd-
17csc a = - 8-
4. a. 2b. 2c. 4
5. sin 281° = - 0.98163cos 281° = 0.19081tan 281° = 5.14455
SPECIAL ANGLES
There are two groups of angles consideredin this section. The first group considered con-tains angles which occur so frequently in prob-lems that their functions are normally consid-ered separately.
The second group considered contains thoseangles whose radius vectors fall on one of thecoordinate axes. These angles cannot be con-sidered as falling in one of the quadrants, andthe group is treated as a special case.
FREQUENTLY USED ANGLES
As stated previously, the approximate valuesof the trigonometric functions for any angle canbe read directly from tables or can be determinedfrom the tables by the use of principles statedin this course. However, there are certainfrequently used simple angles for which theexact function values are often used becausethese exact values can easily be determinedgeometrically. In the following paragraphs thegeometrical determination of these functions isshown.
30° - 60° Angles
To determine the functions of these anglesgeometrically, first construct an equilateraltriangle with the side lengths of 2 units. Thefunctions to be determined are not dependent onthe lengths of these sides being two units; this
42
size was selected for convenience. The ratiosfor given values of angles will be constant forall side lengths. Triangle OYA in figure 4-15is a triangle constructed as described above.
If a perpendicular is dropped from angle Yto the base at point X, two right triangles areformed. Consider the right triangle YOX,formed by the perpendicular, which alsobisectsangle Y forming a 30° angle. This triangle con-tains a 60° and a 300 angle. It is seen in figure4-15 that the side adjacent to the 60° angle isone-half the length of the hypotenuse, or in thiscase 1. Using the Pythagorean theorem withright triangle YOX, the length of the side oppo-site the 60° angle (the length of the perpendicu-lar) is found to be 4.
Figure 4-16(A) shows the right triangle YOXof figure 4-15 tranderred to a rectangular co-ordinate system, with the 60° angle positionedat the origin of the coordinate system.
The triangle now is set as a reference tri-angle, and inspection of figure 4-16 shows thatthe adjacent side is one-half the length of thehypotenuse. This relationship holds for any 60°triangle, regardless of the lengths of the sides.From the figure it is seen that the cosine of 60°is 1 The remaining functions can be read from2 .the figure.
Consider now the right triangle XYA of fig-ure 4-15. If this triangle is placed on a coordi-nate system with the 30° angle positioned at theorigin, the situation is as shown in figure 4-16(B). In this figure it is seen that the side opposite
47 -
Figure 4-15.Equilateral triangle.
Y
1
X
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
the 30° angle is one-half the length of the hy-1potenuse. Therefore, the sine of 30° is T .
(A)
X
(8)
Figure 4-16.Triangle on coordinate system.
In dealing with 30°-60°-90° triangles it is notnecessary to memorize the functions of the 30"and 600 angles. These angles will occur inpairs in right triangles and if one remembersthat the side opposite the 30° angle is one-halfthe length of the hypotenuse it is a simple mat-ter to construct a reference triangle with sidelengths of 1, 2, and ITS to derive the functions.
45° Angles
For a geometrical derivation of the functionsof 45° angles construct a square, one unit lengthon a side, as shown in figure 4-17. If a diago-nal is drawn from point 0 to point Y, two righttriangles are formed. Inspection of the figureshows that triangle XOY contains two 45° angleswith side lengths of 1 unit. These conditionsare also met in the reference triangle in figure4-18. Here it is seen that the two legs of a 450triangle must be equal. This relationship istrue of all 45° triangles and is not altered by thelengths of the legs.
Reference to figure 4-18 allows the functionsfor 45° to be written directly. These functions,like those for 30° and 60°, need not be memo-rized. It is only necessary to remember thatthe legs of a 45° triangle are equal; from this,it is a simple matter to construct a referencetriangle with sides of unit length and all of thefunctions can be read from the reference figure.
A
I
0
1
///////
////
////
45 //45"
r1
Figure 4-17.Determining 45° angles.
43
48,
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
2
45.
,I)
2
Figure 4-18.-45° reference triangle.
The trigonometric functions for 30°, 60°, and450 are summarized in table 4-1 for ready ref-erence. The function values shown are alsoapplicable for any angle which has one of thesefor a reference angle, upon proper considera-tion of the appropriate algebraic signs of x andy in the various quadrants.
EXAMPLE: Find the six trigonometricfunctions of 300°.
SOLUTION: With the angle drawn in stand-ard position as shown in figure 4-19, choose thepoint (1, - arS) on the radius vector with r = 2.The functions of 3000 are then
Figure 4-19.-300° angle in standard position.
vsin 3000 = =
cos 300° = i= 1
tan 300° = = -
cot 300°Y 3
Table 4-1.--Trigonometric functions of special angles.
0 sin 0 cos 0 tan 9 cot 0 sec 0 csc o
300 12
Vii sri-3- la
2 4.5 23
60. v-§-i
12 it 45
.5 22,5
3
450 ri2
ViI 1 1
44
49
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
sec 3000 = = 2
csc 3000 = L=Y 3
QUADRANTAL ANGLES
In previous sections of this chapter thoseangles which are exact multiples of 90° havebeen ignored, in order to simplify the explana-tions. The functions of angles which are exactmultiples of 90° (0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, -90°, etc.)are considered a special case and the anglesare called quadrantal angles. By definition, anangle which has its radius vector falling alongone of the coordinate axes, when the angle is instandard position, is a quadrantal angle.
The trigonometric functions of the quadrantalangles are defined in the same manner as forother angles, except for the restriction that afunction is undefined when the denominator ofthe ratio is zero.
To derive the functions of quadrantal angleswe choose points on the terminal sides wherer = 1, as shown in figure 4-20. In each angle inthis figure it is seen that r = 1. Then either xor y is zero and the other one is *1.
Consider the case where B = 90° in figure4-20 (A). To derive the functions use the pointP (0, 1) and r = 1.
rs1
sin r
x 0cos 90° = 1= 0
0
rx1(-IA)
(A) (B)
tan 90°
cot 90°
sec 90°
csc 90°
_ Y /- is undefined
r 1= = is undefinedx u
r 1= =1
=Y
The functions for the other quadrantal anglescan be determined from the other parts of fig-ure 4-20. The functions are summarized intable 4-2 for ready reference. The values ofthe functions of the special angles, quadrantaland 30°-60°-45°, are used frequently and for thatreason are important. However, additionalimportance is attached to the quadrantal anglesfor they serve as key values in the graphs oftrigonometric functions.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Without using ta-bles, determine the trigonometric functions of0 in problems 1 through 4.
1. 0 = 210°
2. 0 = 360°
3. 0 = 585°
4. 0 = - 180G
5. Without reference to tables or drawingsdetermine the value of 0 described in the fol-lowing, where x and y are points on the radiusvector r.
rz I
270°
X
(0O)
(C)
Figure 4-20. Functions of quadrantal angles.
45
50
0
es 06(I 0)
r:1
CD)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Table 4-2. Functions of quadrantal angles.
0sin 0 cos 0 tan 0 cot 0 sec 0 csc 0Deg. Rad.
0° 0 0 1 0 =defined 1 undefined
900 i 1 0 undefined 0 undefined 1
180° 1r 0 - 1 0 undefined -1_
undefined
270° 31T2-1 0 undefined 0 undefined -1
a. x y = 3
b.
c. y = -r, x = 0
2. sin 360° = 0
cos 360° = 1
tan 360° = 0
Without using tables, determine the nurneri- cot 3600 = undefinedcal value of the functions of indicated angles andverify the statements in problems 6 through 8. sec 360° = 1
6. sin2 150Q + cos2 15042
-= 1 csc 360° = undefined
7. sin 340° = 2 sin 170° cos 170°3. sin 585° = -
8. cos 270° = cos2 135° - sin2 135°
NOTE: Terms such as sin2 0 are used to cos 585° -indicate (sin 0)2.
11. sin 210° = -
cos 210° = -
tan 210° =3
cot 210° =
sec 210° = -
csc 210° = -2
2
46
51.
tan 585° = 1
cot 585° = 1
sec 585° = -
csc 585° = -
4. sin (-1800) = 0cos (-180°) = -1
tan (-180°) = 0cot (-180°) is undefinedsec (-180°) = -1csc (-180°) is undefined
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
5. a. 0 = 45°
b. 9=600
C. 8=2700
FUNCTIONS OF ANGLESGREATER THAN 90°
In previous sections of this chapter a meansof dealing with angles greater than 900, by useof reference triangles, was developed. Whenusing reference triangles, it was found that anyfunction of an angle is, except possibly for thealgebraic sign, numerically equal to the samefunction of the reference angle.
In addition to the reference triangle, thereare formulas for determining the signs of func-tions of any angle. These are normally calledreduction formulas. This section shows thegeometrical development of some of the mostcommonly used reduction formulas. In general,reduction formulas provide a means of renucingthe functions of any angle to an equivalent ex-pression for the function in terms of a positiveacute angle. In the discussion in the followingparagraphs, this acute angle is designated 0.The reduction formulas can be used in the solu-tion of some trigonometric identites and inother applications which require analysis oftrigonometric functions.
SINE OF AN ANGLE
The numerical value of the sine of an angleis equal to the projection of a unit radius on theY axis. Figure 4-21 shows a circle with a unitradius. According to the definition of the sineof an angle
sin 6 =
But r in figure 4-21 is equal to 1 so that
sin 0 = y
Note that y is equal to y', which is the projec-tion of the unit radius on the Yaxis. Therefore,
sin 6 = y'
does not contradict the definiaon of the sine ofan angle less than 90°.
47
Figure 4-21. Circle diagram, sine of an angle.
Now, consider an angle in the second quad-rant. In figure 4-21 we have constructed theangle (180° - 0). The sine of this angle is evi-dently the same as the sine of the angle in thefirst quadrant or
sin (1800 - 0) = sin 0
In the third quadrant the projection of unitradius on the Y axis becomes negative. Thesine of the angle (180° + 0) is the same in mag-nitude but of opposite sign to that of an angle inthe first quadrant, so that
sin (180° + 0) = - sin 0
These formulas give the value of the sine ofany angle between 900 and 270° in terms of thesine of an angle less than 90°. The sine of anangle in the fourth quadrant is found from theformula
sin (380° - 0) = sin (-0) = - sin 0
COSINE OF AN ANGLE
The numerical value of the cosineof an angleis equal to the projection of a unit radius on theX axis.
52 Cr'.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Using the same method of analysis that wasused for the sine, we develop the formulaswhich are used to evaluate the cosine of anyangle.
In figure 4-22, notice that the projections ofthe unit radius on the X axis, or in other words,the cosine of the angles 0 and 1800 - 9 are thesame length but of different sign.
cos (1800 - 0) = - cos 0
Mso, the cosine of an angle in the thirdquadrant is found from the relation
cos (180° + 0) = - cos 0
And lastly, the cosine of an angle in the fourthquadrant is found from the relation
cos (360° - 0) = cos (-0) = cos 0
TANGENT OF AN ANGLE
The value of the tangent of an angle is equalto the lcngth of that part of the tangent to theunit circle at 00 between y .=-0-amd the intersec-tion of the continuation of the unit radius withthe tangent line.
Figure 4-22.Circle diagram, cosine of anangle.
48
53
Let us clarify this definition by studyingfigure 4-23. The line MN is the tangent to theunit circle at 0°. The continuation of the unitradius CD cuts the tangent at M.
According to this definition, MA is the tan-gent of the angle 0. This new definition doesnot contradict the previous rule where we foundtan 8 from triangle CMA as follows:
tan 0 = MACA
Therefore, because CA is equal to 1
tan 0 = MA
For angles in the second quadrant we write
tan (180° - 0) = - tan 0
For angles in the third quadrant we have
tan (180° + 0) = tan 0
Figure 4-23.Circle diagram, tangent of anangle.
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
For angles in the fourth quadrant the relationis
tan (360° - 0) = tan (-0) = - tan 0
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Express each ofthe following as trigonometric functions of O.
1. sin (180° - 0)
2. cos (360° - 0)
3. cos (720° - 0)
4. tan (1800 + 0)
5. tan (-0)
ANSWERS:
1. sin 0
2. cos 0
3. cos 0
4. tan 0
5. - tan 0This section has developed reduction formu-
las for the sine, cosine, and tangent of angles.The reduction formillas apply as well to theother three functions. The formulas developerlin this section and the corresponding formulasfor the remaining functions are summarized inthe following paragraphs.
Functions of 1800 - 0:
sin (1800 - 0) = sin 0
cos (1800 - 0). -cos 0
tan (180° - 0). -tan 0
cot (1800 - 0) = -cot 0
sec (180° - 0) = -sec 0
csc (180° - 0) = csc 0
Functions of 180° + 0:
sin (1800 + 0) = -sin 0
cos (1800 + 0) = -cos 0
49
54
tan (180° + 0). tan 0
cot (180° + 0). cot 0
sec (180° + 0) = -sec 0
csc (180° + 0). -csc 0
Functions of 360° - 0:
sin (360° - 0) = -sin 0
cos (360° - 0) = cos 0
tan (360° - 0) = -tan 0
cot (360° - 0) = -cot 0
sec (360° - 0)= sec 0
csc (360° - 0)= -csc 0
Functions of -0:
sin (-0)= -sin 0
cos (-0)= cos 0
tan (-0) = -tan 0
cot (-0) = -cot 0
sec (-0) = sec 0
csc (-0)= -csc 0
EXAMPLE: Use reduction formulas andtables to find the sine of 220°.
SOLUTION: 220° is in the third quadrantand can be considered a function of 180° + 9.
4
sin (180° + 0) = -sin 0
sin 220° = sin (180° + 40°)
sin 220° = -sin 400
sin 220° = -0.64279
EXAMPLE: Find the tangent of -350°.SOLUTION:First,
tan (-0) = -tan 9tan -350° = -tan 350°
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
then,
tan (360° - 0) = -tan 0
tan 3500 = tan (3600 - 3500)
tan 3500 = -tan 100
combining the two,
tan -350° = -tan 3500
tan 350° = -tan 100
therefore,
tan -350° = -tan 3500 = -(-tan 10°)
tan -350° = tan 10°
tan -350° = 0.17633
COMPOSITE CIRCLE DIAGRAM
All the trigonometric functions can be shownas lengths of lines in a circle diagram as il-lustrated in figure 4-24. The circle has a unitradius. A number of things may be learnedfrom this diagram. For example, the threesides of the right triangle OAB are sin 0, cos
, and 1, so that from the Pythagorean theorem
sin20 + cos 20= 1
In the same way, in triangle ORM
1 + tan20 = sec20
and in triangle ONP
1 : cot20 = csc20.
These three equations are true for any angle.These equations are trigonometric identities
and will be used in chapter 8 of this course.PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Use reduction
formulas and tables to find the values of thesine, cosine, and tangent of 0 in the followingproblems.
1. 0 = 137°
2. 0 = 2i4°
50
Figure 4-24.Composite circle diagram.
3. 0 = 325°
4. 0 = -290°
ANSWERS:
1. sin 137°
cos 137°
tan 137°
2. sin 214°
cos 214°
tan 214°
3. sin 325°
cos 325°
tan 325°
= sin 43° = 0. 68200
= -cos 43° = -0.73135
= -tan 43° = -0.93252
= -sin 34° = -O. 55919
= -cos 34° = -0.82904
= tan 34° = 0. 67451
= -sin 35° = -O. 57358
= cos 35° = 0. 81915
= -tan 35° = -0.70021
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
4. sin -290° = -sin 2900 = sin 700 = 0.93969
cos -290° = cos 2900 = cos 70° = 0.34202
tan -290° = -tan 290° = tan 70° = 2.74748
PERIODICITY OF FUNCTIONS
The trigonometric functions exhibit a prop-erty which is also possessed by some othermathematical functions. These functions ex-hibit a regular repetition of the values whicheach function has in a certain range.
The importance of the functions which areperiodic is that once the values are known forone period of the variable, the values of thefunctions are then known for all values thevariable takes on in its range.
GRAPH OF THE SINE
Figure 4-25 shows the graph of the sinefunction. The angle is plotted on the horizontalaxis, increasing to the right, and the corre-sponding value of the sine function is plotted onthe vertical axis. Two complete revolutionsare plotted. It can be seen onthe graph that thevalue of the sine varies between +1 and -1 andnever goes beyond these limits as the angle
1
varies. The graph also shows that the she in-creases from 0 at 00 to a maximum positive at90° (I) and then decreases back to 0 at 1800 (r).The value of the sine continues decreasing to a
31Tmaximum negative at 2700 (-2--) and then in-
creases to a value of 0 at 360°(2v). If the sec-ond revolution is analyzed it is found to repeatthe variations of the first revolutIon for thecorre: mnding points. Therefore, the period ofthe sine function is 360° or 271. radians.
GRAPH OF THE COSINE
The cosine also has a period of 271, as seenin figure 4-26. The range of values which thecosine can take on also lies between +1 and -1.However, as seen on the graph, the cosine va-ries from a value of 1 at 0° to a value of 090° and uontinues decreasing to reach a maxi-mum negative value at 180°(v). The cosine in-creases from the 180° point and reaches amaximum positive value (equal to 1) at the 360°(2 ir) point.
GRAPH OF THE TANGENT
The graph of the tangent, figure 4-27, showsa special kind of discontinuity called an infinite
Figure 4-25.Graph of the sine.
51
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 4-26.Graph of the cosine.
Figure 4-27.Graph of the tangent.
discontinuity, %len the angle is slightly lessthan 90°, (i), the value of the tangent will bevery large and positive. When the angle is ex-actly 4 the tangent curve and the Y axis areparallel. Thus, the tangent of is plus orminus infinity. When the angle becomes slightlygreater than the tangent assumes very large
52
negative values. Thus, the tangent goes fromlarge positive values through infinity to largenegative values at i. The same occurs at ,
This is called an infinite discontinuity, Theperiod for this function is 180° (7r radians).
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: In the problemplisted below use the graphs of figures 4-2514.:N.-26, and 4-27 to answer the questions; then usethe tables in appendixes III and W to verify theanswers.
For what values of 91. is cos 9 ircreasing if 0 0
2. do sin 9 and cos 9 decrease0-0 as- 2 rr?
3. do cos 9 and tan 9 increase
1__3; ?
4. do sin 0, cos 9, and tan 9 increase to-,gether if 0 5-9:5-2 Tr?
?together if
together if
ANSWERS:
1. None
2. 12150 te_g
3. r < 0 <2
3r4. 0 27T
Chapter 4TRIGONOMETRIC ANALYSIS
r .'vUNCTIONS AND COMPLEMENTARYANGLES
Inspect the two triangles in figure 4-28.Triangle (B) is exactly the same as triangle (A)except that it has been turned on the side.
(A)
cos 0 = sin (90° - 9)
tan 0 = cot (90° - e)
sec 0 = csc 90° - 0)
csc 0 = sec (90° - 0)
cot 8 = tan (90° - 0)
The trigonometric function of an angle isequal to the cofunction of its complement. Thesix trigonometric functions consist of threepairs of cofunctions, The functions are arrangedin pairs so that the name of one can be obtainedfrom the other by adding or deleting the prefix"co." For example: sine, cosine; tangent, co-tangent; secant, cosecant.
90°-0 The cofunction principle accounts for theformat of tables of trigonometric functionssimilar to the one in appendix III. Refer to thepage of this table that contains the function of21'. Enter the table at the top of the sin 21°
Figure 4-28.Complementary angles, column and go down the column to 21°30' asdetermined by the minute column en the left.The value found for sin 21°30' (or 21.5°) is
In triangle (A) In triangle (B) 0.36650. Looking now to the bottom of the pageand reading up the minute column on the ex-treme right, find the cosine of 68°30' (or 68.5°).
sin e cos (90° - 0).1. It is seen that cos 68°30' is also 0.36650. Since
(B)
cos 021°30' + 68°30' = 90°
T sin (90° -21°30' and 68°30' are complementary angles and
tan 0 .the cofunctions are numerically equal. If the
=Z.cot (90° - 0) Y- relationship of complementary angles and co-functions did not hold true, a table of values offunctions from 0° to 90° would require 90 col-
sec 0 = xcsc (90° - 0)=f; umns each for the sine and cosine instead of
the 45 columns that are required.r PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Express the fol-csc = sec (90° - ) = lowing as a function of the complementary angle.
1. sin 27°
cot 0 .x tan (90° - 0) =2. tan 38°17'3. csc 41°4. cos 16°30'22"Express the following as an acute angle less
The ratio in triangle (A) is equal to ratio than 45°.5. sec 79°37'16"
1, in triangle (B); therefore 6. cos 56°7. sin 438°
sin 9 = cos (90° - 0) 8. tan 48°ANSWERS:1. cos 63°
In the same way, 2. cot 51°43'
53
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
3. sec 49° 6. sin 34°4. sin 73029'38" 7. cos 12°5. csc 10°22'44" 8. cot 42°
CHAPTER 5
OBLIQUE TRIANGLES
The tv.o previous chapters considered right-1.-Igles and angles which could be calculated byusing triangles which included right angles.This chapter considers oblique triangles whichare, by definition, triangles containing no rightangles.
In chapter 19 of Mathematics, Vol. 1, NavPers10069-C, a method for solving problems involv-ing oblique triangles was introduced. Thismethod employed the procedure of dividing theoriginal triangle into two oimore right triangles,and using the right triangles to solve the probleminvolved. It was also pointed out at that timethat there were direct methods of dealing withoblique triangles.
This chapter develops two methods of dealingdirectly with oblique triangles. These twomethods, or laws, are developed in the firstsection of the chapter as aids to calculations.The chapter also contains example and practiceproblems for solving oblique triangles con-sidered in four standard cases. In this chapter"solving a triangle" is defined as finding thethree sides a, b, and c and the three angles A,B, and C of an oblique triangle, when some ofthese six parts are given.
Also included in this chapter are some prob-lems using lo.rithms in solving oblique trian-gles (where another law is idroduced) and prob-lems concerning the area of a triangle whichcombine the area formula of plane geometrywith the laws developed in this chapter.
AIDS TO CALCULATION
The aids to calculations, or aids in solvingoblique triangles, developed in this chapter aretwo theorems, known as the law of sines and thelaw of cosines. This section is concerned withthe development and proof of these laws; sub-
55
sequent sections will be concerned with usingthem in calculations.
LAW OF SINES
The law of sines states that the lengths ofthe sides of any triangle are proportional to thesines of their opposite angles. If a triangle isconstructed and labeled as shown in figure 5-1the law of sines can be written
a b c= sin B =
PROOF: For the proof of the law of sines weredraw the triangle of figure 5-1 and drop aperpendicular from A to the oppc,:ite side asshown in figure 5-2 (A).
Reference to the triangle shown in figure 5-2(A) shows that the perpendicular from A to theopposite side has divided the triangle into tworight triangles and the trigonometric functionspreviously developed are used here. Consider-ing these two right triangles we obtain
and,
sin B = or h = c sin B
hsin C - b or h = b sin C
Here we have two expressions for h which areequal to each other, so
c sin B =b sin Cor in another form
c bsin C sin B
In figure 5-2 (B) the triangle is redrawn witha perpendicular from C to an extension of the
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 5-1.Triangle ABC.
(Al
h' = b sin A
to form
a sin B = b sin A
or
a
(S)
a bsin A sin P
Figure 5-2.Proving the law of sines.
opposite side. Considering the right triangleBCD thus formed, it is seen that
h'sin B = or IV = a sin Ba
and in triangle ACD
sin (180° - A) =If or h' = b sin (180° - A)
From chapter 4 of this training course, recallthat
sin (1800 - 8) = sin 0
SO
sin (180° - A) = sin A
then
h'sin A = or h' = b sin A
Now equate
h' = a sin B
and
56
(e)
Two separate triangles were used inprovingthe law of sines simply for clarity of explana-tion. If the two triangles are combined in onefigure, as shown in figure 5-2 (C), it is seenthat the two laws could be derived from this oneillustration. Here it is obvious that the angle Bwhich appears in both of the ratio pairs is thesame angle; thus the ratios
c bsin C sin B
and
asin A sin B
can be combinqd to form the law of sines
a b csin A sin B sin C
agi previously stated.
LAW OF COSINES
The second of the laws to be developed inthis section is the law of cosines which states:In any triangle the square of one side is equalto the sum of the squares of the other two sidesminus twice the product of these two sides
Chapter 5.0BLIQUE TRIANGLES
multiplit. the cosine of the angle between which expands toFor .he triangle in figure 5-3 (A), the
law of cosines can be stated as h2 = a2 - b2 + 2bx x2
= b2 + c2 - 2bc cos A
(6)
Substituting again for x the value given in (2)
PROOF: Consider the triangle in figure 5-3 results in(B) with a perpendicular dropped from B toside b to form two right triangles. To prove
h2 = a2 - b2 + 2bc cos A - c2 cos2 A (7)
a2 = b2 + c2 - 2bc cos A Equatnig the two values of h2 in (4) and (7) gives
(8)consider first the triangle ABD and note that
c2 - c2 cos2 A = a2 - b2 + 2bc cos A - c cos2 A
or
and also
cos A = (I) Canceling like terms and rearranging,
x = c cos A (2)
h2 = c 2 - x2 (3)
2 2 2 2 2c - e1----= a - b + 2bc cos A -
-a2 = -b2 c2 + 2bc cos A
a2 = b2 + c2 - 2bc cos A (9)
The proof is thus complete.Substituting in (3) the value of x given in (2) To prove another form of the law of cosines
results in
h2 = c2 - c2 cos2 A
In triangle BDC
h2 = a2 - (b - 42
(4)
(5)
c2 = a2 + b2 - 2ac cos C
refer to figure 5-3 (C) and note that in the righttriangle CAD
b
Figure 5-3.Proving law of cosines.
5762
cos C =1-
(C)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
or
and also
y = b cos C
h2 = b2 - y2
Substituting for the value of y gives
h2 = b2 - b2 cos2 C
In triangle ABD
h2 = c2 - (a - 3)2
which expands to
2 2 2h = c - a + 2ay - y2
With additional substitution
2 2h = c - a2 + 2ab cos C - b2 cos2C
Equating the two h2 values which are representa-tive of the two right triangles results in
b2 - b2 cos2C
= c2 - a2 + 2ab cos C - b2 cos2C
Canceling and rearranging yields
c2 = a2 + b2 - 2ab cos C
completirk, the proof.The same procedures can be applied to prove
the remaining form of the law of cosines. Insummary, the three forms of the law of cosinesare
a2 = b2 + c2 - 2bc cos A
b2 = a2+ c2 - 2ac cos B
c2 = a 2 + b2 - 2ab cos C
The trigonometric functions or other methodspreviously noted are normally more effectivein dealing with right triangles; however, applica-tion of these laws can be used in an analysis ofsome trigonometric principles and identities.
EXAMPLE: Show that
c2 = a2+ b2 - 2ab cos C
holds true in the right triangle shown in figure5 -4.
.SOLUTION: In the figure it is shown thatC = 900. Recall from the graph of the cosine inchapter 4 of this course (or from appendix III)that cos 900 = 0. Therefore, the formula
c 2 = a 2 + b2 - 2ab cos C
can be reduced to
c2 = a2 + b2 - 2ab cos 90°
c2 = a2+ b2 - (2ab) (0)
c2 = a2 + b2
Reference to the figure shows that c is the hypo-tenuse al a right triangle and from the Pytha-gorean theorem
c2 = a2 + b2
The law of sines and the law of cosines areused mainly to solve oblique triangles, as willbe shown in the following sections. In addition,these laws also hold true for right triangles. Figure 5-4.Example problem, law of cosines.
58
Chapter 5 OBLIQUE TRIANGLES
Thus, the law of cosines would provide a propersolution to the right triangle.
In this problem the law of cosines reduces tothe Pythagorean theorem. However, in worldngwith oblique triangles remember that while thelaw of cosines applies to all triangles, the Pytha-gorean theorem can only be used when dealingwith right triangles.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:1. Refer to figure 5-5 and prove that
b2 = a2 + c2 - 2ac cos B.2. Assume that the triangle in figure 5-5 is
such that a.b.c=2. Transpose the formula inproblem 1 and solve for cos B, then refer to thetable of functions in the appendix and verify thatB = 60°.
FOUR STANDARD CASES
It was stated previously that the solution of atriangle consists of finding the six parts (sidesa, b, and c; and the angles A, B, and C) whensome of these values are known. If three ofthese parts are known, at least one of which is thelength of a side, the remaining parts can normallybe calculated by one of the methods discussed inthe following paragraphs. For convenience, themethods for solving oblique triangles are devel-oped by considering the triangles in four catego-ries as follows:
1. Two of the angles and one of the sides areknown.
2. The three sides are known.3. Two of the sides and the angle between
them are known.
Figure 5-5.Practice problem, law of cosines.
59
4. Two of the sides and an angle that is notbetween them are known.
The last situation described in the precedinglist is known as the AMBIGUOUS CASE for, undercertain conditions, two triangles which are notcongruent can contain the same three knownparts.
Recall f rom plane geometry that two trianglesare congruent (having the same shape and size)if one of the following conditions is met:
1. Three sides of one triangle are equal tothe corresponding sides of a second triangl,
2. Two sides and the included angle of onttriangle are equal to-the corresponding parts o,a second triangle.
3. Two angles and a side of one triangle areequal to the corresponding parts of a second tri-angle.
It is seen here that the ambiguous case isthe only one that does not parallel a plane geom-etry theorem for congruent triangles. The firstand fourth (ambiguous) cases (or categories) oftriangles will employ the law of sines in the solu-tions and cases 2 and 3 will be solved by using thelaw of cosines.
TWO ANGLES AND ONE SIDE
When two angles and a side are known, the re-maining angle can be determined so easily thatthis case could be assumed to be one in which oneside and all angles are known. (The third angleis equal to the difference between 180° and thesum of the known angles.) The law of sines isthen used twice to find the length of the remainingsides. To find either of the unknown sides, selectthe ratio pair which includes the ratio involvingthe unknown side and the one which considers theknown side.
EXAMPLE: Using the law of sines, find thelength of the lettered sides in the triangle infigure 5-6 (A).
SOLUTION: From the law of sines
sin C = sin B
Since
5sm 97.5 = sin 30
sin 0 = sin (180° - 0),
sin 9750 = sin 82.5° = 0.99144
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2 .
Also
sin 30° = 0.5000
SO,
5 _ b 2.50000 s0.99144 0.5000 %°4 0.99144
or
b = 2.5216
Angle A is equal to
180° - B - C = 52.50
Again from the law of sines,c a
sin C sin A
5 a
sin 52.5° = 0.793355 a
0.99144 0.79335
5(0.79335)a0.99144
a = 4.001EXAMPLE: Figure 5-6 (B) shows a flagpole
standing vertically on a hill which is inclined15degrees with the horizontal. Aman climbing thehill notes that at one point his line of sight to thetop of the pole makes an angle of 40° with thehorizontal. At another point, 200 feetfurtherupthe hill, this angle has increased to 55°. Howhigh is the flagpole? Solve using only the law ofsines.
SOLUTION: First, define all the angles in thetriangles OAB and OBD. In triangle OAB
BAO = 40° 15° = 25°
1-OBA = 180 - (550 - 15°)
= 180° - 40° = 140°
L AOB = 180° - 140° -25° = 15°
60
In triangle OBD
LDBO = 55° - 15° az. 40°
LBDO = 90° + 13° = 105°
BOD = 90° - 55° = 35°
These two triangles have OB as a commonside. We can use the law of sines to find BOin triangle OAB and then apply the law again intriangle OBD to find the length of side OD whichis the height of the flagpole. Thus,
AB OBsin AOB sin BAO
200 OBsin 15 - sin 25
OB 200 sin 25°= 326.57 ftsin 15-
And in triangle OBD
OB ODsin BDO sin DBO
326.57 _ODiiiios° si71-417
OD326.57 sin 40°sin 105
sin 0 = sin (180° - 0)
sin 105° = sin 75°
326 57 sin 40°ODsin 75
OD = 217.3 ft
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Refer to figure 5-7in solving the following problems where thefigures (A), (B), and (C) are to be used respec-tively with problems 1, 2, and 3. Use the law ofsines in solving these problems.
1. Find a and b using the values given in thetable of functions of special angles (chapter 4of
Chapter 5-0BLIQUE TRIANGLES
_this -course). Leave answers in radical form ANSWERS:
where applicable.2. Find aides d and f to two decimal places.3. Find the length of ato two decimal places.
(A)
(8)
Figure 5-6.Case 1, example problems.
(A)
1. a=3b = 3V-3-
2. d = e.o7f 3.96
3. 8.39
THREE SIDES
When the three sides of a triangle are given,the triangle can be solved by three successiveapplications of the law of cosines. Each applica-tion yields the value of one angle. The order ofdetermining the angles is not important; any ofthe three angles may be determined first. Aparticular angle is found by using the form ofthe law of cosines in whichthe cosine of the anglein questions appears. When the three angles havebeen found, the solution is checked by verifyingthat A + Fs + C 180°.
EXAMPLE: Solve the triangle ABC, givena = 7, b = 13, and c 14. Determine the size ofthe angles to the nearest degree.
SOLUTION: To simplify the procedure solvethe law of cosines algebraically for cos A.
a2 = b2 + c2 - 2bc cos A
2 bc cos A = b2 + c2 - a2
cos A = b2 + c2 - a2
10
(B)
Figure 5-7.Case 1 practice problems.
61
66.
2bc
10
(C)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
The remaining forms of the law can besolved in the same manner and the results are
and
cos B a2 + c2 - b22ac
cos C a2 + b2 - c22ab
22cos C =182
cos = 0.12088
C = 83°
Checking the calculations gives
Now in the given problem A + B+ C = 300+ 670 4 830 = 1800
Then
and
cos A b2 + c2 - a22bc
cos A 132 + 142 - 722 x 13 x 14
cos A 169 + 196 - 49364
cas A - 316364
cos A = 0.86813
A = 30°
ccs B a2 + c2 - b22ac
=cos Jo 49 + 196 - 1692 x 7 x 14
It may appear that tile best method to use insolving a triangle when three sides are givenwould be to calculate two angles and find the thirdangle by subtracting the sum of the twofrom 180°.While this method shortens the computation, italso destroys the check on the calculations, andis not recommended.
EXAMPLE: Solve the triangle ABC whena = 8, b = 13, and c = 17. Express the angles tothe nearest degree.
SOLUTION:
Then
b2 + c2 - a2cos A
2bc
cos 4k 169 + 289 - 64442
cos A = 394442
cos A = 0. 8914e,
A = 27°
76 cos B 64 + 289 - 169cos B = 5-6 272
cos B = 0.67647cos = 0.38776
B = 67°
and finally
cos C = a2 + b2 - c22ab
B = 47"
cos C 64 + 169 - 289208
,., 56cos C = 49 + 169 - 196 cos k. -182 208
62
67
Chapter 5-0BLIQUE TRIANGLE8
cc,s- C = -0.26927
cos C = -cos 740
-cos C = cos 740
a2 = 49
2a = 74
a274
+ 25 - 70 cos 19°
- 70(0. 94552)
- 66.1864reference to reduction formulas gives
-cos C = cos (180° - C)
and
C = 106°
then, checking,
A + B+ C = 27° + 47° + 106° = 1800
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: The side lengths oftriangle ABC are given in the following problems.Use the law of cosines to determine the sizesof the angles to the nearest degree.
1. a = 3, b = 4, c = 52. a= 2, b=3, c =43. a 7, b = 14, c = 11ANSWERS:1. A = 37°
B = 53°C = 90°
2. A = 29°B = 47°C = 104°
3. A = 29°B = 100°C = 51°
TWO SIDES AND THEINCLUDED ANGLE
Where two sides and the angle between themare given, the triangle is solved most easily byrepeated use of the law of cosines. Using thegiven parts, solve first for the unknown side.Then, with three sides known, solve for the re-maining angles in the same manner "s in casetwo.
EXAMPLE: Using the law of cosines, solvethe triangle ABC shown in figure 5-8, angle ac-curacy to the nearest degree.
SOLUTION: First find the unknown side.
a2 = b2 + c2 - 2bc cos A
/ 2 2a"- = 7 + 5 - 2(5) (7) cos 19°
63
68
a2 = 7. 8136
a = 7.8136
a = 2. 795
To compute the angles, round the values givenabove to
and
cos B = a2 + c2 - b22ac
25 - 492 x 2.8 x 5
cos B = - 16' 228
cos B = -0.57857
B = 125°
2 2 9
COsqC = a + b2ab
7.8 + 49 - 25 31.839.2
= 179°
cos C = 2 x 2.8 x 7
cos C = O. 81633
C = 35°
then, checking,
A + B+ C =19° + 125° + 35°
A+ B+C a 180°This is acceptable with the accuracy requiredhere.
EXAMPLE: Two ships leave port at thesame time; one (ship A) sailed on a course of050° at a speed of 10 knots, the second (ship B)sails on a course of 110° at 12 knots. How farapart are the two ships at the end of 3 hours?
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
e a 5
Figure 5-8.Case 3, example problem.
SOLUTION: A good rule in any problem ofthis type is to first draw a picture to show theproblem. In figure 5-9 a coordinate systemoriented to compass headings is constructed, andthe given information is plotted. From the figureit is seen that the desired answer is the distanceAB opposite the angle labeled C, where C = 1100- 500 = 600 .
Using the law of cosines
c 2 = a 2 + b2 - 2ab cos C
c 2= 362 + 302 - 2(30 x 36) cos 600
1c2 = 1296 + 900 - (1080) x
c 2 = 2196 - 180 = 1116
c =
c = 33.5 approximately
The ships are approximately 33.5 miles part atthe end of 3 hours.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Use the law ofcosines to solve the triangles described below.Express angles to nearest degree mid sides totwo decimal places.
1. a = 10, b = 7, C = 25°2. b = 11, c = 17, A = 20°3. a = 12, c = 26, B = 140°ANSWERS:1. c = 4.69
A = 116°B = 39°
2. a = 7.65B = 29°C = 131°
6964
Figure 5-9.Plot of ship's courses.
3. b = 36A = 12°C = 28°
TWO SIDES AND ANOPPOSITE ANGLE
When two sides and a nonincluded angle aregiven, the triangle falls in the ambiguous cate-gory and one of the following cases will exist:
1. There is no solution.2. There are two solutions.3. There is one solution.The category is called ambiguous for the
given parts cannot alvays establish the shape andsize of one triangle. There may be two triangleswhich are not congruent, but still contain thegiven parts. The ambiguity of this category canbe seen if we assume that three parts (B, b, andc) are given, and we attempt to construct thetriangle from this data. We consider the possi-bilities as follows:
1. If angle B is obtuse as in figure 5-10 (A),the side b must be larger than side c for atriangle to exist. In this case, b>c, there isonly one triangle which exists and only one solu-tion.
2. If B is a right angle, as infigure 5-10 (B),side b must be larger than side c for a triangleto exist and there is only one triangle and onesolution.
Chapter 5-0BLIQUE TRIANGLES
3. Figure 5-11 shows the situations whichcan exist if B is an acute angle. In (A) a figureis constructed with A <900 and b < c; that is, aline drawn from vertex A is too short to reachthe line BC. In this case, no triangle exists andthere is no solution.
4. In figure 5-11 (B), the line from A (sideb) is exactly the, distance from A to the line BC.In this situation, only one triangle exists and-itis a right triangle with one solution.
5. Figure 5-41 (C) shows a triangle wherethe line from A touches the line BC in two places.In this case the sides b and b' are longer thanthe side b in figure 5-11 (B), but still shorterthan line c. In this category there are twotriangles, BAC' and BAC, which contain thegiven parts. With the law of sines two solutionscan be found for this possibility.
6. The last possibility considered is oneshown in figure 5-11 (D). In this figure the lineb is longer than c and again would touch the lineBC in two places to form two triangles. How-ever, only the triangle ABC is considered Sincethe triangle ACC' does not include angle B asan interior angle. This situation is consideredto nave only one solution. If b = c, then c and c'coincide and there is only one triangle.
Ce rtain relationships of angle, side, and func-tion values can be found to determine in advancewhich of the possibilities previously listed existsfor a given triangle. However, this knowledgeis not required before the solutionris attempted.It can be determined in the process of attempt-ing a solution, as will be shown in the exampleproblems, or a drawing can be made from thedata given.
The triangles presented in this section havehad value sizes only in relation to eachother or
- in relation to 90°. Figure 5-12 points out theambiguity which can exist when a triangle isdescribed by giving two sides and an angle op-posite one of these sides. Thisfigure shows twotriangles constructed with given data of A=30°,a = 4-9*-and c = 6. Solution of these two triangleswill show that B, C, and b are not the same forthe two, and this is a case where two solutionsarise.
A good approach to solving triangles whentwo sides and an opposite angle (ambiguouscategory) are given is to first use the law ofsines to find the unknown angle opposite a givenside. Then the third angle can. easily be deter-minEd and the law of sines can be used again,to compute the unknown sicid. In the followingexamples and practice' problems desired
( A)
)
Figure 5-10.Ambiguous case, B > 900.
accuracy is in degrees to the nearest minuteand sides to two decimal places.
EXAMPLE: Solve the triangle (or triangles)ABC when B = 45°, b = 3, c = 7.
SOLUTION; First use the law of sines .tofind angle C
c bsin C sin B
65
70
sin C = c sin B
sin C = 7 sin 4503
sin C 7 x 0.707113
sin C = 4.949173
sin C = 1.64992
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
A
( A )
(C)
The calculations show that
sin C >1
A
Figure 5-11.Ambiguous case, B < 900
However, reference to tables or a graph of thesine function shows that the sine isnever greaterthah 1, so this is the case where no triangle orsolution ex1st:3.
EXAMPLE: Solve the triangle (or triangles)ABC when A = 22°, a = 5.4, c = 14.
SOLUTION: Apply the law of sines to deter-mine angle C.
c asin C sin A
a
66
( D
sin C 14 sin 22°5. 4
sin C 14 x 0.374615114
sin C = 0.97121
C = 76° 13'
Since the side opposite the known angle is smallerthan the other given side, there are two anglesto consider. Since
sin (1800 - C)= sin C
the other angle (C') is 103° 47'.Contimie the solution considering two trian-
gles, ABC and A'B'C'. In ABC;
Chapter 5--OBLIQUE TRIANGLES
( A )
(B)
Figure 5-12.--,Two different triangles derivedfrom identical given ciata.
b = 14.27
This completes the solution of triangle ABC.In the second triangle, angle B' isfound first
by using values previously calculated
8'
13'
8'
8'
=
=
=
=
180° - + C')
1800 - (22° + 103°
180° - 125° 47'
540 13'
47')
Then from the law of sines
a' sin 8'sin A'
b' 5.4 x sin 540 13'sin 22°
5 4 x 0.811230.37461
b' = 11.70
A = 22°, a = 5.4, c = 14, and C = 76° 13' This completes the solution for lx)thpossibletriangles. Figure 5-13 shows a scale drawing ofthe triangle of this example. The angle A was
In A'B'C'; A' = A, a' = a, = v, and constructed with one side of length 14 unitster-minating at B, andthe other line toform an angleof 22°. A compass was set to 5.4 units and an arc
C' = 103° 47 '.was struck using B as the center. As shown inthe figure, the arc intersected the line fromA at two points. Therefore, there are two
Solving ABC first, angle B is found by triangles which satisfy the data.
B = 180° - (A + C)
8 = 1800 - (22° + 76° 13')
B = 180° - 98° 13'
B = 81° 47'
Then by the law of sines
a sin Bsin A
b = 0.374615.4 X 0. 98973
EXAMPLE: Solve the triangle (or triangles)when A = 350, a = 10, b = 8.
SOLUTION: From the law of sines
sin B = b sin A
Then
41; 4
a
sin B = 8 sin 35010
sin B = 0.45886
B = 27° 19'
C = 1800 - (A + B)
it
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
A= 22°
OC14II4
Figure 5-13.Scale drawing of example triangles.
C = 1800 - (350 + 270 19')
C = 1170 41'
Apply the law of sines again to find c
c - a sin Csin A
10 sin 117° 41'C = sin 35°
C =10 x 0.88553
O. 57358
c = 15.44
but
SO
35° + 270 19' + 620 19' =124° 38'
A + B + C' # 1800
and ABC' is not a triangle described by thegiven data.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: In the followingproblems use the given data to solve the tri-angle or triangles involved.
1. C = 100°, c = 46, b = 302. A = 40°, a = 25, b = 303. B = 42°, b = 2, c = 44. B = 30°, b = 10, a = 10ANSWERS:
This solves one triangle and since the side 1. B = 39° 58', A = 40° 02', a = 30.04opposite the given angle is larger than the other 2. B = 500 29', C = 89° 31', c = 38.89 andgiven side, there should be only one solution. B = 1290 31, C = 100 29', c = 7.08However, if this point is overlooked and the 3. No solutionsolution is continued in an attempt to find a 4. A = 30°, C 120°, c = 17.32second solution as in the previous example
sin C' = sin (180° - C)
sin C' = sin (180° - 117° 41')
sin C' = sin 620 19'
C' = 62° 19'
Now if this angle is contained in a secondtriangle described by the given data, it isknown that
A + B + C' = 180°
-
68
LOGARITHMIC (;OLUTIONS
Computations involving triangle solutions areoften concerned with the multiplication or divi-sion of trigonometric functions, which containvalues given in four or five decimal places, andother values which may also contain numerousdigits. There are many opportunities for arith-metic errors in these computations and, inmanycases, the errors are the result of the multipli-cation and division by large decimals. In
Chapter 5-0BLIQUE TRIANGLES
logarithmic solution the computations are re-duced to addition problems, and the number oferrors is frequently reduced.
By the combined use of tables of trigonome-tric functions and tables of logarithms one couldsolve the triangles by first finding the value forthe function and converting this to a logarithmor by converting the logarithm of a function valueto a decimal and then convertingthis to an angle.However, the logarithm equivalents of the princi-pal natural functions have long since been workedout, and are available in tables, so that the neces-sary multiplication or division may be performedby the use of logarithms.
A table of "common logarithms of trigonome-tric functions° usually lists the logs for the sine,cosine, tangent, and cotangent of angles from0° through 180°. Appendix I shows a sample pagefrom such a table; reference to the appendixshows that both the characteristic and the man-tissa are listed. In addition, for each valuelisted, a characteristic of -10 at the end of thelog is understood.
Take the log listed for the sine of 38° 00'00", for example. This is listed as 9.78934.What this actually means is 9.78934-10, which inturn means that the log of this function is actu-ally -1+.78934. On the other hand, the log listedfor the tangent of 51° 10' 00" is 10.09422. Whatthis means is 10.0S422-10; in other words, thelog of this function is 0.09422. The logs areprinted in this manner simply to avoid the neces-sity for printing minus characteristics. Notethat, even when a characteristic is minus, themantissa is considered as plus.
A complete table of the logarithms of trigono-metric functions is not included in this course.For purposes of the examples and practice prob-lems in this course, a short table of values forthe sine, cosine, and tangent is given in table 5-1.The values in this table are given for each 5°from 0° to 90°. The complete logarithm (bothcharacteristic and mantissa) is given in thistable. The problems in this section will beworked with an accuracy of side lengths to threedigits and angles to the nearest 5°.
The solution of oblique triangles was con-sidered in four cases. In logarithmic solutionsthe solutions are also considered in four cases.In cases 1 and 4 the law of sines was used forsolutions. Since the law of sinea fits well withlogarithmic solutions, cases 1 and 4 alsouse thelaw of sines for logarithmic solutions. Cases 2and 3 were solved using the law of cosines; how-ever, the law of cosines involves addition and
749
subtraction and does not lend itself to logarithmicsolutions. For cases 2 and 3, we will usemethods other than the law of cosines for log-arithmic solutions.
CASES 1 AND 4
As previously stated, the solution of these twocases by the law of sines adapts readily to log-arithmic solution since the law of sines involvesmultiplication and division. Example solutionsof the cases are given in the following para-graphs.
EXAMPLES: Use logarithms to solve the tri-pee ABC when A = 1.10°, B = 25°, and c = 125.
SOLUTION: Find the unknown angle as thefirst step
C = 180° - A - B
C = 180° - 1100 - 25°
C = 45°
Using the law of sines with ratios involvinga and c find the value of a.as follows:
a csin A sin C
a = sin C x sin A
Taking the logarithm of both sides of theequation gives
log a = (log c - log sin C) + log sin A
The logarithms of trigonometric fulititionsgiven in table 5-1 include only angles from 0° to90° so the equation above becomes
log a = (log c - log sin C) + log sin (180° - A)
log a = (log 125 - log sin 45°) + log sin 70°
Refer to table 5-1 and appendix II and convertthe values to logarithms. One method of simpli-fying the computation is to convert each log-arithm to one with an end characteristic of -10and use the following procedure
log 125 = 12. 0969 - 10log sin 45° = 9. 8495 - 10 subtract
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Table 5-1. -Logarithms of trigonometric functions.
Degrees Log sin Log cos Log tan
0 0000
5 8.9403 - 10 9.9983 - 10 8.9420 - 10
10 9.2397 - 10 9.9934 - 10 9.2463 - 10
15 9.4130 - 10 9.9849 - 10 9.4281 - 10
20 9.5341 - 10 9.9730 - 10 9.5611 - 10
25 9.6260 - 10 9.9573 - 10 9.6687 - 10
30 9.6990 - 10 9.9375 - 10 9.7614 - 10
35 9.7586 - 10 9.9134 - 10 9.8452 - 10
40 9.8081 - 10 9.8843 - 10 9.9238 - 10
45 9.8495 - 10 9.8495 - 10 0.0000
50 9.8843 - 10 9.8081 - 10 0.0762
55 9.9134 - 10 9.7586 - 10 0.1548
60 9.9375 - 10 9.6990 - 10 0.2386
65 9.9573 - 10 9.6260 - 10 0.3313
70 9.9730 - 10 9.5341 - 10 0.4389
75 9.9849 - 10 9.4130 - 10 0.5720
80 9.9934 - 10 9.2397 - 10 0.7537
85 3.9983 - 10 8.9403 - 10 1.0580
90 . 0000
log (c/sin C) = 2.2474
log (125/sin 450 ) = 12.2474 - 10 add
log sin 70° = 9.9730 - 10
log a = 22.2204 - 20
log a = 2.2204
70
Taking the antilog,
a = 166
To complete the solution, find side busing thesame procedure
b asin B sin A
b = x sin B
Chapter 5-0BLIQUE TRIANGLES
log b = (log a - log sin A) + log sin B Evaluation of the logarithms gives
log b = (log 166 - log sin 700) + log sin 25° log b = 10. 6021 - 10
log sin A . 9.8081 - 10 add
log 166 = 12.2204 - 10 log (b x sin A) = 20.4102 - 20
log sin 70° = 9.9730 - 10 subtract
log (a/sin A) = 2.2474
log (a/sin A) = 12.2474 - 10
log sin 25° = 9.6260 - 10
log b = 21.8734 - 20
log b = 1.8734
b = 74.7
log (b x sin A) = 20.4102 - 20
log a = 10.4771 - 10 subtract
log sin B = 9.9331 - 10
We note that log sin B is less than 0, sothere are two argles to consider, say B and IV,
add where sin (180° - B) = sin B'.
Now
log sin B = 9.9331 - 10
B = 60°
B' = 120'
This completes the logarithmic solution for Then the corresponding angles, C and area triancle in case 1.
EXAMPLE:. Solve the triangle (or tri- C = 180° - (A + B)angles) when A = 40°, a = 3, b = 4. C = 180° - (40° + 60°)
This is an ambiguous case and with the .sideopposite the given angle smaller than the other C = 80°given side there are two possibilities: eitherthere are two solutions or side a is too short andto reach the baseline and there are no solutions.Recall from earlier examples that there is no C' = 1800 - (A + B')solution when the sine of the angle upposite thesecond given side (angle B in this case) is C' = 1800 - (40° + 120°)greater than one. In logarithmic solutions thecondition for no solution is when the log sin of C' = 20°the angle is greater than zero; this correspondsto a sine greater than one. Reference to table5-1 shows that all of the values listed for log To complete the solution find sides c and c'.sin are less than zero (negative characteristic). Consider first side c and use the following form
SOLUTION: Solve first for the unknown of the law of sinesangle opposite a given side using the law of sines
b sin Asin B = a
this in logarithmic form becomes
log sin B = log b + log sin A - log a
7671
a sin Cc = sin A
or, in logarithmic form,
log c = log a + log sin C - log sin A
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Evaluate the logarithms
log a = 10. 4711 - 10
log sin C = 9.9934 - 10
log (a x -in C) = 20. 4705 - 20
log sin A = 9.8031
log c = 10. 6624
Taking the antilog,
c = 4. 6
Finally, to find use
log e' =
log a
log sin C'
, a sin C'c sin A
add
- 10 subtract
- 10
log a + log sin C' - log sin A
. 10. 4771 - 10
= 9. 5341 - 10
log (a x sin C') = 20. 0112 - 20
log (a x sin C') = 10. 0112 - 10
log sin A = 9. 8081 - 10
log c' = O. 2031
Therefore,
= 1. 6
add
subtract
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Use logarithms tosolve the triangle (or triangles) described by thefollowing data.
LAW OF TANGENTS
The law of cosines does not lend itself to loga-rithmetic solutions. The two cases in which weused the law of cosines are solved by loga-rithms using two different methods. The firstmethod to solve triangles in case 3, where twosides and the included angle are given.
The law of tangents is expressed inwords asfollows:
any triangle the difference between twosides is to their sum as the tangent of half thedifference of the opposite angles is to the tangentof half their sum.
For any pair of sidessuch as side a and sidebthe law may be expressed as follows:
a - b tan 1/2 (A -a + b tan 1/2 (A + B)
The law may be expressed in a form that includesother combinations of sides and angles by sys-tematically changing the letters in the formula.
In solving case 3 by the law of tangents. selectthe formula which includes the given sides, saya and b; then angle C is also given. The sum ofthe unknown angles, A + B, is found as
A + B = 180° - C
and the law of tangents is used to find A - B.After the sum and difference of A and B aredetermined, the angles themselves can be found.With the angles known, the law of sines is usedto find the unknown side.
EXAMPLE: Solve the triangle ABC whenA = 25°, b = 10, c = 7.
SOLUTION: With b and c given and b > c usethe law of tangents in the form
b - c tan 1/2 (B - C)b + c tan 1/2 (B + C)
First, determine the sum of the unknown angles
1. A = 70°, B 100°, c = 50 B + C = 180° - A2. A = 80, a = 11, b = 183. A = 40°, a = 25, b = 30 B + C = 180° - 25°ANSWERS:
B + C = 155°1. C = 10°, a = 271, b = 2842. No solution Then 1/2(B + C) = 1/2(155°)3. B = 50°, C = 90°, = 39.84. B' = 130°, C' = 10°, c = 6.75 1/2(B + C) = 77 5°
72- -
77
Chapter 5-0BLIQUE TRIANGLES
and
b - c = 10 - 7 = 3
b + c = 10 + 7 = 17
At this point, the only unknown in the formulafor the law of tangents is tan 1/2(13 C). Thenext step is to transpose the formula and solvefor this unknown.
b - c tan 1/2(B - C)b + c tan 1/2(B + C)
(b - c) (tan 1/2(B + C)) =(tan 1/2(B - C)) (b + c)
(b - c) (tan 1/2(B + C)) tan 1/2(B - C)b + c
tan 1/2(B - C) = 3 tan 77 5017
Rounding the angle to 80° for use with the giventable, the following logarithmic equation can bewritten:
log tan 1/2(B - C) = log 3 + log tan 80° - log 17
then
log 3 = 10. 4771 - 10
log ts.n 80° = 10. 7537 - 10
log (3 x tan 80°) = 21. 2308 - 20
log 17 = 11.2304 - 10
log tan 1/2(B - C) = 10. 0004 - 10
log tan 1/2(B - C) = O. 0004
1/2(B - C) = 45°
B - C = 90°
(+)
(-)
There are now two equations for B and C,(B + C) and (B - C), these are solved simulta-neously to find B and C.
First the two are added to find B
B + C = 155°
B - C = 90°
28 = 240°
B = 120°
Next, subtract the two to find C
B + C = 155°
-B + C = -90°
2C = 65°
C = 32. 5°
To fit the given table round C to 350, then
A + B + C = 25° + 120° + 35° = 180°
In the final part of the solution, use the law ofsines to find side a.
73
78
asin A sin E
b sin Aa = sia B
log a = log b + log sin A - log sin B
log a = log 10 + log sin 25° - log sin 120°
log 10 = 11. 0000 - 10
log sin 25° = 9. 6260 - 10
log (b sin A) = 20. 6260 - 20
log sin B = 9. 9375 - 10
log a = 10. 6885 - 10
log a = O. 6885
a = 4. 88
(+ )
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
There are six forms of the law of tangents,two of which have been shown. The remainingfour are formed, as previously stated, by re-placing the corresponding letters inthe formula.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Use logarithms andthe law of tangents to solve the triangles de-scribed by the given data.
1. a = 4, b = 3, C = 60°2. a = 0.0316, b = 0.0132, C = 500ANSWERS:1. A = 70°, B = 50°, c = 3.692. A = 105°, B = 25°, c = 0.0239
CASE 2
The logarithmic solution of oblique triangleswhen three sides are given involves formulasderived from the law of cosines. These formulasare called half-angle formulas and, in these solu-tions, are expressed in terms of the semiperi-meter of the triangle and the radius of a circleinscribed in the triangle.
The half-angle formulas expressed in $(semiperimeter) and r (radius of inscribed cir-cles) are, not presented in this course. Thelogarithmic solutions of oblique triangles inthiscourse are limited to cases 1, 3, and 4.
AREA FORMULA
In this section two formulas for finding thearea of oblique triangles are given. Theseformulas are used to find the area of trianglesin cases 1 and 3 from the given parts.
Recall from plane geometry that the area ofa triangle is found by the formula
A 4bhwhere b is any side of the triangle and h is thealtitude drawn to that side. To avoid confusionbetween A for area and A as an angle in the tri-angle the word "area* will be used inthis chap-ter. Then the formula is stated as
1area = bh
Reference to figure 5-3 (B) shows that thelength of the altitude h can be found by
h = c sin A
79'74
Substituting this value of h in the area formularesults in
1area = bc sin A
bc sin Aarea - 2
This area formula is stated in words asfollows:the area of a triangle is equal to one-half theproduct of two sides and the sine of the anglebetween them. This fornrila is used for solutionsof triangles when two sides and the included angleare given.
A second formula for area can be derivedfrom the law of sines and the previous formula.From the law of sines
sin B sin C
cb sin B- sin C
Substituting this value of b in the area formula
results in
bc sin Aarea =
area = (c sin 13) (c sin A)sin C, 2
c2 sin a sinarea = 2 sin C
T his formula can be used to solve triangles whentwo angles and one side are given since, whentwo angles are given, the third angle can be founddirectly. It can be seen that the area formulascan be easily adapted to logarithmic solutions,as well as to normal solutions.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Derive the areaformulas most applicable when the following aregiven.
1. a, b, CP. a, c, B3. A, C, b4. B C. a
1. area =ab sin C-2-
Chapter 5:.:41.-iQUE TRIANGLES
2. area - ac sin B2
b2 sin A sin C3. area 2 sin B
4. area - a2 sin B sin C2 sin A
EXAMPLE: Find the area of triangle ABCwhen A = 40°, b = 13, and c = 9.
SOLUTION: Use the first area formulagiven in this section:
area
area
bc sin A2
13 x 9 x sin 400
13 x 9 x 0.64279area= 2
area = 37.6 (square units)
This formula (as well as the other areaformula) adapts easily to logarithmic solutions.In a logarithmic solution the formula
area - bc sin A2
is written
log area = log b + log c + log sin A - log 2
EXAMPLE: Find the area of triangle ABCwhen A = 25°, B = 105°, c = 12.
SOLUTION: First determine angle C.
C = 180° - (A + B)
C = 180° - 130°
C = 50°
then apply the area formula
2 A sin Bsin
area = 111212 sin 25° sin 105°1 2 sin 50°
area - 144 x 0.42262 x 0.965932 x 0.76604
(1)
With the specific values involved in this prob-lem, a logarithmic solution should simplify thearithmetical process. To write the logarithmicequation go back to equation (1). Recall that thelogarithm of 124 is 2 log 12 and that sin (180° -
105°) = sin 75° and write the equation as
log area = 2 log 12 + log sin 25°
+ log sin 75° - (log 2 + log 50°)
2 log 12 = 2.1584
log sin 25° = 9.6260 - 10
log sin 75° = 9.9849 - 10 add
log (c2 sin A sin B) = 21.7693 - 20
log (c2 sin A sin B) = 11.7693 - 10
andlog 2 = 0.3010
log sin 50° = 9.8843 - 10 add
log (2 sin C) = 10.1853 - 10
subtracting these sums
log (c2 sin A sin B) = 11.7693 - 10
log (2 sin C) = 10.1853 - 10 subtract
log area = 1.5840
area = 38.37
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Find the area ofthe triangles described by the given data.
1. Find the area of the triangle given in the
second example problem (A = 25°, B = 105°,
c = 12), without using logarithms.
So'15
MATEMATICS, VOLUME 2
2. A = 25°, B = 450, c = 24 ANSWERS1. 38. 369
3. A = 42°, b = 4. 4, c = 3 2. 91. 63. 4. 4
4. A = 120°, b = 8, c = 12 4. 41.5
CHAPTER 6
VECTORS
Vector quantities, which we will now concernourselves with, are different from scalar quan-tities. Navigation involves the use of vectorquantities, surveyors use vectors in their work,as do structural engineers, and electrical andelectronic technicians. Many of the applica-tions of electricity and electronics involve theuse of vector quantities.
DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
In this section we will make a distinctionbetween a scalar quantity and a vectbr. We
will also define the coordinate systems used inworking with vectors and show some of thesymbols used.
SCALARS
Heretofore, we have been concerned withscalar quantities, which are measurements orquantities having only magnitude, in the appro-priate units. Examples of scalar quantitiesare: 10 pounds, 4 miles, 17 feet, and 28.2pounds per square inch.
VECTORS
A vector, in contrast to a scalar, has di-rection as well as magnitude. Examples ofvector quantities are: 6 miles due north, 9
blocks toward the west, and 250 knots at 30°.Notice that the vector quantities have both amagnitude and a direction.
1
SYMBOLS
The letters A, B, C, and D have been pre-viously used to represent scalar quantities inalgebra. In vector algebra, a notation is usedto denote scalar symbols in relation to vectorymbolo. A dash over the letters, for exaMple
A and 15, denotes vectors.
A vector can conveniently be representedby a straight line. The length of this straightline represents the magnitude, and its positionin space represeats the direction of the vectorquantity. In figure 6-1 the vefctors A , B, and C.
are equal because they have the samemagnitudeand direction and vector 15 is not equal to
either vector X, or C because although ithas the same magnitude it does not have thesame direction.
In navigational problems, a coordinate sys-tem is used in which the compass points serveas indicators of direction, and magnitude isgiven by lengths of the lines. For example,using the origin of the coordinate system asthe point of departure from the harbor, figtire6-2 represents two ships heading out to sea.Vector represents a ship bearing 450 fromdue north at a speed of 20 knots, and vectorrepresents a ship bearing 60° from due northat a speed of 25 knot% Notice that directionsin this coordinate system are measured clock-wise from due north.
When we use the trigonometric system indesignating angles or giving a direction to amagnitude we use the Cartesian coordinatesystem which includes the abscissa (measure-ment on the X axis) and the ordinate (measure-ment on the Y axis). Directions in this coordi-nate system are measured counterclockwisefrom the X axis. For example, using the originof the coordinate system as the point of de-parture from the harbor, figure 6-3 representsa ship heading out to sea bearing 30° at a speedof 25 knots. This is represented by vector laand is the same representation as vector B infigure 6-2 but is shown on a different coordi-nate system.
Angle measurements will be referencedfrom the vertical in the compass coordinatesystem and will be referenced from the hori-zontal in the Cartesian coordinate system.
77
82
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 6-1.Comparison of vectors.
Figure 6=2.Compass coordinate system.
COMBINING VECTORS
If a vector A represents the displacementof a particle or the force acting on the particle,it is convenient to let -A represent the dis-placement of a particle in the opposite direc-tion or to rffresent a force in the directionopposite to A. Thus, vectors A and -A areequal in magnitude but are opposite in direc-tion.
0(ORIGIN)
(ORDINATE)
25 KNOTS
X ( ABSCISSA)
Figure 6-3.Cartesian coordinate system.
ADDITION
The resultant of two vectors acting in thesame direction or acting in opposite directionsis the algebraic sum of their magnitudes. Anexample of this is walking due east four stepsand then walking due west one step. The re-sultant is three steps due east. If one travelsfrom his home to his place of employment hemay have several choices for his route. Wewill assume two of these routes as indicated infigure 6-4. He ?nay move east to point A thennorth to point B or he may move north topoint C then east to point B. In either case hearrives at his place of employment. If weassume his travel in both directions as forcesacting on him, we can call the direct distancefrom home to place of employment, in figure6-4, the RESULTANT of these two forces andrefer to it as vector W. Notice that eitherpath taken results in vector R.
We may now state that ol -I- AB = 4-10
CB = W. The symbol (4) is used to indicatethat vector ra is added vectorially to vectorX. From this it is apparent that vectors maybe added in either order with the same results.
If several vectors A, IN, and W are to beresolved into components, lc, Tat A, and Yr,Vat Yb are used to denote these components,as figure 6-5 portrays.
In the addition of vectors, the initial pointof vector Ti must be placed directly on the
78
Chapter 6VECTORS
ers.0 A E
PLACEOFEMPLOYMENT
terminal point of vector A, and so on for anynumber of vectors. Then vector whichjoins the initial point of vector A with theterminal point of the last vector /It is theresult of adding vectors A and and C throughN vectorially. Hence A 4-e 1§. r 4-*
N= W.. Here it may be shown that thecommutative and associative principles apply,which means that it makes no difference whichvector is used first and which order is followedwhen adding vectors. (The commutative andassociative laws may be reviewed in Mathe-matics, Vol. 1, NavPers 10069-C.)
SUBTRACTION
Subtracting a vector is defined as adding anegative vector:
It follows that if
X-4-13=0Then
Figure e-4.Right angle vectors. =
IMMO OM 1. MEM IMOD IMIN
Vr ifb
r ILD.M.NoMIMO =No imM i MOM
Figure 6-5.Components of vectors.
84 79
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
A careful study of figure e-4 will show thatif
Then
VECTOR SOLUTIONS
In the previous sections we agreed that:
X-I-- . #N=RApproaching this relation from a graphicalstandpoint, one can understand exactly whatthis means.
GRAPHICAL
As an example of the graphical method, sixvectors may be used to represent the pathtaken by a man looking for a lost golf ball. Hestands at position Po, hits the ball and doesnot notice where the ball went. Vectors Athrough r in figure 6-6 represent the path hetakes in an attempt to find the ball. Pf is theposition where the ball is found and we willcall it the termination point. Figure 6-7 showsanother of the many different arrangements ofthe six vectors. The dotted lines from Po to Ptindicate the resultant vector, and this resultanthas the same magnitude and direction regard-less of the arrangement of the vectors we use.This method of graphically solving vector
Figure 6-6.Polygon example number 1.
Figure 6-7.--Polygon example number 2.
problems is called the polygon method, and isused in civil engineering problems involvingstructures such as bridges; it is also, used inlogic problems of everyday living.
If two vectors are to be resolved into asingle resultant, this may be done graphicallyby the parallelogram method. Given any twovectors A and g lying in a plane (fig. 6-8)form a parallelogram by projecting t onto W,initial point to terminal point, and A onto B,initial point to terminal point, thus forming'a parallelogram which has as a diagonal theresultant vector
This process can be reversed in order tofind the components of a vector as shown infigure 6-9. Vector N is given and the problemis to find the rectangular components of this
80
Figure 6-8.Parallelogram example 1.
Chapter 6VECTORS
Fikure 6-9.Parallelogram example 2.
A
x 901b
vector. In this case the parallelogram is arectangle and the projections of Ti on the Xaxis and the Y axis show the components.Generally, the graphical method of resolvingvectors will be used to check the validity of ananalytical method of solution.
ANALYTICAL
The trigonometric functions are used tosolve vector problems analytically.
EXAMPLE: Find the resultant of twovectors at right angles to each other. Vector
represents 90 pounds of force and vector 13represents 60 pounds of force.
SOLUTION: Vector A" is directed verticallyand B lies on the reference line, as shown infigure 6-10. In this case the angle 6' is un-known and the resultant is required. ThePythagorean theorem is sufficient to solve forthe magnitude of the resultant. This is thecase only if we establish a right triangle fromour vector and its components.
Since the magnitude of If is a scalar quan-tity we will designate it by r. As you recallfrom Mathematics, Vol. 1, NavPers 10069-C,the Pythagorean tiworem of right trianglesstates: x2 + = r4. We apply this to ourfigure and find that:
r2= (90)2 + (60)2
r = V1 (90)2 + (60)2
= Iii,7oo
= 108.2 pounds
Figure 6-10.--Vector sum.
If we desire the angle 8 of the resultantvector IT we may use the trigonometric functionfor the tangent of an angle; that is,
Then,
tan 0 = ix = = 1.50000
= 56° 19'
EXAMPLE: Resolve the vector IT into itscomponents. In figure 6-11, If represents 50mph at 30°. We are to find the Yr and Yrcomponents.
SOLUTION: Recalling that the trigonometricfunctions for sin 8 and cos 8 are:
and
sin 8 = Z
XCOB 8 = r
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
mIn . ow, mml as, ens wil
30°
Xr
Figure 6-11.Vector resolution.
I
I
we use these and find that
then
and
then
sin 300 = -Y-50
50 sin 300 = yy = 25 mph
xcos 30° = 50
50 cos 30° = xx = 43.3 mph
Vector components acting in the same direc-tion or in opposite directions may be added orsubtracted algebraically. Vector componentsin the form li = Yr + Yr fulfill this statement.
EXAMPLE: Add the following vectors givenby their rectangular components.
SOLUTION:
If
Then
13- = ri - T
X + li = IT + I
Observe that the first component of eachpair is the X component, and the second is theY component. If vector X is to be added to W,the X component of the resultant is the sum of
the IC components of A and S. The samereasoning applies to the Y components. Noteespecially that an X component is never addedto a Y component or vice versa.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Add the followingre :tangular form vectors.
1. n - 3 and I + 72. 5:5-6 + ER and 1:121 + Ur3. ir.T + CS and U-.72. - 3-.14. 11 2- + SW and 78- - 111
ANSWERS:
1. IF - 22. KIT + 'KO3. TB. + ET4.EXAMPLE: Subtract the following vectors
given by their rectangular components.
If
X = 47 + IT
Then subtract X from rt.
Thus
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Subtraez the fol-lowing rectangular form vectors.
1. Subtract KY + 17. from Kr +2. Subtract FT + El from WS - 233. Subtract 22:2 - 3:2 from 13:2 + 113:24. Subtract -ta + U from -IT - F.-6
ANSWERS:
1. Kg + rf2. 46- - g'S3. -TT + 111:54. TIT ''. 33The notation up to this point has involved
the regular rectangular coordinates. The formW = X. + Yr implies that a number of hori-zontal units and a number of vertical unitscombine to determine the end point of a vector.A second method commonly used describesa vector in terms of polar coordinates.
Chapter 6VECTORS
POLAR COORDINATES
If the length of the vector is known, allthat is required to locate the vector is theangle through which it has been rotated. Mea-sured from the reference line, the notationused is
= r
where r is the magnitude and 9 defines thedirection. Thus, r is a scalar quantity. Forinstance, a vector 10 units long at 30° wouldbe written 10/300.
If Yr and Yr are known, the scalar quantityr can be found by using the Pythagoreantheorem:
r = (xr)2 (yr)2
The angle can then be found by using the tan-gent, thus:
Yrtan 0 = --
x
Now we have a method whereby we can changefrom the rectangular form to the polar coordi-nate form when working with vectors.
EXAMPLE: Change the vector 1. + T intopolar form. (NOTE: xr is always placed first.)
SOLUTION:
If
Then
r = = 5
4tan 9 = -5 . 1.33333
9 = 53° 8'
R = "a +
= 5/ 530 8'
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Change the rec-tangular form into polar form,
1. T +2.
83
S. ,PY + T4. ro 2:11ANSWERS:1. 2.24/63° 26'2. 10/36° 52'3. 2/30°4. 18.5/8° 42'This method may be reversed and it is
possible to change a vector from polar torectangular coordinates.
EXAMPLE: Change the vector 30/65° intorectangular form.
SOLUTION:
If
R = 30/65°
= r sin 0
Then
r = 30 sin 650
= 27.18930
And
= 30 cos 65°
Xr = r cos 0
= 12.67860
Thus
R = 12. 68 + WTI
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Change the polarform to rectangular form.
1. 5/25°2. 83/72°3. 20/63°4. 8.2/31° 23'ANSWERS:1. T:51" + ITT2. 2376- + 1133. 175- + 17.824. 7.00 + 4:21-If we are to combine two vectors, proceed
as follows:EXAMPLE: Find the resultant of two vec-
tors X and IN if X = 12/102° and 13 = 5/12° infigure 6-12.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
l's Y'r 12ta.n 0 = =5
= 2 40000I x't r1
Therefore/i , 0 = 67° 23'
%
%
%
r12 #
%
%' Now, the direction of the resultant is 67° 23'I
,% from the X' axis but the X' axis is 12° from
% the X axis so the resultant 13 67° 23' + 12° or% 790 23' from the X axis.
%
% a .................Ior % - X
---,5
12°
Figure 6-12.A new reference.
Another approach to this problem is byX resolving each of our vectors into their X axis
and Y axis components and then adding thesecomponents algebraically. We have 5/126whichresolves into the following (fig. 6-13):
SOLUTION: In this problem we do not haveeither vector to coincide with the X axis or theY axis. We may choose a new frame of refer-ence, that is, X' and Y' to determine themagnitude of the resultant. Because K differsin direction by 90° from II, we may still usethe properties of right triangles.
Therefore
And
sin 0 = Z
= Z5
= 5 sin 12°
= 5(0. 20791)
= 1. 03955
Therefore r2 = (12)2 + (5)2 COS 0 = r
And r = (12)2 + (5)2 =
= Therefore
= 13 i = 5 cos 12°
We now have the magnitude of our resultant = 5(0. 97815)and need only to find its direction. As we are
=concerned with only two vectors we may ap- 4. 89075proach this probleth in either of two ways. Wemay find our direction from our new referencethen add the angle our new reference makeswith the standard X axis and Y axis reference. We have now determined the x axis andIn the new frame of reference we find the Y axis components of one of the vectors. Weresultant to be: will proceed to find the components of the
Chapter 6VECTORS
12°
Figure 6-13.Components for 5/12°.
other vector, 12/102°, as shown in figure6-14. The Y axis component is as follows:
If
Then
And, since
Then
Therefore
sin 8 =
sin 0 =12
= 12 sin 102°
sin (180° - 0) = sin
sin 102° = sin (180° - 780 )
= sin 78°
= 12 sin 78°
Figure 6-14.Components for 12/102°.
We now find the X axis components as follows:
If
Then
And, since
Then
= 12 cos 102°
cos (180° - 0) = - cos 8
cos 1020 = cos (180° - 78°)
Therefore
= - cos 78°
= 12(0.97815) = 12(-0.20791)
= 11.73780 = - 2.49492
85
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
We must now add the X axis componentsand the Y axis components of the two vectorsalgebraically as follows:
And
= 1.03955 + 11.73780
= 12.77735
= 4.89075 + (-2.49492)
= 2.39583
We now have r and "Ir in rectangular form andmay use the Pythagorean theorem to find theresultant in scalar measurement as shown infigure 6-15. This is as follows:
If
Then
r2 = (2. 39583)2 + (12. 77735)2
r = V 5.74030 + 163.25173
= V 168.99203
= 13
This is in agreement with the result found byusing the method of finding the scalar resultantof two vectors.
We must now find the direction of if, asfollows:
Since
Therefore
tan =
12. 777382. 39583
= 5. 33480
0 = 790 23'
This direction agrees with the direction foundwhen we used the first method of finding thedirection of the resultant of two vectors.
86
91
12.77735
2.39583
Figure 6-15.-Resultant of 7 and V.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Find the resultantof two vectors at right angles to each other.
1. X 5/0°13- = 10/90°
2. X = 7.5/90°13- = 6.3/180°
3. X = 131/185°= 00/275°
4. X = 65/45°F = 120/135°
ANSWERS:1. 11.18/63° 26'2. 9.8/130° 2'3. 144.1/209° 36'4. 136.5/106° 36'Let us examine a problem of adding several
vectors. We will use the method last de-scribed. The method may be used to find theaddition of any number of vectors. We willconsider a problem of the addition of severalvectors, as follows:
EXAMPLE: Find the resultant of the vec-tors in figure 6-16, analytically.
Chapter 6VECTORS
Figure 6-16.Resultant of several vectors.
SOLUTION: The vectors are given as fol-lows:
X is 50a°g is 100/30°
is 75/90°TY is 50/143° 8'
E is 70.7/2.15°is 55/315°
We will use the method of resolving eachvector into its component X axis and Y axiscoordinates. We set up the coordinate systemand place each vector so that it radiates fromthe origin. Then we find
ib x 100 cos 30°= 100(0. 86603)
= 86. 6
Tib = 100 sin 30°= 100(0. 50000)
= 50
= 75 cos 90°= 75(0)
= 0= 75 sin 90°= 75(1)
= 75
id = 50 cos 143° 8'= 50(-cos 36° 52')= 50(-0. 80003)
= - 40. 002= 50 sin 143° 8'= 50(sin 36° 52')= 50(0. 59995)
= 30
= 70. 7 cos 225°= 70. 7 (-cos 45°)= 70. 7 (-0. 70711)
= - 50
if
= 70. 7 sin 225°= 70. 7(-sin 45°)= 70. 7(-0. 77011)
= - 50
= 55 cos 315°= 55 (cos 45°)
ia = 50 cos 0° = 55 (O. 77011)
= 50(1) = 38. 9
= 50 = 55 sin 315°
-37a.= 50 sin 00 = 55(-sin 450)= 50(0) = 55(-0. 77011)
= 0 = - 38. 9
9287
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
We now collect the X axis components and the rectangular form vectors as complex numbers,Y axis components, as follows: as follows:
Vector it I-
X 50 0T3- 86. 6 50
0 75
-ff - 40 30E - 50 - 50it 38. 9 - 38. 9
Adding the X axis components and the Y axiscomponents, we find the magnitudes of r andY as follows:
If
Then
And
= 3 + 41
rt2 = 8 + 5i
3 + 418 + 51
= 85. 5 24 + 321
+ 15i + 2012
The magnitude of the resultant rt is
r = V (85.5)2 + (66.1)2
11680. 67
= 108
The direction is given by using the tangentfunction, as follows:
66. 1tan o =
= 0. 77309
Therefore
e = 370 42'
MULTIPLICATION
Before we discuss the mechanics of multi-plication and division of vectors, in polar form,we will multiply and divide vectors in rec-tangular form. This will serve as an intuitiveexplanation of why the mechanics of polar formmultiplication and division may be used.
As explained in Mathematics, Vol. 1, Nav-Pers 10069-C, we may express the following
Thus
24 + 471 + 2012= 24 + 471 + 20(4)= 4 + 47i
Mi);)We now find,_ as shown previously, the polarform of + ri which is as follows:
(4)2 (47)2
=
= 47.2And
47tan 0 = = 11. 75000
0 = 85° 8'Then
(Tti)(rt2) = 47. 2a52LE
In multiplying vectors i and if2, in polarform, we first change to polar form as follows:
If
88
93
Chapter CIVECTORS
ThenFt
1= 5/53° 8'
irt2 = 9. 43Zar
The multiplication of R1 and it2 results in aproduct which we will label 11192. The follow-ing rule will be used:
To multiply two vectors find the product ofthe scalar quantities and the sum of the anglesthrough which they have been rotated.
In our example
rt1
= 5/53° 8'
and
The product
1-12 = 9. 43/32°
of the scalar quantities is
(5)(9. 43) = 47. 2
the angles isand the sum of
(53° LE) + (32°) = 85° 8'
We now have the product of VI and if2 which isTh,2 and is equal to 47.2/85°- 8' This resultis the same as the result of multiplying thevectors in rectangular form and we intuitivelyunderstand why the mechanics of polar multi-plication may be used.
DIVISION
We will now divide vector by rI2 inrectangular form as follows:
If
Then
= 40 + 3
II1
= 40 + 301
= 8 + 51
89
94'
Thus
And
If
Then
(40 + 30i) (8 - 51)8 + 5i -877E
320 + 401 - 15012
64 2512
470 + 40189
470 40 4
42 89 ge.
= 5. 28 + O. 449i
= 5.28 + URI
r = 11-(-5:78)2 + (O. 440)2
= 07.7)= 5. 3
tan 8 = 0' 4495. 28
= O. 08504
0 = 4° 52'
In dividing vector by No in polar form,we first change to polar iorm as follows:
If
It1
= 475 + 'NU
Then
rt1
= 50/36° 52'
= 9. 43g2°_
In division of vectors in polar form we willuse the following rule:
To divide two vectors, in polar form, findthe quotient of their scalar quantities and thedifference between the angles through whicththey have been rotated.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Thus
rti 50/36° 521r2
=9. 431320
= 5. 3/4° 52'
This result is the same as the result obtainedby dividing vector R1 by R, in rectangularform, and we intuitively uncTerstand why themechanics of polar division may be used.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Multiply the fol-lowing vectors:
1. (5/100) (10a)2. (8.3Pr) (1.1/73°)3. (6.2/52°) (8/200°)4. (100/45°) (30/20°)
ANSWERS:
1. W/15°
2. 9.13/19°3. 49.052°
4. 3000/650
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Perform the indi-cated division:
64/24°1.
8/24°
300/24°2.
20/154°3.
5/142°
64/18°4.
16/27°
ANSWERS:
1. 8/_01
2. 15alt3. 124/12°4. 4/-9°
95
90
It follows that a vector can be raised to anyintegral or fractional power. To square avector, square the scalar quantity and multiplythe angle by 2,
EXAMPLE: Square the vector 8/32°
SOLUTION: (8/12° )2
= (8)2/320 (2)
= 64/64°
To cube a vector, cube the scalar quantityand multiply the angle by 3.
EXAMPLE: Cube the vector 3Zir
SOLUTION: (3/21° )3
(3)3/40 (3)
= 271120
To find the square root of a vector, extractthe square root of the scalar quantity anddivide the angle by 2.
EXAMPLE: Find the square root of thevector 16/70°.
SOLUTION: V 16110° or (16/70° )1/2
= V-176/70° 4 2
= 4Zg3
To find the cube root of a vector, extractthe cube root of the scalar quantity and dividethe angle by 3.
EXAMPLE: Filx1 the cube root of thevector 27133°.
SOLUTION: 34 27/33 6 or (27/330)1/3
3i-Fo3 4. 3
= 3/11°
Chapter 6VECTORS
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Perform the indi- ANSWERS:cated operations:
1. (10290)2 1. 100ZI0°
2. (4/10°)3 2. 134/300
3. (64Z9_02)1/2 3. 8/45°
4. (64/9(01/3 4. 4L3g0
CHAPTER 7
STATIC EQUILIBRIUM
Statics is a branch of physics that deals withbodies at rest. In this chapterwe will make useof the previous investigation ofvectors to estab-lish the mathematical basis necessary for anunderstanding of static equilibrium. Sinceforces acting upon bodies have magnitude anddirection, they may be represented by vectors.
DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
The following paragraphs include definitionsand terms which will be used in this chapter.The definitions used will clarify the meaningsof the discussions on static equilibrium.
EQUILIBRIUM
If a body undergoes no change in its motion,it is said to be in a state of equilibrium. We willdiscuss a body at rest as indicated by the termstatic equilibrium. Balanced forces may actupon a body in static equilibrium,but no motion,neither translatory nor rotary, will occur. Inorder for bodies to be in static equilibrium, twoconditions are required. These two conditionsare (1) the body must not have translator),motion, and (2) the body must not have rotarymotion,
TRANSLATION
Translation, as defined, is motion independ-ent of rotation. Attention is called to the factthat translation involves magnitude and directionof motion and hence can be describedby vectors.
ROTATION
Rotation, as defined, is the turning motion ofa body, such as a wheel turning. .Rotation isindependent of translation.
92
TRANSLATIONAL EQUILIBRIUM
If a body at rest is acted upon by an un-balanced force, it will be set into motion. Thismotion is called translation. All particles ofthe moving body will have at any instant the samevelocity and direction of motion. Two forcesacting in the same line upon a body must beequal in magnitude, but opposite in direction,if the body is to remain in equilibrium. Wewill consider our translations to be confinedto the XY plane.
FIRST CONDITION
The first condition of equilibrium may bestated as follows: For a particle to be in equi-librium the sum of the vectors (forces) actingin any direction upon that particle must equalzero.
In figure 7-1, an iron block is resting on atable. The weigt.t of the block isdirected down-ward; thus the table must exert a force equal andopposite to the weight of this iron block. Theblock has weight, W, and the table exerts apush, P, upward against the block. Since thebodies are in equilibrium, there can be no un-balanced force. Thus,
WrPandW=PThe weight of the block can be represented
by a vector because we know the force anddirection exerted by the weight. The magnitudeand direction of the push (P) by the table isalso known, and it can be represented by a vec-tor. The vectors W and 7 are shown in figure7-1. The weight is in equilibrium because thesum of the vectors acting upon it is equal tozero. We call these two forces parallel con-current forces. We will also call P the equi-librant of W. ft is relatively easy to find theequilibrant of two or more vectors which are
Chapter 7STATIC EQUILIBRIUM
acting upon the same point. We first find theresultant of the vectors. The equilibrant ofthe resultant will have the same magnitude lqutwill be opposite in direction. In figure 7-2 theresultant of X and fl is W. The magnitude of 7is 18 and the direction is 56°18'. The magnitudeof U, the equilibrant of -1:11.is 18 and the directionis 236°18'. The sum of P and is zero; there-fore, a point 0 is in equilibrium.
Figure 7-1.Table and weight.
Figure 7-2.The equilibrant.
93
In figure 7-2, the vectors X and arecalled nonparallel concurrent vectors. Allvectors can be resolved into horizontal and vert-ical components. Since the sum of all forcesacting on a particle must be equal to zero, tosatisfy the condition of equilibrium, we can saythat the sum of all vertical components mustequal zero, and the sum of all the horizontalcomponents must equal zero. The symbols forthis condition of equilibrium are:
EX = 0and
EV = 0The symbol z is the Greek letter, sigma,
and means °the sum of.. Thus, ZX equals0 means that the sum of the vectors along theX axis equals zero.
We may show graphically that a particle Pis in equilibrium while being acted upon byA, 11, C, 15, and r, as in figure 7-3, by drawinga polygon of forces. If the polygon of forces isclosed, there is no resultant force acting uponparticle 7, and that particle is in equilibrium.
We will now examine the condition of equilib-rium of a point which is acted uponby nonparal-lel concurrent forces.
EXAMPLE: We are to find the force of 7i, infigure 7-4, in order that point 0 will remain inequilibrium while being acted upon by IN and C.
SOLUTION: We are looking_for the equilib-rant of the resultant of 13 and U. The resultantof it and C, called V, is found as follows:
yb = 5 sin 30°
a 5(0.50000)
ic 2.5
rcb = 5 cos 30°
5(0.88603)
= 4.3
= 8 sin 270°
= 8(-1.00000)
= .8
= 8 cos 270°
= 8(0.00000)
= 0
S8
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 7-3.--Polygon of forces.
Figure 7-4.Resultant and equilibrant.
We now add the X axis components and theaxis components and find that
Y = 2.5 + (-8)
= -5.5
= 4.3 + 0
= 4.3
and
thus
and
-5.5tan = 4.3
= -1.27907
0 = 308° 1'
r = (4.3)2 4- (-5.5)2
=
= 6.9
therefore our resultant is
6.9/3080 I'and the equilibrant is
6.9Z128° V
In some cases we are given the vectors bythe problem and can easily find our solution.
EXAMPLE: A boy in a swing, as shown infigure 7-5, weighs 70 pounds and ispulledback-ward with a force of 30 pounds. Find the forcethe ropes exert on the swing; also find the anglethe ropes make with the horizontal axis.
SOLUTION: We must find the resultant of thetwo vectors given and then find the equilibrantof the resultant. This is done as follows:
Yia = -30
Tcb = 0
Sfb = -70and
thus
and
94
99
tan() = = 2.33333-30
0 z.. 246° 48'
002 (..70)2
=
=I 76.2
Chapter 7STATIC EQUILIBRIUM
therefore the resultant is76.2/246° 48'
and the equilibrant is76.2/660 48'
Thus the ropes exert a 76.2-pound66°48' on the swing.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Find the equilibrantof the following vectors.
1. 35/0.° and 60/90°
2, 7/35° and 9/125°3. 12/15° and 7/25°4. 9/55° and 10/100°
ANSWERS:
1. 69.4/239° 45'2. 11.4/267° 7'3. 18.7/198° 43'4. 17.5/257° 16'
FREE BODY DIAGRAMS
One of the distinct advantages of vectors isthat a vector may be substituted for the cableor member of a mechanism it is going to repre-sent. As seen in figure 7-6 vectors may besubstituted for the cables holding the weight W.
force at Starting at point 0, a vector representing thetension in cable MO can be drawn, and vectorsmay also be drawn for the tonsion in cables NOand OW. This will give us the forces actingon particle 0. Figure 7-6 (B) is called a freebody diagram, and vector A represents thetension in cable MO. Vectors B and W repre-sent the tensions in NO and WO, respectively.
Figure 7-5,Boy in a swing.
Figure 7-6. Single weight.
(81
Free body diagrams are very important inmechanics and the student should learn to drawthese diagrams with ease. In a free bodydiagram, a member of a mechanism is replacedby a vector representing the force in that mem-ber and acting in the same direction as themember. The student should pay particularattention to the magnitude of the vector whichrepresents a member of the mechanism. Infigure 7-6, notice that the vector representa-tion for MO is longer and the vector representa-tion for NO is shorter in the free body diagram(B) than they appear in the pictorial view (A).
We may use the free body diagram to graph-ically verify our mathematical solution to aproblem. (Refer again to fig. 7-5.) We find theboy in the swing to be in equilibrium and we willuse a free body diagram to verify this. Wedraw our diagram as shown in figure 7-7 (A)where vector r is the equilibrantof the resultant.We draw the vectors W, IT, and C., initial pointto terminal point, as shown in figure 7-7 (B).If the vectors form a closed loop, we have thesum of the vectors equal to zero and havepresent a state of equilibrium.
95
log
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
1111.10 .7§ X
(8 )
Figure 7-7.Closed loop.We have discussed parallel concurrent forces
and nonparallel concurrent forces. In the follow-ing paragraphs we will discuss noncurrent paral-lel forces, remembering that we are still underthe requirements for the first condition ofequilibrium.
96
In figure 7-8 (A), we find a board balancedon and supported by a fulcrum. Draw the freebody diagram as shown infigure 7-8 (B). Assumethe board weighs so little that it is insignifi-cant. Consider forces in a downward directionto be negative (-) and those upward to bepositive (+). For equlibrium,'we must haveZX equal to 0 and zY equal to 0. We have no Xaxis components, therefore zX equals 0. TheZY equals 0 because we have a state of equi-librium. Therefore
-X-15+ U=oA= 42 lbs
= 18 1 b s
= 60 lbs
42 POUNDS
and
therefore
18 POUNDS
Fl
( A)
0
B)
Figure 7-8. Parallel nonconcurrent forces.
Chapter 7STATIC EQUILIBRIUM
Figure 7-9.Free body practice problems.
97
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Draw the iree bodydiagrams for the member indicated inthe follow-ing figures (emphasize direction and not magni-tude):
1. Figure '7-9 (A) (Bar)2. Figure 7-9 (B) (Boom)3. Figure 7-9 (C) (Bar)4. Figure 7-9 (D) (Point 0)ANSWERS:1. Figure 7-10 (A) 3. Figure 7-10 (C)2. Figure 7-10 (B) 4. Figure 7-10 (D)
CABLES
gz/1:6)%o
1 WEIGHT],/
Wi W2
fe'
Figure 7-10.Free body answers.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(0)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
ROTATIONAL EQUILIBRIUM
The first condition of equilibrium guaranteedthat there would be only translatory motion. Itwas stated that there was a distinction betweenthe motion of translation and rotation. Thesecond condition of equilibrium concerns theforces tending to rotate a body.
SECOND. CONDITION
Figure 7-11 shows a body acted upon by twoequal and opposite forces, F1 and F2. The sumof the forces in the horizontal direction equalszero, and there is no translatory motion. It isclear that there will be rotation of the body.These two equal and opposite forces not actingalong the same line constitute a couple and causea moment to be produced. The term couple isdefined as two equal forces acting on a body butin opposite directions and not along the sameline. For a body acted upon by a couple toremain in equilibrium, it must be acted upon byanother couple equal in magnitude but oppositein direction.
The magnitude of a couple is the perpendic-ular distance between the forces multiplied byone of the forces. This product is called themoment of the couple. We willuse M to indicatea moment and we can say, to fulfill the condi-tions of equilibrium, that EM equals 0. That is,the sum of all the moments acting upon a bodymust equal zero to maintain equilibrium. Clock-wise moments, such as in figure 7-11, arepositive and counterclockwise moments arenegative. Our statement that the sum of all themoments acting upon a body must be zero, thatis, IM equals 0, is called the second conditionfor equilibrium.
Assume that the body shown in figure 7-11will rotate about a point halfway between thetwo forces. A moment, defined as a force actingon a lever arm L, is present for both of theforces. The moment acting onthebody in figure7-11 will be
Since
then
F1 (4) + F2 (4)
F1
= F2
M = F1 (2) + F1 (t)= F
1L
If it were assumed that the body were to rotateabout the point upon which F2 acted, then thelever arm would be L for F1 and zero for F2.And again M equals F1L. Hence, themoment ofa couple is one of the forces multiplied by thedistance between them. The definition formoment of a couple holds. The dimensions ofa moment will include a distance as well as aforce. The effect of a force upon the rotationis the perpendicular distance from the rotationpoint to the line of action of the force. In theEnglish system the most used term is foot-pounds.
EXAMPLE: Calculate the momentof a coupleconsisting of two forces, F1 (equal to 20 pounds)and F2 (equal to 20 pounds), acting directlyopposite to each other at a distance of 3 feet.The moment of this couple is M equals FL or
M = (20)(3) = 60 ft-lb
Notice that in this example there is nobalance of moments; that is, ZM does not equal0, and the conditions for equilibrium are not met.
We now put to use the first and second con-ditions for equilibrium. That is,
EY = 0
EX = 0
z M =
98
103
Chapter 7STATIC EQUILIBRIUM
In figure 7-12 (A) we have aboardbalanced on afulcrum and we are to find the weightW2 and theforce F on the fulcrum if W1 equals 12 poundsand the distances are as shown. There are nohorizontal forces; therefore EX equals 0. Wedraw the free body diagram as shown in figure7-12 (B) and find the solution as follows:If
then
Therefore
Thus
and
W1
= 12 lb
L1 = 2 ft
W2 = unknown
L2 = 8 ft
F = unknown
LIW1 = L2W2
(12 lb) (2 ft)
= 24 ft-lb
L2W2 = 24 ft-lb
(8 ft) (W2) = 24 ft-lb
W2 = 3 lb
W1 + W2 - F = 0
Thus
A verythe second
F = 12 lb + 3 lb
= 15 lb
EY = 0useful theorem that originates fromcondition of .,1:luilibrium states that: If
12 lbs
a'
At
12 lbs
IF e'
(AI
Figure 7-12.Forces and moments.
three nonparallel forces acting upon abody pro-duce equilibrium, their lines of actionmust passthrough a common point. In other words, thethree conditions EX equals 0, EY equals 0, andEM equals 0 must be satisfied for equilibrium;and, in order for three nonparallel forces toproduce zero moment, the lines of action of theforces must pass through a common point, thushaving zero lever arm.
CENTER OF GRAVITY
The earth's gravitational field attracts eachparticle in a body and the weight of that body isregarded as a system of parallel forces actingupon each particle of the body. All of theseparallel forces can be replaced by a singleforce equal to their sum. The point of applica-tion of this single force is called the center ofgravity (or C. G.) of the body. For bodies ofsimple shape and uniform density, the C. G. isat the geometric center and can be found byinspection.
The C. G. of an irregularly shaped body canbe found by suspending the body from three dif-ferent points on the body. In each case the bodywill come to rest (equilibrium) with its C. G.directly beneath the point of suspension. Theintersection of any two of these lines will de-termine the C. G. The third line should alsopass through this intersection and thus may beused to check the result. Figi.re 7-13 (A)shows this simple system for finding the C. G.Figure 7-13 (B) shows that in some cases theC. G. may fall outside of the body.
99
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
(Al
Figure 7-13. Center of gravity.
APPLICATIONS
The greatest difficulty encountered in solvingproblems dealing with equilibrium is finding allof the forces acting upon a body. The use of afree body diagram will aid in eliminating thisdifficulty.
The procedure recommended for solvingstatic equilibrium problems is as follows:
1. Sketch the system, taking into account allknown facts, and assign symbols to all of theknowns and unknowns.
2. Select a member that involves one ormore of the unknowns and construct a free bodydiagram.
3. Write the equations obtained from EXequals 0, EY equals 0, and EM equals 0.
4. Solve these equations for the unknowns.5. Continue the process from one side of a
structure to the other side.EXAMPLE: Consider the ladder standing
against a building in figure 7-14 (A) and makingan angle of 600 with the ground. The ladder is16 feet long and weighs 50 pounds.
SOLUTION: We sketch the free body diagramas shown in figure 7-14 (B) and assign symbolsto the known and unknown forces. The arrowsindicate the directions of the forces and h and vrepresent horizontal and vertical components ofa force. The frictional force f holds the ladderfrom slipping, h is the horizontal force of thewall pushing against the ladder, and v is thevertical force which the ground exerts on theladder. We assume all the weight of the ladderto be located at the center of gravity and assignthe letter W to indicate this weight. The ladderis in a state of equilibrium and we have thefollowing:
100
LX = 0
LY = 0
LM = 0
therefore
f - h = 0W - v =0
We use trigonometry to find AB and BC, asfollows:
and
AB = r cos 0
= 16 cos 60°
= 16 (0.50000)
= 8
BC = r sin
= 16 sin 600
= 16 (0.86603)
= 13.85
Using similar triangles we find that W is locateddirectly above the midpoint of AB.
Figure 7-14.Ladder problem.
Next, take the moments about the bottomof the ladder and in that way the two forces(f and v) have zero lever arm and are eliminated.The moments (clockwise) are as follows:
Chapter 7--STATIC EQUILIBRIUM
LM =
= 4W - h(16 sin 60°)Notice that we used the perpendicular distancesfrom point A to where the forces were applied.
We now have equations as follows:
f - h = 0
W - v = 0
4W - h (16 sin 600) = 0
and substituting known values, then solving, wefind
and
and
W - v = 0
50 lb - v = 0v = 50 lb
4W - h (16 sin 60°) = 0
4 (50 lb) - h (13.85) = 0
h = 14.4 lb
f - h = 0
f - 14.4 = 0
f = 14.4 lbEXAMPLE: Determine the forces acting upon
the members of the A-type frame as shown infigure 7-15 (A). The horizontal surface is con-
(A)
sidered smooth and no horizontal force can beexerted on the legs of the frame. A weight of1,000 pounds hangs from the crossbar. Theframe is considered as having no weight.
SOLUTION: Draw the free body diagrams andassign symbols as shown in figures 7-15(B) and(C). Since the system is symmetrical, thereactions at A and C are equal, and each isequal to 500 pounds (each carries half the load).Thus, Av equals 500 pounds and Cy equals 500pounds. The forces Dv and Ev can be foundfrom the diagram of the crossbar in figure 7-15(B) by taking EM about D.Thus
EM = 3W Ev(6) = 0
= 3(1000) - Ev(6)
Ev = 500 lb
and from symmetry
Dv = 500 lb
These forces Ey and Dv are upward to opposethe weight on the bar; thus this member mustexert the same forces downward on the inclinedmember.
It is apparent that BC pushes upward againstAB. This force is unknown, but it does havea vertical and horizontal component.
Using the two conditions of equilibrium wefind the following:
z5e = Dh - Bh = 0
ZM = 5Av - 3Dv - (6 sin 60°)Dh = 0
--IP Eh61 .1
301Ov Ev I
1000Ibs 6111I 1
A v 5$
(0) (c)
Figure 7-15.A-type frame.
101
IC6
49Bh
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Thus
z17 = 500 + B - 500 = 0v
Bv = 0
LMb = 5(500 lb) - 3(500 lb) - 6(0.86603)
Dh = 192 pounds
fil = 192 lb - Bh = 0
Bh = 192 lb
From symmetry we find the following:
= 0
Eh = Dh = 192 pounds
E = D = 500 poundsv v
The magnitude and direction of the X axisand Y axis forces may be used tofind the forcesand their directions.
One important thing to remember whentaking ZM equal to 0 is to take the momentsabout some point that will eliminate one ormore of the unknowns. In the last example,the moment equation was taken about point Band eliminated the forces Bb and Bv. Themoment equations can be taken about any point
and more than one moment equation can betaken, if necessary.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Find the requiredinformation in the following:
1. Two boys pull a wagon, each with a forceof 35 pounds. The angle between the ropes onwhich the boys are pulling is 30°. What is theresultant pull on the wagon?
2. A large portrait weighs 100 pounds, andis supported by a wire 10 feet long which ishooked to the picture at two points 5 feet apart.Find the tension in the wire.
3. A 180-pound man is standing half-way upa 20-foot, 20-pound ladder. The bottom of theladder is 4 feet from the base of the verticalwall it is leaning against. Find the forces ex-erted on the ladder. (Use same symbols asshown in fig. 7-14 (B).)
4. A bar of uniform weight, 12 feet long andweighing 7 pounds, is supported by a fulcrumwhich is 4 feet from the left end. If a 10-poundweight is hung from the left end, find the weightneeded at the right end to hold the bar in equi-librium and find the force with which the ful-crum pushes against the bar.
ANSWERS:1. 67.6 pounds2. 57.8 pounds3. f = 20.4 pounds, h = 20.4 pounds, v = 200
pounds4. 3.25 pounds and 20.25 pounds
CHAPTER 8
TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
This is the final chapter in the section deal-ing directly with trigonometry and trigonometricrelationships. This chapter includes the basicidentities, formulas for additional identitiesinvolving multiples of an angle, and formulasfor identities which involve more than oneangle. Methods and examples of the use of theidentities in simplifying expressions are given,and practice problems in simplification areincluded.
Also included in the chapter are methodsfor solving equations involving trigonometricfunctions. In many cases, the verification orsimplification of an identity is an integral partof the solution of an equation. An additionaltopic considered in the chapter is the inversetrigonometric functions. Examples and prob-lems involving equations and the inverse func-tions are also given.
FUNDAMENTAL IDENTITIES
In earlier chapters it was shown that all ofthe trigonometric functions of an angle couldbe determined if one function or certain relatedinformation was given. This seems to indicatethat there are certain special relationshipsamong the functions. These relationships arecalled identities and are independent of anyparticular angle. Many of the identities whichwill be considered in this section were estab-lished in earlier chapters and will be used hereto change the form of an expression. In manyproblems, especially in calculus and otherbranches of mathematics, one particular methodof expressing a function is more useful thanany of the others. In these instances, theidentities are used to put the expression in thedesired form.
An equality which is true for all values ofan unknown is called an identity. Identities are
familiar in algebra, although they are notalways specifically identified as such. A fac-toring process such as
(x2 - 1) = (x 1) (x + 1)
involves expression of an identity since it istrue for all values of the variable. In trigo-nometric identities, the same situation musthold; that is, the equality must be true for allvalues of the variable.
Problems in identities are often given asequalities, and the identity is established bychanging either one or both sides of the equalityuntil both sides are the same. The fundamentalrule in proving identities is as follows: NEVERWORK ACROSS THE EQUALITY SIGN. Thealgebraic rules for cross multiplication arenever used. In this course all problems will besolved by working on only one side of theequality; that is, one side of the equality willbe reduced or expanded until it is identicalto the other side.
There are no hard ana fast steps or methodsto use in solving identities. However, thereare some basic procedures or hints which willnormally prove helpful in verification of' theidentities. Some of these hints are as follows:
1. Reduce the complex expressions to simpleexpressions, rather than Wilding up from asimpler to a more complex one.
2. When possible, change the expressionto one containing only sines and cosines.
3. If the expression contains fractions, itmay help to change the form of the fractions.
4. Factoring an expression may suggest asubsequent step.
5. Keep the other member of the equalityin mind. Since we are striving to change oneexpression to another, the form of the desiredexpression may suggest the steps to be taken.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
RECIPROCALS AND RATIOS
One group of identities was presented in partin chapter 4 of this course. Recall that
Since
and
CSC 0 = 1sin 0
csc 0 =y
the cosecant function can be written as
and simplified to
csc 9 = sin 01
There are six reciprocal identities, one foreach function. The numbers assigned these andsubsequent identities in this chapter do not con-stitute any rules as to order or precedence.They are used only to simplify the explanationof steps in the example problems. The reciprocalformulas follow directly from the definitions ofthe trigonometric functions
1sin 9 CIO-a
1co s 0 sec 01tan 0 = cot 01csc 9 = sin 0
sec 0 =co1s 0
1cot 0 = tan
There are also identities involving the sine,cosine, tangent, and cotangent of an angle whichare sometimes called ratio identities. Theseidentities also result directly from the functions,and one of these expresses the tangent in termsof the sine and cosine, as follows:
Since
and
sin 0tan 0 = cos 0
sin 0 =
n xcos cr = r
substituting these values in (7) gives
tan 0
which can be simplified to
tan 0 =
(7)
This is the definition of the tangent functiongiven in an earlier chapter. The followingidentity for the cotangent,
cos 0cot 0 - sin 0 (8)
can be shown to reduce identically to the defini-tion of the cotangent function in terms of x, y,and r. The reciprocal and ratio identities are
(1) used to simplify trigonometric expressions asshown in the following example problems.
(2) EXAMPLE: Simplify the expression
(3)sin 0 cos 0 tan 0
to an expression containing only the sine function.(4) SOLUTION: One method of accomplishing
this is to apply identity (7) to the given expres-(5) sion; then it becomes
(6) sin 0 cos 0 (sin 19)0cos
104
1C9
Chapter 8TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
or
sin 0 cos 0 sin 0cos 0
Simplifying the cos 0 terms in both the numera-tor and denominator of the fraction results in
or
sin 0 sin 91
sin20
This is the desired form and is identical, for allvalues of 8, to the original expression.
EXAMPLE: Use fundamental identities toverify the identity
ncsc + cot fa = 1 4" cossin 0
SOLUTION: Since the right-hand member ofthe identity contains sines and cosines, use (4)and (8) to change the left member to sines andcosines.Then
1 cos 0 1 + cossin e + sin e sin 0
Change the sum of fractions in the left memberto a single fraction as in the following
1 + cos 0 1 + cos 9sin 0 sin 0
and the identity is verifiedObserve that the right-hand member of the
identity was not altered throughout the entireprocess. This is in accordance with our statedintention of working on just one side of theequality sign.
If we desire to verify this identity by retain-ing the left member and operating on the rightmember, the following steps may be used.
1 + cos 9csc 0 + cot e =
Change the fraction in the right member to thesum of two fractions
csc 0 + cot 0 = 1 cossin e + sin e
105
Next, apply (4) and (8) to the right member
csc 0 + cot 0 = csc 9 + cot 0
and the identity is verified.
SQUARED RELATIONSHIPS
Another group cd fundamental identities in-volves the squares of the functions. These, insome texts are called Pythagorean identitiessince the Pythagorean théorern is used in theirdevelopment. Consider the Pythagorean theorem
X2 + y2 = r2
and divide both sides by r2,
x2 v2
2 4. r1
Write this in the form42 /1\ 2
cr7 kr)and consider that
and
If cos 0then
cos 0 = r
sin 0 =
1
x yand sin 0 are substituted for I.-
and IT
(cos 0)2 + (sin 9)2 = 1
This is rewritten as
cos2 + sin2 9 = 1
which is a fundamental squared or Pythagoreanidentity.
NOTE: The practice of writing .an expres-sion such as (sin 0)2 in the form sin4 0 is com-mon, and is the preferred method.
In the same manner, dividing both sides ofthe equation
110
2x + y2=
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
by x2 (where x is not equal to 0) gives EXAMPLE: Verify the identify2 2
1 + =2 2 FIET 1x x
or
sin 0 cos 0
2 21 + = (9
Then, since
and
substitution gives
or
tan 0 = Y
sec 0 = r
1 + (tan 0)2 = (sec 0)2
1 + tan2 0 = sec2 0
which is another fundamental identity.The identity
1 + cot2 0 = csc20
(10)
SOLUTION: Reduce the leftmember to equalthe right member. First, change each functionto sin( or cosines as follows:Apply (4) to the denominator of the firstfractionto obtain
sin 0 cos 9 ,1 + =
sin 0
Simplification of the first fraction gives
sin2 0 cos 0 = 11 sec 0
Applying (5) to the remaining fraction gives
sin2 0 + cos 0 - 11
C OS
Simplification gives
sin29 + cos2 0 = 1
(11) Then applying (9) to the left member results in
is derived in a similar manner. 1 = 1The three squared identities can be trans-
posed algebraically to other forms with the and the identity is verified.following results:
cos20 = 1 - sin20
sin2 0 = 1 - cos20
tan2 0 = sec20 - 1
sec20 - tan29 = 1
cot2 0 = csc 20 - 1
csc29 - cot2 0 = 1
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
EXAMPLE: Verify,2,
1 + COL QC
SOLUTION: As a firstterm cot22x.Then
cos22x
the following identity:1
sin 2x
step, apply (8) to the
1
sin22x sin22x
In addition to the fundamental identities, Combine the left term into a single fractionthere are many complicated identities involving with a denominator of sin22xthe trigonometric functions. In the majority ofcases, these identities can be proved by use . 2sin 2x + cos22xof the laws of algebra and the fundamental
=identities. sin22x sin 2x
106
Chapter 8TRIGONOVETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
Applying (9) to the numerator of the left membergives
1 1
2sin 2x sin 2x
and the identity is verified.PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Verify the follow-
ing identities:
= cos2x1
tan x + 11.
2. csc x - sin x = cos x cot xsina8
3. 1 - cos 01 + cos 0
4. cos 0 (sec 0 - cos 0) = sin20
5. tan2 x (1 - sin2 x) =
6. sin3x - 1 - cos2x
1
CSC X1
7. 2 + cot2x 2csc2x -
REDUCTION FORMULAS
cot2x
In chapter 4 of this course, reduction for-mulas were developed for dealing with anglesgreater than 900. These reduction formulas canbe combined into a general category of iden-tities which also includes the formulas developedin chapter 4 for dealing with cofunctions andcomplementary angles. The formulas, of thetYPe
or
sin(90° - 0) = cos 0
sec(180° + 0) = -sec 0
are listed in chapter 4 and the listings will notbe repeated in this chapter.
The formulas from chapter 4 will be used tosimplify expressions, in the same manner as theother identities, in the following examples.
EXAMPLE: Simplify the expression
sin(180° - 0)tan(90° - 0)cot(180° - 0)
into an expression containing functions of 0alone.
SOLUTION: From chapter 4, the followingformulas are chosen
sin(180° - 0) = sin 0
tan(90° - 0) = cot 0
cot(180° - 0) = -cot 0
Substitution of these values in the expression
sin(180° - 0)tan(90° - )cot(180° - 9)
results in the expression
sin 0 cot 0 (-cot 9)
Rewrite this in the form
-sin 0 cot 0 cot 0
and apply identity (8) to one of the cot 9 factors.Then,
107
cos-sin u111
COLS 0
results and this can be simplified to
-cos 0 cot 0
to complete the problem.EXAMPLE: Express the following as an ex-
pression containing the least possible number offunctions of 9.
sin(360° - )tan(90° - )csc
SOLUTION: The following formulas are givenin chapter 4:
and
sin(360° - 0 ) = sin(-0) = -sin 0
tan(90° - 0) = cot 0
Substitution of these values in the original ex-pression results in
-sin 0 cot 0 csc 0
Rewrite this as
-cot 0 sin 0 csc 0
1112
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
and apply identity (1) to the factor sin 0 to arrive orat
-cot 0 cst. 1csc 0
or-cot u
which is an expression in terms of one functionof 0.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Express the fol-lowing as expressions containing the least num-ber of functions of 0.
1. sin (1800
2. sin (180°
3. cos (360°
ANSWERS:
1. sin2O
2. tan 0
3. tan
- 0) sin 0
+ 0) sec (180° - 0)
- 0) cot (90° - 0) csc (90°
INVERSE TRIGONOMETRICFUNCTIONS
= tan lA
In the last notation we do not mean -1 to rep-resent an algebraic exponent and tan-1A does
1 1denote if we meant tan-1 equalstan A tan A°1we would have written (tan A)-1 equals tan A'
In this course, the preferred notation isarctan A.
PRINCIPAL VALUES
For any angle there is one and only one func-tion which corresponds to it; but to any value ofa trigonometric function, there are numerous
0) angles which will satisfy the value. For instance,
In this section we will discuss the definitionswhich apply to the inverse trigonometric func-tions along with the principal values of thesefunctions. Relations among these functions willbe examined by the use of examples andpracticeproblems.
DEFINITIONS
It is often convenient and useful to turn atrigonometric function around so that instead ofwriting
tan 9 = A
we write
0 = the angle whose tangent is A
Rather than write out the last statement, math-ematicians use either of the followingnotations:
0 = arctan A
0 = arctan 1can be written
tan 0 = 1but 1 is the tangent of many angles such as 450,225°, 405°, 585°, and others. Any angle 0 whichsatisfies (45° + n . 180°), where n is an integer,satisfies the expression
tan 0 = 1For any inverse trigonometric function there
are two angles less than 360° which satisfy it.Thus,
= arccos(0.500) refers to 600 and 300°0 = arccos(-0.500) refers to 120° and 240°
= arcsin(0.707) refers to 45° and 135°= arcsec(2.000) refers to 60° and 300°Since a given inverse trigonometric function
has many values, one of these values is selectedas its principal value.
To denote principal values, we will capitalizethe first letter in the name and we will use theranges for principal values as follows:
-900 5 Arcsin x -45 900
0° s Arccos x 180°
-90° < Arctan x < 90°-901' 5- Arccsc x 5 90°
0° s Arcsec x 5- 180°0° < Arccot x < 180°
108
113
Chapter 8-TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
All principal values lie between -90° and1800 proceeding counterclockwise form -90°.The principal values for positive numbers arebetween 00 and 900. For negative numbers,principal values of the inverse sine, tangent,and cosecant lie between -90° and 0°, whileprincipal values of the inverse cosine, cotangent,and secant lie between 900 and 180°. We willuse, for understanding, the examples whichfollow.
EXAMPLE: Find the principal value of theangle in the function
0 = Arccos (0.4472)
SOLUTION: Ush:F, the trigonometric tables,we find the angle whose cosine is 0.4472 is 63°26' or 296° 34'. We choose 63°26' as this is thefirst quadrant angle and is the principal value.We reject 296° 34' because it is afourth quadrantangle and the principal values for the Arccosfunction are limited to the first and secondquadrants.
EXAMPLE: Find the principal value of theangle in the function
0 Arccos (-0.5000)
SOLUTION: Using the trigonometric tables,we find the angle whose cosine is (-0.5000) is120° or 240°. We choose 120° because 240° is inthe third quadrant and does not satisfy the valuewe agreed on as the principal value for the cosinefunct ion.
EXAMPLE: Find the principal value of theangle in the function
Arctan 1
SOLUTION: The angle whose tangent is 1 is45° or 225°. We reject 225°, a third quadrantangle, and select 45° because it is a first quad-rant angle.
EXAMPLE: Find the principal value of theangle in the function
0 = Arcsec 2.236
SOLUTION: If the trigonometric tables donot list secant values, the function may bechanged by the following:Since
sec 0 cos1
then
1Arcsec (2.236) = Arccos
= Arccos (O. 4472)
and we find that the angle whose cosine is 0.4472is 63° 26' and the prindpal value of the anglewhose secant is 2.236 is 63° 261.
PROBLEMS: Find the principal values of theangles in the following functions:
1. 0 = Arccos (0.9135)2. 0 = Arcsin (0.8829)
3, e = Arctan (11.430)4. 0 = Arccot (-0.1169)5. 0 = Arcsec (1.0075)
6. 0 = Arctan (-0.1228)ANSWERS:
1. 24°
2. 62°
3. 85°
4. 96° 40'
5. 7°
6. -7°
In dealing with the inverse trigonometricfunctions, we may be presented the problem offinding the rincipal value of the function0 = Arcsin --9. In this case we could solve it
2as follows:Draw a right triangle as shown infigure 8-1.
This expression 4 can be rewritten as a- bythe following steps:
12611\ 2 1
-271
Recall that sin 0 equalsi. The triangle isa 45°-90° triangle as shown in Mathematics,Vol. 1, NavPers 10069-C. Now, the function
0 = Arcsin -§-
109
.114
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 8-1.-45° - 900 triangle.
becomes
10 = Arcsin
and we find that
= 4 5°
Use this same approach to answer the followingquestions.
4. 30°
5. 80°
6. 120°
If we are to find, using the principal values,the value of the expression Arctan - Arctan
in radians, we proceed as follows:
Arctan 45- = 60°
and
1Arctan = 300
thus
and
then
Arctan i3 - Arctan = 60° - 30°
10 radians180
30°019-) radians
= radians6
PROBLEMS:anglesthe twoematics,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Find the principal values of thein the following functions. (Hint; draw
special triangles as shown in Math-Vol. 1, NayPers 10069-C):
0(112
Arccos
PROBLEMS:give theradians:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ANSWERS:
1.
Using the principal values,values of the following expressions in
1 1Arcsin - Arccos
Arccos
_ =
9 = Arctan (a)
9 = Arccot (-4)
0 Arccos
Arcsin
Arctan 1 - Arctan
Arctan - Arcsin
r
=
0 Arcsin=
0 = Arccot
ANSWERS:
1. 45°
2. 60°
3. 150°
110.f .115
Chapter 8-TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
RELATIONS AMONGINVERSE FUNCTIONS
In order to understand the relations amongthe inverse functions, we will start by drawinga triangle. If 9 equals Arcsin x, we can writesin 9 equals x. We now draw a triangle whichcontains the angle whose sine is x and assumethe hypotenuse equal to one. The remainingside of the triangle will be, from the Pyth-agorean theorem, Nil - x2 . This is shown infigure 8-2.
Now, we can write all of the functions andinverse functions of the angle 9 in terms of thesides of the triangle as follows:
sin 9 = x, or 9 = Arcsin x
cos 9 = 1,17..--x2 , or 9 = Arccos d.----72
x___X___.577tan 9 -2
or-
9 = Arctan17/1. x N2
1 1csc 9 = ,- or 9 = Arccsc-xx1 1
sec 9 = , or 0 = ArcsecNIT=T12 if.77-c2
cot 0 = N/1 - x29 or 0 = /1 - x2
All of the inverse functions are equal to 9; there-fore, they are equal to each other. We will usethis type of analysis to solve a few problems.
EXAMPLE: Using principal values, find1r3the tangent of the angle whose sine is -2-; that is,
tan Arcsin =
SOLUTIOI:rk Draw the trianglethe Arcsin 2 as shown in figureremaining side will be given by
X = 22 (15)2
Using the tangent ratio we havetan 9 = 15
and
= 60°
containing
8-3. The
Figure 8-2.-Triangle containing Arcsin x.
EXAMPLE: Using principal values find
4sin (Arccos 3 - Arcsin -5)
SOLUTION: Draw the triangle as shown infigure 8-4. The missing side of the triangle
3containing Arccos -5- is given by
.152 32 = 16 = 44Notice that this triangle also contains Arcsin-5-,
so that
3 4Arccos 5 = Arcsin -5
and the original expression becomes
sin 0°
which is zero.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:lowing expressions:
1. sin (Arccos
2. tan (Arcsin 1+0
3. cot (Arcsin
4. sec (Arctan -2151-)x 1
5. cos (Arc sin 1X" 1
111
.1116
Evaluate the fol-
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 8-3. Triangle containing Arcsin --VI2-.
ANSWERS:
41. 512.
1/Zi77---i3. x
422E4 - 2x2 + 14.x2 - 11
xfx2 - 2x2 - 1
FORMULAS
In this section we will discuss the trigono-metric formulas for addition and subtractionof angles, half angles, double angles, and trans-cendental functions. We will use examples forbetter understanding and in some instances wewill derive formulas.
112
Figure 8-4.Triangle containing Arccos 4.
ADDITION AND SUB-TRACTION FORMULAS
Four formulas express the sine or cosine ofthe sum and difference of two angles as afunction of the sines and cosines of the singleangles. They are very important because theyare the basis for much of trigonometric analysis.From the following four formulas we may deriveall of the formulas in the following sections:
sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B (1)
cos (A + B) = cos A cos B - sin A sin B (2)
sin (A - B) = sin A cos B - cos A sin B (3)
cos (A - B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B (4)
We will prove these four formulasfor angleswhose sum is less than 900. They are actuallytrue for all angles.
211
Chapter 8TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
In figure 8-5 we have indicated the sum oftwo angles, A and B. The hypotenuse of thetriangle containing angle B has been set equalto 1 so that the legs of this triangle have thevalues sin B and cos B.Thus,
1
and
PL-T = sin B
OL = cos B1
In the triangle containing angle A, we can seethat
Therefore,
and
Therefore
ON ONcos A = OL cos B
ON = cos A cos B
COSA MKS
SIN.A SIN.13
L
kl NSlN.A SINAI
Figure 8-6.--Sum of two angles, part two.
terms of the sine and cosine of angles A and B.First, let us prove that angle A is equal to angleA'.
Triangle OMF is similar to triangle PFL, andin A = NL
=NL angles A and A' are corresponding angles.s OL cos B Therefore, angle A equals angle A'. In triangle
PRL
NL = sin A cos Band
cos A' = PRsin B
Now, let us add a construction to the figure, PR = cos A' sin Bas in figure 8-6, and calculate more lines in
SIN. II
Also,
and
= cos A sin B (7)
sin A' = RLsin* B
RL = sin A' sin B
= sin A sin B (8)
SIN. A COS. 8 Furthermore,
RL = MN = sin A sin B (9)
Now, in triangle OMP we can writeCOS. A COS. El
Figure 8-5.--Sum of two angles, part one.
up s
PMsin (A + B) = -r- = PR + RM (10)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
but
RM = LN (11)
SO
sin(A+ B) = PR + LN = LN + PR (12)
Also
cos(A + B) = = ON - MN (13)
Substituting from equations (6) and (7) intoequation (12)
sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B (14)
Substituting from equations (5) and (9) intoequation (13)
cos(A + B) = cos A cos B - sin A sin B (15)
EXAMPLE: Use the addition formulas to findcos 75°.
SOLUTION: Use cos(A + B) equal to cos Acos B - sin A sin B. From this we write cos75° equals cos (450 + 30°) and substitute asfollows:
cos(45° + 300) = cos 45° cos 300 - sin 45° sin 30°
=(171)(1)- (4)(1)
(1)-4
The subtraction formulas can be derived fromthe addition formulas by substituting (-B) for(+B). Now, we have
sin(A - B) = sin A cos(-B) + cos A sin(-B) (16)
and
cos(A - B) = cos A cos(-B) - sin A sin (-8) (17)
But, the cosine of a negative angle is equalto the cosine of the angle. The sine of a negativeangle, however, is equal to minus the sine of theangle; that is,
cos(-B) = cos B
sin(-B) = -sin B
Substitution of these values in equations (16) and(17) gives
sin(A - B) = sin A cos B - cos A sin L (20)
and
cos(A - B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B (21)
EXAMPLE: Show that
cos 9 - sin 9sin (45° - 0) =
SOLUTION: Applying equation (20)
sin(45° - 0) = sin 45° cos 0 - cos 45° sin 0but
sin 45° = cos 450= 4
Substituting these values we havecos9 sin 0sin (45° - 0) = v2
cos 9 - sin 0Nri
We can use these four formulas, (14), (15),(20), and (21), to drive a number of other im-portant ones. One of these is the tangent ad-dition formula.
tan A + tan Btan (A + B) = (22)1 - tan A tan BIn order to prove this formula, proceed asfollows:
Taking the ratio of equalities (14) and (15),we have
sin(A + sin A cos B + cos A sin B(23)cos(A + B) cos A cos B - sin A sin B
Dividing both numerator and denominator ofthe right side of this equation by cos A cos Bwe have
sin Acos Bsin B
tan (A + B) = cos A1 sin A sin B
cos A cos B
which reduces to
tan A + tan Btan (A + 1 - tan A tan B
(24)
(25)
Chapter 5TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
Another important formula is the subtractionformula for the tangent. To find tan(A -replace B by (-13). Therefore,
tan A + tan(-B)tan(A - (26)1 - tan A tan(-B)tan A - tan B1 + tan A tan B (27)
EXAMPLE: Use subtraction formulas tofind tan 15°
SOLUTION: Use the special triangles aspreviously discussed.
and
tan 15° = tan(45° - 300)
tan 450 - tan 30°tan (45° - 300, 1 + tan 45° tan 30°
Irs
-1+(-1753-
Therefore,
= 4 + 2/5
= -(2 + 4-5)
= -3.732
tan .105° = -3.732
PROBLEMS: Use the addition and subtnc-tion formulas to find the values of the followingwithout tables:
1. sin 75°2. cos 15°3. tan 75°4. cot 165° Hint: recall cot(180 - 0) =
1-cot 0 and cot 0 =
ANSWERS:3 - +5775 1. 4
3+71 1773.3 - - 2.
+4
9 - 615 4-75 3. 2 +
= 2 -
EXAMPLE: Given tan 45° equals 1 and tan60° equals 15. Find the tangent of 105°
SOLUTION: Applying this knowledge to equa-tion (22), we have
1tan(45° + 60°) = tan 105° =
It is easy to evaluate a fraction in this form byrationalizing the denominator.
Multiply numerator and denominator by the In equations (14) and (15), if B equals A, we can
same numbers as are in the denominator but writeconnected by the opposite sign.
(1 + /5)2 1 + 215 + 3(1 - 1[1) (1 + V3) 1 - 3 cos 2A = cos A cos A - sin A sin A
14. ur 473 - 2
DOUBLE ANGLE FORMULAS
The addition formulas may be used to derivethe double angle formulas.
sin 2A = 2 sin A cos A
cos 2A = cos2A - sin2A
2 tan Atan 2A =tan" A
(28)
sin 2A = sin A cos A + cos A sin A (29)
115
120
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
from which we obtain
and, using
then
sin 2A = 2 sin A cos A
sin2 A + cos2 A = 1
cos 2A = cos2 A - sin2 A
The solutions of this equation may be obtainedby setting the factors equal to zero and making
(30) use of inverse trigonometric functions. We maywrite
cos 2x = 0
2x = Arccos 0
= 90°
x = 45°and
= 2 cos2 A - 1 (31) 2 sin 2x - 1 = 0= 1 - 2 sin2 A 1sin 2x =
Substituting A for B in equation (25), we obtain 12x = Arcsin2 tan Atan 2A (32) 2x = 30°, 150°
1 - tan2 A
EXAMPLE: Evaluate sin 15° cos 15°.SOLUTION: Since
and
then
2 sin A cos A = sin 2A
1sin A cos A = 2 sin 2ADividing all the angles in equation (31) by 2
we obtain
x = 1 5°, 750
The equation has three solutions, x equals 1 5°,45°, and 750 Notice that in writing down thevalues of the inverse functions, it was necessaryto include 1 50° since, when divided by 2, thisgives an angle in the first quadrant.HALF ANGLE FORMULAS
2 A 2 A-2-1 cos A = cos -2- - sin (33)sin 15° cos 15° = sin 2(15°)
Using equation (33), we can derive two useful1= sin 30° 2 Aformulas. Adding and subtracting sin on the
=GMright side of equation (33) we have
cos A = (cos2 4+ sin2 - 2 sin2 t (34)1
71- Observe that the methods necessary forsimplifying trigonometric identities and equa-EXAMPLE: Find the three fin::: quadrant tions often include operations which may at firstangles which satisfy the trigonometric equationappear to be pointless. In the preceding sentence
sin 4x = cos 2x we referred to gadding and subtracting sin2 t onthe right side of equation (33).° The advantage ofSOLUTION: From the double angle formulas, 2 Awe can write adding sin becomes obvious when we group it
A2 sin 2x cos 2x = cos 2x with cos2 T. The expression (-sin2-2A.) is added
or to the right-hand side along with (sin2 4)in
cos 2x(2 sin 2x - 1) = 0 order to avoid changing the overall value.
116
121
Chapter 8-TRIGONOMETRIC DENTITIZS AND EQUATIONS
The quantity in the parentheses in equation(34) is equal to 1, so
cos A = 1 - 2 sin2 A (35)2
Rearranging equation (35) and taking the squareroot of both sides, we have
A /1 - cos Asin = 2 (36)
AAdding and subtracting cos2 -f on the right sideof equation (33), we have
cos A = 2 cos2 2(cos2 + sin2 -41) (37)2 2
but, the quantity within the parenthesis is equalto 1 so tha
Rearranging
2 Acos A = 2 cos (38)
equation (38) and taking the squareroot of both sides gives us
COSA / 1 + cos AI v 2
Taking the ratiohave
, ALan -2-
(39)
of equations (36) and (39), we
ri - cos A= v (40)1 + cos ANotice that the use of (+) or (-) is dependentupon the quadrant of argle termination.
EXAMPLE: Find cos 15°, if cos 30° equalsNr30.866 or
SOLUTION: From
30°cos -2- = cos 15° =
Thus
equation (39) we have
/1 + 0.8662
cos 15° =
The solution using -I f
0. 9659
30°+ 11-52
cos = cos 15° =2 2
+2
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Use the half angleformulas to find the exact value of the following:
1. sin 15°2. cos 135°3. tan 22.5°4. tan 195°ANSWERS:
2 Nrg1. ± 2
2. ±2
3. ±
4. ± -7-4T1
TRANSCENDENTAL FUNCTIONS
To define transcendental functions we statethat any functions other than algebraic func-tions will be classified, for the purposes of thiscourse, as transcendental functions. This groupof transcendental functions includes such func-tions as trigonometric functions, inverse trigo-nometric functions, exponential functions, andlogarithmic functions.
Later in calculus we will prove that the sineand cosine of an angle can be calculated from thefollowing series, if the angle is expressed inradian measure:
and
x3 x5 x7sin x = x -1
+51 71
- + . . .3
COS X = 12 4 x6x x
41 61
NOTE: 31 is read 3 factorial and is equal to1 x 2 x 3 or 6. 51 is read 5 factorial and isequaltolx 2 x 3 x4x 5 or 120.
At the same time the expansion of the func-tion ex where e is the number 2.71828. . . , thebase of the system of natural logarithms, is asfollows:
117
and
x2 x3 x4ex = 1 + x + + + + .
21 31 TI
-x x2 x3 x4e 31 41
122
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Moreover, by using the notation i = 1 twosimilar expressions are obtained:
eiaL +x2 1x3 x4 ix5 x6 1x7- 2T ST
and
= 1- ix - x2 + 12(3 x4 1x5 x6 ix7-ET 31+
41-
51 61 +71 +.01ixAdding eix to e- term by term and dividing by
two we obtain an expression equal to cos x.
eix + e -ix2 - cos x
Subtracting e-ix from eix term by term anddividing by 2i we have an expression equal tosin x.
ixe - = sin x
In calculus, trigunometric and logarithmicfunctions are grouped together and called trans-cendental functions, partly because they cannotbe expressed by a simple algebraic formula,and partly because they both are related to thenumber e. This relation becomes important inderivations in advanced and applied calculus.
EQUATIONS
A trigonometric equation is an equality whichis true for some values but may not be true forall values of the variable. The principles andprocesses used to solve algebraic equations maybe used to solve trigonometric equations. Theidentities and reduction formulas previouslystudied may also be used in solving trigono-metric equations. There are so many differentapproaches to solving these equations that wewill use several examples for better under-standing.
MULTIPLE SOLUTIONS
We will use the following examples andprac-tice problems to show the multiple solutions ofa trigonometric equation.
EXAMPLE: Find the value of 0 if
tan 0 = 1
SOLUTION: We must find the angle or angleshaving a tangent equal to 1. Using the inversetrigonometric functions, we may write
118
tan 9 = 1
arctan 1
= 45°
and recalling that
tan(180° + 0) = tan 0then
Thus,
and
tan(180° + 45°) = tan 450
tan 2250 = tan 45°
arctan 1 = 45°
arctan 1 = 225°
Therefore, the solutions for Cava equation are 450and 225°. The 450 angle is a first quadrantangle and the 225° angle is a third quadrantangle and both have a positive sign and thesame trigonometric value; thus we have amultiple solution.
Notice that the two solutions of the equationdiffer from the investigation of the inversetrigonometric functions in which we were re-quired to find the PRINCIPAL value. ThePRINCIPAL value solution was found to be in aparticular quadrant. In multiple solutions wewill use the term PRIMARY to indicate that weare searching for solutions which are restrictedto the range
00 s 9 < 360°Notice also that if we remove the restric-
tion of the term PRIMARY we may write
tan 0 = tan(O + n . 3600)
and we find, if n is an integer, that there aremany solutions to the equation.
EXAMPLE: Find the primary solutions tothe equation
Chapter 8TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
SOLUTION: We first use the inverse trigo- 1. tan 0 = -1nometric function to write
then
but
2. sec 0 = 2, IScos II = a
2 3. sin 0 = T14. cos 0 =
,./ ANSWERS:0 = arccos 2= 300 1. 135° and 315°
2. 600 and 3000cos 0 = cos (3600 - 0)
3. 240° and 300°cos 30° = cos 330°
4. 600 and 300°Therefore, the solutions are 30° and 330°.
EXAMPLE: Find the primary solutions tothe equation
csc 0 = 2
SOLUTION: As in the previous example, wewrite
The following examples show how to find thesolution of more difficult equations.
EXAMPLE: Find the primary values of theequation
sin 0 + sin 0 cot 0 = 0
SOLUTION: We factor the equation andcsc 0 = 2 find that
and sin 0 + sin 0 cot 0 = 0
1 andcsc 0 = sin 0 sin 9 (1 + cot 0) = 0
Setting each factor equal to zero, we have thetwo equations
sin 0 = 0
then and
1 1 + cot 9 = 00 = arcsin -2-
= 30°Solve each as follows:
but
sin 0 = sin (180° - 0)
sin 30° = sin 1500
then
andTherefore, the solutions are 30° and 150°
PROBLEMS: Find the primary values of 0in the following equations:
119
sin 9 = 0
9 = arcsin 0
= 0° and 1800
1 + cot 9 = 0
cot 0 = -1
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2-
Therefore, Therefore, the solutions are 30°, 90°, and 1500.PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Find the primary
value of the following equations:= 135° and 315° 1. 2 cos20 = 3 cos 0 - 1
Therefore, the solutions to the equation are 0°, 2. tan20 = 3135°, 180°, and 315°.EXAMPLE: Find the primary values of the 3. 2 sin20 - 3 sin 0 = -1equation
0 = arccot -1
2 sin20 + sin 0 - 3 = 0SOLUTION: Factor the equation and then set
each factor equal to zero, as follows:
2 sin20 + sin 0 - 3 =and
(2 sin 9 - 1) (sin 9 - 1) = 0
then
2 sin 9 - 1 = 0
and
sin 0 - 1 = 0
Solve each as follows:
2 sin 0 - 1 = 0
then
and
Also,
then
2 sin 0 = 11sin 0 = 2
. 10 = arcsm
0 = 30° and 1500
sin 0 - 1 = 0
sin 0 = 1
= arcsin 1
= 90°
ANSWERS:
1. 00, 600, 300°
2. 60°, 120°, 240°, 3000
3. 30°, 900, 150°
LIMITED SOLUTIONS
We will consider two types of possiblesolutions to fall within the category of limitedsolutions. The following examples show both ofthese types.
The first type of limited solution occurs whenan equation is solved and one of the solutions isnot true upon inspection.
EXAMPLE: Find the primary values of 0 inthe equation
sin2O sec 0 = sec 0
SOLUTION: We first rearrange, and thenfactor the equation as follows:
sin20 sec 0 = sec 0
sec 0 - sin20 sec = 0
sec 0 (1 - sin20) = 0
Set each factor equal to zero
1 - sin20 = 0
and
sec 0 = 0
Solving the first equation
1 sin20 = 0
sin29 = 1
sin 0 = ±1
120
125
Chapter 8TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES AND EQUATIONS
then
= arcsin *1
= 900 and 1800
Solving the second equation
sec 0 = 0
then
These seem to be the values of the equation,but we squared both sides of the equation andwe must now substitute these values into theoriginal equation to verify the values. Uponsubstituting we find
tan 9 - sec 0 + 1 = 0
This implies that
tan 0° - sec 00 + 1 = 0
= arcsec 0 and since
However, there is no angle for which sec 0 0 - 1 + 1 = 0equals zero and we reject this false solution.Therefore, the primary solutions for the original the value 00 holds true.equation are 90° and 180°.
For 180° we findThe second type of limited solutions occurwhen introducing a radical into an equation by tan 0 - sec 0 + 1 = 0substitution or by squaring both members of anequation in solving the equation. These solutions tan 180° - sec 180° + 1 = 0are called extraneous roots. Solutions of thistype must be substituted into the original equa- buttion for verification.
EXAMPLE: Find the primary values of 9 for 1 -(-1) + 1 0the equation
tan 0 - sec 0 + 1 = 0 and we say 180° is an extraneous root.SOLUTION: We first rearrange the equa- PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Find the primarytion to read
values for 0 in the following equations:tan 0 + 1 = sec 0
1. tan 0 cos28 = sin29Square both sides:
2. cos29 sin 0 = sin 0 + 1tan29 + 2 tan 0 + 1 = sec29
Rearrange again: 3. 2 sec 9 + 1 - cos 0 = 0
2 tan 0 = sec29 - (tan20 + 1) 4. cot 0 - csc 8 - i3 = 0
This givesANSWERS:
2 tan 0 = 0and
tan 9 = 0Therefore,
o = arctan 0= 0° and 180°
1.
2.
3.
4.
0°, 45°,
270°
180°
240°
180° , 225°
CHAPTER 9
STRAIGHT LINES
The study of straight lines provides anexcellent introduction to analytic geometry.As its name implies, this branch of mathematicsis concerned with geometrical relationships.However, in contrast to plane and solid geometry,the study of these relationships in analyticgeometry is accomplished by algebraic analysis.
The invention of the rectangular coordinatesystem made algebraic analysis of geometricalrelationships possible. Rene Descartes, aFrench mathematician, is credited with thisinvention, and the coordinate system is oftendesignated as the Cartesian coordinate systemin his honor.
Recalling our study of the rectangular coor-dinate system in Mathematics, Vol. 1, NavPers10069-C, we review the following definitionsand terms:
1. Distances measured along, or parallel to,the X axis are ABSCISSAS. They are positiveif measured to the right of the origin; theyare negative if measured to the left of theorigin. (See fig. 9-1.)
2. Distances measured along, or parallel to,the Y axis are ORDINATES. They are positiveif measured above the origin; they are negativeif measured below the origin.
3. Any point on the coo;dinate system is des-ignated by naming its abscissa and ordinate.For example, the abscissa of point P (fig. 9-1)is 3 and the ordinate is -2. Therefore, thesymbolic notation for P is
P(3, -2)
In using this symbol to designate a point, theabscissa is always written first, followed bya comma. The ordinate is written last. Thusthe general form of the symbol is
P(x, y)
122
4. The abscissa and ordinate of a point areits COORDINATES.
DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS
The distance between two points, Pi andP2, can be expressed in terms of their coor-dinates by using the Pythagorean Theorem.From our study of Mathematics, Vol. 1, Navrers10069-C, we recall that this theorem is statedas follows:
In a right triangle, the square of the lengthof the hypotenuse (longest side) is equal to thesum of the squareS of the lengths of the twoshorter sides.
Let the coordinates of Pi be (x111) and letthose of P2 be (x2,y2), as in figure 9-2. Bythe Pythagorean Theorem,
d =i(P1N) + (P
2N)
2
where d represents the distance from P1 to P2.We can express the length of PIN in terms ofxi and x2 as follows:
Likewise,
PIN =x2 - x1
P2N=y
2-y1
By substitution in the formula developedpreviously for d, we reach the following con-clusion:
d = Ni(x2 - x1)2 + (y2 - y1)2
Although we have demonstrated the formulafor the first quadrant only, it can be proved
Chapter 9STRAIGHT LINES
Figure 9-1. Rectangular coordinate system.
for all quadrants and all pairs of points.EXAMPLE: In figure 9-2, xi = 2, x2 = 6,
3,1 = 2, and y2 = 5. Find the length of d.
SOLUTION: d = 1(6 - 2)2 + (5 - 2)2
= /42 + 32
= /16 + 9
=
= 5
This result could have been foreseen by ob-serving that triangle P1NP2 is a 3-4-5 tri-angle.
EXAMPLE: Find the distance between P1(4, 6) and P2(10, 4).
SOLUTION' d = 1(10 - 4)2 + (4 - 6)2
d = i136 -7-1- 4
d = 2 rfo
DIVISION OF A LINE SEGMENT
Many times it becomes necessary to findthe coordinates of a point which is someknown fraction of the distance between Pi andP2.
123
In figure 9-3, P is a point lying on the linejoining Pi and P2 so that
P P1 kPIP2
If P should lie one-quarter of the way betweenPi and P2, then k would equal 1/4.
Triangles PiMP and P1NP2 are similar.Therefore,
P1M p1 p
P1N P1P2
PIPSince 12 is the ratio that defines k,
PP1M
P = kN
1
Therefore,
P1M k (P1N)Referring again to figure 9-3, observe that
PiN is equal to x2 - Likewise, P1Mis equalto x - xi. Therefore, replacing P1M and PiNwith their equivalents in terms of x, the foregoingequation becomes
x - x1
= k(x2
- x 1)
x = x1 + k(x2- x 1)
is y milimmmirmimmwomminiWE 11.111111111101111111111-1110111-M11111IIIUIMIIIINEIMIThroimrMmusommassamplaB imiumlI busimisminsilimarummr. wemi Emmil Elmweliwoommipm MMMMM pm. lim01111mThr uonas uormwommumo-mmr!.No milNummuiAullum SOsm. Nummummum .-.2onom74M1111 EUS4110151111111..11110MOIN Allal-011 MNIM111 diII upsMom mrIriiiiiird.miwi muumuu.IiiII011 11111111W.MuiiiNEF8-ui.. MIME 1111111"
EN MINNINOr.11.111....111.01111.1111P011Elli 111111M115111.111R111111111ASII! MINA111AllUllMIUrn 111 1111111,1111111III 11111ENIIIII 11101111 IOWatm soilliggiumaimainimum11.NEN
Nomumwol 161111111 1111111.111M
11.11 MIN1111N11.1111MM .1111
II1 ritar11111!suommmm110111111.111111111.MW11111111rnillIN111111Figure 9-2. Dietance between two points.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
X1
Xx2
Figure 9-3. Division of a line segment.
By similar reasoning,
y1 142 yl)The x and y found. as a result of the foregoing
discussion are the coordinates of the desiredpoint; whose distances from P1 and from P2 aredetermined by the value of lc
EXAMPLE: Find the coordinates of a point1/4 of the way from P1 (2,3) to P2 (4,1).
SOLUTION:1k = , x2 - = 2, y2 - y1 = -2
1 1 5x = 2 + .71 (2) = 2 + =
y = 3 + d-1 (-2)
The point P is (5i 9-1).
FINDING THE MIDPOINT
1 5=0
When the mi.dpoint of a line segment is to befound, the value of k is 1/2. Therefore,
124
1x = x1 + (x2 - x1)
1 1
xl + 2 x2 2 xl
1 1= xi + x2
1
(x1 + x2)
By similar reasoning,1
Y 2 (Y1 + Y2)
EXAMPLE: Find the midpoint of the linebetween P1 (2,4) and P2 (4,6).
SOLUTION: k =2
3
1y = (4 + 6)
= 5
The midpoint is (3,5).
INCLINATION AND SLOPE
A line drawn on the rectangular coordinatesystem and crossing the X axis forms a positiveacute angle with the X axis. This angle, shownin figure 9-.4 as angle a, is called the angle ofinclination of the line.
The slope of any line, such as AB infigure 9-4, is equal to the tangent of its angleof inclination. Slope is denoted by the letterm. Therefore, for line AB,
m = tan a
If the axes are in their conventional positions,a line sloping upward to the right has a positiveslope. A line sloping downward to the righttali; a negative slope.
Chapter 9STPAIGHT LINES
A
Figmrp 9-4,Angle of inclination.
Since the tangent of a is the ratio of P2Mto P1M, we can relate the slope of line ABto the points P1 and P2 as follows:
P2Mm = tan a =
Designating the coordinates of P1 as (x1ty1),and those of P2 as (x2,y2), we recall that
P2M Y2 yl
P1M = x2 -1
121 =
The quantities (x2 - xi) and (Y2 - yl)represent changes thai oCcur in the values ofthe x and y coordinates as a result of changingfrom P2 to Pi on line AB. The symbol usedby mathematicians to represent an incrementof change is the Greek letter delta (A). There-fore, x means "the change in x" and Ay means"the change in y.1 The amount of change in
the x coordinate, as we change from P2 toPi, is x2 - x. Therefore,
zix = x2 - x1
y2
We use this notation to express the slope ofline AB, as follows:
m = -4Y-Ax
EXAMPLE: Find the slope of the lineconnecting P? (7,6) and Pi (-1,-4).
SOLUTION:
m = AxAy = y2 yl = 6 - (-4) = 10
ax = x2 - x1 = 7 - (-1) 8
10 5
It is important to realize that the choiceof labels for P1 and P2 is strictly arbitrary.If we had chosen the point (7,6) to be Pi inthe foregoing example, and the point (-1,-4)to be P2, the following calculation would haveresulted:
m el
Ay = Y2 Y1 =
x2 xl =
- 6
- 7
=
=
-10
-8
-10 5m = -8 =
This is the same result as in the foregoingexample.
The slope of 5/4 means that a point movingalong this line would move vertically +5 unitsfor every horizontal movement of +4 units.This result is consistent with the previously
125
'130
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
stated meaning of positive slope; i.e., slopingupward to the right.
If line AB in figure 9-4 were parallel to theX axis, yi and y2 would be equal and the dif-ference (y2 - yi) would be 0. Therefore,
0m - 0-x2 xl
Thus we conclude that the slope of a horizontalline is 0. This conclusion can also be reachedby noting that angle a (fig. 9-4) is 0 when the lineis parallel to the X axis. Since the tangent ofOa is 09
m = tan a = 0
The slope of a line that is parallel to theY axis becomes meaningless. The tangent ofthe angle a increases indefinitely as a ap-proaches 90°. It is ^nmetimes said thatm 00
(m approaches infinity) when a approaches 900.
PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULARLINES
If we are given two lines that are parallel,their slopes must be equal. Each line willcut the X axis at the same angle a , so that
m1
= tan a, In2 = tan a
Therefore, ml m2We conclude that two lines which are parallelhave the same slope.
Suppose that two lines are perpendicular toeach other, as lines Li and L2 in figure 9-5.The slope and inclination of Li are ml and ai,respectively. The slope and inclination of L2are m2 and a 2, respectively. Then the followingis true:
m = tan a1 1
m2 = tan a2
It can be shown geometrically that a 2 (fig.9-5) is equal to al, plus 90°. Therefore,
Figure 9-5. Slopes of perpendicular lines.
tan a2 tan (al 90°)
= - cot al
1_tan al
Replacing tan a i and tan a2 by their equivalentsin terms of slope, we have
126
r112 =1
ml
We conclude that, if two lines are per-pendicular, the slope of one is the negativereciprocal of the slope of the other.
Conversely, if the slopes of two lines arenegative reciprocals of each other, the linesare perpendicular.
EXAMPLE: In figure 9-6, show that lineLi is perpendicular to line L2. Line Li passesthrough points Pi (0,5) and P2 (-1,3). LineL2 passes through points P2 (4,3) and P3(3,1).
Chapter 9STRAIGHT LINES
Figure 9-6. Proving lines perpendicular.
SOLUTION: Let in and m2 represent theslopes of lines Li and L2, respectively. Then
we have
ANGLE BETWEEN 'IWO LINES
When two lines intersect, the anglebetweenthem is defined as the smallest angle throughwhich one of the lines must be rotated to makeit coincide with the other line. For example,the angle (I) in figure 9-7 iL the angle betweenlines Li and L2.
Referring to figure 9-7,
45 = a2 -
It is possible to determine the value of di-rectly from the slopes of lines Li and L2, asfollows:
M1 =
m =2
5 - 32
-2 1.
tani an (a2 cv1)
tan a2 al0 - (-1)
1 - 31+ tan a
1tan a
2
3 - (-1) 4
Since their slopes are negative reciprocalsof each other, the lines are perpendicular.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:1. Find the distance between P1 (5,3) and
P2 (6p 7).2. Find the distance between P1 (1/2,1)
and P2 (3/2,5/3).3. Find the midpoint of the line connecting
Pi (5,2) and P2 (-1,-3).4. Find the slope of the line joining P1
(-2,-5) and P2 (2,5).ANSWERS:1.
2. VII3
3. (2, .4)
4. 5
1 27
132
This result is obtained by use of the trigono-metric identity for the tangent of the dif-ference between two angles. Trigonometric
Figure 9-7.--Angle between two lines.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
identities are discussed in chapter 8 of thistraining course.
Recalling that the taLgent of the angle ofinclination is the slope of the line, we have
tan al = m1 (the slope of L )
1
tan a2 = m2 (the slope of L2)
Substituting these expressions in the tangentformula derived in the foregoing discussion,we nave
m2 mltan = 1 + m m1 2
If one of the lines were parallel to the Yaxis, its slope would be infinite. This wouldrender the slope formula for tan 0 useless,because an inainite value in both the numerator
m2 - mland denominator of the fraction ' pro-'1 2duces an indeterminate form. However, if oneof the lines is known to be parallel to the Yaxis the tangent of 0 may be expressed byanother method.
Suppose that L2 (fig. 9-7) were parallelto the Y axis. Then we would have
a2 = 90°
0 = 90° - altan 0 = cot al
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:1. Find the angle between the two lines
which have m1 = 3 and m2 = 7 for slopes.2. Find the angle between two lines whose
slopes are mi = 0, in2 = 1. = Osig..nifies that line Li is horizontal and the formulastill holds).
3. Find the angle between the Y axis and aline with a slope of m = -8.
4. Find the obtuse angle between the X axisand line with a slope of m = -8.
128
ANSWERS:1. 10°18'2. 45°3, 7°7'4. 97°7'
EQUATION OF A STRAIGHT LINE
In Mathematics, Volume 1, NavPers 10069-C,equations such as
2x + y = 6
are designated as linear equations, and theirgraphs are shown to be straight lines. Thepurpose of the present discussion is to studythe relationship of slope to the equation ofa straight line.
POINT-SLOPE FORM
Suppose that we desire to find the equationof a straight line which passes through a knownpoint and has a known slope. Let (x,y) re-present the coordinates of any point on theline, and let (xi,y1) represent the coordinatesof the known point. The slope is representedby m.
Recalling the formula defining slope interms of the coordinates of two points, wehave
111 =
. . y - y1 = ni(x x1)
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of a linepassing through the point (2,3) and having aslope of 3.
SOLUTION:
x1 = 2 and y1 = 3
y - y1 = m(x - x1)
. y - 3 = 3(x - 2)
y - 3 = 3. -6
y - 3x = -3
Chapter 9STRAIGHT LINES
The point-slope form may be used to findthe equation of a line through two known points.The values of xi, 2r22 yl) and y2 are firstused to find the slope of the line, and then eitherknown point is used with the slope in the point-slope form.
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the linethrough the points (-3,4) and (4,-2).
SOLUTION:
Y2 ylm =x2 - x1
-2 - 4 -64 + 3 7
Letting (x,y) represent any point on the line,and using (-3,4) as a known point, we have
-6y - 4 = -,--f [x (-3)]
7(y - 4) = -6(x + 3)
7y - 28 = -6x - 18
7y + 6x= 10
SLOPE-INTERCEPT FORM
Any line which is not parallel to the Y axisintersects the Y axis in some point. The xcoordinate of the point of intersection is 0,because the Y axis is vertical and passesthrough the origin. Let the y coordinate ofthe point of intersection be represented by b.Then the point of intersection is (0,b), asshown in figure 9-8. The y coordinate, b,
Figure 9-8.Slope-intercept form.
This is the standarda straight line.
EXAMPLE: Findthat intersects the Yand has a slope of 5/3.
SOLUTION:
slope-intercept form of
the equation of a lineaxis at the point (0,3)
v mx + b5
y x + 3
3y = 5x + 9
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:
Write equations for linesslopes as follows:
is called the y intercept. 1. P(3,5), m = -2
The slope of the line in figure 9-8 is 4,4',1cY.
The value of 4 y in this expression is y -b,where y represents the y coordinate of any
2. P(-2,-1), m =
point on the line. The value of x is equalto the x coordinate of 13(x,y), so that
3. Pi(2,2) and P2(-4,-1)
= y - bAX x
mx = y - b
y = mx + b
4. Y intercept = 2, in
ANSWERS:
1. y = -2x + 11
2. 3y = x - 1
129 .
having points and
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
3. 2y = x + 2
4. y = 3x + 2
NORMAL FORM
Methods *or determining the equation ofa line usually depend upon some knowledgeof a point or points on the line. We nowconsider a method which does not requireadvance knowledge concerning any of the line'spoints. All that is known about the line isits perpendicular distance from the originand the angle between the perpendicular andthe x axis.
In figure 9-9, line AB is a distance p awayfrom the origin, and line OM forms an angle 0with the X axis. We select any point P(x,y)on line AB and develop the equation of lineAB in terms of the x and y of P. Since Prepresents ANY point on the line, the x andy of the equation will represent EVERY pointon the line and therefore will represent theline itself,
PR is constructed perpendicular to OB atpoint R. NR is drawn parallel to AB, andPN is parallel to OB. PS is perpendicularto NR and to AB. Since right triangles OMBand RSP have their sides mutually perpen-dicular, they are similar; therefore, anglePRS is equal to 0 Finally, the x distanceof point P is equal to OR, and the y distanceof P is equal to PR.
In order to relate the distance p to x andy, we reason as follows:
ON = (OR) (cos )
= x cos
PS = (PR) (sin())
= y sin
OM = ON + PS
p = ON + PS
p = x cos 0 + y sin 0
This final equation is the NORM.AL FORM.The word "normal" in this usage refers to theperpendicular relatimisnip between OM andAB. "Normal" frequently means "perpen-dicular" in mathematical and scientific usage.
The distance p is considered to be alwayspositive, and 0 is any angle between 0° and360°.
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of a linethat is 5 units away from the origin, if theperpendicular from the line to the origin formsan angle of 300 with the positive side of theX axis.
SOLUTION:
p = 5; 0 = 300
p = x cos 0 + y sin
5 = x cos 30° + y sin 30°
1(12)
y
PARALLEL ANDPERPENDICULAR LFNES
The general equation of a straight line isoften written with capital 1 etters for co-efficients, as follows:
Ax + By + C = 0
These literal coefficients, as they aro called,represent the numnical coefficients encoun-tered in a typical linear equation.
Suppose that we are given two equationswhich are duplicates except for the constantterm, as follows:
Ax + By + C = 0
Ax+ By+ D=0
By placing these two equations in slope-interceptform, we can show that their slopes areequal, as follows:
ii) C.)B/
13/
Thus the slope of each line is - A/13.Since lines having equal slopes are parallel,
we reach the following conclusion: In any two
130
135
Chapter 9STRAIGHT LINES
Figure 9-9.Normal form.
X
linear equations, if the coefficients of the x and y A situation similar to that prevailing withterms are identical in value and sign, then the parallel lines involves perpendicular lines.lines represented by these equations are par- For example, consider the equationsallel.
EXAMPLE: Write the equation of a lineparallel to 3x - y - 2 = 0 and passing throughthe point (5,2).
Ax + By + C = 0
Bx - Ay + D = 0SOLUTION: The coefficients of x and y in
the desired equation are the same as those in Transposing into the slope-intercept form, wethe given equation. Therefore, the equation is have
3x - y + D = 0
Since the line passes through (5,2), the valuesx = 5 and y = 2 must satisfy the equation. Sub-stituting these, we have
3(5) - (2) + D = 0
D = -13
Thus the required equation is
3x - y - 13 = 0
Y = (2) x 4. (-A-
D)
Since the slopes of these two lines are nega-tive reciprocals, the lines are perpendicular.
The conclusion derived from the foregoingdiscussion is as follows: If a line is to beperpendicular to a given line, the coefficientsof x and y in the required equation are foundby interchanging the coefficients of x and y
131
136
MATHEMATICS , VOLUME 2
in the given equation and changing the signof one of them.
EXAMPLE: Write the equation of a line per-pendicular to the line x + 3y + 3 = 0 and havinga y intercept of 5.
SOLUTION: The required equation is
3x - y + D = 0
Notice the interchange of coefficients and thechange of sign. At the point where the linecrosses :ne Y axis, the value of x is 0 andthe value of y is 5. Therefore, the equationis
3(0) - (5) + D = 0
D = 5
The required equation is
3x - y + 5 = 0
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:
Find the equations of the following lines:
1. Through (1,1) and parallel to 5x -3y = 9.
2. Through (-3,2) and perpendicular to+ y = 5.
3. Through (2,3) and perpendicular to 3x -2y = 7.
4. Through (2,3) and parallel to 3x2y = 7.
ANSWERS:
1. 5x - 3y = 2
2. x y = -5
3. 2x + 3y = 13
4. 3x - 2y = 0
DISTANCE OF A POINTFROM A LINE
It is frequently necessary to express thedistance of a point from a line in terms ofthe coefficients in the equation of the line.In order to do this, we compare the two rormsof the equation of a straight line, as follows:
General equation: Ax + By + C 0Normal form: x cos 0 + y sin 0 - p = 0
The general equation and the normal formrepresent the same straight line. Therefore,A (the coefficient of x in general form) isproportional to cos 0 (the coefficient of x inthe normal form). By similar reasoning, B isproportional to sin 9 , and C is proportionalto -p. Recalling that quantities proportionalto each other form ratios involving a constantof proportionality, let k be this constant.Thus we have
cos = kA
sin 0= k
cos 0 = kA
sin 0 = kB
^
Squaring both sides of these two expressionsand then adding, we have
IN;:1
cos2 0 + sin2 0 = k2(A2 + 82)
1 = k2(A2 + B2
k2 1
A2 + B2
k = 1
jA2 B2
Chapter 9STRAIGHT LINES
The coefficients in the normal form, ex-pressed in terms of A, B, and C, are as follows:
cos 0 =
sin 0 =
A
/A2 B2
11 A2 + B2
*jA2 + B2
The sign of 1A 2 + B2 is chosen so as to make p(a distance) always positive.
The conversion formulas developed in theforegoing discussion are used in finding thedistance from a point to a line. Let p representthe distance of line L from the origiri. (Seefig. 9-10.) In order to find d, the distanceof point Pi from line L, we construct a linethrough Pi and parallel to L. The distanceof this line from the origin is OS, and thedifference between OS and p is d.
Figure 9-10.Distance from a point to a line.
We obtain an expression for d, based on thecoordinates of P1, as follows:
OS = x1 cos 0 + y1 sin e
d = OS - p
= xi cos e + y1 sin 0 - p
Returning to the expressions for s:n cos 0and -p in terms of A, B, and C (the coefficientsin the general equation), we have
d =A
)B
jA2+ B2 yl jA2 132
±IA2 + B2
The denominator in each of the expressionscomprising the formula for d is the same.Therefore we may combine as follows:
d -xlA + yl B + C
A2 B2
We use the absolute value, since d is a dis-tance, and thus avoid any confusion arisingfrom the * radical.
EXAMPLE:. Find the distance from the point(2,1) to the line 4x + 2y + 7 = 0.
SOLIJ ION:
d(4) (2) + (2) (1) + 7
'42
133
slaS
8 + 2 + 7
-7q
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:
In each of the following problems, find thedistance from the point to the line:
ANSWERS:
1. 19 JR10
1. (5,2), 3x - y + 6 = 0 2. 1/-6-
2. (3,-5), 2x + y + 4 = 0 3. 2
3. (3,-4), 4x + 3y = 10 4. 1
4. (-2,5), 3x + 4y - 9 = 0
CHAPTER 10
CONIC SECTIONS
This chapter is a continuation of the studyof analytic geometry. The figures presented inthis chapter are plane figures which are in-cluded in the general class of conic sections orsimply "conics."
Conic sections are so named because theyare all plane sections of a right circular cone.A e!-rlf. can be formed by cutting a cone perpen-dicular to its axis. An ellipse is produced whenthe cone is cut obliquely to the axis and the sur-tace. A hyperbola results when the cone isintersected by a -.)lane parallel to the axis, anda parabola Is the result when the intersectingplane is parallel to an element of the surface.These are illustrated in figure 10-1.
When the curve produced by cutting the coneis placed on a coordinate system it may be de-fined as follows:
A conic section is the locus of a point thatmoves so that its distance from a fixed point isin a constant ratio to its distance from a fixedline. The fixed point is the focus, and the fixedline is the directrix.
The ratio r3ferred to in the definition iscalled the eccertricity. If the eccentricity (e)is less than one, the curve is an ellipse. Ife is greater than one, the curve is a hyperbola.If e is equal to 1, the curve is a parabola. Acircle is a special case having an eccentricityequal to zero, and may be defined by the dis-tance from a point. It is actually a limitingcase of an ellipse in which the eccentricity ap-proaches zero. Thus, if
e = 0, it is a circle
e < 1, it is an ellipse
e = 1, it is a parabola
e 1, it is a hyperbola
The eccentricity, focus, and directrix areused in the algebraic analysis of conic sectionsand the corresponding equations. The conceptof the locus of an equation also enters into ana-lytic geometry; this concept is discussed beforethe individual conic sections are studied.
THE LOCUS OF AN EQUATION
In chapter 9 of this course, methods foranalysis of linear equations are presented. Ifa group of x and y values (or ordered pairs, P(x,y)) which satisfy a given linear equation areplotted on a coordinate system, the resultinggraph is a straight line.
When higher ordered equations such asx2 + y2 = 1 or y =
are encountered, the resulting graph is not astraight line. However, the points whose coordi-nates satisfy most of the equations inx and y arenormally not scattered in a random field. If thevalues are plotted they will seem to follow a lineor curve (or a combination of lines and curves).In many texts the plot of an equation is calleda curve, even when it is a straight line. "7hiscurve is called the locus ot the equation. Thelocus of an equation is a curve containing thosepoints, and only those points, whose coordinatessatisfy the equation.
At times the curve may be defined by a setof conditions rather than by an equation, thoughan equation may be derived from the given con-ditions. Then the curve in questlonwould be thelocus of all points which fit the conditions. Forinstance a circle may be said to be the locus ofall points in a plane which lie a fixed distancefrom a fixed point. A straight line may be de-fined as the locus of a point that moves in a planeso that it is at all times equidistant from twofixed points. The method of expressing a set
135
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
HYPERBOLA CIRCLE
PARABOLA ELUPSE
Figure 10-1.Conic sections.
of conditions in analytical form gives an equation.Let us draw up a set of conditions and translatethem into an equation.
EXAMPLE: What is the equation of the curvewhich is the locus of all points which arlequidistant from the two points (5, 3) and (2,1)?
SOLUTION: First, as in figure 10-2, choosesome point having coordinates (x, y). Recall fromchapter 9 of this course that the distance betweenthis point and (2, 1) is given by:
/(y - 1)2 + (x - 2)2
The distance between pAnt (x, y) and (5, 3) willbe given by
3)2 5)2
Equating these distances, since the point is tobeequidistant from the two given points, we have
.1(y 1)2 2)2 3)2 5)2
136
Squaring both sides
(y - 1)2 + (x - 2)2 . (y - 3)2 + (n- 3)2
Expanding2
y - 2y + 1 + x2 - 4x + 4
= y2 - 6y + 9 + x2 - 10x + 25Canceling and collecting terms:
4y + 5 = -6x + 34
4y = -6x + 293y = - x + 7. 25
This is the equation of a straight line with a slopeof minus 3/2, and a Y intercept of +7.25.
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the curvewhich is the locus of all points which areequidistant from t a line x = -3 and the point(3, 0).
SOLUTION: The distance from the point (x,y) on the curve to the line will be (x (-3)) or
141
xly)
513)
X
Figure 10-2.Locus of points equidistantfrom two given points.
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
(x + 3). Refer to figure 10-3. The distance frcmthe point (x, y) to the point (3, 0) is
- 0)2 + (x - 3)2
Equating the two distances,
x + 3 = 1y2 + (x - 3)2
Squaring both sides,
x2 + 6x + 9 = y2 + x2 - fix + 9
Canceling and collecting terms,
y2 = 12x
which is the equation of a parabola.EXAMPLE: What is the equation of the curve Since
the locus of which is apointwhich moves so thatat all times the ratio of its distance from thepoint (3, 0) to its distance from the linex = 25/3 is equal to 3/5? Refer to figure 10-4.
SOLUTION: The distance from a point (x,y) to the point (3, 0) is given by
d1
= - 3)2 + (y - 0)2
The distance from the same point (x, y) to theline is
25d = x2 -7
then
Figure 10-4. Ellipse
d1 3 3
`A2
= or d1 = d2
3)2 _2 3 (25 -"Squaring both sides and expanding,
x2 y2 59 (x2 530 6295)
x2 - 6x + 9 + y2 x 6x + 259 2
Collecting terms and transposing
16 2 225 x + y = 16
Dividing through by 16
2 2x25 16 a
Figure 10-3.Parabola. This is the equation of an ellipse.
137
142
MATHEMATICS, VOLIME 2
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Fi ad the equationwhich is the locus of the point which moves sothat it is at all times:
1. Equidistant from the points (0, 0) and(5, 4),
2, Equidistant from the points (3, -2) and(-3, 2).
3. Equidistant irom the line x = -4 and thepoint (3, 4).
4. Equidistant from the point (4, 5) and theline y = 5x -4. HINT: Use the standard distanceformula to find the distance from the point P(x, y) and the point P (4, 5). Then use the fnrmulafor finding distance from a point to aline, givenin chapter 9 of this course, to find the distancefrom P (x, y) to the given line. Put the equationof the line in the form Ax + By + C = 0.
ANSWERS:
1. y = 1. 25x + 418
2. 2y = 3x
3. y2 - 8y = 14x - 9
4. x2 + 10xy + 25y2 - 168x - 268y + 1050 = 0
THE CIRCLE
A circle is the locus of a point which is al-ways a fixed distance from a fixed point calledthe center.
The fixed distance spoken of here is the radiusof the circle.
The equation of a circle with its center at theorigin (figure. 10-5) is, from the definition:
frx- 0)2 + (y - 0)2 = r,
where (x, y) is a point on the circle and r is theradius and replaces d in the standard distanceformula. Then
or2 2x + y2 = r
(1)
If the center of a circle, figure 10-6, is atsome point x = h, y =k, the distance of the mov-
138
143
ing point from Lhe center will be constant andequal to
or
./(x - h)2 + - k)2 = r
- h)2 + - k)2 = r2 (2)
Equations (1) and (2) are the standard forms forthe equation of a circle. Equation ;1) is merelya special case of equation (2) in which h and kare equal to zero.
The equation of a circle may also be ex-pressed in the form:
x2 + y2 + Bx + Cy + D =
where B, C, and D are constants.
(3)
THEOREM: An equation of the second de-gree in which the coefficients of the x2 and y2terms are equal, and there is no (xy) term, re-presents a circle.
Whenever we find an equation in the form ofequation (3), it is best to convert it to the formof equation (2), so that we have the coordinatesof the center of the circle and the radius as partof the equation. This may be done as shown inthe following example problems.
Figure 10-5.Circle with centerat the origin.
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
Figure 10-6.Circle with centerat (h, k).
EXAMPLE: Find the coordinates of thecenter and the radius of the circle which isdescribed by the following equation:
x2 + y2 - 4x - 6y + 9 = 0
SOLUTION: First rearr2nge the terms
x2 - 4x + y2 - 6y + 9 = 0
and complete the square in both x and y. Com-pleting the square is discussed in the chapter onquadratic solutions in Mathematics, Vol. 1,NavPers 10069-C, The procedure consists i4asi-cally of adding certain quantities to both sidesof a second degree equation to form a perfectsquare trinomial. When both the first and seconddegree members are known, the square of one-half the coefficient of the first degree term isadded to both sides of the equation. This willallow the quadratic equation to be factored intoa perfect square trinomial. To complete thesquare in x in the given equation
x2 - 4x + y2 - 6y + 9 = 0
add the square of one-half the coefficient of xto both sides of the equation
x2 - 4x + (2)2 + y 2 - 6y + 9 = 0 + (2)2
then
(x2 - 4x + 4) + y2 - 6y + 9 = 4
(x-2)2 + y2 - 6y + 9 = 4
completes the square in x.For y then
2)2 y2 (3)2
(x - 2)2 + (y2 - 6y + 9) + 9 = 4
(3)2
+ 9
- 2)2 + - 3)2 + 9 = 4 + 9
completes the square in y.Transpose all constant terms to the right-
hand side and simplify
(x - 2)2 + (y - 3)2 = 4 + 9 - 9
(x - 2)2 + (y - 3)2 = 4
and the equation is in the standard form ofequation (2). This represents a circle with thecenter at (2, 3) and with a radius equal toif or 2.
EXAMPLE: Find the coordinates of thecenter and the radius of the circle given by theequation
2 2 1 27x + y +.2. X - .3Y
SOLUTION: Rearrange and complete thesquares in x and y
2 1 2 27x +-2- x+y -3y it)
2 1 1 2 9 27 1 9
Transposing all constant terms to the right-handside and adding,
2 2 9tic 2 + 18 4. 3y + i) 4
139
1144
...=111,
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Reducing to standara Thrm
1 2 3 2 2(x + + (y - = (2)
Thus, the equation represents a circle with itscenter at (-1/4, 3/2) and a radius equal to 2.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Find the coordi-nates of the center and the radius for the circlesdescribed by the following equations.
1. x2 - 29y2 - 4y + = 025
2. x2 + 6x + y2 - 14y = 23
3. x2 - 14x + y2 + 22y = -26
2 2 2 2 24. x + y
5. x2 + y2 - 1 = 0
ANSWERS:
21. Center (-6., 2), radius
2. Center (-3,7), radius 9
3. Center (7,-11), radius 12
1 1 2 VT.3-4. Center (- -0- , radius
5. Center (0,0), radius 1
THE CIRCLE DEFINEDBY THREE POINTS
In certain situations it is convenient to con-sider the following standard form of a circle
x2 + y2 + Bx + Cy + D = 0
as the equation of a circle in which the specificvalues of the constants B, C, and D are to bedetermined. In this problem the unknowns to befound are not x and y, bit the values.of the con-stants B, C, and 1). The conclitionswhich define
140
I 45
the circle .are used to form algebraic relation-ships between these constants. For example, ifone of the conditions imposed on the circle isthat it pass through the point (3,4) then the stan-dard form is written with x and y replaced by 3and 4 respectively; thus
x2 + y2 + Bx + Cy + D = 0
is rewritten as
(3)2 + (4)2 + B(3) + C(4) + D = 0
38 + 4C + D = -25
There are three independent constants intheequation of a circle; therefore, there must bethree conditions given to define a circle. Eachof these conditions will yield an equationwithB,C, and D as theunknowns. These three equationsare then solved cimultaneously to determine thevalues of the constants which satisfy all of theequations. In an analy- is, the number of inde-pendent constants in .11 J general equation of acurve indicate how many cnnditions must be setbefore a curve can be completely defined. Also,the number of unknowns in an equation indicatesthe number of equations which must be solvedsimultaneously to find the values of the unknowns.For example, if B, C, and D are unknowns in anequation, three separate equations involvingthese variables are required for a solution.
A circle may be defined by three noncollinearpoints, that is, by three points which do not lieon a straight line. There is only one possible cir-cle through any three noncollinear points. To findthe &nation of the circle determined by the threepoints substitute the x, y values of each of thegiven points into a general equation to form threeequations with B, C, and D as the unknowns.These equations are then solved simultaneouslyto find the values of B, C, and D in the equationwhich satisfies the three given conditions.
The solution of simultaneous equations intwovariables is discussed in Mathematics Vol. 1.Systems involving three variables use an exten-sion of the same principles, but with three equa-tions instead of two. Step-by-step explanationsof the solution will be given in the example prob-lems.
EXAMPLE: Write the equation of the circlewhich passes through the points (2,8), (5,7), and(6, 6).
SOLUTION: The method used in this solutioncorresponds to the addition-subtraction method
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
used for solution of equations in two variables.However, the method or combination of methodsused will depend on a particular problem. Noone method is best suited to all problems.
First, write a general equation of the form
x2 + y2 + Bx + Cy + D = 0
for each of the given points, substituting the givenvalues for x and y and rearranging
For (2, 8)
For (5, 7)
For (6,6)
4 + 64 + 28 + 8C + D = 0
2B + 8C + D = -68
25 + 49 + 5B + 7C + D = 0
5B + 7C + D = -74
36 + 36 + 6B + 6C + D = 0
6B+ 6C+ D=-72
To aid in the explanationwe number the threeresulting equations
2B + 8C + D = -68
5B + 7C + D = -74
6B + 6C + D = -72
The first step is to eliminate one of the unknownsand have two equaticns and two unknowns remain.The coefficient of D is the same in all three equa-tions and is the one most easily eliminated byaddition and subtraction. This is done in thefollowing manner. Subtract (2) from (1)
2B + 8C + D = - 68
5B + 7C + D = - 74
(1)
(-) (2)
-3B + C = 6 (4)
Subtract (3) from (2)
5B + 7C + D = - 74 (2)
68 + 6C + D = - 72 (3)
-B + C (5)
141
(1-46
This gives two equations, (4) and (5), in two un-knowns which can be solved simultaneously,Since the coefficient of C is the same in bothequations it is the most easily eliminated vari-able.
To eliminate C, subtract (4) from (5)
-B+ C =-2
-38 + C = 6
28 = -8
B = -4
To find the value of C substitute the valuefound for B in (6) in equation (5)
-B + C = -2
-(-4) + C = -2
C = -6
(5)
(7)
Now the values of B and C can be substitutedin any one of the original equations to determinethe value of D.
If the values are substituted in (1)
28 + 8C + D = -68
2(-4) + 8(-6) + D = -68
-8 - 48 + D = -68
D = -68 + 56
(1)
D = -12 (8)
The solution of the system of equations gavevalues for three independent constants in thegeneral equation
x2+ y2+ Bx+ Cy+ D=0
When the constant values are substituted theequation takes the form of
x2 + y2 - 4x - 6y - 12 = 0Rearranging and completing the square in x and y,
(x2 - 4x + 4) + (y2 - 6y + 9) - 12 = 4 + 9
(x - 2)2 + - 3)2 = 25
z
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
which corresponds to a circle with the centerat (2, 3) with a radius of 5. This is the circledescribed by the three given conditions and isshown in figure 10-7 (A).
The previous example problem showed onemethod for determining the equation of a circlewhen three points are given. The next exampleshows another method for solving the same prob-lem. One of the most important things to keepin mind when studying analytic geometry is thatmany problems may be solved by more than onemethod. Each problem should be analyzed care-fully to determine what relationships exist be-tween the given data and the desired results ofthe problem. Relationships such as distance fromone point to another, distance from a point to aline, slope of a line, the Pythagorean theorem,etc., will be used to solve various problems.
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the circledescribed by the three points (2, 8), (5, 7), and(6, 6). Use a method other than that used in theprevious example problem.
SOLUTION: A different method of solvingthis problem results from the reasoning in thefollowing paragraphs.
The center of tne desired circle will be theintersection of the perpendicular bisectors ofthe chords connecting points (2, 81 with (5, 7)and (5, 7) with (6, 6), as shown in Zigure 10-7(B).
The perpendicular bisector of the line con-necting two points is the locus of a point which
( A )
moves so that it is always equidistant from thetwo points. Using this analysis we can get theequations of the perpendicular bisectors of thetwo lines.
Equating the distance formulas which de-scribe the distances from a point (x,y), which isequidistant from the points (2,8) and (5,7),gives
or
j(x _2)2 8)2 i(c 5)2 7)2
Squaring both sides glves
(x - 2)2 + & - 8)2 = (x - 5)2 + - 7)2
2 2- 4x + 4 + yx - 16y + 64 =
x2 - 10x + 25 + y2 - 14y2 + 49
Canceling and combining terms results in
or6x - 2y = 6
3x - y = 3
( )
Figure 10-7.Circle described by three points.
142
Chapter 10 CONIC SECTIONS
Follow the same procedure for the points(5, 7) and (6, 6).
vfix 5)2 27 1/(X - 6)2 + (y - 6)2
Squaring each side gives
(x - 5)2 + (y - 7)2 = (x - 6)2 + (y - 6)2
x2 - 10x + 25 + y2 + 14y + 49 =
x2 - 12x + 36 + y2 - 12y + 36
Canceling and combining terms gives a secondequation in x and y.
Or
2x - 2y = -2
x - y = -1
Solving the equations simultaneously will givethe coordinates of the intersection of the twoperpendicular bisectors; this is the center ofthe circle.
3x - y = 3
x - y = -1 (Subtract)
2x = 4
x = 2
Substitute the value x = 2 in one of the equa-tions to find the value of y.
= 3
Thus, the center of the circle is the point (2,3).The radius will be the distance between the
center (2,3) and one of the three given points.Using point (2, 8) we obtain.
r = 1(2 - 2)2 + (8 - = Ar2-3 = 5
143
La,
The equation of this circle is
(x - 2)2 + - 3)2 = 25
as was found in the previous example.If a circle is to be defined by three points
the points must be noncollinear. In some casesit is obvious that the three points are non-collinear. Such is the case with points (1,1),(-2, 2), and (-1, -1), since the points are in quad-rants 1, 2, and 3 respectively and cannot be con-nected by a straight line. However, there aremany cases in which it is difficult to determineby inspection whether or not the points are colli-near, and a methel for determining this ana-lytically is needed. In the followng example anattempt is made to find the circle described bythree points, when the three points are colli-near
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the circlewhich passes through the points (1,1), (2, 2),(3,3).
ZIOLUTION: Substitute the given values of xand y in the standard form of the equation of acircle to get three equations in three unknowns.
x2 + y2 + Bx + Cy + D = 0
For (1,1) 1 + 1 + B + C + D = 0
B + C + D = -2 (9)
For (2, 2) 4 + 4 + 2B + 2C + D = 0
2B + 2C + D = -8 (10)
For (3,3) 9 + 9 + 3B + 3C + D = 0
38 + 3C + D = -18 (11)
To eliminate D, first subtract (9) from (10).
2B+ 2C + Drs -8
B + C + D = -2 (Subtract)
B + C = -6
Next subtract (10) from (11).
3B + 3C + D = -18
2B + 2C + D = -8
(12)
B + C = -10 (13)
4
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Then subtract (13) from (12) to eliminate one ofthe unknowns.
B + C = -6
B + C = -10
0 + 0 = 4
ANSWERS:
1. x2 + y2 - 10x + 4y = 56
2. x2 + y2 - 6x - 14y = 7
3. No solution; the given points describethe straight line y = x.
0 = 4 4. x2 + y2 - 2x + 14y = 75This solution is not valid and there is no cir-cle through the three given points. The readershould attempt to solve (12) and (13) bythe sub-stitution method. When the three given pointsare collinear an inconsistent solution of sometype will result.
If we attempt to solve the problem by eli-minating both B and C at the same time (tofind D) another type of inconsistent solution re-sults. With the given coefficients it is notdifficult to eliminate both A and B at the sametime. First, multiply (10) by 3 and (11) by-2 and add the resultant equations.
6B + 6C + 3D = -24
-6B - 6C - 2D = 36 (+)
D = 12
Then multiply (9) by -2 and add the resultantto (10)
-2B - 2C - 2D = 4
2B + 2C + D = -8
-D = -4
D = 4
This gives two values for D and is in-consistent since each of the constants must havea unique value consistent with the given con-ditions. The three points are on the straightline y = x.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: In each of the prob-lems below find the equation of the circle whichpasses through the three given points.
1. (14,0), (12,4), and (3,7)2. (10,3), (11,8), and (7,14)3. (1,1), (0,0), and (-1,-1)4. (12,-5), (-9,-12), and (-4,3)
144
THE PARABOLA
The parabola is the locus of all points whichare equidistant from a fixed point, called thefocus, and a fixed line called the directrix.In the parabola shown in figure 10-8, the pointV, which lies halfway between the focus of thedirectrix is called the VERTEX of the parabola.In this figure and in many of the parabolasdiscussed in the first portion of this section,the vertex of the parabola will fall atthe origin;however, the vertex of the parabola, like thecenter of the circle, can fall at any point in theplane.
In figure 10-8, the distance from the point(x, y) on the curve to the focus (a, 0) is
I(xa)-2+ y2
The distance from the point (x, y) to the di-rectrix is
x + a
Since by definition these two distances are equalwe may set them equal
- a)2 + y2 = x + aSquaring both sides
a)2 y2 a)2
Expanding
2 - 2ax + a2 2+ y = x2x + 2ax + a2Canceling and combining terms bve an equa-tion for the parabola
y2 = 4ax
Chapter 10--CC.NIC SECTIONS
For every positive value of x in the equa-tion of the parabola there are two values of y.But when x becomes negative the values of yare imaginary. Thus, the curve must be en-tirely to the right of the Y axis when the equa-tion is in this form and a is positive. If theequation is
y2 = - 4 ax
(a negative) the curve lies entirely to the leftof the Y axis.
If the form of the equation is
x2 = 4ay
the curve will open upward and the focus willbe a point on the Y axis. For every positivevalue of y there will be two values of x and thecurve will be entirely above the X axis. Whenthe equation is in the form
x2 = -4ay
Figure 10-8.The parabola.
the curve will open downward, be entirely be-low the X axis, and have as its focus a point onthe negative Y axis. Parabolas which are rep-resentative of the four cases given here areshown in figure 10-9.
When x is equal to a in the equation
it follows that
and
y2 = 4ax
2= 4a2
y
y = 2a
This value of y is the height of the curve at ttefocus or the distance from the focus to pointD in figtire 10-8. The width of the curve at thefocus is the distance from point D to point D'in the figure and is equal to 4a. This width iscalled the LATUS RECTUM in many texts; how-ever, a more descriptive term is FOCAL CHORDand both terms will be used in this course. Thelatus rectum is one of the properties of a par-abola which is used in the analysis of a par-abola or in the sketching of a parabola.
EXAMPLE: Give the value of a, the lengthof the focal chord, and the equation of the par-abola which is the locus of all points equi-distant from the point (3,0) and the line x -3.
SOLUTION: First plot the given informationon a coordinate system as shown infigure 10-10(A). Reference to figure 10-8 shows that thepoint (3, 0) corresponds to the position of thefocus and that the line x = -3 is the directrix
X of the parabola. Figure 10-8 also shows thatthe value of a is equal to one half of the distancefrom the focus to the directrix or, in thisproblem, one half the distance from x = -3 tox = 3. Thus, the value of a is 3.
The second value required by the problemis the length of the focal chord. As statedpreviously, the focal chord length is equalto 4a. The value of a was found to be 3 sothe length of the focal chord is 12. Refer-ence to figure 10-8 shows that one extremityof the focal chord will be a point on the curvewhich is 2a or 6 units above the focus, and theother extremity is a second point 2a or 6 unitsbelow the focus. Using this information andre-calling that the vertex is one-half the distance
145
148
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Isa4ay
(C )
DIRECTRIX
rso
FOCUS(o,,413
(D)
Figure 10-9,Farabolss corresponding to four forms of the equation.
148
. 149
x 2-4oy
x
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
(3,0)X
(C)
(B)
F
3,0)
DI
X
Figure 10.10.Sketch of a parabola.
(0)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
from the focus to the directrix, plot three morepoints as shown in figure 10-10 (B).
Now a smooth curve through the vertex andthe two points that are the extremities of thefocal chord is a sketch of the parabola in thisproblem. (See fig. 10-10 (C).)
To find the equation of the hyperbola refer tofigure 10-10 (D) and use the procedure usedearlier. We know by definition that any pointP(x, y) on the parabola is equidistant from thefocus and directrix.Thus we equate these two distances and
a)2+ y2 = x + a
However, we have found the distance a to beequal to 3 so we substitute and
(x - 3)2 + y2 x + 3
Square both sides
(x - 3)2 + y2 = (x + 3)2
Expand
x2 - 6x + 9 + y2 = x2 + 6x + 9
Cancel and combine terms to obtain the equa-tion of the parabola
y2 = 12x
If we check the consistency of our findings,we see that the form of the equation and thesketch agree with figure 10-9 (A). Also, the 12in the right side of the equation corresponds tothe 4a in the general form and is correct sincewe determined that the value of a was 3.
NOTE: When the focus of a parabola lies onthe Y axis, the equated distance equation is
(iryF 2)2 + x2 = y + a
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Give the equation,the value of a, and the length of the focal chordfor the parabola which is the locus of all pointsequidistant from the point and line given in thefollowing problems.
1. The point (-2,0) and the line x = 22. The point (0,4) and the line 3? = -4
148
3. The point (0,-1) and the line y = 14. The point (1,0) and the line x = -1
ANSWERS:
1. y2 1111. -8x, a = -2, f.c. = 8
2. x2 = 16y, a = 4, f.c. = 16
3. x2 = -4y, a = -1, f.c. = 4
4. y2 = 4x, a = 1, Lc. = 4
FORMULA GENERALIZATION
All of the parabolas in the preceding sectionhad the vertex at the origin and the correspond-ing equations were in one of four forms asfollows:
1. y2 = 4ax
2. y2 = -4ax
3. x2 = 4ay
4. x2 = -4ay
In this section we will present four moreforms of the equation of a parabola, generalizedto consider a parabola with a vertex at point V(h,k). When the vertex is moved from the originto a point V(h,k) the x and y terms of the equationare replaced by (x h) and (y - k). Then thegeneral equation for the parabola which opens tothe right (fig. 10-to (A)) is
(y - k)2 = 4a(x - h)
The four general forms of the equations forparabolas with vertex at the point V(h,k) are asfollows:
1. (y - k)2 = 4a (x - h), corresponding toy2 = 4ax, parabola opens to the right
2. (y - k)2 = -4a (x h), corresponding toy2 = -4ax, parabola opens to the left
151
c hapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
3. (x - h)2 4a (y - k), corresponding tox2 = 4ay, parabola opens upward
4. (x - 102 = -4a (y - k), corresponding to
x2 = -4ay, parabola opens downward.
The method for reducing an equation to oneof these standard forms is similar to the methodsused for reducing the equation of a circle.
EXAMPLE: Reduce the equation
y2 - 6y - 8x + 1 = 0to standard form.
SOLUTION: Rearrange the equation so thatthe second degree term and any first degreeterms of the same unknown are on the left side.Then group the unknown term which appears onlyin the first degree and all constants on the right.
y2 - 6y = 8x -1
Then complete the square in y
y2 - 6y + 9 = 8x - 1 + 9
(y - 3)2 = 8x + 8
To get the equation in the form
(y - k)2 = 4a(x h)
factor an 8 out of the right side. Thus
(y - 3)2 z 8(x + 1)
is the equation of the parabola.PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Reduce the equa-
tions given in the following problems to stan-dard form.
1. + 4 ag 4y
2. y2 - 4x = 6y + 9
3. 4x + 8y + y2 + 20 = 0
4. 4x - 12y + 40 + x2 = 0
ANSWERS:
1. x2 = 4(y - 1)
2. (y - 3)2 = 4x
3. (y + 4)2 = -4(x + 1)
4. (x + 2)2 = 12(y - 3)
THE ELLIPSE
An ellipse is a conic section with an eccen-tricity less than one.
Referring to figure 10-11, let
PO = a
FO = c
OM = d
where F is the focus, 0 center,-and P and13' are points on the ellive. Then from the de-finition of eccentricity,
149
- a-c=ed- ead a
a + cd+ a =e a+ c=ed+ ea
Addition and subtraction of the two equationsgive:
2c = 2ae or c = ae
2a = 2de or d =
Place the center of the ellipse at the originso that one focus lies at (-ae,0) and one directrixis the line x = -a/e.
Referring to figure 10-12, there will be a pointon the Y axis which will satisfy the conditionsfor an ellipse. Let
(14)
2
P"O = b
FO = c
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Then
Figure 10-11.Development of focusand directrix.
P"F = 1b2 + c2
and the ratio of the distance of P" from thefocus and the directrix is e so that
2+ c2
= ea
Multiplying both aides by ale gives
jb2 c2
b2 + c2 = a2
Iia2 c2so that
(15)
Now combining equations (14) and (15) gives
b = ia2 a2e2
and the distance from (x, y) to the directrixax = is
The ratio of these two distances is equal to e'so that
or
j(x + ae)2+ y2
a
+ ae)2+ y2 = e +
= ex + a
Squaring both sides gives
x2 + 2aex + a2e2+ y2 = e 2x2 + 2aex a2
Canceling like terms and transposing terms in xto the left-hand side of the equation gives
x2 - e2 x2 + y2 = a2 - a2e2
Removing a common factor,
x2(1 - e2) +y2 a2(1 e2)
(17)
LI =MO MO .M.M.IM 1M ON. =0 ANO .= IMO 41.1MO gol
or /.b = ±a117.72 (16) e/
Refer to figure 10-13. If the point (x, y) is i1 eon the ellipse, the ratio of its distance from F 6 co f .1to its distance from the directrix will be e: The
i .distance from (x, y) to the focus (-ae,0) will be MI P Fft
cI
(x + ae)2 + y2
160
'163
Figure 10-12.Focus directrix,and point P".
PIO
0 X
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
Dividing equation (17) through by the right-hand member
'2 2
+ 1a a2(1 - e2
)
From equation (16) we obtain
b = ±a ii-=?2(1 - e2)
= b2
a
so that the equation becomes
(18)
This is the equation of an ellipse in standardform. In figure 10-14, a is the length of thesemimajor axis and b is the length of the semi-minor axis.
The curve is symmetrical with respect to thex and y axes, so that it is easily seen that ithas another focus at (ae,0) and a correspondingdirectrix x = a/e.
The distance from the center through thefocus to the curve is always designated a and iscalled the semimajor axis. This axis maybe ineither the x or y direction. When it is in the ydirection, the directrix is a line with the equa-tion
y = k
Figure 10-I3.The ellipse.
X aae
-0IRECTRICESI
X s a-r
MAJORAXIS
Figure 10-14. Ellipse showing axes.
In the case we have studied, the directrixwas denoted by the formula
x = k
where k is a constant equal to - a/e.The perpendicular distance from the midpoint
of the major axis to the curve is called the semi-minor axis and is always signified by b.
The distance from the center of the ellipse tothe focus is called c and in any ellipse the follow-ing relations hold for a, b, and c
c = ja2 - b2
b = ia2 - c2
1)32 c2
Whenever the directrix is a line with the equa-tion y =k the major axiswillbe in the y directionand the equation of the ellipse will be as follows:
(19)
Otherwise everything remains as before andthe equation is given by (18).
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
In an ellipse the position of the a2 and b2terms indicate the orientation of the ellipseaxis. As shown in figure 10-14 the value isthe semimajor or longer axis.
In the previous paragraphs formulas weregiven which related a, b, and c and, in the firstportion of this discussion, a formula relating a,co and the eccentricitywas given. These relation-ships will be used to find the equation of anellipse in the following example.
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the ellipsewith center at the origin and having foci
2 VA6t
(±2 .4,0) and an eccentricity equal to 7
SOLUTION: With the focal points on the xaxis the ellipse is oriented as in figure 10-14and the standard form of the equation is
x2 2
-aT Il32= 1
With the center at origin the numeratorsof the fractions on the left are y2 and y2 sothe problem is to find the values of a and b.
The distance from the center to either ofthe foci is the value c (fig. 10-14) so in thisproblem
c = ±2
from the given coordinates of the foci.The values of a, c, and e (eccentricity) are
related by
or
c = ae
From the known information, substitute thevalues of c and e
a = *2 473
2E3
a = *2 4.rg x 7
2 laand a = *7
a2 = 49
Then, using the formula
b = a -TT- c9-
or
b2 = a 2 - c2
and substituting for a2 and c2
b2 = 49 - (±2 1.)2
b2 = 49 - (4 x 6)
b2 = 49 - 24
gives the final required value of
b2 = 25
Then, the equation of the ellipse is2 2x
49 25
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Find the equationof the ellipse with center at the origin and forwhich the-following properties are given.
1. Foci at (± 117/, 0) and an eccentricity
of 4
152
2. b = 5, e
3. a=7,eANSWERS:
1
2
3.
2IL42
2
+
+
+
.2=
=
=
1
1
1
32
.,2
25
2
36
x2
72 2
ELLIPSE AS A LOCUS OF POINTS
An ellipse may be defined as the locus ofa point which moves so that the sum of its
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
distances from two fixed points is a constantequal to 2a.
Let the foci be F1 and F2at (±ae,0), as shownin figure 10-15, and let the directrices be
e
Then
F, P = e a - xj = a - ex
F2P = e +
so that
= a + ex
F1P + F2P = a - ex + a + ex
F1P + F2P = 2a
Whenever the center of the ellipse is at somepoint other than (0,0), say at the point (h,k),figure 10-16, the equation of the ellipse must bemodified to the following form
- h)2 - k)2
a2 b2 1 (20)
Subtracting h from the value of x reduces thevalue of the term (x - h) to the value which xwould have if the center were at the origin. Theterm (y - k) is identical in value to the valuecf y if the center were at the origin.
REDUCTION TO STANDARD FORM
Whenever we have an equation in the form
Ax2 + Cy2 + Dx + Ey + F = 0 (21)
where the capital letters refer to independentconstants and A and C have the same sign, wecan reduce the equation to the standard form foran ellipse. Completing the squares in x and yand performing a few simple algebraic trans-formations will change the form to that of equa-tion (20).
THEOREM: An equation of the second degree,in which the.xy terAn is missing and the co-efficients of ic4 and yh are different but have thesame sign, represents an ellipse with axesparallel to the coordinate axes.
Figure 10-15.Ellipse, center at origin.
EXAMPLE: Reduce the equation
4x2 + 9y2 - 40x - 54y + -145 = 0
to the standard form of an ellipse.SOLUTION: Collect terms in x and y and re-
move the common factors of these terms.
4x2 - 40x + 9y
2 - 54y + 145 = 0
4(x2 - 10x) + 9(y2 - 6y) + 145 = 0
Transpose the constant terms and completethe squares in x and y. When there are factoredterms involved in completing the square, as inthis example, an error is frequently made. The
153
0
Figure 10-Ie.Ellipse, center at (h,k).
X
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
factored value operates on the term added in-side the parentheses as well as the originalterms. Therefore, the values added to the rightside of the equation will be the product of thefactored value and the term added to completethe square.
Complete the square in x noting that there willbe a product added to the right side
32 20x 100) 2 (100)+ + + y - -Oh t
3 9
4(x2 - 10x + 25) 9(y2 - 6y + 9)
= -145 + 4(25) + 9(9)
= -145 + 100 + 81
= 36
4(x - 5)2 + 9(y - 3)2 = 36
3lo 2
300x + y2 =+
2 y2
-32 +
-288 +9 300
Divide through by the right-hand (constant)term. This reduces the right member to 1 asrequired by the standard form.
4(x - 5)2+
90 - 3)2 1
- 5)2 (y - 3)29 4
This reduces to the standard form
(x - 5)2 ( - 3)220)2 (2)
1
Corresponding to equation (20) and represents anellipse with the center at (5,3), its semimajoraxis (a) equal to 3, and its semiminor axis (b)equal to 2.
EXAMPLE: Reduce the equation
3x2+ y2 + 20x + 32 = 0
to the standard form of an ellipse.SOLUTION: .First, collect terms in x and y.
Ai in tht previous example, the coefficients ofe and yzmust be reduced to 1 in order to facili-tate completing the square. Thus the coefficientof the xz term is divided out of the two termscontaining x, as follows:
3x2 + 20x + y2 4- 32 = 0
2 20x3 ( )x + + y2 = -32
3
154
157
10 2 12-02 +
0 2 43 (x + 1 -Tr + y =
Divide through by the right-hand term.
+3
10)23/
43
9 \(x 10)
2
4
2Z_ =4
2( 10) 23 + 1=
(1)
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
This reduces to the standard form
= 1
= 1
PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Express the fol-lowing equations in the standard form for anellipse.
1. 5x2 - 110 x + 4y2 + 425 ?, 0
2. x2 - 14x + 36y2 - 216y + 337 = 0
3. 9x2 - 54x + 4y2 + 16y + 61 = 0
4. 3x2 - 14x + 4y2 + 11 = 0
ANSWERS:
(X - 11)2 y2 9 = 1
(6)2
2 2
2. 1(6)
(x - 3)2 4. (y+ 2)2 1
3. (3)2
2+ y--- =
/2 .5\\ 3 )
1
THE HYPERBOLA
A hyperbola is a conic section with an ec-centricity greater than one.
The formulas
c = ae
and
d =
developed in the section concerning the ellipsewere derived so that they hold true for any valueof eccentricity. Thus, they hold true for thehyperbola as well as for an ellipse. Since e isgreater than one for a hyperbola, then
c ae and c > a
d and d < a
Therefore c >a >d.According to this analysis, if the center of
symmetry of a hyperbola is the origin, the fociwill lie farther from the origin than the direc-trices. An inspection of figure 10-17 shows thatthe curve will never cross the Y axis. Thus,the solution for the value of b, the semiminoraxis of the ellipse will yield no real value forb. In other words, b will be an imaginerynumber. This can easily be seen from theequation
b = 1a2 - c2
since c > a for a hyperbola.However, we can square both sides of the
above equation, and since the square of animaginary number is a negative real mimber wewrite
or
155
-b2 = a2 - c2
and, since c = ae,
58
.o2= c2 - a2
b2 = a2e2 - a2 = a2 (e2 - 1)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
X
0
Figure 10-17.The hyperbola.
Now we can use this equation to obtain the equa-tion of a hyperbola from the following equationwhich was developed in the sectionon the ellipse.
2 2x 4. - 1a2 a2( 21 - e)
and since
a2(1 - e2) = -a(e2 - 1) = -b2
we have
2 2x
a2b2
This is a standard form for the equation ofa hyperbola. The solution of this equation fory gives
by ±- X - aa
wilich shows that y is imaginary only whenx4 < a2. The curve, therefore, lies entirelybeyond the two lines x = *a and crosses the xaxis at x = *a.
The two straight lines
bx+ay2=Oandbx-ay= (22)
can be used to illustrate an interestingpropertyof a hyperbola. The distance from the linebx - ay = 0 to a point (x1, yi) on the curve isgiven by
d =bx
1- ay
1
a + b(23)
Since (xi , ) is on the curve, its coordinatessatisfy the Ligation
b2x12 - a2y12 = a2b2
which may be written
or
(bx1
- ay 1) (bx1
+ ay 1) = a2b2
bx - ay -1 1 bx1 + ay1
Now substituting this value into equation (23),gives us
a2b2
d = a2b2
1a2 b2 (13x1 ay))1
As the point (x1, yi) is chosen farther andfarther from the center of the hyperbola, theabsolute values for xi and yi will increase andthe distance d will approach zero. A similarresult can easily be derived for the linebx + ay = 0.
The lines of equation (22) which are usuallywritten
y = x and y = +xa a
are called the asymptotes of the hyperbola. Theyare very important in tracing a curve and study-ing its properties. The asymptotes of a hyper-bola, figure 10-18, are the diagonals of the rect-angle whose center is the center of the curve andwhose sides are parallel and equalto the axes of
156
159
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
the curve. The latus rectum of a hyperbola is
equal to 2b2
Another definition of a hyperbola is the locusof a point that moves so thatthe difference of itsdistances from two fixed points is constant, Thefixed points are the foci and the constantdifference is 2a.
The nomenclature of the hyperbola is slightlydifferent from that of an ellipse. The trans-verse axis is 2a or the distance between the in-tersections of the hyperbola with its focal axis.The conjugate axis is 2b and is perpendicular tothe transverse axis.
Whenever the foci are on the Y axis and thedireetrices are lines of the form y=*.k, where kis a constant, the equation of the hyperbola willread
x21
a2
b
This equation represents a hyperbolawith itstransverse axis on the Y axis, Its asymptotesare the lines by - ax = 0 and by + ax = 0.
ANALYSIS OF THE EQUATION
The properties of the hyperbola most oftenused in analysis of the curve are the foci, direc-trices, length of the latus rectum, and the equa-tions of the asymptotes.
Reference to figure 10-17 shows thatthefociare given by the points F1 (c,0) and F2 (-c,0)when the equation of the hyperbola is inthe form
2 2
a2 b2
If the equation were
2 2
b2 a2the foci would be the points (0,c) and (0,-c).The value of c is either determined from the for-mula
1
or the formula
c22
= a2 + b
c = ae
ay cbx
0
Figure 10-18.Using asymptotes to sketch a hyperbola.
157
160
X
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 10-17 also shows that the directricesare the lines x = ± or, in the case where thehyperbolas open upward and downward, yThis is also given earlier in this discussion
aas d =
The equations of the asymptotes are givenearlier as
bx + ay = 0 and bx - ay = 0Or
y = --a x and y = +xa
It was also pointed out that the length of the latus2b 2rectum is equal to
The properties of a hyperbola can be deter-mined from the equation of a hyperbola or theequation can be written given certainproperties,as shown in the following examples. In theseexamples and in the practice problems immedi-ately following, all of the hyperbolas consideredhave their centers at the origin.
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of thehyperbola with an eccentricity of 3/2, directricesx = *4/3, and foci at (±3,0).
SOLUTION: The foci lie on the X axis at thepoints (3,0) and (-3,0) so the equation is of theform
2 2
'`a2 b2
This fact is also shown by the equation of thedirectrices.
Before proceeding with the problem one pointshould be emphasized: in the basic formula forthe hyperbola the a2 term will always-be the de-nominator for the x2 term and the b2 term thedenominator for the y2 term. The orientation ofthe axis of symmetry is not dependent onthe sizeof a2 and bz as in the ellipse; it lies along orparallel to the axis of the positive x4 or y2term.Since we have determined the form of the equa-tion and since the. center of the curve in thissection is restricted to the origintheproblem isreduced to finding the values of a2 and b2
First, the foci are given as (±3,0) and sincethe foci are also the points (±c,0) it follows that
c = ±3
The eccentricity is given and the value of a2can be determined from the formula
c = ae
a
a ±63
a = ±2
a2 = 4
The relationship of a, b, and c for thehyperbola is
and
b2 = c2 - a2
b2 = (±3)2 - (±2)2
b2 = 9 - 4
b2= 5
When these values are substituted in the equa-tion
the equation
2 2x _ =
a2b2
2 2L.4 5
results and is the equation of the hyperbola.The equation could also be found by the use
of other relationships which utilize the giveninformation.
The directrices are given as
158
X =3
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
and, since and, when a > 0
or
d = ae
a = de
Substituting the values given for d and e resultsin For a < 0
a = *1 (1)
a = 1 (-0
a = 2 Then
When d > 0
c = 2 (2)2
c = 3
c = -2 (1)2
c = -3
When d < 0 c = *3
therefore
and
4a3
a = -2
(-0
a = *2
a2 = 4
While the value of c can be determined by thegiven information in this problem, it could alsobe computed since
With values for a and c computed, the valueof b is found as before and the equation can bewritten.
EXAMPLE: Find the foci, directrices,eccentricity, length of the latus rectum, andequations of the asymptoten of the hyperboladescribed by the equation
2 2x y_ i9 16 a
SOLUTION: This equation is of the form
2 225__ y_a2 b2
and the values for a and bare determined by in-c = ae spection to be
and a has been found to equal *2 and e is given as3 then2 '
3c =*2 ()2
and
159
a2= 9
a = *3
b2
= 16
b =*4
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
With a and b known, find c by using theformula
b2 = c2 - a2
c 2 = a2 + b2
c = ± Ia2 + b2
c = ± VT) -Th
c = ±
c = ±5From the form of the equation we know that thefoci are at the points
F1(c' 0)
and
F (-c 'so the foci = (±5,0).
When a > 0
and when a < 0
x = -3 (1)5
so the directrices are the lines
The eccentricity is found by the formula ±9x =c
e - -a-
±5e = 1-3
5e =
Reference to figure 10-17 shows that with thecenter at the origin, c and a will have the samesign.
The directrix is found by the formula
d
or, since this equation will have directricesparallel to the Y axis, use the formula
ax e Finally, the equations of the asymptotes are theequation of the two straight lines
Then
The latus rectum (1. r. ) is found by
2b21. r. = To-
1. r.
1. r.
2(16)3
32=3
x = ±3 (1)5
and
160
163
bx + ay = 0
bx - ay = 0
Chapter 10-CON/C SECTTONS
In this problem, substituting the values of aand d in the equation gives
4x + 3y = 0
4x - 3y = 0
4x ± 3y = 0
The equa!dons of the lines asymptotic to the
curve can also be written in the form
and
or
and
aIn this form the lines are
4Y = -3 x
and4y = - ix
or4y = ±
If we think of this equation as a form of theslope intercept formula
y = mx + b
from chapter 9, the lines would have slopes of
1± -a and each would have its Y intercept at the
origin as shown in figure 10-18.PRACTICE PROBLEMS:1. Fine the equation of the hyperbolawith an
eccentricity of 4, directrices x = ± r, and fociat (±111, 0).
2. Find the equation of the hyperbola with aneccentricity of 5/3, foci at (±510), and directricesx = ± 9/5.
Find the foci, directrices, eccentricity, equa-tions of the asymptotes, and length of the latusrectum of the hyperbolas given in problems 3and -4.
3.
4.
2x 21
= 1
9
2
9
2-
9 4
161
ANSWERS:
1. x2 - y2 = 1
,2 ..22. -a- 1
9 16
3. foci = (*3 V-2,0);eccentricity = VI; 1.r. = 6;
4. foci = (* Nir.310);
eccentricity = r.* 3y = 0.
directrices, x =S-3y
asymptotes x* y = 0.
directrices x;
8'=
3- asymptotes 2x
The hyperbola can be represented byanequation in the form
Ax2 + Cy2 + Dx + Ey + F = 0
where the capital letters refer to independentconstants and A and C hav e different signs. Theseequations can be reduced to standard form inthesame manner in which similar equations for theellipse were reduced to standard form. Thegeneral forms of these standard equations aregiven by
and
(x - h)2 (y - k)2
1a
(y - k)2 (x - h)2_ L
a
POLAR COORDINATES
So far we have located a point in a plane bygiving the distances of the point from two per-pendicular lines. The location of a point can bedefined equally well by noting its distance andbearing. This method is commonly used aboardship to show the position of another ship ortarget. Thus, 3 miles at 350 locates the posi-tion of a ship relative to the course of the shipmaking the reading. We can use this methodto develop curves and bring out their properties.Assume a fixed direction OX and a fixed point0 on the line in figure 10-19. The position ofany point P is fully determined, if we know thedirected distance from 0 to P and the angle thatthe line OP makes with reference line OX. Theline OP is called the radius vector and the angle
1.64:
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
PDX is the polar angle. The radius vector is EXAMPLE: Change the equationdesigned P while 0 is the angle designation.
2Point 0 is the pole or origin. As in conven- y =tional trigonometry, the polar angle is positivewhen measured counterclockwise and negative from rectangular to polar coordinates.when measured clockwise. However, unlike the SOLUTION: Substitute p cos 0 for xand P sinconvention established in trigonometry, the 0 for y so that we haveradius vector for polar coordinates is positiveonly when it is laid off on the terminal sideof the angle. When the radius vector is laidoff on the terminal side of the ray produced be-yond the pole (the given angle plus 180°) anegative value is assigned the radius vector.For this reason, there may be more than oneequation in polar coordinates to describe agiven locus. The concept of a negative radiusvector is utilized in some advanced mathematics.For purposes of this course the concept is notexplained or used. It is sufficient that thereader remember that the convention of analways positive radius vector is not followedin someloranches of mathematics.TRANSFORMATION FROM CARTESIANTO POLAR COORDINATES
At times it will be simpler to work with theequation of a curve in polar coordinates than incartesian coordinates. Therefore, it is im-portant to know how to change from one systemto the other. Sometimes both forms are useful,for 3ome properties of the curve may be moreapparent from one form of the equation and otherproperties more evident from the other.
Transformations are made by applying thefollowing equations which can be derived fromfigure 10-20.
x = p cos 0
Y = P sin 0
p2 = X2 + y2
tan =
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
Figure 10-19. Defining the polar coordinates.
162
165
or
p sine = p2 cos2a
sine = p cos20
sin 0P =
cos20
p = tan 6 sec@
EXAMPLE: Express the equation of thecircle with its center at (a,0) and with a radiusa, as shown in figure 10-21.
(x - a)2+ y2 = a2
in polar coordinates.
Figure 10-20.Cartesian and polarrelationship.
Chapter 10CONIC SECTIONS
SOLUTION: First, expanding this equationgives us
x2 2ax + a2+ y2 = a2
Rearranging terms we have
x2 + y2 = 2ax
The use of equation (26) gives us
p2 = 2ax
and applying the value of x given by equation(24), results in
p2 = 2ap cos
Dividing through by p we have the equation of acircle with its center at (a,0) and radius a inpolar coordinates
p = 2a cos 9
TRANSFORMATION FROM POLARTO CARTESIAN COORDINATES
In order to transform to an equation incartesian or rectangular coordinates from anequation in polar coordinates use the followingequations which can be derived from figure10-22.
cos =
sin 0 =
tan 9 =
sec 9
csc 8
cot 0
(28)1/ x2 y2
(29)
lef X y
(30)
ix2 + y2
(31)
+ v2 (32)
slx2 + y2(33)
x(34)
EXAMPLE: Change the equation
p = sec 9 tan 8
to an equation in rectangular coordinates
SOLUTION: Applying relations (28), (31),and (32) to the above equation gives
2 21/7-4. y2k x/
Dividing both sides by 11-c-2-7/4y , we obtain
or2y = x
which is the equation we set out to find.
Chinge the following equationto an equation in rectangular coordinates.
Figure 10-21.--Circle with center (a,0).
163
3P sin - 3 cos 9
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
( x y )
X
Figure 10-22.--Polar to cartesian relationship.
SOLUTION: Written without a denominatorthe polar equation is
p sin 0 -3 p cos e = 3
Using the transformations
p sin 0 = y
p cos 0 = x
we havey - 3x = 3
as the equation in rectangular coordinates.PRACTICE PROBLEMS: Change the equa-
tion in problems 1 through 4 to equations havingpolar coordinates.
1. x2 + y2 = 4
2) a3 x22. (x2 +
3. 3y - 7x = 10
4. y = 2x - 3Change the equations in the following problemsto equations having Cartesian coordinates.
5. p = 4 sin 9
164
6. p = sin A + cos A
7. p = a2
ANSWERS:
1. P = ±2
2. P = a 1.1c',"(TI
103. p = 3 sin 8 - 7 cos 0
-34. P = sine - 2 cost)
5. x2 + y2 - 4y = 0
6. x2 + y2 = y + x
2 27. x + y = a4
CHAPTER 11
TANGENTS, NORMALS, AND SLOPES OF CURVES
AyIn chapter 9, the notation Erc was introducedto represent the slope of a line. The straightline discussed has a constant slope and thesymbol Ay was defined as (y2 - y1) and Axwas defined as (x2 - x1). In this chapter wewill discuss the slope of curves at specificpoints on the curves. We will do this with aslittle calculus as possible but our discussionwill be directed toward the study of calculus.
SLOPE OF A CURVE AT A POINT
In figure 11-1, the slope of the curve isArepresented at two different places by y
TheAxAyvalue of taken on the lower part of the curve
AXwill be extremely close to the actual slope atP1 because P1 lies on a nearly straight portionof the curve. The value of the slope at P2 willbe less accurate than the slope near P1 becauseP2 lies on a portion of the curve which hasmore curvature than the portion of the curvenear 131. In order to obtain an accurate mea-sure of the slope of the curve at each point, assmall a portion of the curve as possible shouldbe used. When the curve is nearly a straightline a very small error will occur when findingthe slope regardless of the value of the incre-ments Ay and.Ax. If the curvature is great andlarge increments are used when finding theslope of a curve, the error will become verylarge.
Thus, it follows that the error can be re-duced to an infinitesimal if the increments arechosen infinitely small. Whenever the slope ofa curve at a given point is desired, the incre-ments Ay and Ax should be extremely small_Consequently, the arc of the curve can be re-placed by a straight line, which determines theslope of the tangent at that point.
It must be understood that when we speakof the tangent to a curve at a specific point weare really considering the secant line, whichcuts a curve in at least two points. This secantline is to be decreased in length, keeping theend points on the curve, to such a small valuethat it may be considered to be a point. Thispoint is then extended to form the tangent tothe curve at that specific point. Figure 11-2shows this concept.
DIRECTION OF A CURVE
If we allow
y = f(x)
to represent the equation of a curve, then
It!xis the slope of the line tangent to the curve
at P (x, y).The direction of a curve is defined as the
direction of the tangent line at any point on thecurve. Let 0 equal the inclination of the tan-gent line; then the slope equals tan 0 and
165
AX
is the slope of the curve at any point P (x, y).The angle 0 1 is the inclination of the tangentto the curve at P1 in figure 11-3. This angleis acute and the value of tan 0 1 is positive.Hence the slope is positive at point P1. Theangle 02 is an obtuse angle and tan 8 2 is neg-ative and the slope at point P2 is negative. Alllines which lean to the right have positiveslopes and all lines which lean to the left havenegative slopes. At point P3 the tangent to thecurve is horizontal and 8 equals 0. Thismeans that
= tan 0
168
4-E = tan 00 = 0ax
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 11-1.Curve with incrementsAy and AX.
St
0 tx
Figure 11-2.Curve with secant lineand tangent line.
X
The fact that the slope of a curve is zerowhen the tangent to the curve at that point ishoriwntal is of great importance in calculuswhen determining the maximum or minimumpoints of a curve. Whenever the slope of acurve is zero, the curve may be at either amaximum or a minimum.
Whenever the inclination of the tangent to acurve at a point is 900, the tangent line is
Figure 11-3.Curve with tangent lines.
vertical and parallel to the Y axis. This re-sulta in an infinitely large slope
61Y = tan 90° = coax
TANGENT AT A GIVEN POINTON THE STANDARD PARABOLA
166
The standard parabola is represented by theequation
y2 = 4ax
Let Pi with coordinates (xi, yi) be a point onthe curve. Choose 13' on the curve,figure 11-4,near the given point so that the coordinates of13' are
(x1
+ ax y1 + ay)
Since P' is a point on the curve
y2 = 4ax
the values of its coordinates may be substi-tuted for x and y. This gives
or
169
(Yi + ay) 2 = 4a(x1 + x)
2 + 2y1 ay + (ay) 2 = 4ax1
+ 4a ax (I)
Chapter 11TANGENTS, NORMALS, AND SLOPES OF CURVES
Figure 11-4.--Parabola.
AySolving for we findAx
(Ay)2
4a AXAX 2y1 2yi
(Ay)2
2a Ax
yl 2y 1
(3)
Before proceeding, a discussion of the term
y)2
AX2y1
in equation (3) is in order. If we solve equation(2) for Ay we find
The point P1(x1, yi) also lies on the curve and thenwe have
2yl = 4axl
2Substituting this value for yi into equation (I)transforms it into
4ax1
+ 2y1
Ay + (Ay)2 = 4ax1
+ 4a Ax
Simplifying we obtain
2y1Ay + (Ay)2 = 4aAx
Divide through by Ax, obtaining
which gives
2y14
4y thol2 4aAx+Ax Ax Ax
2y a 4a (AO2
1 Ax Ax
(2)
and
2y1
Ay + (Ay)2 = 4aAx
Ay(2y1 + Ay) = 4aAx
4aAx"Y 2y1 + ay
Since the denominator -contains a term not de-pendent upon Ay or Ax, as we let Ax approachzero Ay will also approach zero.
NOTE: We may find a value for Ax that willmake Ay luss than 1 and then when y issquared it will approach zero at least as rapidlyas Ax does.
We now refer to equation.(3) again and make2
Azthe statement that we may disregard
since it approaches zero when Ax approacheszero.
Then
167
Ay 2aAx y1
(4)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
The quantityzi is the slope of the line con-
necting Pi and V. From figure 11-4, it isobvious that the slope of the curve at Pi isdifferent from the slope of the line connectingPi and V. y
As Ax and Ay approach zero, the ratio Ax
will approach more and more closely the trueslope of the curve at Pi. We designate theslope by (m). Thus, as Ax approaches zero,equation (4) becomes
ylThe equation for a straight line in the
point slope form is
2a
yl m(x
2aSubstituting for m gives
Yi
Y -2a
y = (x - X )1 Y1
1
Clearing fractions we have
2yyi yi = 2ax - 2ax1 (5)
but2
yl 4axl
Adding equations (5) and (6) yields
yyi = 2ax + 2ax1
Dividing by y1 gives
(6)
2ax 2ax1
Yyl Y1
which is an equation of a straight line in theslope intercept form. This is the equation of
the tangent line to the parabola
y2 = 4ax
at the point (x1, y1).
EXAMPLE: Given the equation
y2 = 8x
find the slope of the curve and the equation ofthe tangent line at the point (2, 4).
SOLUTION: Put the equation in standardform as follows: Solve for (a) by letting
y2 = 8x
have the form
T hen
168
171
and
y2 = 4ax
4a = 8
a = 2
2a = 4
The slope m at point (2, 4) becomes2a
yl2(2)
4
The slope of the line is 1 and the equation ofthe tangent to the curve at the point (2, 4) is
1
2ax2ax
1
yl Yl
(2) (2) (x) (2) (2) (2)+
= x + 2
This method, used to find the slope andequation of the tangent for a standard parabola,can be used to find the slope and equation ofthe tangent to a curve at any point regardlessof the type of curve. The method can be usedto find these relationships for circles, hyper-bolas, ellipses, and general algebraic curves.
This general method is outlined Is follows:To find the slope (m) of a givell curve at thepoint Pi (xi, yi) choose a second point r onthe curve so that it has coordinates (xi + Ax,
yl 4- Ay) and substitute the coordinates of Irin the equation of the curve and simplify.Divide through by Ax and eliminate termswhichcontain powers of Ay higher than the first power,as previously discussed. Let Ax approach zero
Chapter 11TANGENTS, NORMALS, AND SLOPES OF CURVES
butand -62-- y will approach the absolute value for the
A xslope (m) at point Pl. Finally solve for (m).
When the slope and coordinates of a pointon the curve are known, the equation of thetangent line can be found by using the point andslope method.
EXAMPLE: Using the method outlined, findthe slope and equation of the tangent line to thecurve
x2 + y2 = r2 at (x1, y1) (7)
SOLUTION: Choose a second point P1 suchthat it has coordinates
(x1 + Ax, yi + Ay)
Substitute into equation (7) and
(x1 + Ax)2 + (yi + Ay)2 = r2
thus
2x
1+ 2x
1Ax + (Ax)2
+ y2 + 2y1Ay + (Ay) 2 = r2
1
then
2 22x
1Ax + (Ax)
2 + 2y1Ay + (Ay)2 = r
2 - x1
- y1
2 2 2=r
=0
Divide through by Ax
2x1Ax (442 2371 Ay (A02.
AX "7-6,-7 Ax
and eliminating (Ay)2 results in
2x1 + ax + 2y1 -bati = 0
Solve for as follows:
-2x1 - Ax
AX 2y1
111 =
AX
-2x1
- bix
2y1
Let Ax approach zero and
Now use the point slope form of a straight line-xl
with the slope equal to and find at point(x1 yi)
Rearranging
and
but
y - yl 121(x -xl)
-xi= (x - x )
1
2 2yy1 - y1 = -xix +
2 2YY. = -2{ x + x +
1 1 -v
1
2 2 2x1 + y1 = r
Then, by substitution
= 0= -xix r2
169
and
-x1x r2
+
Y1 Y1
which is the general equation of the tangentline to the curve
r '17 2
x2 + y2 = r2 at (x1, y1)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
EXAMPLE: Using the given method, withminor changes) find the slope and equation ofthe tangent line to the curve
- y2 = k2 at (xi, y1) (8)
SOLUTION: Choose a second point Pi suchthat it has coordinates
(x1 + ax, y1 + py)
Substitute into equation (8) and
(x1
+ ax)2 - (y1
+ ay)2 = k2
and
2 2Xi+ 2xiax+ (Ix)2 - y - 2y1ay- (ay)2k
2 In%
then subtract equation (8) from (9) and obtain
2x1Ax + (ax) 2 - 2y1ay - (ay)2= 0
then divide by Ax and we have
ay2x1
+ - 2y1 -x-
Let Ax approach zero and
(4,y)2
2x1 - 2y1 gc = 0
Solving for zfci results in
ax ylUse the point slope form of a straight line tofind the equation of the tangent line at point(xi, y1) as shown in the following:
y - y1 = m(x - x1)
= m =x
1
= 0
x1Substitute for In
yl
Y1- x 1)
Multiply through by yi and
2 2yy1 - yi = xix xl
Rearrange to obtain
yyl xlx2 2- xi + y1
= x x L2 2)1 19. Y1
Substitute x1
- y1
for k 2 and2 2
yyi = xix - k2
Divide through by y1 to obtain
xlx k2
=
which is the equation and slope desired.PROBLEMS: Find the slope (in) and equa-
tion of the tangent line, in problems 1 through6, at the given points.
2 41. y =
2. y2 = 12x
3. x2 + y2 = 25
4. x2 + y2 = 100
5. x2 - y2 = 9
6. x2 - y2 = 3
7. Find the slope of y = x8. Find the slope of
y = 2x2- 3x + 2ANSWERS:
170
6_1'3
X 4 11. y = + =
2. y = x + 3, m = 13x 25 33.
-3x 254. 4 + -3in
5x 9 5Y t
in T+ 3, tn = 2
7. m = 48. in = 5
2
at (3, 2)
at (3, 8)
al (-3, 4)
al (6, 8)
al (5, 4)
at (2, 1)
at (2, 4)
al (2, 4)
Chapter 11TANGENTS, NORMALS, AND SLOPES OF CURVES
EQUATIONS OF TANGENTSAND NORMALS
In figure 11-5, the coordinates of point P1on the curve are (xi, yi). Let the slope of thetangent to the curve at point Pi be denoted by
ml. Knowing the slope and a point throughwhich the tangent line passes, the equation ofthat tangent line can be determined by usingthe point slope form.
Thus, the equation of the tangent line (MP1)is
y - y1 = m(x - x1)
The normal to a curve at a point (xi, yi) isthe line which is perpendicular to the tangentline at that point. The slope of the normal
1line is then where, as before, the slope
of the tangent line is m1' This is shown in thefollowing:
If
then
Figure 11-5.Curve with tangent andnormal lines.
Notice that if the slope of the tangent ismi and the slope of the normal to the tangentis rn2 and
m1=tan6 1in2nil
m2 = tan (8 + 900)
= -tan [180° - (0 + 90°)]
= -tan (900 - 9)
= -cot 0
1tan 0
1
ml
then the product of the slopes of the tangentand normal equals -1. The relationship be-tween the slopes of the tangent and normalstated more formally is: The slope of thenormal is the negative reciprocal of the slopeof the tangent.
Another approach iu show the relationshipbetween the slopes of the tangent and normalfollows: The inclination of one line must be900 greater than the other. Then
02 = 01 + 900
therefore If
1
2 - tan 82 = m2m1
The equation of the normal through P1 is and
1
yl xl)
171
a174
tan 82 = tan (81 + 900)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
then
sin (01 + 900)tan (01+ 90°)= go )
sin 01 cos 90° + cos 8
1sin 90°
therefore
cos 01 cos 90° - sin el sin90°
cos 01=
sin 01
= - cot 01
1tan 91
1tan 02 -O1
LENGTHS OF SUBTANGENTAND SUBNORMAL
The length of the tangent is defined as thatportion of the tangent line between the pointP1 (xi, yi) and the point where the tangentline crosses the X axis. In figure 11-5, thelength of the tangent is (MP1).
The length of the normal is defined as thatportion of the normal line between the point P1and the X axis, That is (P1R) which is perpen-dicular to the tangent.
The projections of these lines on the Xaxis are known as the length of the subtangent(MN) and the length of the subnormal (NR).
The relationships between the slope of thetangent and the lengths of the subtangent andsubnormal follows:
From the triangle MP1N, in figure 11-5,
and
P N1tan 8 = m =
1 MN
MN = P1Nml
The line segment (MN) is the length of thesubtangent said (PIN) is equal to the verticalcoordinate yi. Therefore, the length of the
ylsubtangent is .
but
and
In the triangle NP1R,
tan 0 = NP1
NR
tan 0 = m1
NR = m1NP
1
1111y1
Therefore, the length of the subnormal is miyi.
From this, as shown in figure 11-5, thelength of the tangent and normal may be foundby using the Pythagorean theorem.
NOTE: If the subtangent lies to the right ofpoint Mt it is considered positive, if to theleft it is negative. Likewise, if the subnormalextends to the right of N it is positive, to theleft it is negative.
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the tan-gent, the equation of the normal, the length ofthe subtangent, the length of the subnormal,and the lengths of the tangent and normal of
2 4y = -5 x at (3, 2)
SOLUTION: Find the value of 2a from
172
Since
then
y2 = 4ax
2 4x3
44a
1a =
2a 2=.1-
4
Chapter 11TANGENTS, NORMALS, AND SLOPES OF CURVES
Thc slope is2
y2a "Y_ 1
m 7- 31
Using the point slope form
5' yl 111(x x1)
then, at point (3, 2)
y - 2 = -13-(x - 3)
x-5
andxy = -5- + 1i
which is the equation of the tangent line.Use the negative reciprocal of the slope
find the equation of the normal as follows:
Y -
then
2 = -3(x - 3)
= -3x + 9
y = -3x + 11
The length of the normal is equal to
hylin1)2 + (3r1)2
=A2
1) + (2)23
9
6.323
to PROBLEMS: Find the equation of the tan-gent and normal, and the lengths of the sub-tangent and subnormal in the following:
1. y2 = 12x,
2. x2 + y2 = 25,
3. x2 - y2 = 9,
4. y = 2x2 - 3x + 2,
ANSWERS:
1. Equation of tangentEquation of normal
Length of subtangent 6
Length Of subnormal
The length of the subtangent is
Y1 2ii-i 1- = 6
1
and the length of the subnormal is
y1m1 = 2(5 = i1) 2
To find the length of the tangent we use thePythagorean theorem. Thus, the length of thetangent is
671)2
1(6)2 (2)2
= V-476
= 6.32
173
at (3, 6)
at (-3, 4)
at (5, 4)
at (1, 1)
y = x + 3y = -x + 9
2. Equation of tangent
Equation of normal
Length of subtangent
6
Y =
Y
163
Length of subnormal 5
3. Equation of tangent
Equation of normal
Length of subtangent
Length of subnormal
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
4. Equation of tangentEquation of normal
Length of subtangent
Length of subnormal
PARAMETRIC EQUATIONS
Equations used previously have been func-tions involving two unknowns such as x and y.The functions have been in either Cartesian orpolar coordinates and have been defined by oneequation. If a third variable is introduced itis called a parameter. When two equationsare used, each containing the parameter, theequations are called parametric equations.
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
To illustrate the application of a parameterwe will assume that an aircraft takes off froma field which we will call the origin. Figure11-6 shows the diagram we will use. The air-craft is flying on a compass heading of duenorth. There is a wind blowing from the westat 20 miles per hour and the airspeed of theaircraft is 40C miles per hour. Let the direc-tion of the positive Y axis be due north and thepositive X axis be due east as shown in figure11-6. Use the scales as shown.
MILES
500
400
300
200
100
10 20 30 40 50
MILES
Figure II-ELAircraft position.
One hour after takeoff the position of theaircraft, represented by point P, is 400 milesnorth and 20 miles east of the origin, If weuse t as the parameter, then at any time t theaircrafts position (x, y) will be given by xequals 20t and y equals 400t.The equations are
and
x = 20t
y = 400 t
and are called parametric equations. Noticethat time is not plotted on the graph of figure11-6. The parameter t is used only to plot theposition (x, y) of the aircraft.
We may eliminate the parameter t to obtaina direct relationship between x and y as follows:
If
then
= 400 61-0
y = 20x
and we find the graph to be a straight line.When we eliminated the parameter the resultwas the rectangular coordinate equation of theline.
MOTION IN A CIRCLE
Consider the parametric equations
x = r cos t
and
y r sin t
These equations describe the position of apoint (x, y) at any time t. They can be trans-posed into a single equation by squaring bothsides of each equation to obtain
174
2 2x = r cos2,
y2 = r2 sin2t
Chapter 11TANGENTS, NORMALS, AND SLOPES OF CURVES
and adding
x2 + y2 = r2 cos2t + r2 sin2t
Rearranging we have
x2 + y2 = r2 (cos2t + sin2t)
cos2t + sin2t = 1
X2 + y2 = r2
but
then
which is the equation of a circle.This means that if various values were
assigned to t and the corresponding values ofx and y were calculated and plotted, the re-sult would be a circle. In other words, thepoint (x, y) moves in a circular path.
Using this example again, that is
By substituting we findr cos t
Ax -r sin t cot t
Comparing this result with equation (7) of theprevious section, we find that in rectangularcoordinates the slope is given as
x1
yl
while in terms of a parameter it is
m = - cot t
OTHER PARAMETRIC EQUATIONS
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the tangentand the normal and the length of the subtangentand the subnormal for the curve representedby
x = t2
and
and given that
and
x r cos t
y = r sin t
Ax=
and
at
given that
and
y = 2t + 1
t = 1
-421 = 2 tA t
m = -r sin t2 At
m = = r cos t1 At
we are able to express the slope at any pointon the circle in terms of t.
AxNOTE: These expressions for AT and lt,Y
may be found by using calculus, but we willaccept them for the present without proof.
If we know -Al and --1-CA we may find AY-At At Ax
leich is the slope of a curve at any point.
That is,
Ay Tt-m = Ax Axat
2At
SOLUTION: Since t equals 1 we write
and
and
then
x = 1
Y = 3
_A/ 2 1
Ax 2t I
=
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
The equation of the tangent line when t is equal we haveto 1 is
y - 3 = 1(x - 1)
y = x + 2
The equation of the normal line is
y - 3 = -1(x - 1)
y = -x + 4
The length of the subtangent is
ylm
The length of the subnormal
yim = (1) (3) = 3
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the tangentand normal and the lengths of the subtangentand subnormal to the curve represented by theparametric equations
and
at the point where
given that
and
x = 2 cos
y = 2 sin
8 = 45°
= -2 sin
m = L = cot 45° = -1Ax
In order to find (x1' y1) we substitute
0 = 45°
in the parametric equations and
x1
= 2 cos 45° = 2 (-I) =2
y1 = 2 sin 450 = 2(4) =
The equation of the tangent is
y = m(x - xi)
Substituting we have
y = -1(x -
or
x + y = 2 Nri
The equation of the normal is
y - = 1(x -
orx y 0
The length of the subtangent is
Y1 r--m 71. v 2
The length of the subnormal isA v = 2 cos 0 yim = (a) (-1) = r2AO
SOLUTION: We know that The horizontal and vertical tangents of acurve can be found very easily when the curve
02. is represented by parametric equations. TheAO 2 cos 0 - cot 0 slope of a curve at any point equals zero when
AX AX -2 sin 8 the tangent is parallel to the x axis. In para-Ao metric equations the horizontal and vertical
tangents can be found easily by settingThen at the point where
0 = 45°
176
179
= 0A t
Chapter 11TANGENTS, NORMALS, AND SLOPES OF CURVES
andAx = 0A t
For the horizontal tangent solve -41f equals
zero for t and for the vertical tangent solveAx equals zero for t.At
EXAMPLE: Find the points of contact of thehorizontal and vertical tangents to the curverepresented by the parametric equations
and
x = 3 - 4 sin 0
y = 4 + 3 cos 0
Plot the graph of the function by taking 0
from 00 to 3600 in increments of 30°.Given that
AX = - 4 cos 0AO
and
= - 3 sin 0Ao
SOLUTION: The graph of the function showsthat the figure is an ellipse, figure 11-7, andconsequently there will be two horizontal andtwo vertical tangents. The coordinates of thehorizontal tangent points are found by firstsetting
This gives
Then
and
- 3 sin 9 = 0
sin 0 = 0
= 0° or 180°
Substituting 0° we have
x = 3 - 4 sin 00
= 3 - 0
= 3
and
y = 4 + 3 cos 0°
= 4 + 3
= 7
Substituting 1800 we obtain
x = 3 - 4 sin 180°
= 3
= 3
and
- 0
y = 4 + 3 cos 180°
= 4 - 3
= 1
The coordinates of the points of contact ofthe horizontal tangents to the ellipse are (3, 1)and (3, 7).
The coordinates of the vertical tangentpoints of contact are found by setting
= 0AO
177
(-1, 4)
( 3 7)
(3,1)
(7,4)
180
Figure 11-7.Ellipse.
X
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
We find
from which
- 4 cos 0 = 0
0 = 90° or 270°
Substituting 900 we obtain
x = 3 - 4 sin 90°
= 3 - 4
= 4
and
y = 4 + 3 cos 900
= 4 + 0
= 4
Substituting 270° gives
x = 3 - 4 sin 270°
= 3 + 4
and
= 7
y = 4 + 3 cos 270°
= 4 + 0
= 4
The coordinates of the points of contact ofthe vertical tangents to the ellipse are (-1, 4)and (7, 4).
PROBLEMS: Find the equations of the tan-gent and the normal and the lengths of the sub-tangents and the subnormal for each of thefollowing curves at the point indicated.
1. x = t3
y = 3tat t = -1
Ax Aygiven At = 3t2 and
2. x = t2 + 8
y = t2 + 1
at t = 2
3.
Ax 162./given = 2t and = 2tat At
x = t2y = t
at t = 141x 1 and
biy = 2tgiven =at t4. Find the points of contact of the hori-
zontal and vertical tangents to the curvex = 2 cos 0
given
178
y = 3 sin 0
-42-c = -2 sin 0A0
3 cos 0
ANSWERS:
1. Equation of tangentEquation of normal
Length of subtangent
Length of subnormal
y = x - 2y = -x - 43
3
2. Equation of tangent y = x - 7Equation of normal y = -x + 17Length of subtangent 5
Length of subnormal 5
3. Equation of tangent
Equation of normal
Length of subtangent
Length of subnormal 2
4. Coordinates of the points of contact ofthe horizontal tangent to the ellipse are(0, 3) and (0, -3) and the vertical tangentto the ellipse are (2, 0) and (-2, 0).
y = 2x - 1-x 3-2- 4- -ff
CHAPTER 12
LIMITS AND DIFFERENTIATION
Limits and differentiation are the beginning ofthe study of calculus, which is an important andpowerful method of computation.
LIMIT CONCEPT
The study of the limit concept is very im-portant as it is the very heart of the theory andoperation of calculus. We will include in thissection the definition of limit, some of the in-determinate forms of limits, and some limitformulas, along with example problems,
We will start with values lying between
and
x = 2
x = 6
indicated by line A in figure 12-1. This intervalmay be written as
0 < I x - 4 1 < 2
DEFINITION OF LIMIT The Corresponding interval for y is between
Before we start differentiation ther e are c er- y = 4tain concepts which we must understand. One ofthese concepts deals with the limit of a function. andMany times it will be necessary to find the valueof the limit of a function. y = 36
The discussion of limits will begin with anintuitive point of view. We now take a smaller interval aboutWe will work with the equation
y = f(x) = x2 x = 4 (line B)
which is shown in figure 12-1. The point P by using values ofrepresents the point corresponding to
and
y = 16
x = 4
and
x = 3
x = 5
The behavior of y for given values of x near and find the corresponding interval for y to bebetweenthe point
x = 4
is the center of the discussion. For the present andwe will exclude the point P which is encircledon the graph.
179
= 9
y = 25
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Interval of
s
Interval of
f(x)
2 - 6 (A) 4 363 - 5 (9) 9 25
3.5 4.5 t3) 12.25 20.25
3.9 4.1 (D) 15.21 16.91
(8)
Figure 12-1.(A) Graph of y = x2;(B) value chart.
These intervals for x and y are written as
0 < lx - 4 1 < 1
and
9 < y <25
As we diminish the interval of x around
x = 4 (line C and line D)
we find the values of
2y = x
to be grouped more and more closely around
y = 16
This is shown by the chart in figure 12-1.Although we have used only afew intervals of
x in the discussion, it should be apparent thatwe can make the values about y group as closelyas we desire by merely limiting the valuesassigned to x about
x = 4
Because the foregoing is true, we may now saythat the limit of x2, as x approaches 4, resultsin the value 16 for y and we write
lim x2 = 16x-4
In the general form we may write
urn f(x) = Lxa
and we mean that as x approaches a, the limit off(x) will approach L and L is called the limit off(x) as x approaches a. No statement is madeabout f(a) for it may or may not exist although thelimit of f(x), as x approaches a, is defined.
If f(x) is defined atx = a
and for all values of x near a, and if the functionis continuous, then
lim f(x) = f(a)xa
We are now ready to define a limit.Let f(x) be defined for all x in the interval
near
x = a
bu . f necessarily at
x = a
180
'1133
Chapter 12LIMITS AND DIFFERENTMTION
Then there exists a nuinber L such that for everypositive number C
11(x) - LI<E
provided that we may find the number 8 such that
0<ix-al< 6Then we say L is the limit of f (x) as x approachesa and we write
lim f(x) = Lx a
This means that for every challenge numberE We must find a number 6 in the interval
0 < Ix- al<6
such that the difference between f(x) and L issmaller than the number e.
EXAMPLE: Suppose we are given
lim x2 + x - 2x 1 x - 1 3
and the challenge number is 0.1.SOLUTION: We must find a number 6 such
that in the neighborhood of
for all points except
x = 1
x = 1
we have the difference betweenf(x) and 3 smallerthan 0.1.We write
and
x2 + x - 2 +0.1x - 1
x2 + x - 2 - 3x - 1
(x1-.21(21.11)x -
and we consider only values where
x 1
Simplifying the first term, we have
181
(x + 2) (x - 1)
Finally, combine terms as follows:
and
or
then
x + 2 - 3 = x - 1
Ix - 11 < 0.1
-0.1 <X 1 < 0.1
0.9 <x<1.1
and we have fulfilled the definition of the limit.If the limit of a function exists and the function
is continuous then
lirn f(x) = f(a)x a
For instance, in order to find thelimit of thefunction x2 - 3x + 2 as x approaches 3, we sub-stitute 3 for x in the function. Then
f(3) = 32 - 3(3) + 2
= 9 - 9 + 2
=2
Since x is a variable it may assume a valueas close to 3 as we wish, and the closer wechoose the value of x to 3, the closer f(x) willapproach the value 2. Therefore, 2 is called thelimit of f(x) as x approaches 3 and we write
lirn (x2 - 3x + 2) = 2x-3
PROBLEMS: Find the limit of each of thefollowing functions.
urn 2x2 - 11. x-1 2x- 1
Lim-2
22. (x - 2x + 3)x
'184
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
3.lim
a a
4. tlim (5t2 - 3f + 2)0
5. Urn E3 - EE 6 E - 1
lim Z2 - 3Z + 26.0 Z - 4
ANSWERS:
1. 12. 33. a - 14. 25. 42
16 -
2
INDETERMINATE FORMS
Whenever the answer obtained by substitu-tion, in searching for the value of a limit,assumes any of the following forms, anothermethod for finding the correct limit must be used.
51 (c4) Of 0°, 0043f 100
These are called indeterminate forms.The proper method for evaluating the limit
depends on the problem and sometimes callsfora high degree of ingenuity. We will restrict themethods of solution of indeterminate forms tofactoring and division of the aimerator and de-nominator by powers of the variable. Later inthe study of limits, L'Hospital's rulewill be usedas a method of solving indeterminate forms.
Sometimes factoring will resolve an indeter-minate form.
EXAMPLE: Find the limit of
x2 - 9- as x approaches 3x 3
SOLUTION: By substitution we find
lim x2 - 9 0x 3 x - 3 0
182
165
which is an indeterminate form and is thereforeexcluded as a possible limit. We must nowsearch for a method to find the limit. Factoringis attempted and results in
x2 - 9 (x + 3) (x -3)x - 3 x - 3
then
= x + 3
urn (x + 3) = 6x-3
and we have a determinate limit of 6.Another indeterminate form is often met when
we try to find the limit of a function as the inde-pendent variable becomes infinite.
EXAMPLE: Find the limit of
x4 + 2x3 - 3x2 + 2x3x4 - 2x2 + 1
as x becomes infinite.SOLUTION: If we let x become infinite in the
original expression the result will be
lim x4 + 2x3 - 3x2 + 2xx
3x4 - 2x2 + 1
co
at)
which must be excluded as an indeterminateform. However, if we divide both mnneratorand denominator by x4 we obtain
2 3 2+ -
lim xX 41. 2 1
1" 4x x
1 + 0 - 0 + 03 - + 0
13
and we have a determinate limit of 13'PROBLEMS: Find the limit of the following:
lim x2 - 41. x 2 Tc7":2
2 lim 2x + 3x IT 71
Chapter 12LIMITS AND DIFFERENTIATION
lim 2a2b - 3ab2 + 2ab3. a 0 5ab - a3b2
lim x2 - x - 64. x-3 x - 3
5lim x4 - a4
x a x - a-
lira (x - a)2 - x26. a 0 aANSWERS:
1. 4
2 17
2 - 3b36
5
4. 5
5. 4a3
6. -2x
LIMIT FORMULAS
To obtain results in calculus we will fre-quently operate with limits. The proofs oftheorems shown in this section will not be givenas they are quite long and demand considerablediscussion.
The theorems will be stated and examples willbe given. Assume that we have three simplefunctions of x.
Further, let these functions have separate limitssuch that
lim u = Ax alirnv=B
a
lim w= Cx a
183
Theorem 1. The limit of the sam of twofunctions is equal to the sum of the limits.
lira [ f(x) + g(x)] = A + Bx a
Um f(x) + lim g(x)
This theorem may be extended to include anynumber of functions such as
lira [f(x) + g(x) + h(x)1 = A B + Cx a
lim f(x) + lira g(x) + llm h(x)xa x aEXAMPLE: Find the limit of
(x - 3)2
SOLUTION:
Um (x - 3)2 =x 3
= 9
= 0
as x-3
Urn (x2 - 6x + 9)x 3
ijin x2- Um 6x+ lira 9x 3 x-3 x 3
- 18 + 9
Theorem 2. The limit of a constant c timesa function f(x) is equal to the constant c timesthe limit of the function.
Um cf(x) = cA = c urn f(x)a x a
EXAMPLE: Find the limit of
2x2 as x-3SOLUTION: Um 2x2 = 2 Um x 2
x-3 x 3= (2) (9)
= 18
Theorem 3. The limit of the product of twofunctions is equal to the product of their limits,
llm f(x) g(x) = ABxa
= f(x) (xlim g(x))\x a a
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
EXAMPLE: Find the limit of
(x2 - (1-23) as x--2
SOLUTION:
urn (x2 - x) (/2i) = ABX 42
= (x2 - x)) (Umx-2 x--2
= (4 - 2) (11)
= 4
3.
4.
ANSWERS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5x4 as x-2 (Theorem 3)
2x2 + x - 4 4)3x - as x-3 (Theorem7
4
21
80
172
Theorem 4. The limit of the quotient of twofunctions is equal to the quotient of their limits,provided the limit of the divisor is not equal tozero.
lim f(x) Axa g(x) B
lim f(x)xalim g(x)xa
if B
EXAMPLE: Find the limit of
3x2 + x - R as x-3
SOLUTION:
3x2 + x - 6x-3 2x - 5
lim 3x2 + x - 6
lim 2 x - 5x-3
= 24
PROBLEMS: Find the limits of the following,using the theorem indicated.
1. x2 + x + 2 as x--1 (Theorem 1)
2. 7(x2 - 13) as x-4 (Theo.am 2)
184
INFINITESIMALS
In chapter 11, the slope of a curve at a givenpoint was found by taking very small incrementsof ay and Ax and the slope was said to be equalto This section will be a continuation ofthis concept.
DEFINITIONS
A variable that approaches .0 as a limit iscalled an infinitesimal. This may be written as
orlim V = 0
V-0and means, as recalled from a previous sectionof this chapter, that the numericalvalue of V be-comes and remains less than any positive chal-lenge number e .
If the
then
lim V = L
lim V - L = 0
which indicates that the difference between avariable and its limit is an infinitegimal. Con-versely, if the difference between a variable anda constant is an infinitesimal, then the variableapproaches the constant as a limit.
EXAMPLE: As x becomes increaSingly1large, is the term an infinitesimal?
Chapter 12LIMITS AND DIFFERENTIATION
SOLUTION: By the definition of itginitesi-1mai, 6 approaches 0 as x increases in value,x"
12 is an infinitesimal. It does this, and is there-
fore an infinitesimal.EXAMPLE: As x approaches 2, is the ex-
pression x2 - 4 - 4 an infinitesimal?x - 2SOLUTION: By the converse of the definition
2 - 4of infinitesimal, if the differencebetween
x
and 4 approaches 0, as x approaches 2, the ex-
pression x2 -24 - 4 is an infinitesimal. Byx-
direct substitution we find an indeterminateform; therefore we make use of our knowledgeof indeterminates, and write
x2 - 4 (x + 2) (x - 2) x + 2x - 2 x - 2
andUrn (x + 2) = 4x--2
The difference between 4 and 4 is 0 and the ex-
x2-- 4pression x 2
- 4 is an infinitesimal, as xapproaches 2.
SUMS
An infinitesimal is a variable that approaches0 as a limit. We state that and 6 , in figure12-2, are infinitesimals because they bothapproach 0 as shown.
Theorem 1. The algebraic sum of any numberof infinitesimals is an infinitesimal.
In figure 12-2, as e and 8 approach 0, noticethat their sum approaches 0 and by definitionthissum is an infinitesimal and the truth oftheorem 1 has been shown. This approach may beused for the sum of any number of infinitesimals.
PRODUCTS
Theorem 2. The product of any number ofinfinitesimals is an infinitesimal.
In figure 12-3, the product of two infinitesi-tnals, and6, is an infinitesimal as shown. The
product of any number of infinitesimals is alsoan infinitesimal by the same approach as shownfor two numbers.
Theorem 3. The product of a constantand aninfinitesimal is an infinitesimal.
This may be shown, in figure 12-3, by holdingeither e or 6 constant and noticing their productas the variable approaches 0.
185
/ /-- / /44
/4,......
Z56........ 0
/4
/ 2 44 C :#5 G/ ...1 ._,/_ _,E.
/6/7 as
/16
/7Ti.
f / S /7 '
256/6 9 i#/ 65
rir/I .5 / 5
af. 6* 6 f 32 256
/ 257 45 ii $ /_
256 256 256 256 256 /28
i'0
\0
Figure 12-2.Sums of infinitesiinals.
Eef I
/44
2/6
/6-71
_Z...
256I
-.1.0
/ / i .?-a tgii di/ / / / / /
:ir # TC 6f 256 /02*
,..i. / / / / /256 /0244 140%/4 n-- Z-F
/ / / / / /644 Pr X /024 Of% low/ / / / /
256 256....4.,
tail 1094 /650 iiis
0 1 NFigure 12-3.--Products of infinitesimals.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2'
CONCLUSIONS then it is said to be discontinuous at
The term irdinitesimal vas used to describe x = athe term As as it approaches zero. The quantityAx was called in increment of : where incrementwas used to imply that we have added a small We will use examples to show the above state-amount to x. Thus x + Ax indicates thatwe are ments,holdi: g x constant and adding a small but varial:Ileamount to which we will call Ax. EXAMPLE: In figure 12-4, is the function
A very small increment is sometimes called adifferential. A small Ax is indicated by dx. The f(x) = x2 + x - 4differential of 0 is dO and that of y is dy. Thelimit of Ax as it approaches zero is of coursezero, bt this does not meanthat the ratio of two continuous at f(2)?uinfinitesimals cannot be a real number or a realfunction of x. For instance, no matter how small SOLUTION:
dxAxis chosen, the ratio will still be equal to 1. f(2) = 4 + 2 - 4dxIn the section on indeterminate forms, a = 2
0method for evaluating the form -6 was shown.This form results whenever the limit takes theform of one infinitesimal over another. In everycase the limit was a real number.
DISCONTINUITIES
The discussion of discontinuities will bebased upon a comparison to continuity which isdefined by:
A function f(x) is continuous at
x = a
if f(x) is defined at
x = a
and has a limit as x--a, as follows:
lim f(x) = f(a)
Notice that for continuity a function must fulfilthe following thre 3 conditions:
1. f(x) is defined at x = a.2. The limit of f(x) exists as x approaches a.
The value of f(x) at x = a is equal to thelimit of f(x) at x = a.
If a function f(x) is not continuous at
and
lim x2 + x - 4 = 2x-2
and
Um f(x) = f(2)x-2
Therefore the curve is continuous at
x = 2
EXAMPLE: In figure 12-5, is the function
x - 2
continuous at f (2) ?
SOLUTION:
f(2) is undefined at
x = 2
and the function is therefore discontinuous at
x = 2
However, by extending the original definitionx = a of f(x) to read
186
,169
Chapter 12.LIMITS AND DIFFERENTIATION
Figure 12-4. Function f(x) = x2 + x -4.
x2 - 4Figure 12-5.Function f(x) =
11. It should be obvious thatthevalue of the tan-2gent at is undefined. Thus thefunctionis saidto be discontinuous at 11.
PROBLEMS: In the following definitions ofthe functions find where the functions are dis-continuous and then extend the definitions so thatthe functions are continuous.
f14) =
24
x - 2' 1. x - 2
4, x = 2
we will have a continuous function at
x = 2
NOTE: The value of 4 at x = 2 was foundby factoring the mnnerator of f(x) and thensimplifying.
A common kind of discontinuity occurs whendealing with the tangent function of an angle.Figure 12-6 is the graph of the tangent as theangle varies from 0° to 90°; that is, from 0 to
lol
2. f(x) 22,2
gm' 3x + 3
3. f(x) = x2 + x - 129x - 9
ANSWERS:
1. x 2, f(2) 3
2. x -3, f(-3) -4
73. x = 3, f(3) am T
490
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
1
1
1
11
I 9,9
1(111 2
0 ) y = f(x)
( 0) As recalled from the discussion of limits,;1 11as Ax is made smaller, Ay gets smaller also,
1
but the radio approaches 20. This is shown1 Ax
and
= = 22Ax 2
AyWe are interested in the ratio because thelimit of this ratio as Ax approaches zero is thederivative of
1
1
1
1
Figure 12-6.Graph of tangent function.
INCREMENTS AND DIFFERENTIATION
In this section we will extend our discus-sion of limits and examine the idea of the deriva-tive, the heart of differential calculus.
We will assume we have a particular func-tion of x, such that
y = x2
If x is assigned the value 10, the correspondingvalue of y will be (10)2 or 100. Now, if we in-crease the value of x by 2, making it 12, we maycall this increase of 2 an increment or Ax. Thisresults in an increase in the value of y and wemay call this increase an increment or Ay. Fromthis we write
y + Ay = (x + Ax)2
= (10 + 2)2
= 144
As x increases from 10 to 12, y increases from100 to 144 so that
Ax = 2
Ay = 44
in table 12-1.
Table 12-1. Slope values.
Variable Values of tl'e variable
ax 2 1 0. 5 0. 2 0.1 0. 01 0.0001
Ay 44 21 10. 25 4.04 2.01 0. 2001 0. On)0001
Ay_ax 22 21 20. 5 20. 2 20.1 20. 01 20.0001
There is a much simpler way to find that thelimit of Atit as Ax approaches zero is, in thisAxcase, equal to 20. We have two equations
and
y + Ay = (x + Ax)2
y = x2
By expanding the first equation so that
y + Ay = x2 + 2x Ax + (4x)2
and subtracting the second from this, we have
= 2x Ax + (4)2
Dividing both sides of the equation by ax gives
= 2x + AxAx
188
isl.
Chapter 12LIMITS AND DIFFERENTIATION
Now, taking the limit as Ax approaches zero
Thus,
lim =Ax--0 AX
(2)
NOTE: Equation (2) is onewayof expressingthe derivative of y with respecttox. Other waysare
= y' = V (x) = D(x) =lim Ay.
Ax--0 Ax
Equation (2) has the advantage that itis exactand true for all values of xt Thus if
then
and if
then
x = 10
= 2 (10) = 20dx
x = 3
= 2(3) = 6dx
This method for obtaining the derivative of ywith respect to x is general and may be formu-lated as follows:
1. Set up the function of x as a function of(x + Ax) and expand this function.
2. Subtract the or iginal function of x from thenew function (x + Ax).
3. Divide both sides of the equation of Ax.4. Take the limit of all the terms in the equa-
tion as Ax approaches zero. The resulting equa-tion is the derivative of f(x) with respect to x.
GENERAL FORMULA
In order to obtain a formula for the deriva-tive of any expression in x, assume the function
y = f(x) (3)
189
1S2
so that
y + Ay + Ax) (4)
Subtracting equation (3) from equation (4) gives
Ay = f(x + Ax) f(x)
and dividing both sides of the equation by Ax wehave
y. f(x + Ax) - f(x)Ax Ax
The desired formula is obtained by taking thelimit of both sides as Ax approaches zero, sothat
or
urn f(x + Ax) - f(x)Ax--0 Ax Ax
lim f(x + Ax) - f(x)dx Ax-,0 Ax
NOTE: The notation 51 is not to be con-dx
sidered as a fraction which has dy for the mimer-ator and dx for the denominator. The expression
-41 is a fraction with Ay as its numeratorand AxAx
as its denominator and gr is a symbol repre-Ay
senting the limit approached by as Ax ap-Ax
proaches zero.
EXAMPLES OF DIFFERENTIATION
In this last section of the chapterwewill useseveral examples of differentiation to obtain afirm understanding of the general formula.
dyEXAMPLE: Find the derivative for theax
functiony = 5x3 3x + 2
and determine the slope of its graph at
X = -1, 41 04 1Draw the graph of the function, as shown infigure 12-7
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
( A )
Expand equation (5), then subtract equation (6)from equation (5) and simplify to obtain
f(x + Ax) - f(x)
= 5 [ 3x2 px + 3x(Ax)2 + (Ax)3] - 3Ax
Divide through by Ax and we have
f(x + Ax) - f(x)Ax
1 = 5 [3x2 + 3xAx + (Ax)2] - 3t
Take the limit of both sides as Ax-- 0 and
2 I1
-2
(B)
lim + Ax)Ax--0 Ax,
X1 2
x - II
-Irr 0I
qr. 1
dy
dx12 0 -3 0 12
Y 0 2.89 2 1.1 4
Figure 12-7.(A) Graph of f(x) = 5x3 - 3x+ 2; (B) chart of values.
SOLUTION: Finding the derivative by for-mula, we have
f(x + Ax) = 5(x + Ax)3 - 3(x + Ax) + 2 (5)
And
f(x) = 5x3 -3x + 2 (6)
then
= 152 - 3dx
Using this derivative let us find the slope ofthe curve at the points given.
Thus we have a new method of graphing anequation. By substituting different values ofx inequation (7) we can find the slope of the curve atthe point corresponding to the value of x.
EXAMPLE: Differentiate the function, that
is' find of
and then find the slope of the curve at
x = 2
SOLUTION: Apply the formula for the de-rivative, and simplify as follows:
190
133
1 1f(x + Ax) - f(x) x + Ax
Ax Ax
Ax
- 1x x + Ax)
Chapter 12LIMITS AND DIFFERENTIATION
Now take the limit of both sides as Ax-0 and
dx x2
In order to find the slope of the curve at thepoint where x has the value 2, substitute 2 for x
dyin the expression for --
1dx 2
1= _
EXAMPLE: Find the slope of the tangent lineon the curve
f(x) = x 4- 4
x = 3
at
SOLUTION: We need to find a which is thedxslope of the tangent line at a given point. Applythe formula for the derivative; then,
f(x + Ax) = (x + Ax)2 + 4
and
f(x) = x2 + 4
Expand equation (8) so that
f(x + Ax) = x2 + 2xAx + (Ax)2 + 4
then subtract equation (9) from equation (8) and
(8)
(9)
f(x + Ax) - f(x) = 2x Ax + (Ax)2
Now, divide through by Ax arid
f(x + Ax) - f(x)Ax
then take the limit of both sides as Ax--0 and
Substitute 3 for x in the expression for the de-rivative to find the slope of the function at
so that
x = 3
slope = 6
In this last example we willsetthe derivativeof the function f(x) equal to zero to find a maxi-mum or minhmun point on the curve. By maxi-mum or minim* _ of a curve we mean the pointor points througn which the slope of the curvechanges from positive to negative orfromnega-tive or positive.
NOTE: When the derivative of a function isset equal to zero this does not mean that in allcases we will have found a maximum or minimumpoint on the curve. A complete discussion ofmaxima or minima may be found in most calcu-lus texts.
We will require that the following conditionsare met:
1. We have a maximum or minimum point.2. The derivative exists.3. We are dealing with an interior point on
the curve.When these conditions are met the derivative
of the function will be equal to zero.EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of the func-
tion
y = 5x3 - 6x2 - 3x + 3
and set the derivative equal to zero and find thepoints of maximum and minimum on the curve,then verify this by drawing the graph of thecurve.
SOLUTION: Apply the formula for 3!as fol-lows:
and
f(x + Ax) =(10)
5(x + Ax)3 - 6(x + Ax)2 - 3(x + Ax) + 3
f(x) = 5x3 - ex2 - 3x + 3 (11)
Expand equation (10) and subtract equation (11),obtaining
191
184
MATBEMATICS, VOLUME 2
f(x + Ax) - f(x) = 5(3x2Ax 3xAx2 + Ax3) -6(2xAx + Ax2) - 3Ax
Now, divide through by Ax and take the limit asAx--0, so that
= 5(3x2) 6(2x) - 3cbc
= 15x2 - 12x - 3
Set dx equal to zero, thus
then
and
15x2 - 12x - 3 = 0
3(5x2 - 4x - 1) = 0
(5x + 1)(x - 1) = 0
Set each factor equal to zero and find the pointsof maximum or minimum are
and
5x = - 1
x = 1
The graph of the function is shown infigure 12-8.PROBLEMS: Differentiate the functions in
problem 1 through 3.
1. f(x) = x2 - 3
2. f(x) = x2 - 5x
3. f(x) = 3x2 - 2x + 34. Findthe slope of the curve
at the points
= x3 - 3x + 2
x = -2, 0,. and 3
192
Figure 12-8.Graph of 54(3 - 6x2 -3x + 3.
5. Find the values of x where the function
f(x) = 2x3 - 9x2 - 60x + 12
has a maximum or a minimum.
ANSWERS:
1. 2x2. 2x - 53. 6x - 24. m = 9, -3, and 245. x = -2, x = 5
CHAPTER 13
DERIVATIVES
In the previous chapter on limits, we usedthe delta process to find the limit of a functionas Ax approached zero. We called the resultof this tedious and in some cases lengthy pro-cess the derivative. In this chapter we willexamine some rules used to find the derivativeof a function without using the delta process.
To find how y changes as x changes, we take
the limit of as AX- 0 and writeAx
limAx - 0 Ax
which is called the derivative of y with re-
spect to x, and we use the symbol to indi-
cate the derivative and write
urnAx Ax dx
In this section we will take up a number of
rules which will enable us to e4bily obtain thederivative of many algebraic functions. In thederivation of these rules, which will be calledtheorems, we will assume that
lim Ex_± Ax) - f(x)Ax
ordy. lim Aydx Ax--0 Ax
exists and is finite.
DERIVATIVE OF A CONSTANT
The method used to find the derivative of aconstant will be similar to the mita processused in the previous chapter but will include ananalytical proof. A diagram is used to give ageometrical meaning of the function.
FORMULA
Theorem 1. The derivative of a constant iszero. Expressed as a formula, this may bewritten as
lim ndx Ax--0 Ax
when y is parallel to the x axis.
PROOF
In figure 13-1, the graph of
y = e (a constant)
the value of y is the same for all values of
x, and any change in x (that is, Ax) does notaffect y, then
and
and
Ay = 0
Another way of stating this is that when x isequal to x1 and when x is equal to x1 + Ax,y has the same value. Therefore,
193
and
115(P::
y = c
y + Ay =
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
11110MIIMIIMION A X IMIIMIIM100IP
xi xit ax
Figure 13-1.--Graph of y = c (a constant).
so that
and
then
f(x + Ax) - f(x) c - cAx Ax Ax
lim Ay nAxO Ax
dy lim f(x±,Ax) - fdx AxO Ax
lira c - c-AxO Ax
The equation
y = c
therefore
lim f(x + Ax) - f(x)dx Ax--0 Ax
= 0
VARIABLES
In this section on variables, we will extendthe theorems of limits covered previously. Re-call that a derivative is actually a limit. Theproof of the theorems presented here involve thedelta process, and only a few of these pro'Aswill be offered.
POWER FORM
Theorem 2. The derivative of the function
y = xn
where n is any number is given by
nxn-1dx
Proof: By definition
dy lim (x + Ax)n - (x)nAx-0 Ax
The expression (x + Ax)n may be expandedrepresents a straight line parallel to the x by the binomial theorem intoaxis. The slope of this line will be zero forx -
all values of x. Therefore, the derivative is n + nxn-1 Ax + n(n-1) x112Ax2 + . . . + Axilzero for all values of x.2
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative a of theSubstituting in the expression for the deriva-function tive, we have
SOLUTION:
and
Y = 6
Y = 6
y + Ay = 6
nxn- l+ xn(n-1) n-2 2Ax +. .dx x-0
Ax
Simplifying, this becomes
dy lim [ix11-1 + + . . .a"-= Ax-0
194
Chapter 13DERIVATIVES
Letting ax approach zero, we have
Thus, the proof is complete.EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of
f(x) = x5
cnT3TTION: Apply Theorem 2 and Mid
5 nx = x
The previous example is a special case ofthe power form and indicates that the deriva-tive of a function with respect to itself is 1.
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of
and
f(x) = ax, a = constant
SOLUTION:
f(x) = ax
...:tore f(x + Ax) = a(x + Ax)
and
so that given
n = 5
n - 1 = 4
a nxn-1dx
and substituting values for n find that
= 5x4dx
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of
f(x) = x
so that
Therefore
= ax + aAx
Ay = f(x + Ax) f(x)
= (ax + aAx) - ax
= aAx
lim aAxdx Ax
= a
The previous example is a continuation ofSOLUTION: Apply Theorem 2 and find the derivative of a function with respect to
itself and indicates that the derivative of aX
n = X function with respect to itself, times a con-stant, is that constant.
therefore EXAMPLE: Find the derivative ofn = 1
f(x) = 6xand
SOLUTION:n - 1 = 0
so that = 6dx
= 1
A study of the functions and their deriva-tives in table 13-1 should further the under-standing of this section.
195
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Table 13-1. Derivatives of functions.
f(x) 3 x x2 x3 x4 3x2 9x3 x-1 x-2 9x-4
clz0 1 2x 3x2 4x3 6x 27x2 -x-2 -2x-3 -12x-5
then
PROBLEMS: Find the derivatives of the andfollowing:
1. f(x) = 21
2. f(x) = x
3. f(x) = 21x
4. f(x) = 7x3
5. f(x) = 4x2
6. f(x) = 31-2
ANSWERS:
1. 0
2. 1
3. 21
4. 21x2
5. 8x
6. -6x-3
SUMS
Proof:
du dvdx dx dx
y = g(x) + h(x) (1)
y + Ay = g(x + Ax) + h(x + Ax) (2)
Subtract equation (1) from equation (2) and
Ay = ex + Ax) + h(x + Ax) - g(x) - h(x)
Rearrange this equation such that
Ay = g(x + Ax) - g(x) + h(x + Ax) - h(x)
Divide both sides of the equation by Ax andthen take the limit as AxO and
lim Ay lim g(x + Ax) - g(x)Ax-0 Ax AxO AX
lim h(x + Ax) - h(x)
but, by definition
lim ex + Ax) - g(x) duAxO Ax dx
and
lim h(x + Ax) - h(x) dv
Theorem 3. The derivative of the sum of AxO Ax dx
two or more functions of x is equal to the sumof their derivatives, then by substitution
Assume two functions of x which we willcall u and v, such that du dv
dx dx dxu = g(x)
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of the func-and tion
and also
v = h(x)
y u +
= g(x) + h(x)
196
y = x3 - 8x2 + 7x - 5
SOLUTION: Theorem 3 indicates that weshould find the derivative of each term andthen show them as a sum; that is, if
Chapter 13DERIVATIVES
then, if
then
y =
y = 7x,
Y = -5,city. ndx
y = x3 - 8x2 + 7x - 5
ca.= 33E2 16x + 7 + 0dx
= 3x2 - 16x +
PROBLEMS: Find the derivative of the fol-lowing:
1. f(x) = x2 + x - 1
2. f(x) = 2x4 + 3x + 16
3. f(x) = 2x3 + 3x2 + x - S
4. f(x) = 3x3 + 2x2 - 4x + 2 + 2x-1 - 3x-3
ANSWERS:
1. 2x + 1
2. 8x3 + 3
3. 6x2 + 6x + 1
4. 9x2 + 4x - 4 - 2x -2 + 9x -4
PRODUCTS
Theorem 4. The derivative of the productof two functions of x is equal to the first func-tion multiplied by the derivative of the secondfunction, plus the second function multiplied bythe derivative of the first function.
If
y = uv
197
then
dv du= vdx d dx
This theorem may be extended to includethe product of three functions. The result willbe as follows:
If
theny = uvw
= uv + vwd--1-1/(1u + uwdx dx dx dx
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of
f(x) = (x2 2)(x4 + 5)
SOLUTION: The derivative of the first fac-tor is 21, and the derivative of the second fac-tor is 4x4. Therefore
(x2 2)(4x3) t,x4 + 5)(2x)
= 4x5 - 8x3 + 2x5 + 10x
= ex5 - 8x3 + 10x
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of
f(x) = (x3 - 3)(x2 + 2)(x4 - 5)
SOLUTION: The derivatives of the threefactors, in the order given, are 3x2, 2x, and3x2.
Therefoi e
fy (x) = (x3 - 3)(x2 + 2)(4x3)
(x2 2)(x4 5)(3x2)
+ (x3 - 3)(x4 - 5)(2x)
then
(x) = 4x8 + 8x6 - 12x5 -24x3
+ 3x8 + 6x6 - 15x4 - 30x2
+ 2x8 - 6x5 - 10x4 + 30x
= 9x8 + 14x -18x5- 25x4 - 24x3 -30x2+30x
gigc
4
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
PROBLEMS: Find the derivatives of thefollowing:
1. f(x) = x3(x2 -
2. Mc) = (x3 - 3)(x2 + 2x)
3. f(x) = (x2 - 7x)(x5 - 4x2)
4. f(x) = 2)(x2 3)(x3 - 4)
ANSWERS
1. 5x4 - 12x2
2. 5x4 + 8x3 - 6x-6
3. 7x6 - 42x5 - 16x3 + 84x2
4. 6x5 - 10x4 - 12x3 + 6x2 + 16x + 12
QUOTIENTS
Theorem 5. The derivative of the quotientof two functions of x is equal to the denomina-tor times the derivative of the numerator ministhe numerator times the derivative of the de-nominator, all divided by the square of the de-nominator,
If
then
du dvvdx
dx v2
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of the func-tion
x2 - 7gx) 2x + 8
SOLUTION: The derivative of the mimeratoris 2x, and the derivative of the denominator is2. Therefore
(x)(2x + 8)(2x) - (x2 - 'n(2)
(2x + 8)2
4x2 + 16x - 2x2 + 14
(2x + 8)2
2x2 + 16x + 144(x + 4)2
x2 + 8x + 72(x + 4)2
PROBLEMS: Find the derivatives of thefollowing:
x41. Alt) =
2. f(x) = x + 7
x2 + 3x + 53. gx) = 3x - 4
ANSWERS:
1.
2.(x + 7)2
3+ 620 + 15x2 + 8x + 12)
.(20 - 4)2
POWERS OF FUNCTIONS
Theorem 6. The derivative of any func-tion of x raised to the power n, whe .e n isany number, is equal to a times the po?inomialfunction of x to the (n - 1) power times thederivative of the polynomial itself.
2x5 - 8x3
(x2 - 2)2
x2 + 14x 4. 3
If
y = uwhere u is any function of x then
dudx dx
F.
198
Chapter 13DERIVATIVES
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of the func- RADICALStion
y = (x3 - 3x2 + 7
SOLUTION: Apply Theorem 6 and find
7(x3 3x2 + 2x)6 (3x2 - ex + 2)aEXAMPLE: Find the derivative of the func-tion
(x2 + 2)3f(x) =
SOLUTION: This problem involvesTheorem5 and Theorem 6. Theorem 6 is used to findthe derivative of the numerator, then Theorem5 is used to find the derivative of the resultingquotient.The derivative of the numerator is
3(x2+ 2)2 (2x)
and the derivative of the denominator ii 1.Then, by Theorem 5
(x - 1) [3(x2 + 2)2 (2x)1 - (1)(x2 +dx(x - 1)2
6x(x2 + 2)2 (x - 1) - (x2 + 2)3(x - 1)2
(x2 + 2)2 [6x(x - 1) - (x2 + 2)](x - 1)
)3
(x2 + 2)2 (5x2 - 6x - 2)(x - 1)2
PROBLEMS: Find the derivatives of thefollowing:
1. f(x) = (x3 + 2x - 6)22. f(x) = 5(x2 + x + 7)4
3. f(x)=
2(x + 3)3
ANSWERS:
1. 2(x3 + 2x - 6)(3x2+ 2)
2. 20(x2 + x + 7)3 (2x + 1)3. 18x(x + 3)2 - 6(x + 3)3
9x2
199
To differentiate a function containing a radi-cal, replace the radical by a fractional expo-nent then fiLd the derivative by applying theappropriate theorems.EXAMPLE: Find the derivative ofnu-f(x) = v 2x - 5SOLUTION: Replace the radical by theproper fractional exponent, then
f(x) = (2x2 - 5)1/2and by Theorem 6
1/2x 5) -1(4x)dx 2
(2x2 - 5)4/2 (4x)
= 2(2x2 - 5)-1/2
2x= / n
N/2x` -5
2x 077i2x
2 - 5EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of
f(x) - 2x + 1/377i
SOLUTION: Replace the radicalproper fractional exponent, thus
2x + 1f(x)(3x2 + 2)1/2
by the
At this point a decision is in order. Thisproblem may be solved by either writing
f(x) -(3x2 2+ 2)1/
2x + 1(3)
and applying Theorem 6 in the denominatorthen applying Theorem 5 for the quotient, orwriting
f(x) =I (2x + 1)(3x2 + 2)-1/2 (4)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
and applying Theorem 6 for the second factor Find the derivative of each factorthen applying Theorem 4 for the products
The two methods of solution will be com-pleted individually as follows:
Use equation (3)
f(x)(3x2
+ 2)1/2
2x + 1
Find the derivative of the denominator
d 2 1/2(3x + 2)dx Now apply Theorem 4 and
by applying the power theorem and 21-3/21+ (3x2+ 2)-1/2r(x) = (2x+ 1) [lx(3x2
dx + = 2d
and
d 2 -1/2 1 2 -1/2-1(3x + 2) (3x + 2) (6x)
-3x(3x2 + 2r3/2
d 2 1/2 1 2 1/2-1 (6x)(3x + 2) = -- (3x + 2)dx 2
= 3x(3x2+ 2)-1/2
Multiply both numerator and denominator by
and
(3x2 2)41'2
The derivative of the numerator is-3x(2x + 1) + 2(3x2 + 2)ft(x) -
d (3x2+ 2)3/2(2x + 1) = 2dx
Now apply Theorem 5 and
r(c) (3x2
+ 2)1/2(2) -(2x + 1) [3x(3x2 + 2)4/2]
(3x2 + 2)
-6x2 - 3x + 6x2 + 4(3x2 + 2)3/2
4 - 3x(3x2
+ 2)3/2Multiply both numerator and denominator by which agrees with the solution of the first
method used.(3x2 + 2)1/2
PROBLEMS: Find the derivatives of theand simplify, then following:
r(x) = 2(3x2 + 2) - 3x(2x + 1)(3x2
+ 2)31'2
6x2 + 4 - Ox2 - 3x(3x2 + 2)3/2
=4 - 3x(3x +
1. f(x) = NrZ
2. f(x) = 4-317
3. f(x) = acc - 4
4. f(x) =31r
- 3x + 2
ANSWERS:
To find the same solution, by a different1. ormethod, use equation (4) 2frc 2x Ng
1f(x) = (2x + 1)(3x2
+ 2)-1/2 2. - or - le-2-12?-
200
2103
Chapter 13DERIVATIVES
3 3 3x - 43' 2 V-57:7 or 2(3x - 4)
but
8x - 34 r---0
or- 3x + 2)1 therefore,
LIE = 2(x + x2)(1 + 2x)(8x - 3) 3I4x2 - 3x + 2 dx
3(4x2 - 3x + 2)
CHAIN RULE
A frequently used rule in differential calculusis the chain rule. This rule links togetherderi-vatives which have related variables. The chain andrule is
dy sly dudx du dx
when the variable y depends on u and u inturadepends on x.
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of
y = (X + X2)2
SOLUTION: Let
and
Then
and
Now,
u = (x + x2)
y = u2 then
dy = 2udu and by substitution
and
and
EXAMPLE: Find ca wheredx
y = 12t4 + It
t = x2 + 4
SOLUTION: By the chain rule
sly dtdx dt dx
48t3 + 7dt
dtdx= 2x
= (48t3 + 7)(2x)dx
dx du dx dx
du = 1 + 2xdx
and substituting into equation (5) gives
az du= + 2x)
dx du dx
(5)
201
20f4y,;
E.IY. = [48(x2 + 4)3 + (2x)dx
dyPROBLEMS: Find in the following:aTc
1, y = 3t3 + 8t and
t = x3 + 2
2. y = 7n2 + 8n + 3 and
n = 2x3 + 4x2 + x
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
ANSWERS: dxThe reciprocal of Ty- is the derivative of1. [9(x3 + 2)2 + 8] (3x2) the direct function, and we find
2. [14(2x3 + 4x2 + x) + 8] (6x2 + 8x + 1) 1 y3dx dx y - 2
INVERSE FUNCTIONS dy
Theorem 7. The derivative of an inverse dvEXAMPLE: Find the derivative of thefunction is equal to the reciprocal of the deriva- drtive of the direct function. function
In the equations to this point, x has been2the independent variable and y has been the x = y
dependent variable. The equations have beenin a form such as dx d4SOLUTION: Find to be ai = 2ydy
= x2 + 3x + 2Suppose that we have a function like
then
1 1
dx dxdy
dy_dy. PROBLEMS: Find the dertwative of theand we wish to find the derivative No- dxdx 6 following functions:tice that if we solve for y in terms of x, usingthe quadratic formula, we get the more cora- 1, x = 4 - y2plicated function
2. x = 9 + y2Y = 2x
If we call this function the direct function,then
ANSWERS:
11. - 2y
1 1 1
Y Y
is the inverse function. It is easy to deter- IMPLICIT FUNCTIONS
mine a- from the inverse function.dx In equations containing x and y, it is notEXAMPLE: Find the derivative a of the always easy to separate the variables. If we
function do not solve an equation for y, we call y an1 1 implicit function of x. In the equation
x = -Y Y x2 - 4y = 0
dxSOLUTION: Find the derivative thus y is an implicit function of x, and x is alsocalled an implicit function of y. If we solveddx
+1 this equation for y, that iscTI 4-
Y Y
-2 1x2y =4
Y Ythen y would be called an explicit function ofx. In many cases such a solution would befar too complicated to handle conveniently.
Chapter 13-DERIVATIVES
When y is given by an equation such as ANSWERS:
x2 + xy2 = 0
y is an implicit function of x.Whenever we have an equation of this type
in which y is a function of x, we can dif-ferentiate the function in a straightforwardmanner. The derivative of each term con-taining y will be followed by cd4c. Refer totheorem 8.
EXAMPLE: Obtain the derivative 5-17- of thefollowing
dx.
X2 +2 = 0
SOLUTION: Find the derivative
d 2Tx-
2x
and the derivative
2dx
.(xy ) = xtcy; + (y2)(1)
Therefore,
d (x2 +2) = 2x + 2xy 2
dx dx
Solving for we find that
-2xy 2x + y2
and
1-5x4 - 4y3
12xy2 - 15y4
2.
3.
IL- 2xy
x2 + 3y2
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS
If we are given
y = sin U
we may state that, from the general formula,
lim sin(u + Au) - sin uAu-0 Au
sin u cosAu + cos u sthAu - sin uAu-.0 Au
Urn sin u(cosAu - 1) lim sinAu cos uAu-0 Au Au-0 Au
It can be shown that
and
(8)
Um cosAu - 1 0Au-0 Au (7)
lim sinAulu-.0 Au
= 1 (8)
Therefor, by substituting equations (7) and(8) into equation (8)
Thus, whenever we differentiate an implicit = COB U (9)
function, the derivative will usually Isontainterms in both x and y.
PROBLEMS: Find the derivative of theNow, we are interested in finding the deriva-2-
folbwing: tive of the function sin u so we apply thechain rule
1. x5 + 4xy3 - 3y5
2: 2
2. x3y2 = 3
1=crahli3. x2y + y3 = 4
203
!ge6
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
and from the chain rule and equation (9) we and substituting into equation (10) find thatfind
cos2 u + sin2 udu(sin u) = cos u duax- cos2 udx
In words, this states that to find the deriva-tive of the sine of a function, we use the cosineof the function times the derivative of thefunction,
By a similar process we find the deriva-tive of the cosine function to be
dx (cos = - sin u aidu-
1
cos u
sec2 u
Now, using the chain rule and equation (11)we find
dx du dx
The derivatives of the other trigonometric 2 du= sec ufunctions may be found by expressing them in dxterms of the sine and cosine. That is
dx (tan u) = ci (sin u\dx \cos AV
By stating the other trigonometric func-tions in terms of the sine and cosine andusing similar processes, the following deri-vatives may be found to be
and by substituting sin u for u, cos u for v, duand du for dx in the expression of the quotient cv u) = cos u(sin -c-ii
theorem
we have
du dvv uc_(1) dx _arlvz
(sin u)du du cos u
(cos u) = - sin u aidudx -
dTX- (tan u) = sec2 dx
2 du(cot u) - cec udx dx
zr (sec u) = sec u tan u
(10) du(clic u) - cec u cot ucos u E (sin u) - sin u E (cos u) dx
Taking
and
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of the func-tion
= sin 3xati (sin u) = cos u SOLUTION:
= cos 3x (3x)dx dx(cos u) - sin udu SI 3 cos 3x
Chapter 13DERIVATIVES
EXAMPLE: Find the derivative of the func- Combining all of these, we find thattion
y = tan2 3x= (2 tan 3x)(sec2 3xX3)dx
SOLUTION: Use the power theorem and = 6 tan 3x sec2 3x
= 2 tan 3x d (tan 3x)dx cTi
PROBLEMS: Find the derivative of the fol-lowing:
then find 1. y = sin 2x
2. y = (cos x2 )2(tan 3x) = sec2 3x (3x)
dx dxANSWERS:
and1. 2 cos 2x
mdiax, =dx 2. - 4x cos x2 sin x2
205
CHAPTER 14
INTEGRATION
The two main branches of calculus are dif-ferential calculus and integral calculus. Havinginvestigated differential calculus in previouschapters, we now turn our attention to integralcalculus. Basically, integration is the inverseof differentiation just as division is the inverseof multiplication, and as subtraction is the in-verse of addition.
DEFINITIONS
Integration is defined as the inverse et dif-ferentiation. When we were dealing with dif-ferentiation, we were given a function F(x) andwere required to find the derivative of thisfunction. In integration we will be given thederivative of a function and will be requiredto find the function. That is, when we are giventhe function f(x), we will find another functionF(x) such that
dit1.1cdx " (1)
In words, when we have the function f(x), wemust find the function F(x) whose derivative isthe function f(x).
If we change equation (1) to read
dr(x) = f(x) dx (2)
we have used dx as a differential. An equiva-lent statement for equation (2) is
F(x) f f(x) dx
We call f(x) the integrand, and we say F(x) isequal to the indefinite integral of f(x). Theelongated S, that is,f, is the Litegral sign. Thissymbol is used because integration may beshown to be the limit of a sum.
INTERPRETATION OF AN INTEGRAL
We will use the area under a curve for theinterpretation of an integral. It should berealized, however, that an integral may repre-sent many things, and it may be real or abstract.It may represent plane area, volume, or surfacearea of some figure.
AREA UNDER A CURVE
In order to find the area under a curve, wemust agree on what is desired. In figure 14-1,where f(x) is equal to the constant 4, andthe °curve° is the straight line
y = 4
The area of the rectangle is found by multiplyingthe height times the width. Thus, the area underthe curve is
A =4(b a)
Tha next problem will be to find a methodfor determining the area under any curve, pro-vided that the curve is continuous. in figure14-2, the area under the curve
y = f(x)
between points x and x Ax is approximatelyf(x)Ax. We consider that Ax is small and the areais given to be .A A. This area under the curveis nearly a rectangle. The area AA, under thecurve, would differ from the area of the rec-tangle by the areaof the triangle ABC if AC werea straight line.
When Ax becomes smaller and smaller, thearea of ABC becomes smaller at a faster rate,and ABC finally becomes indistinguishable froma triangle. The area of this triangle becomesnegligible when A x is sufficiently small.
206
12(9
4
Chapter 14INTEGRATION
Figure 14-1.Area of a rectangle.
X x+ax
Figure 14-2.Area AA.
Therefore, for sufficiently small values of ax we
can say that
X
AA As f(x)Ax
Now, if we have the curve in figure 14-3, thesum of all the rectangles will be approximatelyequal to the area under the curve andbounded by
the lines at a and b. The difference between theactual area under the curve and the sum of the
areas of the rectangles will be the sum of the
areas of the triangles above ekich rectangle.As Ax is made smaller and smaller, the sum
of the rectangular areas will approach thevalue
Figure 14-3.Area of strips.
of the area under the curve. The sum of thoareas of the rectangles may be indicated by
A = urn f(x) Ax (3)n.4 k=1
where Z (sigma) is the symbol for sum, n is thenumber of rectangles, f(x)Ax is the area of eachrectangle, and k is the designation number ofeach
rectangle. In the particular example just dis-cussed, where we have four rectangles, we would
write
4AL f(xu.) Ax
k=1 "
and we would have only the sum of four rec-tangles and not the limiting area under the curve.
When using the limit of a sum, as in equa-tion (3), we are required to use extensive alge-braic techniques to find the actual areaunder the
curve.To this point we have been given a choice of
using arithmetic and finding only anapproxima-tion of the area under a curve, or we could use
207
210
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
extensive algebraic preliminaries and find theactual area.
We will now use calculus to find the areaunder a curve fairly easily.
In figure 14-4, the area under the curve, froma to by is shown as the sum of the areas of
A and A . The notation A means thea c c b a carea under the curve from a to c.
The Intermediate Value Theorem statesthat
aAb f(c) a)where f(c) in figure 14-4 is the function at an in-termediate point between a and b.
We now modify figure 14-4as shown infigure14-5.
When
x = a
aAa = 0
It is seen in figure 14-5 that
aAx + xA (x+ Ax) = aA(x+Ax)
Figure 14-4.Designation of limits.
Figure 14-5.Increments of area at f(c).
therefore, the increase in area, as shown, is
A A =xA(x+ Ax)
but reference to figure 14-5 shows
xA(x+ Ax) = f(c)Ax
where c is a point between a and b.Then, by substitution
= f(c) Ax
or
AA = f(c)Ax
and as PX approaches zero we have
208
AA_
AV..°
= lim f(c)cx
= 1(4
Chapter 14INTEGRATION
Now, from the definition of integration
aAx = f f(x) dx
= F(x) + C
and
aAa = F(a) + C
but
aAa = 0
therefore
(4)
F(a) + C = 0
and solving for C we have
C = -F(a)
By substituting -F(a) into equation (4) we find
If we let
then
aAx = F(x) - F(a)
x = b
aAb F(b) -F(a)where F(b) and F(a) are the integrals of thefunction of the curve at the values b and a.
The constant of integration C is omitted inequation (5) because when the function of thecurve at b and a is integrated C will occur withboth F(a) and F(b) and will therefore be sub-tracted from itself.
EXAMPLE: Find the area under the curve
(5)
y = 2x - 1
in figure 14-13, bounded by the vertical lines ata and b, and the x-axis.
SOLUTION: We know that
aAb F(a)
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
a2 3 4 5 6
X
Figure 14-6.Area of triangle and rectangle.
and find
F(x) = f f(x)clx
= j (2x - 1)dx
= x2 - x (this step will bejustified later)
Than, substituting the values for a and b intoF(x) (that is, xz x) find that when
and when
209
x b= 5
F(b) = 25 - 5= 20
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Then by substittu'-g these values in
find thataAb "3) F(a)
aAb = 20 - 0
= 20
We may verify this by considering figure 14-6 tobe a triangle with base 4 and height 8 sitting ona rectangle of height 1 and base 4. 13:1 knownformulas, we find the area under the curve to be20.
CONSTANT OF INTEGRATION
A number which is independent of the variableof integration is called a constant of integration.This is to say that two integrals of the samefunction may differ by the constant of integration.
1NTEGRAND
When we are given a differential (or de-rivative) and we are to find the function whosederivative is the differential we were given,we call the operation integration.
If we have
_2dx x
and are asked to find the function whose de-rivative is this value, x2, we write
dy x2cbc
then
or we write
y = f x2dx
x3 + C
The symbol is the iategral sign, f x2dx is theintegral of x dx, and xh is called the integrand.The C is called the constant of integration.
INDEFINITE INTEGRALS
When we were finding the derivative of a func-tion, we wrote
or
dx
whe:e we say the derivative of F(x) isf(x). Ourproblem is to find F(x) when Nye are given f(x).
We know that the symbol J ...dx is the in-verse of ccly2c- , or when dealing with differentials,the operator symbols d and f are the inverse ofeach other.
That is
F(4 f f(x)dx
and when the derivative of each side is taken,d annulling ft we have
dF(x) = f(x)dx
or where f ...dx annuls Tcx we have
df(x) r itlxdx dx N= JOE)
From this, we find that
d(x3) = 3x2dx
then
f 3x2dx = x3 + C
Also we find ths.t
d(x3 + 3) = 3x2dxthen
f 3x2dx = x3 + 2Again, we find that
d(x3 - 9) 123x2dx
210
-0.1:213
Chapter 14INTEGRATION
then
f 3x2clx = x3 - 9
This is to say that
and
d(x3 + C) = 2dx
3x2dx = x3 + C
where C is any constant of integration. SinceC may have infinitely many values, then a dif-ferential expression may have infinitely manyintegrals which differ only by the constant.We assume the differential expression has atleast one integral.
Because the integral contains C and C is in-definite, we call
F(x) + C
an indefinite integral of f(x)dx. In the generalform we say
f f(x)clx = F(x) + C
With regard to the constant of integration,a theorem and its converse state:
If two functions differ by a constant, theyhave the same derivative.
If two functions have the same derivative,their difference is a constant.
EVALUATING THE CONSTANT
To evaluate the constant ui integration we willuse the following approach.
If we are to find the equation of a curvewhose first derivative is 2 times the independentvariable x, we may write
= 2xdx
ordy = 2xdx (6)
We may obtain the desired equation for the curveby integrating the expression for dy. That is,integrate both sides of equation (6).If
dy = 2xdx
then
but
and also
therefore
f dY = f 2xdx
f dY =
f 2xclx = x2 + c
y = x2 + C
We have obtained only a general equation of thecurve because a different curve resultsfor eachvalue we assign to C. This is shown in figure14-7. If we specified that
and
x = 0
Y = 6
we may obtain a specific value for C and hencea particular curve.
Suppose that
then
or
y = x2 + CI x = 01 and y = 6
6 = 02 + C
C = 6
By substituting the value 6 into the generalequation, the equation for the particular curveis
y = x2 + 6
which is curve C of figure 14-7.
The values for x and y will determine thevalue for C and also determine the particularcurve.of the family of curves.
In figure 14-7, curve A has a constant equalto -4, curve B has a constant equal to 0, andcurve C has a constant equal to 6.
211
214
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 14-7.Family of curves.
EXAMPLE: Find the equation of the curveif its first derivative is 6 times the independentvariable, y equals 2, and x equals 0.
SOLUTION: We may write
and
therefore
Solving for C when
and
.-- = 6xdx
fdy = f 6xclx
y = 3x2 + C
x = 0
y = 2
we have
or
2 = 3(02) + C
C = 2
y = 32 + 2
RULES FOR INTEGRATION
and the equation is
Although integration is the inverse of dif-ferentiation, and we were given rules for dif-ferentiation, we are required to determine theanswers in integration by trial and error. Thereare some formulas which aid us in the determi-nation of the answer.
In this section we will discuss four of therules and hnw they are used to integrate standardelementary forms. In the rules we willlet u andv denote a differentiable function of a variablesuch as x. We will let C, n, and a denote con-stants.
Our proofs will involve remembering thatwe are searching for a function F(x) whose de-rivative is f(x)dx.
Rule 1. f du = u + C
The integral of a differential of a function isthe function plus a constant.
Proof: If
then
and
212
d(u + C)du
d(u + C) = du
ft:111=u+ c
EXAMPLE: Evaluate the integral
fdxSOLUTION: By Rule 1 we have
fdx=x+ C
Chapter 14I4TEGRATION
Rule 2. fadu = a fclu = au + C EXAMPLE: Evaluate the integral
The integral of the product of a constant and f (2x - 5x + 4)dxa variable is equal to the product of the constantand the integral of the variable. That is, a con- SOLUTION: We will not combine 2x and -5x.stant may be moved across the integral sign. Then, by Rule 3NOTE: A variable may NOT be moved acrossthe integral sign. f (2ic - 5x + 4)dx
Proof: If= f 2xdx - f+ 5xdx + f 4dx
d(au + C) = (a) d(u + C)= 2 f xdx - 5 f xdx + 4 f dx
= au2 5x2
then =2 1
C - C2 + 4x + C3
f adu = a f du = au + C2 5 2= x -
2x + 4x + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate the integralwhere C is the sum of C1, C2, and C3.
f 4dx This solution requires knowledge of Rule 4 whichfollows.
SOLUTION: By Rule 2 n+ 1r uf 4dx = 4 f dx
Rule 4. u uu n + 1
and by Rule 1 The integral of undu may be obtained by add-ing 1 to the exponent, then dividing by this new
f dx = x + C exponent. NOTE: If n is minus 1, this rule isnot valid and another method must be used.
therefore Proof: If
f4dx = 4x + C
Rule 3. f (du+ dv+ dw) = fdu+ fdv+ fdw
=u+ v+ w+ C
The integral of a sum is equal to the sum of thenthe integrals.
Proof: If
then
d(u + v + w + C) = du + dv + dw
f (du + dv + dw) = (u + C1) + + C2)
+ + C3)
=u+v+w+Cwhere
C C1
+ C2 + C3
213
4+ 11n-- + C) =
(n.n + 1 n + 1
= un
un+1f undu = + Cn + 1
EXAMPLE: Evaluate the integral
f x3 dx
SOLUTION: By Rule 4
3+ 1f x3 (ix + c
x4"T c
)31.6
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
EXAMPLE: Evaluate the integral 1. f x2dx
dx 2. f 4xdx
SOLUTION: First write the integral 3. f (x3 + x2 + x)dx
dx 4. f 6dx5
5. dxas
f 7x-3dx ANSWERS:
then, by Rule 2 write x31. + C3
'7 f x-3dx2. 2x2 + C
and by Rule 44 3 2x x x
7 f x 3.3dx 4 4' 3 2
4. 6x + C
-2
f 73
fls
= - 72
+ C2x
EXAMPLE: Evaluate the integral
1 2 \
x2 + x )dx
SOLUTION:
1 2
f + x3)dx
1 2
= f x2dx + f x3dx
3 5T Ix x
= + c + C3 5 +2 3
3 5
2x2 3x3
3 5+ C
is
55.
DEFINITE INTEGRALS
The general form of the indefinite integral
f f(x)dx = F(x) + C
and has two identifying characteristics. First,the constant of integration was required to beadded to each integration. Second, the result ofintegration is a function of a variable and has nodefinite value, even after the constant of inte-gration is determined, until the variable is as-signed a numerical value.
The definite integral eliminates these twocharacteristics. The form of the definite inte-gral is
fbf(x)thc = F(b) + C - [F(a) + C ]
= F(b) - F(0(7)
where a and b are given value.... : ,tice that thePRACTICE PROBLEMS: Evaluate the fol- constant of integration does not appear in the
lowing integrals: final expression of equation (7). In words,
214
Chapte. 4.4.4NTEGRATION
this equation states that the difference of thevalues of
for
and
f f(x)dxa
x = a
x = b
gives the area under the curve defined by f(x),the x axis, and the ordinates where
and
x = a
x = b
Figure 14-8.Upper and lower limits.
where b is the upper limit and a is the lowerlimit.
EXAMPLE: Find the area bounota.d by thecurve
2y = x
UPPER AND LOWER LIMITS the x axis, and the ordinates
In figure 14-8, the value of b is the upper x = 2limit and the value at aisthe lower limit. These andupper and lower limits may be any assignedvalues in the range of the curve. The upper x = 3limit is positive with respect to the lower limitin that it is located to the right (positive in our as shown in figure 14-9.case) of the lower limit. SOLUTION: Substituting into equation (8)
Equation (7) is the limit of the sum of all thestrips between a and b, having areas of f(x)Ax.That is f f(x)dx = F (x) 1 = F(b) - F (a)
a ax=b
urn f(x)Ax = f f(x)dx 3 ax=a a f x`cbc
2
To evaluate the definite integral x3 I 3
3 I 2
fa f(x)dx.2 23
find the function F(x) whose derivative is f(x)dx 3at the value of b and subtract the function at thevalue of a. That is 27 8
bf(x)dx F(x)
a I a
F(b) - F(a)
(8)
,
215
--3- -3-
_ 193 ;
1= 63
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Figure 14-9.Area from x = 2 to x= 3.
We may make an estimate of this solution 1:15considering the area desired in figure 14-9 atbeing a right triangle resting on a rectangleThe triangle has an approximate area of
A bh2
(1)(5)2
5
and the area of the rectangle is
A = bh
= (1)(4)
= 4
and
-4 -3 3 4
Figure 14-10.Area under a curve.
SOLUTION: Substituting into equation (8)
f f(x)dx = F(x) I 2a I -2
= F(2) - F(-2)
=2 nf e dx
which is a close approximation of the area -2found by the process of integration.
EXAMPLE: Find the area bounded by the3 2curve
y = X23 -2
the x axis, and the ordinates
x = -2and
x = 2as shown in figure 1440.
216
..219
= [163
Chapter 14--/NTEGRATION
The area above a curve and below thex axis,as shown in figure 14-11, will through integr, -tion furnish a negative answer.
Then when dealing with area as shown infigure 14-12, each of the areas shown must befound separately. The areas thus foundare thenadded together, with area considered as the ab-solute value.
Figure 14-11.Area above a curve.
Figure 14-12.Negative and positive valueareas
EXAMPLE: Find the area between the curve
* x
and the x axis, bounded by the lines
x = -2
and
x = 2
SOLUTION: These areas must be computedseparately; therefore we write
217
0Area A 32 f f(x)dx
-2
0f xdx
-2
x2 0
2 -2
0 - [1]32
-2
and the absolute value of -2 is
Then
1-21 = 2
2Area B = f f(x)dx
0
x2I 22 0
= 2
and adding the two areas A and B we find
A + B Is 2 + 2
21 4
7
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
NOTE: INCORRECT SOLUTION: If the func-tion is integrated from -2 to 2 the following in-correct result will occur
This is o14-12. Suof makinglution. Athis common
EXAMPLthe curve
2Area = f f(x)dx
-2
2f xdx-2
x2 2
2 -2
1 [Inam.
= 0 (INCORRECTSOLUTION)
bviously not the area shown in figurech an example emphasizes the valuea commonsense check on every so-
sketch of the function will aidsense Judgment.E: Find the total area bounded by
the x axis, and t
and
y = x3 - 9xhe lines
x = -3
as shown in figure 1SOLUTION: The
and below the x axis,the areas separately,using their absolute valTherefore
x = 34-13.area desired is both above
therefore we need to findthen add them togetherues.
0A = f (x3 - 9x)dx1 -3
_x4 9 2102 x I -3
181 11211
81T
+3
fivre 14-13.Positive and negative vahleareas.
The area
and
Then
218
221
3A2 = f
3- 9x)dx
0
3x4 9 2=2 x4 2 1 0
_81 81 ro4 2 "
I 11 II 4 I 4
81 81Al +2
-4
+4
_ 1624
1
Chapter 14INTEGRATION
PROBLEMS: and
1. Find, by integration, the area under the x = 2curve
y = x + 4
bounded by the x axis and the lines
x = 2
and
x = 7
Verify this by a geometric process.
3. Find the area between the curve
y = x3 - 12x
and the x axis, from
to
x = 3
2. rind the area under the curveANSWERS:
y = 3x2 + 2 1. 42 1-2-
bounded by the x axis and the lines 2. 12
x = 0 3. 39 1/4
2194 "1,
f222
CHAPTER 15
INTEGRATION FORMULAS
In this chapter several of the integrationformulas and proofs are discussed and ex-amples are given. Some of the formulas fromthe previous chapter are repeated because theyare considered essential for the understandingof integration. The formulas in this chapterare basic and should not be considered a com-plete collection of integration formulas. Inte-gration is so complex that tables of integralshave been published for use as referencesources.
In the following formulas and proofs, u, v,and w are considered functions of a singlevariable.
POWER OF A VARIABLE
The integral of a variable to a power isthe variable to a power increased by one anddivided by the new power.
Formula:
f xn dx
Proof:1d - +n + 1
therefore
n+ 1
xn + 1 + n 7i -1
(n + 1)xn+(n + 1)
(n + 1)xn(n + 1)
= xn
_II+ 1f xn dx = + c, n -1
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f x5 dx
SOLUTION:
f x5 dx x5+ 1=5 + 1
= + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f x-5 dx
SOLUTION:
fx-5 dx =-4
+ c
PRODUCT OF CONSTANTAND VARIABLE
When the variable is multiplied by a con-stant, the constant may be written either be-fore or after the integral sign.
Formula:
faciu=a fdu = au + C
Proof:
d(au + C) = a d + g-a)
= a du
therefore
faduma f du mg au + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f 17 dx
Chapter 15INTEGRATION FORMULAS
SOLUTION:
fl7clx=l7fcIx
= 17x + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f3x4dx
SOLUTION:
f 3x4 dx =3 f x4 dx
SUMS
The integral of an algebraic sum of differen-tiable functions is the same as the algebraicsum of the integrals of these functions takenseparately.
Formula:
f (du + dv dw) = f du + f dv + f dw
Proof:
d(u + v + w + C) = du + dv + dw
therefore
f du +
where
Then
and
f dv + f dw =u+ C1+v+C 2+w+C3
C1
+ C2 + C3 = C
f du+ fdv+ fdw=u+v+w+C
f (du + dv + dw) =fdu+ fdv + fdw
=u+ v+w+ C
221
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f (3x2 + x) dx
SOLUTION:
f (3x2 + dx = f 3x2 dx + f x dx
= x3 + C1 + z21
3 x2= x2
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f (x6 + x-3) dx
SOLUTION:
+ C2
f (x5 + x-3) dx = f x5 dx + fx3 dx
6 -2x
X6 X-2 + C
X6 1 f4+
2x
PROBLEMS: Evaluate the following inte-grals:
'224
1. f x6 dx
2. f x-4 dx
3. f 17x2 dx
4. fvr drf7x1/2
6. f (x7 + x6 + 3x3) dx
7. f (6- x3) dxANSWERS:
1.
12.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
POWER OF A FUNCTION OF x
The integral of a function raised to a powerand multiplied by the derivative of that functionis found by the following steps:
1. Increase the power of the function by 1.2. Divide the result of step 1 by this in-
creased power.3. Add the constant of integration.Formula:
a+ 1f un du = " + 1 + C n -1n
Proof:fun+ ) n
d c n + 1 u"
= un du
therefore
and
and
Then
du = 2 dx
n = 2
f un du
and by substitution
f (2x - 3)2 (2)dx = (2x - 3)3
When using this formula the integral mustcontain precisely du. If du is not present itmust be placed in the integral and then com-pensation must be made.
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
and
f (3x + 5)2 dx
SOLUTION: Let
u = (3x + 5)
du = 3 dx
un+1
f un du = n + 1 + C We find dx in the integral but not 3 dx. A 3 mustbe included in the integral in order to fulfill therequirements of du.
NOTE: Recall that In words, this means the integral
f (3x + 5)2 dxcbdc {-1 (2x - 3)1 = (3) (1) (2x - 3)2
needs du in order that the formula may be used.
= 2(2x - 3)2Therefore, we write
EXAMPLE: Evaluate f (3x + 5)2 dx3
f (2x - 3)2 (2) dx
SOLUTION: Let
u (2x - 3)-
and recalling that a constant may be carriedacross the integral sign, we write
f (3x 5)2 .x 1a f (3x + 5)2 3 dx
222
;1%.5
4
Chapter 15INTEGRATION FORMULAS
Notice that we needed 3 in the integral for duand we included 3 in the integral, then com-pensated for the 3 by multiplying the integralby 1/3.Then
3_Is) (3x-,.3- 5)3 + C
= 1(3x + 5)3 + C9
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f x(2 + x2)2 dx
SOLUTION: Let
u = (2 + x2)
and
Then
du = 2x dx
2 rf x(2 + x2)2 jdx =-2- x(2 + x2)2 dx
.1 r2
2x(2 + x2)2
1 /2 4. 2,3
(2 + x2)3
6 + C
PROBLEMS: Evaluate the followinggrals:
1. f (x2 + 6) (2x) dx
2. fx2 (7 + x3)2 dx
3. f (3x2 + 2x)2 (6x + 2) dx4. f (6x3 + 2x)1/2 (9x2 + 1) dx
5. f (x2 + 712 x dx
ANSWERS:
(x2 + 6)21. + C
(7 + x3)32. + t.;
inte-
223
(3x2 + 2x)33. + C
3
(6x3+ 2x)3/24. + C
15. 4- C2(x2 + 7)
QUOTIENT
In this section three methods of integratingquotients are discussed but only the secondmethod will be proved.
The first method is to put the quotient intothe form of the power of a function. The secondmethod results in operations with logarithms.The third method is a special case in hich thequotient must be simplified in order to use thesum rule.
METHOD 1
If we are given the integral
2x
(9 - 4x2)1/2 cbc
we observe that this integral may be written as
-1/2f 2x(9 - 4x2) dx
and by letting
u = (9 - 4x2)
and
du = -8x dx
the only requirement for this to fit the form
f un du
is the factor for du of -4. We accomplish thisby multiplying 2x dx by -4, giving -8x dx whichis du. We then compensate for the factor -4by multiplying the integral by - 1/4.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Then PROBLEMS: Evaluate the following inte-grals:
2-1/2
22x, dx =-- f 2x(9 - 4x ) dx
r=
1j (-4) (2x)(9 4x2)-1/2
9 A.,-1/2- I f-8x(9 - 4f) `44.'4
21/2
(4) (9÷c )2
2 1/2(9 - 4x ) + C2
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
I.
dx(3 + x-)
SOLUTION: Write
1. f x 1/2 dx+ x2)
2 f dx
3. f dx(3x + 2)5
ANSWERS:
9 1/21. (2 + + C
Ar,
(3x + 1)2/3.
-13. + C12(3x + 2)4
METHOD 2
In the previous examples, if the exponent of9 -1/2 u was -1, that is
f 1-7172 dx = f x(3 + dx
(3 +
Then, let where
fun du
u = (3 + x2)
we would have applied the following.and
du 2x dx Formula:= fc-14)The factor 2 is used in the integral to give du =lnu+C,u 0and is compensated for by multiplying the inte-gral by 1/2, Proof:Therefore
d(ln u + C) = du9 -1/2 -1/2f x(3 + xm) dx =I f 2x(3 + x2) dx therefore
2 1/2(i) amc.
1/2= 13 + x ) + C
224
Plnu+ CEXAMPLE: Evaluate the integral
f.dx
Chapter 15INTEGRATION FORMULAS
SOLUTION: If we write
fdx = f x-1 dx
we find we are unable to evaluate
f x-1 dx
by use of the power of a variable rule so wewrite
j2idx= hix+
because the 1 dx in the numerator is preciselydu and we have fulfilled the requirements for
= u + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
r 2-I 2x + 1 w'
SOLUTION: Let
and
u = 2x + 1
du = 2 dx
then we have the form
therefore
f = ln u + C
r 2 dx = in (2x + 1) + CJ 2x + 1
EXAMPLE: Evaluater 23x + 1 dx
SOLUTION: Letu=3x+ 1
and
du = 3 dx
We find we need 3 dx but we have 2 dx, There-fore, we need to change 2 dx to 3 dx, We do thisby writing
dx = (A) (i) f 23x + 1 2 3 3x + 1
2f 2 3x + 1 dx
3 f 3x 3+ 1 dx
3ln (3x + 1) + C
where the 2/3 is used to compensate for the 3/2used in the integral.Therefore
225
r 2 Air =_2_ ln(3x + 1) + C3x + 1 w' 3
PROBLEMS: Evaluate the following inte-grals:
r x3. j dx2 - 3x2
n 3
3 + 2xANSWERS:
11. T1g3x+ 2) + C
12. - ln(5 - 2x) + C
3. - ln(2 - 3x2) + C
4. I ln(3 + 2x4) + C
METHOD 3
In the third method that we will discuss, forsolving integrals of quotients, we find that to
2 28:.
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
integrate an algebraic function which has a Integrating separately,numerator which is not of lower degree than thedenominator we proceed as follows1 f dx = x + c
1Change the integrand into a polynomial plusa fraction by dividing the denominator into the andnumerator. After this is accomplished, applythe rules available. f dx = -1n(x + 1) + C2
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
r16x2 - 4x - 8 dxJ 2x + 1
SOLUTION: Divide the denominator into thenumerator, then
(16x2 - 4x - 82x + 1
therefore
r xx + 1 dx = x - ln(x + 1) + C
where
dx = f (8x - 6 - dx2 C = C
1+ C2
PROBLEMS: Evaluate the following inte-dx grals:2f 8x dx f 6 dx
r2x+ 1
and, integrating each separately, we have
f 8x dx = 4x2 + C1 3x - 82. j dx
and
and
1. r2x2 + 6x + 5dxx + 1
. f 6x3 + 13x2 + 20x + 23dx- f 6 dx = -6x + C2 3
2x + 3
f 2x +2 1 dx = -1n(2x + 1) + C34. r2lx + 16x + 4
dx.1 3x + 1
ANSWERS:
x2 + 4x + ln(x + 1) + CThen, by substitution, find that
r16x2 - 4x - 8 21.
2.
3.
dx = 4x - 6x - ln(2x + 1) + C2x + 1
where3x - 81n(x) + C
x3 + x2 + 7x + ln(2x + 3) + CC = Cl + C2 + C3
7 2 14. -I x + 3x + ln(3x + 1) + CEXAMPLE: Evaluate
dxCONSTANT TO A VARIABLE POWER
In this section a discussion of twoform.s of aSOLUTION: The numerator is not of lower constant to a variable power is presented. Thedegree than the denominator; therefore we di- two forms are au and ell where u is the variablevide and finq that and a and e are the constants.x A.p f 1
x + 1 `11' x + 1 dx
1=fdx-fi dx
Formula:
Chapter 15INTEGRATION FORMULAS
Proof: SOLUTION: Let
d(au + C1) = au hi a du u = 2x
then and
fa In a du = a + C1
but ln a is a constant, then
and
faulnadu=lna fall&
ln a f au du = + C1
Then, by dividing both sides by ln a, we have
Ina r 4,,_ au C1
Ina Jau
'""6-. Ina lna
du = 2 dx
The integral should contain a factor of 2 in orderthat
du = 2dx
Thus we add a factor of 2 in the integral and com-pensate by multiplying the integral by 1/2.
Then
and letting therefore
we have
and
1C = 1 32xI f 321c 2 dx = (i) +2
In a
32x
f au du a= + C 2 ln 3 + CIn
f 32x dx = f (2) 32x dx2
= f 3 2x2 dx
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
SOLUTION: Let
f 3x
U = X
du = 1 dx
therefore, by knowing that
f au"
aIn a
and using substitution, we find that3x
f 3x dx = + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate but we have
f 32x dx
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f7x1r dx
SOLUTION: Let
and
In order to use
U = X2
du = 2x dx
auf au du = lna 4- C
the integral must be in the form of
227
21/4do
f bx2
f bx2 7x dx
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
therefore we remove the 7 and insert a 2 by thereforewriting
f 7xbx2 dx = f 4)* 7xbx2
= 1 fi7xbx2dx2 7
= 2xbx2 dx2
2bx2
7 bx2TInb C
PROBLEMS: Evaluate the following inte-grals:
1. f 1o2x cbc
2. f 73x
3. f 02 x dx
4. f (3x2 + 1)cbc
ANSWERS:
102x1 2 ln 10 +
73x2. + C
9x2u° 2 ln 9 +
2(3x2 + 1)4' 6 ln 2 + C
We will now discuss the second form of theintegral of a constant to a variable power.
Formula:
Proof:
f eu clu = eu + C
d(eu eu
228
and
fe du =e + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
feXdx
SOLUTION: Let
=
du = 1 dx
The integral is in the correct form to use;f e du = e + C
therefore, using substitution, we find
f ex cbc = ex + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f e2x dx
SOLUTION: Let
and
u = 2x
du = 2 dx
We need a factor of 2 in the integral and write
f e2x dx = f e2x dx2
= 1 f e2x 2clx2
and
231
2
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
2fxe`" dx
SOLUTION: Let
u = 2x2
du =4x dx
Chapter 15INTEGRATION FORMULAS
Here a factor of 4 is needed in the integral,therefore
fxe`d4 dx = r 4 las.j -dr xe dx
1=
4r 4xe
2x2dx
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
x2
ex3
+ C
dx
SOLUTION: Write the integral
2r xj dx = fx2 e-x3 dx
exq"
and let3
U = -X
and
du = -3x2 dx
therefore
3f x2 e-x dx - f -3x2 e3-x
1 -x3= + C
dx
PROBLEMS: Evaluate the following inte-grals:
21. f -2xe-x dx
2. fe4x dx
3.fe(2x - 1) dx
4. fex2
229
ANSWERS:
1. e-x2 + C
12. -4- e
4x + C
1 (2x - 1)e
2+ C
4. -e-x2 + C
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS
Trigonometric functions, whichcomprise onegroup of transcendental functions, may be dif-ferentiated and integrated in the same fashionas the other functions. We will limit our proofsto the sine, cosine, and secant functions,butwilllist several others.
Formula:
Proof:
and
therefore
f sin u = -cos u + C
d(cos u + C) = -sin u du
d(-cos u + C) = sin u du
f sin u du = -cos u + C
Foftnula:
f cos u du = sin u + C
Proof:
d(sin u + C) = cos u du
therefore
f cos u du = sin u + C
Formula:f sec2u du= tan u + C
Proof:/sin u c)
d(tan u + C)\COB U
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
and by the quotient rule
d(sin u)+ cos u(cos u) - sin u(-sin u) ducos AV 2cos u but we do not have 3 dx. Therefore, we multiplythe integral by 3/3 and rearrange as follows:
and
du = 3 dx
therefore
=6os2u + sin2u)cos2u
du3 rf sin 3x dx = 3- i sin 3x dx
(---cosi2u) du
= sec 2udu
f sec2u du = tan u + C
To this point we have considered integralsof trigonometric functions which result in func-tions of the sine, cosine, and tangent. Thoseintegrals which result in functions of the co-tangent, secant, and cosecant are included inthe following list of elementary integrals,
f sin u du = -cos u + C
f cos u du = sin u + C
f sec2u du= tan u + C
f csc2u du = -cot u + C
f sec u tan u du = sec u + C
f csc u cot u du .-csc u + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f ain 3x dx
SOLUTION: We need the integral in the formof f (3 sin 2x + 4 cos 3x) dx
then
and
1 r3 j sin 3x 3 dx
1 f sin 3x 3 dx = 1 (-cos 3x) + C3 3
1= - cos 3x + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f cos(2x + 4) dx
SOLUTION: Let
u = (2x + 4)
du = 2 dx
Therefore,
f cos(2x + 4) dx = -?2- f cos(2x + 4) dx
1 f cos(2x + 4) 2 dx2
1 .- sm(2x + 4) + C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f (3 sin 2x + 4 cos 3x) dx
SOLUTION: We use the rule for sums andwrite
f sin u du = -cos u + C
therefore, we let
u = 3x
= f 3 sin 2x dx + f 4 cos 3x cix
Then, in the integral
f 3 sin 2x dx
letu = 2x
Chapter 15INTEGRATION FORMULAS
and
but we have
du = 2 dx
3 dx
To change 3 cbc to 2 dx we divide by 3 and multiplyby 2, with proper compensation, as follows:
f 3 sin 2x dx = (-1-) (1) f 3 sin 2x dx
= 1 f 1 (3 sin 2x dx)2 3
=1f2sin2xdx2
3= (-cos 2x) + C
2 1
3= - 2 cos 2x + C1
The second integral
f 4 cos 3x dx
with
u = 3x
and
du = 3 dx
is evaluated as follows:
f 4 cos 3x dx = (1)(i) f 4 cos 3x dx
f3 cos 3x dx
4= 3 (sin 3x) + C2
Then, by combining the two solutions, we have
f (3 sir. 2x + 4 cos 3x) dx
= - 4 cos 2x + C1 + sin 3x + C2
3- cos 2x + 4 sin 3x + C2 3
where
and
C1 + C2 = C
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f sec2 3x dx
SOLUTION: Let
u = 3x
du = 3 dx
We need 3 dx so we write
and
f sec2 3x dx = 1 fsec2 3x dx3
= I f sec2 3x 3 cbc3
1= (tan 3x) + C
3
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
csc 2x cot 2x dx
SOLUTION: Let
u = 2x
du = 2 dx
We require du equal to 2 dx so we write
f csc 2x cot 2x dx = f csc 2x cot 2x six2
f 2 csc 2x cot 2x dx
EXAMPLE:
SOLUTION:
1-2
csc 2x + C
Evaluatef csc2 3x dx
Letu = 3x
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
and
then
du = 3 dx
f csc2 3x dx = f 3 csc2 3x dx3
1= - cot 3x + C3
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f sec tan
SOLUTION: Let
-2-
and
then
dx
1du = dx2
f sec 21 tan 3- cix = 2 f 1 sec2
2-E- tan dx2 2 2 2
= 2 sec f + c
PROBLEMS: Evaluate the following inte-grals:
1. fcos 4 xdx
2. f sin 5x dx
3. f sec2 6x dx
3. I tan 6x C6
1 .4. -2- sin (6x + 2) + C
15. - cos(2x2) + C
26. - 1- cot 5x + C
7. 9 sec -a- c
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONSOF THE FORM fun du
The integrals of powers of trigonometricfunctions will be limited to those which may,by substitution, be written in the form
and
fun du
EXAMPLE: Evaluate__
f sing x cos x dx
SOLUTION: Let
u = sin x
du = cos x dx
By substitution
f sin4 x cos x dx = fu4 du
115
5
4. f 3 cos(6x + 2) dx Then, by substitution again, find that
5. f x sin (2x2) 5
5sin5 x + C5
6. f 2 esc2 5x dxtherefore
x x7. f3 sec tan dx f sin4 x cos x dx = sth5 x5
+ CANSWERS:
1 . s in 4x + C
2. - 1 cos 5x + C
232
EXAMPLE: Evaluate
f cos3 x(-sin x) dx
Chapter 15INTEGRATION FORMULAS
SOLUTION: Let
and
Write
U = COS X
du = -sin x dx
r 3 u4j u du = + C4
and by substitution
u4COS
4 x+ C =4 4 + C
f cos 2x dxsin3 2x
5. f cos3 x sin x clx
6. f sin x cos x (sin x + cos x) dx
ANSWERS:
1 31. sin x + C3
1 52. sin x + C
5
3. sin2 x + C
-1PROBLEMS: Evaluate the following inte- 4. + Cgrals: 4 sin2
2x
1. f sin2 x cos x clx
2. f sin4 x cos x dx
3. f 2 sin x cos x cix
\
233
1 45. - 7-1- cos x + C
6. sin3x - cos3 x + C3
-
4
4
I
1
CHAPTER 16
COMBINATIONS AND PERMUTATIONS
This chapter deals with concepts required forthe study of probability and statistics. Statisticsis a branch of science which is an outgrowth ofthe theory of probability. Combinations andpermutations are used in both statistics andprobability, and they, in turn, involve opera-tions with factorial notation. Therefore, combi-nations, permutations, and factorial notationare discussed in this chapter.
DEFINITIONS
A combination is defined as a possible se-lection of a certain number of objects takenfrom a group with no regard given to order.For instance, suppose we were to choose twoletters from a group of three letters. If thegroup of three letters were A, B, and C, wecould choose the letters in combinations of twoas follows:
AB, AC, BC
The order in which we wrote the letters is ofno concern. That is, AB could be written BAbut we, would still have only one combination ofthe letters A and B. ,
If order were considered, we would referto the letters as permutations and make a dis-tinction between AB and BA. The permutationsof two letters from the group of three letterswould be as follows:
AB, AC, BC, BA, CA, CB
The symbol used to indicate the foregoingcombination will be 3C2 meaning a group ofthree objects taken two at a time. For theprevious permutation we will use 3P2, meaninga group of three objects taken two at a timeand ordered.
An understanding of factorial notation isrequired prior to a detailed discussion of com-binations and permutations. We define theproduct of the integers 1 through n as n frac-torial and use the symbol n! to denote this. Thatis,
31 = 1.2.3
6 I = 123.4.5.6n1 = 1.2.3. (n - 1).n
EXAMPLE: Find the value of 5!SOLUTION: Write
5! = 1.2.3.4.5
= 120
EXAMPLE: Find the value of
5!3 I
SOLUTION: Write
and
then
5! = 5.4.3.2.1
31 = 3.2.1
5! 5442-131 3.21
and by simplification
234
1237
5.4.3.2.1 5.43* 2* 1
= 20
Chapter 16--COMBINATIONS AND PERMUTATIONS
The previous example could have been solved by This theorem allows us to simplify an expres-writing sion as follows:
51 31 4.53! 3!
= 54 = 3! 4.5
Notice that we wrote = 21 3-4.5
5! = 5.4.3.2.1 =
and combined the factors Another example is
3.2.1 (n + 2)1 = (n + 1)1 + 2)
as = n 1 (n + 1)(n + 2)
31 = (n - 1)1n(n + 1)(n + 2)
5! = 4! 5
then
and
51 = 31 4.5
EXAMPLE: Simplify
(n + 3)1n!
EXAMPLE: Find the value of SOLUTION: Write
61 - 4!4!
SOLUTION: Write
then
61 = 41 5-6
then
(n + 3)! = n! (n + 1)(n + 2)(n + 3)
(n. 4_2_1)1 n! (n+ 1)(n + 2)(n + 3)n! n!
= (n + 1)(n + 2) (n + 3)
4! = 411 PROBLEMS: Find the value of problems1-4 and simplify proslems 5 and 6.
6! - 4! 41(5.6 - 1)4! 4!
= (5.6 - 1)
= 29
Notice that 4! was factored from the expression
6! - 4!
THEOREM
If n and r are positive integers, with n grzaterthan r, then
n! = r 1 (r + 1)(r + 2) .n
235
1. 6!
2. 3! 4!
3. 8!11!
5! - 3!4.31
nl5.
6. n!ANSWERS:
1. 7202. 144
2381
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
3.
4.5.6.
1 n(n - 1) ... (n - r + 1)99019n(n + 1) (n + 2)
n r 1. 2- 3. - rThe denominator may be written as
COMBINATIONS
As indicated previously, a combination is theselection of a certain number of objects takenfrom a group of objects without regard to order.We use the symbol 5C3 to indicate that we havefive objects taken three at a time, without re-gard to order. Using the letters A, B, C, D, andE, to designate the five objects, we list thecombinations as follows:
ABC ABD ABE ACD ACE
ADE BCD BCE BDE CDE
We find there are ten combinations of five ob-jects taken three at a time. We made the se-lection of three objects, as shown, but we calledthese selections combinations. The word com-binations infers that order is not considered.
EXAMPLE: Suppose we wish to know lowmany color combinations can be made fromfour different colored marbles, if we use onlythree marbles at a time. The marbles arecolored red, green, white, and blue.
SOLUTION: We let the first letter in eachword indicate the color, then we list the pos-sible combinations as follows:
RGW RGY RWY GWY
If we rearrange the first group, RGW, to formGWR or RWG we still have the same colorcombination; therefore order is not important.
The previous examples are completely withinour capabilities, but suppose we have 20 boysand wish to know how many different basketballteams we could form, one at a time, from theseboys. Our listing would be quite lengthy and wewould have a difficult task to determine that wehad all of the possible combinations. In fact,there would be over 15,000 combinations wewould have to list. This indicates the need fora formula for combinations.
FORMULA
The general formula for possible combina-tions of r objects from a group of n objects is
1.2.3...r =r!
and if we multiply both numerator and denomi-nator by
(n - r). 2.1
which is
- r)!
we have
n(n - 1) (n - r + 1)(n - r). 2.1nCr r! (n - r). .2.1
The numerator
is
Then
n(n - 1)... (n - r + 1)(n - r). 2.1
n1
n!Cn r - r! (n - r)!
This formula is read: The number of combi-nations of n objects taken r at a time is equalto n factorial divided by r factorial times nminus r factorial.
EXAMPLE: In the previous problem where20 boys were available, how many differentbasketball teams could be formed?
SOLUTION: If the choice of which boy playedcenter, guard, or forward is not considered,we find we desire the number of combinationsof 20 boys taken five at a time and write
236
where
and
n!C* =n r r 1 (n- r)!
n = 20
r 5_
Chapter 16COMBINATIONS AND PERMUTATIONS
Then, by substitution we have
20!ncr 20
c5 5! (20 - 5)1
20!51 15!
15! 16.17.18.19.20151 51
16.17.18.19.205. 4. 3. 2. 1
16.17.3.19.11
= 15,504
EXAMPLE: A man has, in his pocket, asil-ver dollar, a half-dollar, a quarter, a dime, anickel, and a penny. If he reaches into hispocket and pulls out three coins, how many dif-ferent sums may he have?
SOLUTION: The order in not important,therefore the number of combinations of coinspossible is
6C =1
6 3 31 (6 - 3)1
6!31 31
31 4.5.631 3!
4.5.63. 2. 1
4. 51
= 20
This seems to violate the rule, °division byzero is not allowed,' but we define 0! as equal 1.Then
311
31 01 3!
which is obvious if we list the combinations ofthree things taken three at a time.
PROBLEMS: Find the value of problems 1-6and solve problems 7, 8, and 9.
1. 6C2
2.6
C4
3. 15C5
4. 7C7
6C3 + 7C35.
13C6
6. (7C3) (6C3)14C4
7. We want to paint three rooms in a house,each a different color and we may choose fromseven different colors of paint. How many colorcombinations are possible, for the three rooms?
8. If 20 boys go out for the football team,how many different teams may be formed, one ata time?
9. Two boys and their dates go to the drive-in and each wants a different flavor ice creamcone. The drive-in has 24 flavors of ice cream.How many combinations of flavors may theychoose?
ANSWERS:
EXAMPLE: Find the value of
3C3
SOLUTION: We use the formula given andfind that
1.
2.
3.
4.
5'
A
15
15
3,003
1
5C3 3 31 (3 - 3)1
31
156
10031 01 143
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
7. 35
8. 167,960
9. 10, 626
PRINCIPLE OF CHOICE
EXAMPLE: A man ordering dinner has achoice of one meat dish from four, a choice ofthree vegetables from seven, one salad fromthree, and one dessert from four. How manydifferent menus are possible?
SOLUTION: The individual combinations areas follows:
meat . 4The principle of choice is discussed in re-lation to combinations although it is also, later vegetable 7C4in this chapter, discussed in relation to permu-tations. It is stated as follows: salad
3C1If a selection can be made in n1 ways, andafter this selection is made, a second selection dessert ... C.. 4 1can be made in n2 ways, and after this selec-tion is made, a third selection can be made in The value ofn3 ways, and so forth for r ways, then the r
41selections can be made together in C =4 1 1 ! (4 - 1)!
nln2n3nr ways 4!31
EXAMPLE: In how many ways can a coachchoose first a football team and then a basket-ball team if 18 boys go out for either team?
SOLUTION: First let the coach choose a andfootball team. That is
18!18c11 11! (18 - 11)1
181111 7!
11! 121314.15.16.17.18111 7.6.5.4.3.2.1
= 31, 824
The coach now must choose a basketball teamfrom the remaining seven boys. That is
= 4
7!C7 4 = 41 (7- 4)!7!
41 31
5.6.72.3
= 35
and
-3 1 1! (3 - 1)!
7!7c
5 51 (7 - 5)1 3121
7151 21 = 351 6.7 therefore, there are5! 21
67 (4)(35) (3) (4) = 1680.2 different menus available to the man.
PROBLEMS: Solve the following problems.= 21 1. A man has 12 different colored shirtsand 20 different ties. How many shirt and tieThen, together, the two teams can be chosen in combinations can he select to take on a trip, if
(31, 824) (21) = 668,304 ways he takes three shirts and five ties?
238
.1241
Chapter 16COMBINATIONS AND PERMUTATIONS
2. A petty officer, in charge of posting thewatch, has in the duty section 12 men. He mustpost three different fire watches, then post fouraircraft guards on different aircraft. How manydifferent assignments of men can he make?
3. If there are 10 third class and 14 secondclass petty officers in a division which mustfurnish two second class and six third classpetty officers for shore patrol, how many dif-ferent shore patrol parties can be made?
ANSWERS:1. 3,410,8802. 27,7203. 19,110
PERMUTATIONS
Permutations are similar to combinations butextend the requirements ofcombinations by con-sidering order.
Suppose we have two letters, A and B, andwish to know how many arrangements of theseletters can be made. It is obvious that the answeris two. That is
AB and BA
If we extend this to the three letters A, B, andC, we find the answer to be
ABC, ACB, MC, BCA, CAB, CM
We had three choices for the first letter, andafter we chose the first letter, we had only twochoices for the second letter, and after thesecond letter, we had only one choice. This isshown in the °tree" diagram in figure16-1. No-tice that there is a total of six different pathsto the ends of the "branches" of the "tree"diagram,
STARTINGPOINT
FIRSTCHOICE
SECONDCHOICE
THIRDCHOICE
0
Figure 16-1."Tree" diagram.
If the number of objects is large, the treewould become very complicated; therefore, weapproach the problem in another manner, usingparentheses to show the possible choices. Sup-pose we were to arrange five objects inas manydifferent orders as possible. We have for thefirst choice six objects.
(6) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
For the second choice we have only five choices.
(6) (6) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
For the third choice we have only four choices.
(6) (5) (4) ( ) ( ( )
This may be continued as follows:
(6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)
By applying the principle of choice we find thetotal possible ways of arranging the objects tobe the product of the individual choices. That is
6.5.4.3.2.1
and this may be written as
61
This leads to the statement: The number ofpermutations of n objects, taken all together, isequal to nl.
EXAMPLE: How many permutations ofseven different letters may be made?
SOLUTION: We could use the "tree" but thiswould become complicated. (Try it to seewhy.)We could use the parentheses as follows:
(7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) = 5040
The easiest solution is to use the previousstatement and write
7P7 = 71
That is, the number of possible arrangementsof seven objects, taken seven at a time, is 7NOTE: Compare this with the number of COM-BINATIONS of seven objects, taken seven at atime.
239
'242
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
If we are faced with finding the number ofpermutations of seven objects taken three at atime, we use three parentheses as follows:
In the first position we have a choice ofseven objects.
(7) ( ) ( )
In the second position we have a choice of sixobjects
(7) (6) ( )
In the last position we have a choice of five ob-jects,
(7) (6) (5)and by principle of choice, the solution is
7.6.5 = 210
FORMULA
At this point we will use our knowledge ofcombinations to develop a formula for the num-ber of permutations of n objects taken r at atime.
Suppose we wish to find the number of per-mutations of five things taken three at a time.We first determine the number of groups of three,as follows:
5C3
= 10
Thus, there are 10 groups of three objects each.We are now asked to arrange each of these
ten groups in as many orders as possible. Weknow that the number of permutations of threeobjects, taken together, is 31. We may arrangeeach of the 10 groups in 31 or six ways. Thetotal number of possible permutations of 5C3then is
5C3 3! = 10.6
which is written
5C3 31 =5P3
Put into the general form, then= PnCr r! n r
240
and knowing that
then
but
therefore
nCr =
n!nCr r! = r!r! - r)!
n!(n - r)!
nCr r! = nPr
nlnPr - (n r)!
EXAMPLE: How many permutations of sixobjects, taken two at a time, can be made?
SOLUTION: The number of permutations ofsix objects, taken two at a time, is written
6!t6-r2ff6!4!
4 ! 5. 64!
= 5. 6
= 30
EXAMPLE: In how many ways can eightpeople be arranged in a row?
SOLUTION: All eight people must be in therow; therefore, we want the number of permu-tations of eight people, taken eight at a time,which is
8!P8 8 (8 - 8)!810!
(Remember that 0! was defined as equal to 1)then
243
8! 875 5. 4.3.2.10! 1
= 40,320
Chapter 16COMBINATIONS AND PERMUTATIONS
Problems dealing with combinations and per-mutations often require the use of both formulasto solve one problem.
EXAMPLE: There are eight first class andsix second class petty officers on the board ofthe fifty-six club. In how many ways can theyelect, from the board, a president, a vice-president, a secretary, and a treasurer if thepresident and secretary must be first classpetty officers and the vice-president and treas-urer must be second class petty officers?
SOLUTION: Since two of the eight first classpetty officers are to fill two different offices, wewrite
8P2 8!
(8 - 2)!
8!6!
= 7.8= 56
Then, two of the six second class petty officersare to fill two different offices; thus we write
6P2
= 5.6
= 30
The principle of choice holis inthis case; there-fore, there are
56.30 = 1680
ways to select the required office holdees. Theproblem, thus far, is apermutationproblem, butsuppose we are asked the following: In howmany ways can they elect the office holders fromthe board, if two of the office holders must befirst class petty officers and two of the officeholders must be second class petty officers?
SOLUTION: We have already determinedhow many ways eight things may be takentwo ata time and how many ways six may be takentwo at a time, and also, how many ways theymay be taken together. That is
8P2 = 50
and
then
6P2 = 30
P6P
2= 16808 2
Our problem now is to find how many ways wecan combine the four offices, two at a time.Therefore, we write
241
4C24!
= 2! (4 - 2)!4!
= 2! 2!4.3.2.1_
2. 2
= 6
Then, in answer to the problem, we write= 10,080
8P2 6P2 4C2
In words, if there are 4C2 ways of combiningthe four offices, and then, for everyone of theseways there are 8P2 6P2 ways of arrangingtheoffice holders, then there are
8 2 6 2 4 2ways of electing the petty officers.
PROBLEMS: Find the answers to the fol-lowing.
1. 6P32. 4P3
3. 72 524. In how many ways can six people be seated
in a row?5. There are seven boys and nine girls in
a club. In how many ways can they elect fourdifferent officers designated byA,B,C, and D if:
(a) A and B must be boys and C and Dmust be girls?
(b) two of the officers must be boys andtwo of the officers must be girls?
ANSWERS:1. 1202. 243. 8404. 7205. (a) 3,024
(b) 18,144
.244
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
In the question "How many different arrange-ments of the letters in the word STOP can bemade?" were asked, we would write
4P4 41
= 24We would be correct since all letters are dif-ferent. If some of the letters were the same,we would reason as given in the following prob-lem.
EXAMPLE: How many different arrange-ments of the letters in the word ROOM can bemade?
SOLUTION: We have two letters alike. Ifwe list the possible arrangements, using sub-scripts to make a distinction between the O's,we have
R 0102M 0102M R 01M 02R M 0102R
R 0201M 0201M R 02M 01R M 0201R
R 01M 02 0102R M 01R M 02 M 0
1R 02
R 02M 01 0201R M 02R MO1
M02R 01
R M 0102 01M R 02 01R 02M M R 0102
R M 0201 02M R 01 02R 01M M R 0201
but we cannot distinguish between the O's andR 0102M and R 0201M would he the same ar-rangement without the subscript. Notice in thelist that there are only half as many arrange-ments without the use of subscripts or a totalof twelve arrangements. This leads to the state-ment: The number of arrangements of n items,where ri, r2, and rk are alike, is given by
n!r 11 r
21 rk I
In the previous example n was equal to fGur andthere were two letters alike; therefore,wewouldwrite
4! 4-3.2.12! 2.1
= 12
EXAMPLE: How many arrangements canbemade using the letters in the word ADAPTA-TION?
SOLUTION: We use
where
and
and
Then
n Ir 1! r 2! . . rk!
n = 10
r1
= 2 (two T's)
r2
= 3 (three A's)
n!rl! r2i rk!
10!2! 3!
2.5.6.7.8.9.101
= 302, 400
PROBLEMS: Find the number of possiblearrangements of the letters in the followingwo rds.
1. DOWN2. STRUCTURE3. BOOK4. MILLIAMPERE5. TENNESSEEANSWERS:1. 242. 45,3603. 124. 2,494,8005. 3,780Although the previous discussions have been
associated with formulas, problems dealingwithcombinations and permucations may be analyzedand solved in a more meaningful way withoutcomplete reliance upon the formulas.
EXAMPLE: How many four-digit numberscan be formed from the digits 2, 3,4, 5, 6, and 7
(a) without repetitions?(b) with repetitions?
SOLUTION: The (a) part of the question is astraight forward permutation problem and we
Chapter 16-COMBINATIONS AND PERMUTATIONS
reason that we want the number of permutationsof six items taken four at a time.
Therefore
p = 6!6 4 (6 - 4)!
=6- 5.4-3.2.1
2. 1
= 360
The (b) part of the question would become quitecomplicated if we tried to use the formulas;therefore, we reason as follows:
We desire a four digit number and find wehave six choices for the first digit. That is,we may use any of the digits 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7in the thousands column which gives us sixchoices for the digit to be placed in the thousandscolumn. If we select the digit 4 for the thousandscolumn we still have a choice of any of the digits2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 for the hundreds column.This is because we are allowed repetition andmay select the digit 4 for the hundreds columnas we did for the thousands column, This givesus six choices for the hundreds column.
Continuing this reasoning, we couldwrite thenumber of choices for each place value columnas shown in table 16-1.
Table 16-1. -Place value choices.
thousands
column
hundreds
column
tens
column
units
column
six
choices
six
choices
six
choices
six
choices
In table 16-1, observe that the total numberof choices for the four digit number, by theprinciple of choice, is
tition. We would be required to start in the unitscolumn because ai. odd number is determined bythe units column digit. Therefore, we haveonlythree choices. That is, either the 3, 5, or 7.For the tens column we have five choices andfor the hundreds column we have four choices.This is shown in table 16-2,
Table 16-2. -Place value choices.
hundreds
column
tens
column
units
column
four
choices
five
choices
three
choices
In table 16-2, observe that there are
4.5.3 = 60
three-digit odd numbers that can be formedfrom the digits 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, withoutrepetition.
PROBLEMS: Solve the following problems.1. Using the digits 4, 5, 6, and 7, how many
two-digit numbers can be formed:(a) without repetitions?(b) with repetitions?
2. Using the digits 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, howmany five-digit numbers can be formed:
(a) without repetitions?(b) with repetitions?
3. Using the digits of problem 2, how manyfour-digit odd numbers can be formed, withoutrepetitions?
ANSWERS
6.6.6.6 = 1,296 1. (a) 12(b) 16
Suppose, in the previous problem, we were 2. (a) 720to find how many three-digit odd numbers could (b) 7,776be formed from the given digits, without repe- 3. 180
243
246
CHAPTER 17
PROBABILITY
The history of probability theory dates backto the 17th century and at that time was relatedto games of chance. In the 18th century it wasseen that probability theory had applicationsbeyond the scope of games of chance. Some ofthe applications in which probability theory isapplied are situations with outcomes such as lifeor death and boy or girl. In the present century,statistics and probability are applied to insur-ance, annuities, biology, and social investiga-tions.
The treatment of probability in this chapter islimited to simple applications. These applica-tions will be, to a large extent, based On gamesof chance which lend themselves to an under-standing of basic ideas of probability.
BASIC CONCEPTS
If a coin were tossed, the chance that it wouldland heads up is just as likely as the chance itwould land tails up. That is, the coin has nomore reason to land heads up than it has to landtails up. Every toss of the coin is called a trial.
We define probability as the ratio of the dif-ferent number of ways a trial can succeed (orfail) to the total numbers of ways in which it mayresult. We will let p represent the probabilityof success and q represent the probability offailure.
One commonly misunderstood concept ofprobability is the effect prior trials have on asingle trial. That is, after a coin has beentossed many times and every trial resulted inthe coin falling heads up, will the next toss of thecoin result in tails up? The answer is "notnecessarily," and will be explained later in thischapter.
PROBABILITY OF SUCCESS
If a trial must result in any of n equallylikely ways, and if s is the number of successful
ways and f is the number of failing ways, thenthe probability of success is
where
244
41"'s
s + f = n
EXAMPLE: What is the probability that acoin will land heads up?
SOLUTION: There is only one way the coincan land heads up, therefore s equals one.There is also only one way the coin can landother than heads up; therefore, f equals one.Then
and
s = 1
f = 1
Thus the probability of success is
P = s + f1
1 + 1
1
TThis, then, is the ratio of successful ways in
which the trial can succeed to the total numberof ways the trial can result.
EXAMPLE: What is the probability that adie (singular of dice) willland withathree show-ing on the upper face.
SOLUTION: There is only one favorableway the die may land and there are a total offive ways it can land without the three face up.
Chapter 17PROBABILITY
and
and
s = 1
= 5
P = s + f
1
EXAMPLE: What is the probability of draw-ing a black marble from a box of marbles if allsix of the marbles in the box are white?
SOLUTION: There are no favorable waysof success and there are six total ways, there-fores
and
then
s = 0
f = 6
013 0 + 6
0
= 0
EXAMPLE: What is the probagility ofdrawing a black marble from a box of sixblack marbles?
SOLUTION: There are six successful waysand no unsuccessful ways of drawingthe marble,therefore
and
then
s = 6
f = 0
66 + 0
e"6"
= 1
The previous two examples are the extremesof probabilities and intuitively demonstrate that
the probability of an event ranges from zero toone inclusive.
EXAMPLE: A box contains six hard leadpencils and twelve soft lead pencils. What isthe probability of drawing a soft leadpencil fromthe box?
SOLUTION: We are given
and
then
245
s = 12
f = 6
12P
1182
2=
PROBLEMS:
1. What is the probability of drawing anace from a standard deck of fifty-two playingcards?
2. What is the probability of drawing a blackace from a standard deck of playing cards?
3. If a die is rolled, what is the probabilityof an odd number showing on the upper face?
4. A man has three nickels, two dimes, andfour quarters in his pocket. If he draws a singlecoin from his pocket, what is the probabilitythat:
(a) he draws a nickel?(b) he draws a half-dollar?(c) he draws a quarter?
ANSWERS:
1.
2.
3.
113
1
1
(b) 04
(c) -(4
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
PROBABILITY OF FAILURE
If. a trial results in any of n equally likelyways, and s is the number of successful waysand f is the number of failures then, as before,
ors + f n
n - s = f
The probability of failure is given by
q =S + f
n - s
A trial must result in either success or fail-ure. If success is certain then p equals one andq equals zero. If success is impossible thenp equals zero and q equals one. By combiningboth eventsthat is, in either casethe proba-bility of success plus the probability of failureis equal to one as shown by
and
then
If, in any ev
then
In the caseof success is
P = s + f
q =S + f
P+cl=s+f+s+f= 1
ent
p + q = 1
q = 1 P
of tossing a coin, the probability
and the probability of failure is
q = 1 P
1
2
EXAMPLE: What is the probability of notdrawing a black marble from a box containingsix white, three red, and two black marbles froma box containing six white, three red, and twoblack marbles?
SOLUTION: The probability of drawing ablack marble from the box is
211
Since the probability of drawing a marble isone, then the probability of not drawing a blackmarble is
q = 1 - p
= 1 -
9IT
PROBLEMS: Compare the following prob-lems and answers with the preceding problemsdealing with the probability of success.
1. What is the probability of not drawing anace from a standard deck of fifty-two playingcards?
2. What is the probability of not drawing ablack ace from a standard deck of playing cards?
3. If a die is rolled, what is the probability ofan odd number not showing on the upper face?
4. A man has three nickels, two dimes, andfour quarters in his pocket. If he draws a singlecoin from his pocket, what is the probability that:
(a) he does not draw a nickel?(b) he does not draw a half-dollar?(c) he does not draw a quarter?
ANSWERS:
246
249
Chapter 17PROBABILITY
, 2526
3.
4. (a) I(b) 1
5(c)
EXPECTATION
In this discussion of expectation we will con-sider two types. One is a numerical expecta-tion and the other is value expectation.
Numerical Expectation
If you tossed a coin fifty times you would ex-pect the coin to fall heads about twenty-fivetimes. Your assumption is explained by thefollowing definition.
If the probability of success in one trial isp, and k is the total number of trials, then pk isthe expected number of successes inthek trials.
In the above example of tossing the coinfiftytimes the expected number of heads (successes)is
En = pk
where
En = expected number
p = probability of heads (successes)
k = number of tosses
Substituting values in the equation, we find that
1E = () 50n 2
= 25
EXAMPLE: A die is rolled by a player. Whatis the expectation of rolling a six in 30 trials?
SOLUTION: The probability of rolling a sixin one trial is
and the number of rolls is
therefore
k = 30
En = pk
1= (30)
= 5
In words, the player would expect to roll asix five times in thirty rolls.
EXAMPLE: If a box contained seven num-bered slips of paper, eachnumbered differently,how many times would a man expect to draw asingle selected number slip, if he returned thedrawn slip after each draw and he made a totalof seventy draws?
SOLUTION: The probability of drawing theselected number slip in one drawing is
1= "Ff
247
and the number of draws is
therefore
k = 70
En = pk
= 10
Note: When the product of pk is not an inte-ger, we will use the nearest integer to plc.
Value Expectation
We will define value expectation as follows:If, in the event of a successful result, a personis to receive m value and p is the probability ofsuccess of that event, then nip is his value ex-pectation.
If you attended a house party where a doorprize of $5.00 was given and ten people attendedthe party, what would be your expectation? Inthis case, instead of using k for expected num-ber we use m for expected value. That is
250
Eir = pm
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
where
p = probability of success
m -T. value of prize
and
Ev = expected value
Then, by substitution
= pm
= (A-) $5-00
= $.50
EXAMPLE: In a game, a wheel is spun andwhen the wheel stops a pointer indicates one ofthe digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. The prizefor winning is $16.00. If a person needed a 6 towin, calculate the following:
(a) What is his probability of winning?(b) What is his value expectation?SOLUTION
(a) p 1
1(b) p = and m = $16.00
therefore
Ev = pm = $16.00
= $2.00
PROBLEMS:1. When a store opened, each person who
made a purchase was given one ticket on a chancefor a door prize of $400. At the close of theday 2,000 people had registered.
(a) If you made one purchase, what isyour expectation?
(b) If you made 5 purchases, what isyourexpectation?
2. Each person at a Bingo game purchaseda fifty-cent chance for the jackpot of twentydollars. If fifty people purchased chances,what is each person's
(a) probability of winning?(b) probability of not winning?(c) expectation?
ANSWERS:
1. (a) $.20(b) $1.00
2. (a) 1)-49
(b) 50(c) $.40
COMPOUND PROBABILITIES
The probabilities to this point have beensingle events. In the discussion on compoundprobabilities, events which may affect otherswill be covered. The word °may* is used be-cause included with dependent events and mu-tually exclusive events is the independent event.
INDEPENDENT EVENTS
Two events are said to be independent if theoccurrence of one has no effect on the occur-rence of the other.
When two coins are tossed at the sametime or one after the other, whether one fallsheads or tails has no effect on the way thesecond coin falls. Suppose we call the coinsA and B. There are four ways in which thecoins may fall, as follows:
1. A and B fall heads.2. A and B fall tails.3. A falls heads and B falls tails.4. A falls tails and B falls heads.The probability of any one way for the coins
to fall is calculated as follows:
= 1
and
n = 4
therefore
1p 74-
This probability may be determined by con-sidering the product of the separate probabil-ities; that is
248
251
1p that A falls heads is y1p that B falls heads is -2-
4
Chapter 17PROBABILITY
and the probability that both fall heads is
1.1_i-4
In other words, when two events are inde-pendent, the probability that one and then theother will occur is the product of their sepa-rate probabilities.
EXAMPLE: A box contains three red mar-bles and seven green marbles. If a marble isdrawn, then replaced and another marble isdrawn, what is the probability that both mar-bles are red?
SOLUTION: Two solutions are offered.First, there are, by the principle of choice,10 10 ways in which two marbles can be se-lected. There are three ways the red marblemay be selected on the first draw and threeways on the second draw and by the principleof choice there are 3 3 ways in which a redmarble may be drawn on both trials. Then therequired probability is
9= 100
The second solution, using the product ofindependent events, follows: The probability of
3drawing a red ball on the first draw is yr) and
the probability of drawing a red ball on the3
second draw is Therefore, the probability
of drawing a red ball on both draws is theproduct of the separate probabilities
3 3 9'-i rrO 0PROBLEMS:1. If a die is tossed twice, what is the prob-
ability of a two up followed by a three up?2. A box contains two white, three red, and
four blue marbles. If after each selection themarble is replaced, what is the probability ofdrawing, in order:
(a) a white then a blue marble?(b) a blue then a red marble?(c) a white, a red, then a blue marble?
ANSWERS:
1
82. (a) 81
DEPENDENT EVENTS
In some cases one event is dependent onanother. That is, two or more events are saidto be dependent if the occurrence or nonoccur-rence of one of the events affects the probabil-ities of occurrence of any of the others.
Consider that two or more events are de-pendent. If pi is the probabilityof a first event,p2 the probability that after the first happensthe second will occur, p3 the probability thatafter the first and second have happened thethird will occur, etc., then the probability thatpalrlodeuveetpntsl pii2.1 happ3pen in the given order is the
EXAMPLE A box contains three white mar-bles and two black marbles. What is theprobability that in two drawsboth marbles drawnwill be black. The first marble drawn is notr eplaced.
SOLUTION: On the first draw the probabilityof drawing a black marble is
2131 5
and on the second draw the probability of draw-ing a black marble is
1
P2 71.
then the probability of drawing both black mar-bles is
249
P P1 P2
2 1
1
10
EXAMPLE: Slips numbered one throughnineare placed in a box. N two slips are drawn,what is the probability that
(a) both are odd?(b) both are even?SOLUTION:(a) The probability that the first is odd is
5P1
252
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
and the probability that the second is odd is4
P2
therefore, the probability that both are odd is
P = P1 P2
5 4
518
(b) The probability that the first is even is4
131
and the probability that the second is even is3
P2 =
therefore, the probability that both are even is
PROBLEMS: In the following problems as-sume that no replacement is made after eachselection.
1. A box contains five white and six redmarbles. What is the probability of success-fully drawing, in order, a red marble then awhite marble?
2. A bag contains three red, two white, andsix blue marbles. What is the probability ofdrawing, in order, two red, one blue and twowhite marbles?
3. There are fifteen airmen inthe line crew.They must take care of the coffee mess and lineshack cleanup. They put slips numbered 1through 15 in a hat and decide that any who drawsa number divisible by 5 will be assigned thecoffee mess and any who draws a number divis-ible by 4 will be assigned cleanup. The firstperson draws a 4, the second a 3, and the thirdan 11. As fourth person to draw, what is theprobability that you will:
(a) be assigned the coffee mess?
4 3 (b) be assigned the cleanup?ti ANSWERS:
1 i 3-6 1 II-----
A second method of solution involves the use 12of combinations. 770
(a) There are a total of nine slips taken two1at a time and there are five odd slips taken two 3. (a) i
at a time, therefore
5C2 (b)
1
P =9C2
MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE EVENTS51
21 (31) Two or more events are called mutually ex-= clusive if the occurrence of any one of them
21 (71) excludes the occurrence of the others. Theprobability of occurrence of some one of two
5 or more mutually exclusive events is the sumro of the probabilities of the individual events.It sometimes happens that when one event
(b) There are a total of 9C2 choices andfour has occurred, the probability of another eventeven slips taken two at a time, therefore is excluded, it being understood that we are re-
ferring to the same given occasion or trial.4C2
P For example, throwing a die once can yield: 6, but not both, in the same toss. The
1 7.Dility that either a 5 or a 6 occurs is the6 6- . cf their individual probabilities.
250
253
Chapter 17PROBABILI:TY
EXAMPLE: From a bag containing five whiteballs, two black balls, and eleven red balls, oneball is drawn. What is the probability that it iseither black or red?
SOLUTION: There are eighteen ways inwhich the draw can be made. There are twoblack ball choices and eleven red ball choiceswhich are favorable, or a total of thirteen fav-orable choices. Then, the probability of suc-cess is
13
Since drawing a red ball excludes the drawingof a black ball, and vice versa, the two eventsare mutually exclusive. Then, the probabilityof drawing a black ball is
2131 =
and the probability of drawing a red ball is
Therefore the probability of success is
P 131 + P2
2 11 13
EXAMPLE: What is the probability of draw-ing either a king, a queen, or ajack from a deckof playing cards?
SOLUTION: The individual probabilities are
4king =
queen = 452
4jack =
251
254
Therefore the probability of success is4 4 4
P 52 4.
12
3
EXAMPLE: What is the probability of roll-ing a die twice and having a 5 and then a 3 showor having a 2 and then a 4 show?
SOLUTION: The probability of havinga 5 andthen a 3 show ir,
1 1
p1 = -6
1
and the probability of having a 2 and then a 4 showis
P2 (1)1
Then, the probability of either p1 or p2 is
P =131 +132
1 1
+
1
18
PROBLEMS:1. When tossing a coin, whatisthe probabil-
ity of getting either a head or a tail?2. A bag contains twelve blue, three red, and
four white marbles. What is the probability ofdrawing:
(a) in one draw, either a red or a whitemarble?
(b) in one draw, either a red, white, orblue marble?
(c) in two draws, either a red marblefollowed by a blue marble or a red marble fol-lowed by a red marble?
3. What is the probability of getting a total ofat least 10 points in rolling two dice?
(HINT: You want either a total of 10, 11, or12.)
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
ANSWERS:
1. 1
2. (a) 11
(b) 1
(c) -54
1
EMPIRICAL PROBABILITIES
Among the most important applications ofprobability are those in situations where wecannot list all possible outcomes. To this pointwe have considered problems in which theprobabilities could be obtained from situationsin terms of equally likely results..
Because some problems are so complicatedfor analysis we can only estimate probabilitiesfrom experience and observation. This is em-pirical probability.
In modern industry probability now plays animportant role in many activities. Qualitycontrol and reliability of a manufactured articlehave become extremely important considera-tions in which probability is used.
RELATIVE FREQUENCY OF SUCCESS
We define relative frequency of success asfollows. After N trials of an event have beenmade, of which S trials are success, then therelative frequency of success is
STs1-
Experience has shown that empirical proba-bilities, if carefully determined on the basis ofadequate statistical samples, can be applied tolarge groups with the result that probability andrelative frequency are approximately equal. Byadequate samples we meana large enough sampleso that accidental runs of "luck," both good andbad, cancel each other. Withenoughtrials, pre-dicted results and actual results agree quiteclosely. On the other hand, applying a probabil-ity ratio to a single individual event is virtuallymeaningless.
For example, table 17-1 shows a small num-ber of weather forecasts from April 1 to April 10.The actual weather on the dates is also given.
Observe that the forecasts on April 1, 3, 4,6, 7, 8, and 10 were correct. We have observedten outcomes. The event of a correct forecasthas occurred seven times. Based on this infor-mation we might say that the probability for
7future forecasts being true is . This num-ber is the best estimate that we can make fromthe given information. In this case, since wehave observed such a small number of outcomes,it would not be correct to say that the estimateof P is dependable. A great many more casesshould be used if we expect to make a good esti-mate of the probability that a weather forecastwill be accurate. There are a great many fac-tors which affect the accuracy of a weatherforecast. This example merely indicates some-thing about how successful a particular weatheroffice has been in making weather forecasts.
Another example may be drawn from in-dustry. Many thousands of articles of a certaintype are manufactured. The company selects100 of these articles at random and subjectsthem to very careful tests. In these tests it isfound that 98 of the articles meet all measure-ment requirements and perform satisfactorily.
98This suggests that iifjo- s a measure of therelizbility of the article.
One might expect that about 98% of all of thearticles manufactured by this process will besatisfactory. The probability (measure ofchance) that one of these articles will be satis-factory might be said to be 0.98.
This second example of empirical probabilityis different from the first example in one veryimportant respect. In the first example all ofthe possibilities could be listed and in the secondexample we could not do so. The selection of asample and its size is a problem of statistics.
Considered from another point of view, sta-tistical probability can be regarded as relativefrequency.
EXAMPLE: In a dart game, a player hitthe bull's eye 3 times out of 25 trials. What isthe statistical probability that he will hit thebull's eye on the next throw?
SOLUTION:
and
hence
2524..
255
N = 25
S = 3
3I- =23
Chapter 17PROBABILITY
Table 17-1. Weather forecast.
Date Forecast Actual weatherDid the actualforecasted eventoccur ?
1 Rain Rain yes
2 Light showers Sunny No
3 Cloudy Cloudy Ye s
4 Clear Clear Yes
5 Scatteredshowers
Warm and sunny No
6 Scatteredshowers
Scattered showers Yes
7 Windy andcloudy
Overcast and windy Yes
8 Thundershowers Thundershowers Yes
9 Clear Cloudy and rain No
10 Clear Clear Yes
EXAMPLE: Using table 17-2, what is the thereforeprobability that a person 20 years old will liveto be 50 years old?
SOLUTION: Of 95,148 persons at age 20, where81,090 survived to age 50. Hence
P 81'09095,148
= 0.852
EXAMPLE: How many times would a die beexpected to land with 5 or6 showing in 20 trials?
SOLUTION: The probability of a 5 or 6 show-ing is
1p = -s
The relative frequency is approximately equalto the probability
P p
253
-11'56
and
S=
N = 20
Rearranging and substituting, find that
SN
1 S3 20
203
= 7
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Table 17-2. Mortality table (based on 100,000 indi-viduals 1 year of age).
Age Number of people
5 98, 382
10 97, 180
15 96, 227
20 95, 148
25 93, 920
30 92, 461
35 90, 655
40 88, 334
45 85,255
50 81, 090
55 75, 419
60 67, 777
65 57, 778
70 45,455
75 31,598
80 18, 177
85 7, 822
90 2,158
(NOTE: The number observed in an experi- 3. Using table 17-2, find the probability thatment may differ from that predicted; therefore, a person whose age is 30 will live to age 60.the results may be taken to the nearest integer.) ANSWERS:
1. 1PROBLEMS:2. 15
1. In a construction crew there are six elec- 3. 0.733tricians and 38 other workers. How many elec-tricians would you expect to choose if you chose DATA PROCESSINGone man each day of a week for your helper?
2. How many times would a tossed die be Data processing is an extremely large andexpected to turn up 3 or less in thirty tosses? complex field and applications are usually made
254
72' 5 7
Chapter 17PROBABILITY
for individual situations. For a general under-standing of how data processing can be relatedto probability and statistics, the functional op-eration of the computer is needed.
COMPUTER OPERATIONS
High speed computers are used in dataprocessing because they are able to solve prob-lems in seconds where humans may requiremonths and even years to solve the sameproblem.
A problem which arises, when using a com-puter, is how the human can communicate withthe computer. This communication is a functionof mathematics. We refer to this form of mathe-matics as computer-oriented mathematics.
Digital computers are high speed adding ma-chines. To perform multiplication they makerepeated additions. To perform subtraction theaddition sequence may be reversed, and.divisionis the process of repeated subtraction.
An example of an operation of a digitalcomputer is finding the square root of 36. Weknow that the sum of the first n odd integersis equal to n2. The computer is programed tosubtract successive odd integers from 36 untilzero is reached. That is,
36 - 1 - 3 - 5 - - 9 - 11 0
When zero is reached, the computer then countsthe number of odd integers it has subtracted andthis sum is the square root of 36. For a furtherdiscussion on computers and number systemsrefer to Mathematics, Volume 3, NavPers 10073.
APPLICATION TO PROBABILITY
Many problems may be solved on computerswith the use of the proper mathematical model.The mathematical model may include any of thevariables and the probability with which theyoccur. The collection of statistical data playsan important part in building a mathematicalmodel for the computer.
The mathematical model may be used to de-termine probabilities by the use of computers.That is, the computer will 'play a game° manytimes and give a result comparable to manytrials for determining probabilities.
To understand how a game of chance may beused to produce a useful result, consider the
problem of determining the product of 3/8 and2/3. Place eight ping-pong balls of which threeare coated with a conducting material in onecontainer. Place three other ping-porg ballsof which two are coated with the conducting ma-terial in a second container. A trial consists ofa detecting head from the computer touching aball in each container. If both balls are coateda point is registered; if not, azero is registered.The number of points registered divided by thetotal trials, if the number of trials is large, willclosely approximate the fraction 6/24.
The reasoning for the result is that theprobability of touching a coated ball in thefirst container is 3/8 and the probability oftouching a coated ball in the second containeris 2/3. The events of touching a coated ball inthe first container and one in the second con-tainer are independent, and the probability of bothballs being coated is the product of the individualprobabilities. This is exactly what we set out todetermine.
The preceding example is extremely simpli-fied, in comparison with the complexity of theactual statistical problems solved by computers.However, it does serve to indicate some of thepossibilities of computer-oriented mathematics.
USAGE OF STATISTICAL DATA
Suppose a squadron, through years of opera-tion, has accumulated statistical data on theoperation of an aircraft. By using a computer,the probability of the failure of an engine can bedetermined from the many bits of informationregarding individual parts of the engine. A re-lated problem is to determine how the enginefailure probability can be decreased.
While changiag all of the components of anaircraft engine to try to improve efficiency isunsound, the mathematical model, from a se-lected group of experiments, may be used topredict the change in efficiency for any combi-nation of component changes.
One solution is by trial and error, but thiswould take years of time. Another solution is tomake a few flights using various configurationsof the engine and then use the computerto simu-late years of operation. Researchers would thendetermine the probability of failure, based on thenew 3tatistical data obtained from the few flights.By this high speed determination of the failureof the engine with different combinations of na
255
258
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
parts, the optimum design of the modified enginemay be determined.
The field of data processing with computersis just beginning and many new techniques are
being developed. It is hoped that this briefintroduction will stimulate the reader tosearch further for a better understanding ofthis new field.
256
259
APPENDIX I
LOGARITHMS OF TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS
3804 sin Diff.1' csc tan Diff.
1' cot sec Diff.1 , cos 4-14 i. °
,
01
234 -56789
9.....
78934789507896778983781199
16
17161616161616161616171616161616-161016161616
15161 616161616161616151616161616151616,g-151616161516161516, A
15161615161615
10...
.
.
2106621050210332101721001
9..
.
.
.
8928189307893338935989385
262626262626262626262626262626262626262626262626262626262626252626262626262626262625262626262626262526262626252625262626
10..
.
.
.
1071910693106671064110615
10..
.
.
.
1034710357103671037610386
1010
91010101010101010101010
100
101010101010101010101010111010101010101010101010101110101010101011101010in-1011
1010101110
9..
.
.
.
9...
.
.
8965389643896338962489614
6059585756
9..
.
.
.
7901579031790477906379079
10..
.
.
.
2098520969209532093720921
9..
.
.
.
8941189437894638948989515
10..
.
.
.
1058010563105371051110485
10.....
103N10406104161042610436
6960489594895848957489564
5554535251
1011121314
9..
.
.
.
7909579111791287914479160
10..
.
.
.
2090520889208722085620840
9..
.
.
.
8954189567895938961989645
10..
.
.
.
1045910433104071038110355
10....
.
1044610456'104661047610486
9..
.
.
.
8955489544895348952489514
5049484746
1516171819
9..
.
.
.
7917679192792087922479240
10...
.
.
2082420808207922077620760
9..
.
.
.
8967189697897238974989775
10...
.
.
1032910303102771025110225
10.....
1049610505105151052510535
9...
.
.
8950489495894858947589465
45444342414039383736
2021222324
9.....
7-925679272792887930479319
10.....
2074420728207122069620681
9...
.
.
8980189827898538987989905
10....
.
1019910173101471012110095
10...
.
.
10.....
10545105551056510575105851059510605106151062510636
9..
.
.
.
8945589445894358942589415
25262728293031323334
9..
.
.
.
703579351
.79.?t)77931.379391
10..
.
.
.
2066520649206332061720601
9..
.
.
.
8993189957899839000990035
10.....
1006910043100170999109965
9..
.
.
.
8940589395893858937589364
3534333231
9..
.
.
.
7P41579431794477946379478
10....
.
2058520569205532053720522
9..
.
.
.
9006190086901129013890164
10..
.
.
.
0993909914098880986209836
10.....
10.....
10646106561066610676106861069610706107161072610736
9...
.
.
8935489344893348932489314
3029282726
3536373839
9..
.
.
.
7949479510795267954279558
10....
.
2050620490204742045820442
9..
.
..
9019090216902429026890294
10..
.
.
.
0981009784097580973209706
9.....
8930489294892848927489264
2524232221
4041424344
9....
.
7957379589796057962179636
10..
.
.
2042720411203952037920364
9..
.
.
.
9032090316903719039790423
10..
.
.
0968009654096290960309577
10....
.
1074610756107671077710787
9..
.
.
.
8925489244802338922389213
20li)181716
4546474849
9....
.
7965279668796847969979715
10...
.
.
2034820332203162030120k85
9..
.
.
.
9044990475905019052790553
10..
.
.
.
0955109525094990947309447
10.....
1079710807108171082710838
9..
.
.
.
8920389193891838917389162
1514131211
5051525354
9...
..
7973179746797627977879793
10...
.
.
2026920254202382022220207
9...
.
9057890604906309065690682
10...
.
0942209396093700934409318
10..
.
.
.
1084810858108681087810888
9. 89152. 89142. 89132. 89122. 89119
-17871-61. 89001. 800A1. 89071. 89060
9. 89050
10-98i
555657585960
9.....
9.
798097982579840798567987279887
10.
.
.
.10.
201919n17520160201442012820113
9..
.
.
.
9.
90708907349075990 i 859081190837
10.....
10.
092920926609241092150918909163
10...
.
.10.
108991090910919109291094010950
46421
0t
12804 cos Diff.1 '
sec cot Diff.I' tan cso Diff.
i ,t
sin .51o
257
160
AP
PE
ND
IX II
CO
MM
ON
LO
GA
RIT
HM
SO
F N
UM
BE
RS
0R.e
12
1r-
--ed
56
78
910
0000
0043
6938
1312
801
7002
1202
5302
9403
3403
7411
044
0453
0492
053:
05G
906
0706
4506
8207
1907
5512
0792
0828
0861
108
9860
409
6910
0410
3810
7211
0613
1139
1173
1208
129
1271
1303
1335
1367
1399
1430
1414
6114
9215
2315
5315
8416
1416
4416
7317
0317
3215
1761
1790
1818
1847
1875
1903
1931
1959
1987
2014
1620
4120
6829
9521
2221
4821
7522
0122
2722
5322
7917
2304
2330
2385
2580
2405
2430
2455
2480
2504
2529
1825
5325
7726
0126
2526
4826
7226
9527
1827
4227
6519
2788
2810
2833
2856
2878
2900
2923
2945
2967
2989
2030
1030
3230
5430
7530
9631
1831
3931
6031
8132
0121
3222
3243
' 326
332
8433
0433
2433
4533
6533
8534
0422
3424
3444
3464
3483
3502
3522
3541
3560
3579
3598
2336
1736
3636
5536
7436
9237
1137
2937
4737
6637
8424
3802
3820
3838
3856
3874
3892
3909
3927
3945
3962
2539
7939
9740
1440
3140
4840
6540
8240
9941
1641
3326
4150
4166
4183
4200
4216
4232
4249
4265
4281
4298
2743
1443
3043
4643
6243
7843
9344
0944
2544
4044
5628
4472
4487
4502
4518
4533
4548
4564
4579
4594
4609
2946
2446
3946
5446
6946
8346
9847
1347
2847
4247
5730
4771
4786
4800
4814
4829
4843
4857
4871
4886
4900
3149
1449
2849
4249
5549
6949
8349
9750
1150
2450
3832
5051
5065
5079
5092
5105
5119
5132
5145
5159
5172
3351
8551
9852
1152
2452
3752
5052
6352
7652
8953
0234
5315
5328
5340
5353
5366
5378
5391
5403
5416
5428
3554
4154
5354
6554
7854
9055
0255
1455
2755
3955
5136
5563
5575
5587
5599
5611
5623
5635
5647
5658
5670
3756
8256
9457
0557
1757
2957
4057
5257
6357
7557
8638
5798
5809
5821
5832
5843
5855
5866
5877
5888
5899
3959
1159
2259
3359
4459
5559
6659
7759
8859
9960
1040
6021
6031
6042
6053
6064
6075
6085
6096
6107
6117
4161
2861
3861
4961
6061
7061
8061
9162
0162
1262
2242
6232
6243
6253
6263
6274
6284
6294
6304
6314
6325
4363
3563
4563
5563
6563
7563
8563
9564
0564
1564
2544
6435
6444
6454
6464
6474
6484
6493
6503
6513
6522
4565
3265
4265
5165
6165
7165
8065
9065
9966
0966
1846
6628
6637
6646
6656
6665
6675
6684
6693
6702
6712
4767
2167
3067
3967
4967
5867
6767
7667
8567
9468
0348
6812
6821
6830
6839
6848
6857
6866
6875
¢884
6893
4969
0269
1169
2069
2869
3769
4669
5569
6469
7269
8150
6990
6998
7007
7016
7024
7033
7042
7050
7059
7067
5170
76'7
084
7093
7101
7110
7118
7126
7135
7143
7152
5271
6071
6871
7771
8571
9372
0272
1072
1872
2672
3553
7243
7251
7259
7267
7475
7284
7292
7300
7308
7316
5473
2473
3273
4073
4873
5673
6473
7273
8073
8873
96N
o.0
11
23
451
6,7
89
o.0
12
34
56
78
'9
5574
0474
1274
1974
2774
3574
4374
5174
5974
6674
7456
7482
7490
7497
7505
7513
7520
7528
7536
7543
7551
5775
5975
6675
7475
8275
8975
9776
0476
1276
1976
2758
7634
7642
7649
7657
7664
7672
7679
7686
7694
7701
5977
0977
1677
2377
3177
3877
4577
5277
6077
6777
7460
7782
7789
7796
7803
7810
7818
7825
7832
7839
7846
6178
5378
6078
6878
7578
8278
8978
9679
0379
1079
1762
7924
7931
7938
7945
7952
7959
7966
7973
7980
7987
6379
9380
0080
0780
1480
2180
2880
3580
4180
4880
5564
8062
8069
8075
8082
8089
8096
8102
8109
8116
8122
6581
2981
3681
4281
4981
5681
6281
6981
7681
8281
8966
8195
8202
8209
8215
8222
8228
8235
8241
8248
8254
6782
6182
6782
7482
8082
8782
9382
9983
0683
1283
1968
8325
8331
8338
8344
8351
8357
8363
8370
8376
8382
6983
8883
9584
0184
0784
1484
2084
2684
3284
39 1
445
7084
5184
5784
6384
7084
7684
8284
8884
9485
0065
0671
8513
8519
8525
8531
8537
8543
8549
8555
8561
8567
7285
7385
7985
8585
9185
9786
0386
0986
1586
2186
2773
8633
8639
8645
8651
8657
8663
8669
8675
8681
8686
7486
9286
9887
0487
1087
1687
2287
2787
3387
3987
4575
8751
8756
8762
8768
8774
8779
8785
8791
8797
8802
7688
0888
1488
2088
2588
3188
3788
4288
4888
5488
5977
8865
8871
8876
8882
8887
8893
8899
8904
8910
8915
7889
2189
2789
3289
3889
4389
4989
5489
6089
6589
7179
8976
8982
8987
8993
8998
9004
9009
9015
9020
9025
8090
3190
3690
4290
4790
5390
5890
6390
6990
7490
7981
9085
9090
9096
9101
9106
9112
9117
9122
912S
9133
8291
3891
4391
4991
5491
5991
6591
7091
7591
8091
8683
9191
9196
9201
9206
9212
9217
9222
9227
9232
9238
8492
4392
4892
5392
5892
6392
6992
7492
7992
8492
8985
9294
9299
9304
9309
9315
9320
9325
9330
9335
9340
8693
4593
5093
5593
6093
6593
7093
7593
3093
8593
9087
9395
9400
9405
9410
9415
9420
9425
9430
9435
9440
8894
4594
5094
5594
6094
6594
6994
7494
7994
8494
8989
9494
9499
9504
9509
9513
9518
9523
9528
9533
9538
9095
4295
4795
5295
5795
6295
6695
7195
7695
8195
8691
9590
9595
9600
9605
9609
9614
9619
9624
9628
9633
9296
3896
4396
4796
5296
5796
6196
6696
7196
7596
8093
9685
9689
9694
9699
9703
9708
9713
9717
9722
9727
9!97
3197
3697
4197
4597
5097
5497
5997
6397
6897
7395
9777
9782
9786
9791
9795
9800
9805
9809
9814
9818
9698
2398
2798
3298
3698
4198
4598
5098
5498
5998
6397
9868
9872
9877
9881
9886
9890
9894
9899
9903
9908
9899
1299
1799
2199
2699
3099
3499
3999
4399
4899
5299
9956
9961
9965
9969
9974
9978
9983
9987
9991
9996
No.
01
23
45
67
89
sw.-* azmuz issztzs VIt7=4 salmi tmana mums mmula stenftx arme= subiew-0 is091- 01 4
*.
j-
u
g
%)
rusy IMO ;MP IFEU iEUP pill jiVig piSi piii 'Mt lira 'INV i
a
I
IIg unit EEENN !RUN FM ling !Mg isin igsga :RUN 12ANN pin MIR Pidg
to. ..
Q
pall liSiS pia WU pli ION rall pin INFIN :UNE FRO IMO 11
d1
ii
ERMA iguIl ims IMO iirli pig: !MN ism lam pus fun ism its2
hu
lama lam luta iggs2 isgsg igIBS pal Wil piss Ism FEB pli Id
4
aSan§ 101PH pal MEV 51P.EN WAN lieS5 kfRie WA pig pill IEIEN II
d ii 1l C3
Ug iMI rail ring pig FEE 1110 piii pal lassa iglu psi-inn II
1
1, 6d gang PM IgiBM /ER21 pal ling IWO pat pill WEE pail inn 1
I.
g 1§§§§ 1§§g§ ling inn igng igni-pgi iiiii Inn pill 111,1 'visa 1 1
1 11
da,
Milt ILION own pen liss: pal pigs psga rgol FM :Ong MO rig
°°° e-el" ",'" RNFIRM *MON stanax 334143 SW443 134$41 2;233 MOM 31
Cf?Li)
APP
EN
DIX
III
.-N
atur
al s
ines
and
cos
ines
-Con
tinue
d1
M.
r6°
7°r
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
os.
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
oe.
Sin.
Cos
.
0.09
716
0. 9
9019
0. 1
0453
0. 9
0452
0. 1
2187
0.99
253
0. 1
3917
0.99
027
0.15
643
0. 9
8769
401
745
617
482
449
216
251
946
023
672
764
592
774
614
511
446
245
248
975
019
701
760
588
803
612
540
443
274
244
. 140
0401
573
075
557
483
160
956
944
030
224
003
301
175
875
156
B.0
8960
.996
0710
597
.994
37. 1
2331
.992
37. 1
4061
.990
06. 1
5787
.967
46X
688
960
462
643
130
023
309
000
281
674
154
791
860
265
343
138
923
011
9.9
6998
845
737
538
947
599
684
428
418
226
148
994
873
732
529
976
596
713
424
447
222
177
990
902
728
51
IS.0
9065
.995
9410
742
.994
21. 1
2476
.992
19.1
4295
.989
86. 1
5934
.987
2333
it03
459
177
141
850
421
523
498
295
971
849
1206
358
8SO
O41
553
321
126
397
898
871
448
1309
258
682
941
256
220
829
297
3. 1
6017
709
4714
121
583
858
408
691
204
320
960
016
704
4615
.091
50.9
9580
.108
97.9
9406
.126
20.9
9200
. 143
49.9
0965
.160
74.9
8700
4516
179
373
916
402
649
197
378
961
103
695
4417
206
575
945
399
678
193
407
957
132
690
4318
237
572
973
396
7436
189
436
953
160
656
4219
266
670
. 110
0239
373
318
646
194
818
968
141
BS
.092
95. 9
9567
. 110
31.9
9390
.127
64.9
9182
1449
3. 9
8O14
.162
1896
676
4421
324
664
060
386
793
178
522
940
246
671
3922
353
662
089
383
822
175
MI
936
275
667
3823
382
as11
838
085
111
158
093
130
466
237
2441
155
614
737
788
016
760
692
733
365
736
X.0
1440
.995
53. 1
1176
.953
74.1
2908
.991
33. 1
4637
.989
23. 1
6a61
.986
5235
2646
955
120
537
093
716
066
691
939
064
834
2749
654
823
436
796
615
669
591
441
961
333
2662
754
526
336
499
515
272
391
044
763
832
2965
661
220
1M
O.1
3024
148
752
906
476
633
31
X.0
9595
.911
510
.113
20.9
9357
. 130
53.9
9144
. 147
81.9
8902
. 165
05.9
8629
SOa
614
537
349
354
081
141
810
897
533
624
2932
642
534
378
331
110
137
838
693
562
619
2833
671
531
407
347
139
133
867
689
591
614
27X
701
525
436
344
168
129
896
864
620
609
26U
.007
22.9
9526
.114
65.9
9341
. 131
97.9
9125
. 149
25.9
8880
. 166
03.9
660-
.-5
3673
852
949
433
722
612
295
487
667
7W
C 2
437
787
520
523
334
254
118
982
871
706
595
/338
816
517
532
331
283
114
. 150
1166
773
459
022
3984
551
458
032
731
211
004
086
376
358
521
46. 0
0874
.995
11.1
160
.993
24.1
3341
.991
06.1
5069
. 991
558
.167
92.9
9580
X41
903
508
638
320
370
102
097
854
820
575
1942
932
506
667
317
399
096
126
849
849
570
1643
961
503
696
314
427
094
155
845
1.78
565
1744
990
500
725
310
456
091
184
841
906
561
16U
.100
19.9
9497
.117
54.9
9307
. 134
85.9
9087
.152
12.9
8836
. 163
35.9
8556
1544
048
494
783
303
514
OW
241
832
964
331
1447
077
491
812
300
543
079
270
827
992
546
1345
106
468
840
297
572
075
299
823
. 170
2154
112
4913
548
586
929
360
007
1av
818
050
336
11
X.1
0164
.994
62.1
1998
.992
90.1
3629
.990
67. 1
5356
.988
14.1
7078
.985
3114
St19
247
992
728
665
806
338
580
910
762
69
5222
147
695
628
366
705
941
480
513
652
18
1325
047
396
527
971
605
544
2B
OO
164
516
711
427
947
0. 1
2014
926
744
031
171
796
193
.511
4U
.103
08.9
0167
.120
43.0
9272
.137
73.9
0047
.155
013
.987
91.1
7222
.985
064
se33
746
407
126
980
204
352
973
725
030
14
a36
646
110
026
583
103
955
778
227
949
63
8129
54
129
262
860
035
566
778
308
491
269
424
433
138
256
389
031
615
773
336
486
1
66.1
0453
.121
6799
255
.139
17.9
0027
. 136
43. 9
8789
. 173
65.1
0481
9
Cos
.81
11.
Ow
Ms.
Cos
.St
a.C
p.Si
n.C
OS.
Sin.
M.
$eU
116
1Sr
APP
EN
DIX
III
.-N
atur
al s
ines
and
cos
ines
-Con
tinue
d10
°11
012
113
014
0
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
os.
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
os.
Sin.
Cos
.
00.
173
650.
9648
10.
190
810.
931
630.
207
910.
9781
50.
224
950.
9743
70.
241
920.
970
3060
139
347
610
915
782
080
952
34
I22
0O
M59
242
247
113
815
284
880
355
242
424
901
5SS
a45
146
616
71
if87
779
766
041
727
700
857
447
946
119
514
090
579
160
841
130
300
156
5.1
7508
.984
55.1
9224
.081
35.2
0933
.977
84.2
2637
.974
04, 2
4333
. 909
9455
663
743
023
129
902
778
605
398
362
937
547
66.5
445
25-1
121
990
772
693
391
390
030
538
694
440
309
118
. 210
197
-72
238
441
897
352
962
343
533
311
204
770
075
037
844
696
651
10.1
7651
. 984
30.1
9360
.981
07.2
1076
.977
54.2
2778
.973
71, 2
1474
.960
5950
1163
042
339
3-1
0110
474
880
736
539
395
249
1270
842
042
309
613
274
283
533
853
194
5 44
1373
741
445
209
016
173
586
335
155
993
747
1476
640
948
103
418
972
989
234
556
793
046
15. 1
7794
.984
94.1
9509
.980
79. 2
1218
.977
29. =
920
.973
38.2
4615
.969
2045
1662
339
953
807
321
671
794
833
161
491
641
1783
239
164
600
727
571
197
732
367
296
9 43
1888
036
950
500
130
370
523
005
318
700
902
4319
1909
3.3
673
056
331
698
033
311
723
894
4120
. 179
37.9
8378
.196
52.9
8050
.213
00.9
7692
. 230
62.9
7304
.247
56.9
6987
40
2190
637
363
004
439
366
609
022
973
163
0 39
2299
536
370
903
941
768
011
829
181
387
338
23..1
8023
302
737
033
445
673
146
284
841
600
3724
052
357
766
027
474
667
175
273
8611
833
3625
. 180
81.9
8352
.197
94.9
8021
.215
02. 9
7661
.232
03.9
7271
.243
07.9
6851
3526
109
347
823
016
530
655
231
264
925
614
3427
138
341
851
010
559
648
260
257
954
637
3328
166
336
830
004
887
642
288
251
992
829
3529
195
331
908
.979
9361
663
631
624
4. 2
5010
822
31
30.1
8224
.963
25. 1
9937
.979
92.2
1644
.976
30.2
3345
.977
. 250
38. 9
6815
3031
252
320
965
987
672
023
373
230
906
807
2932
231
315
994
931
701
617
401
223
004
800
2833
309
319
. 290
2297
572
961
142
921
712
279
327
3433
830
405
196
975
8O
M43
821
015
176
635
. 183
67. 9
8299
. 200
79.9
7963
.217
86.9
7598
. 234
86.9
7203
. 25
t 79
.967
78Z
3639
529
410
895
881
459
251
419
620
777
124
3742
426
813
693
264
359
554
216
923
576
423
3845
229
316
59
vs87
157
937
!15
220
373
622
3948
127
719
394
089
957
359
917
620
174
92)
10.1
8509
. 932
72; 2
o2n
.079
3 i
. 219
=. 9
7566
. =62
7. 9
7169
.253
20.9
6742
2541
539
267
230
923
956
500
056
102
315
731
1942
567
261
279
922
985
553
684
155
376
727
li13
595
256
307
916
. 220
1354
771
214
840
471
917
4462
425
033
691
00-
1154
174
014
143
271
216
45. 1
8052
.932
45. 2
0364
. 979
03. 2
2070
. 075
34. 2
3769
.971
34. 2
5460
. 967
0515
4668
124
039
389
909
852
879
712
748
907
1447
710
234
421
693
126
521
825
120
516
GD
O13
4873
822
945
093
715
551
58.
5311
354
.566
212
4976
722
347
888
116
350
888
210
657
367
5 11
50.1
8795
.942
19. 2
0507
.978
75. 2
2212
.975
02. =
910
.971
00.2
5601
.960
67 1
051
824
262
535
869
210
496
939
093
629
691
952
852
207
503
803
269
459
966
096
057
65.1
853
881
201
592
857
297
443
995
079
685
645
764
910
196
620
851
325
476
. 240
2307
2W
S63
66
SS.1
8938
.981
00. 2
0649
.978
45. 2
2353
. 974
70. 2
4051
. 970
6S. 2
5741
.906
305
5696
718
567
783
936
246
307
9. 0
5670
962
34
5799
517
970
683
341
041
710
305
179
861
53
58. 1
9024
174
733
827
433
450
136
044
826
606
259
052
168
763
821
46:
444
164
037
854
609
1
40. 1
9081
. 981
63. 2
0791
. 978
15. =
495
. 974
37. 2
4192
.970
30. 2
5882
. 965
930
Coo
.(3
1o.
Ow
.M
a.C
os.
SW.
Cos
.84
3.04
6.si
n.M
.Ig
hW
17°
76°
191
APP
EN
DIX
M.-
Nat
ural
sin
esan
d co
sine
s-C
ontin
ued
M.
ivle
17.
333
....._
...19
°
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
os.
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
os.
Sin.
Cos
.
00
2363
20.
9659
30.
2756
1O
. 961
260.
332
170.
9563
00.
3020
20.
4151
03O
. 325
570.
945
52 6
0
191
056
550
2U
b26
562
292
909
753
154
2 59
293
357
562
0II
129
361
393
706
561
215
33 5
5
393
667
061
310
232
160
595
507
063
953
3 57
490
156
267
609
434
559
0.3
1012
070
667
514
56
5r
I.9
6555
.277
04.9
6036
.293
76.9
3534
. 320
40.9
5961
. 326
94. 9
4504
SS
6i
617
731
073
404
579
036
032
712
435-
54
707
954
67-
070
432
571
095
043
749
435
53
810
.53
278
.06
246
0ha
t17
303
377
747
6 52
013
552
481
505
446
755
4D
IC
2480
446
6 SI
II.2
6134
.963
17.2
7943
.060
16. 2
9515
.935
46.3
1178
.930
13.3
2352
.944
57 3
0
1119
150
987
113
3734
353
320
303
636
344
7 49
1221
950
289
98.
571
528
233
. 919
3733
:4-
3 45
1324
745
192
702
159
031
926
193
391
443
3 47
1427
.48
695
501
362
651
125
997
394
241
3 46
15.
.961
79.7
3933
.330
05.2
9651
.953
02. 3
1316
.949
20.3
2969
.044
09 1
5
1633
147
1.2
8011
..997
652
493
314
961
917
399
44
1735
946
303
903
371
045
537
21)
52.3
3021
390
4 I
lb38
743
606
793
173
747
33-
3991
303
133
3 42
1941
544
604
597
276
546
742
703
307
937
0 41
29.2
6443
.964
40.2
1112
3.9
5914
.207
93.6
5459
.314
54.9
4924
.331
06.9
4361
1 40
2147
143
315
095
682
143
043
391
313
435
1, 3
9
223
425
173
945
519
411
510
906
161
342
33
2341
720
694
087
644
381
1'80
715
933
2j 3
7
2441
1Z
S93
190
442
456
3SS
S21
632
21 3
6
25.3
6534
.96
.232
62.9
5923
.299
32.9
5415
.313
93.9
4373
. 332
44I
.943
13; 3
3
N61
344
2911
915
960
407
020
SO27
130
3 34
2733
631
500
793
739
664
386
129
329
3! 3
3
'28
468
379
346
893
.300
1538
967
565
132
6V
-4 3
2
2637
137
459
004
335
070
384
235
327
41
31
30.2
6724
.963
63.2
8402
.933
52. 3
0071
.953
62.3
1730
. 948
33.3
3331
.943
34; 3
0
31r
355
429
874
095
333
763
823
403
234'
29
3234
745
766
312
633
475
681
443
624
51 2
8
3380
534
043
857
154
346
813
303
433
235
27
3433
251
391
919
233
764
179
"49
022
526
35.2
6364
.963
24.2
8341
.038
41.3
0209
.933
23. 3
1834
.947
36. 3
3518
. 94C
1523
3631
633
303
237
319
696
777
543
206
24
3730
S.1
621
263
310
1323
765
573
196
23
3830
1In
8129
230
19'
.173
360
113
3 22
31)
929
365
607
32*3
293
979
749
627
176
21
40. 2
7004
.962
85. 2
36so
.957
99. 3
0345
.952
31.3
2006
.942
40. 3
365.
.941
67 2
0
4103
227
770
379
137
627
303
473
063
215
719
4201
3326
973
673
4133
266
061
721
710
147
Id43
038
%I
764
774
431
257
059
712
73:
137
17
44U
S25
379
276
645
924
311
610
276
412
7 16
45. 2
7144
.962
46. Z
OO
.957
37.3
0486
. 952
40. 3
2144
.940
3. 3
3:02
. 941
18 1
5
4617
2'23
884
774
951
4ni
171
634
819
103
14
47M
O23
087
574
034
222
219
967
434
609
2113
4823
122
240
373
237
021
322
713
6587
405
812
4925
621
493
172
469
.20
425
165
000
107
8L
I
SO.2
7284
.911
206
.289
59.9
5715
.306
25. 9
3195
. 323
32. 6
660
. 334
29. 9
4069
10
5131
3119
893
770
783
318
630
363
795
6O
SS9
5284
015
.290
1560
3)
177
337
627
983
049
8
3336
6j18
243
470
916
936
161
3. 3
4011
039
7
5417
40
168
113
839
260
90.
19O
N6
85.3
7424
.951
.290
96.8
3679
.307
63.9
5130
.324
19.0
1309
.340
65.9
4019
8
5643
3115
31
664
791
142
447
590
093
009
4
3740
I15
481
913
347
465
012
0. 9
3999
3
5614
164
,84
612
450
257
114
798
92
59S3
Oj
134
.-,.
874
115
523
561
175
979
1
a.
.961
26. 2
9237
. 956
30. 3
0902
. 931
06. 3
2337
.945
52.3
4202
.039
00
tC
os.
Sla.
Cos
.St
n.C
os.
&a.
Cos
.Si
o.C
os.
Sin.
Bd.
346
1IV
re71
470
°
APP
EN
DIX
M.-
Nat
ural
sin
es a
nd c
osin
es-C
ontin
ued
20°
ar2r
.23
°11
4°
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
os.
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
oo.
Sin.
Cos
.
0 1 2 3 4
0. 3
4202 22
925
729
431
1
0. 9
3969 959
949
039
929
0. 3
5837 86
489
191 94
5
0. 9
3356 34
833
732
781
6
0.37
461
488
515
0. 9
27/8
0. 3
9073
707
100
697
127
686
153
675
0.9
039
0 01 ..
0. 4
0674 70
072
773
378
0
0.91
353
343
331
319
307
49 59 58 37 36
II.3
4339
.939
19.3
3973
.933
06.3
7.9
2664
.392
07. 9
1994
. 408
06.9
1295
ss6
366
909
.31
129
562
263
323
493
383
323
354
730
389
902
721
3564
964
226
0iln
860
272
53
342
188
905
427
467
663
128
788
620
052
914
808
126
470
331
491
324
831
10.3
4473
.938
69.3
61.9
3233
.377
30.9
2609
.393
41.9
1936
.409
39.9
1236
SO
1119
2385
'13
524
37.
3759
636
792
503
622
449
1284
916
223
278
458
739
191
499
221
248
1355
783
919
022
281
157
642
1. 4
1019
200
47
1456
482
921
721
183
856
544
899
045
, 183
46
15.3
4612
.938
19.3
6244
.932
01.3
7865
.925
5449
474
. 013
7v. 4
1072
.916
7645
1663
980
927
119
089
234
350
109
616
444
1766
67
298
180
919
532
585
612
515
243
1869
478
325
169
946
521
355
845
151
140
42
1972
177
965
215
997
351
058
183
317
812
841
29.3
4748
.937
69-
.-
.931
48.3
7999
.924
99.3
9308
. 3/8
=. 4
1201
.911
/ 6
40
2177
575
9,
137
: i ,.
488
63.5
8 1
231
104
39
2280
374
843
412
705
347
763
125
709
233
2373
846
111
608
046
669
878
728
408
037
2483
772
848
810
610
745
571
577
310
068
36
25.3
4884
.937
18.3
8515
.030
95.3
8134
.924
44.3
9741
.917
64. 4
1337
.910
5635
2691
270
854
208
416
1
4321
768
732
363
044
34
2793
969
866
907
418
842
179
574
139
003
2 33
2896
668
814
606
321
541
8M3
416
020
3229
903
677
623
052
241
384
87
443
008
31
30.3
5021
.936
67.3
6650
.930
42.3
8258
.9M
38.3
9873
.91
. 414
69.9
0996
34
3104
865
767
703
129
537
769
449
698
4 29
3207
564
770
402
032
236
6X
683
522
972
2833
11,
637
731
010
349
355
95.5
671
549
460
2734
626
758
.929
9937
634
398
267
594
8 26
35.3
515
.936
16.3
6783
.929
88.3
8403
.934
32. 4
0008
.916
46. 4
1602
.009
36 2
536
134
606
812
978
430
321
035
-62
892
4 24
3721
159
683
'96
745
631
006
265
591
1 N
3823
958
586
795
648
329
9, 0
8861
363
189
9 22
3957
589
494
551
023
711
540
170
788
7 21
40.3
5203
.933
65.3
6921
.312
933
.563
37.4
2276
.401
41.9
1.4
1734
. 973
75 3
041
320
AM
948
924
364
263
168
8..
760
863
1942
347
544
975
913
591
234
1978
785
1 13
4337
563
4. 3
7002
902
617
243
MI
813
$39
1744
402
624
I89
264
423
124
883
384
082
6 16
35.3
54.9
3514
.370
56.9
2881
.386
7.9
2220
4027
.915
31. 4
1866
.903
14 lb
4645
661
308
387
069
320
930
161
6 .
892
1447
484
493
120
859
725
198
328
919
790
1348
511
433
137
8475
25
491
577
8 12
4963
847
216
477
817
538
148
497
276
6 11
SO.3
3565
. 934
6. 3
7191
.928
27.3
8805
.921
6440
408
.914
72. 4
1998
.907
53 1
451
592
4521
881
683
215
243
446
1. 4
2024
741
9
3261
441
2480
58.
5911
146
144
905
172
98
3364
743
127
794
880
130
443
707
771
77
6467
442
02
784
912
119
514
423
101
704
6
SS.3
3701
.934
10.3
7326
.927
73.3
8939
.921
07°
.405
41.9
1414
.421
30.9
0692
566
400
353
762
964
096
567
402
156
680
4
V ims
755,
7132
38 37.
407
751
740
93.3
9023
085
073
594
621
290
378
183
209
563
865
61 2
6981
036
843
473
904
606
264
736
623
564
3'1
60.3
3837
.933
38.3
7461
.927
18.3
0073
.920
50.4
0674
.913
55. 4
2262
.906
314
Cos
.Si
n.C
os.
Silo
.C
oo.
Sin.
Cos
.Si
n.C
os.
Sin.
ILIP
IVtr
eW
12°
222MS 3s224 3413:4 442V; Ian: 0.11374.1 MIAS McInim net:4 n==t174 20- ,.....e.-
b
i E -:E' E --.=.= a533 el atig = el._ iga a-gg ig
;gni ii§23 lAll INNU ili-i pH pin pail= pail 1201 laii 12 .
gb
0
ti
lam galtA pus lasaa lam leaTIFFITFITFEe 11.1.24v ingi pan i
mai pa V 1E.mi li g 1 1_ _ A 112 IARDI 1111R 11185 pepla IUSEI I.
.
h
0
h
gpg. IEVII i pal ri6 =1-A NME pfigl ;414E9.5 ilggt pill pill' i.
ACO
IP iii 1 a -, I-531 i R ,EMI IBM Wag 1.041 EaRg paf ici
." il IV pan pin vita FIS pal NSRH aili ggrigi Iiii.1 Ifigii i d
Alin peon pan pen pm nun pus pfil pUR igraiF gem. Mai 1 1
g 11E13 1 if 1V631 144A4 pin IflaS faati lila 1§1§1§5.11;31=.4:ifilj
dMU MPH plit1 pen 11311 FEE pH Ian [ME rail pal WU id 1 1
1
4"."6" 184.". =2: 02=2 84RAX MARNM 24223 22223 2:22: 42440 3422: 22223 2
,
smrAn agngg sz.44T. 'A---- egngn ngngg AMA A=41 fle4"-m 2-enl- Scbu,,-,0 0",c1t1- 0
k
tc.,
-V47A-g73 sW2E:42 70i74gn .?,lirwa r4-zg vim nvgRa Fggn pia tigill 'OM pin 4nmanA pAeleol iii.e. -la 6 is AI el: 4 4 46 .
.
am
pan lauz tulia ini; gni§ ii012 SEZi lail., 6§AaR puu RIO illIg 14 e .. .-..
4.1 . . . ea . .
.
i '0
d
iii-,,,7 Anv! r.7.RI.:8 s'271gg srmi v.-Aril* r.vpig sWrasi' rog=sv ilFrip pnal Fv4vn v4'
0 6°! "! 6 0! 6a a
co
d6
nEAR naman WA IONE5 ?mu p.5621 PHE pi§i Mig fEEIA FIA pit! i$ V e-- 4.4!
, . .-:
.11. .4. MP4 . . .
. ''
3
h
v6ElAggg gggig WM Mai plER 11F.EU Inist FOR 12E414 pU1i pin ran g6
act
pa TIMIN411 tall iiiii ig§551 gam lam Feu lusa pga lam 16
d
h
t pal liEliR ra igas paa lara ma! puha pug lina mu Paiig4 :4
bA'
,e
.laili lira png Eg223 liai Vali Ism Fella WM 11V14 11122 OMR §
.. I I
h
PUN illva leen lit41 IgEA4 lIggi prig :EE!! 156§1 ing: iii§§Ia
tE 2 latui pus lam vim giug Aam ma 511N3 3:41 pan gEfIRa II.. .r C 06 . 4.
.44 4"4S' ..... °"'" '- LIN= MIMI itaPS3 MAR 41:U24 344423 3422: !MAIM $
262
APP
EN
DIX
III
-N
atur
al s
ines
and
cos
ines
-Con
tinue
d
DC
Ir31
°37
°Ir
369
IthL
Om
. I81
0.I
Cm
816.
1 2 2 4 8 6 7 a 9 II 12 13 9 15 9 117 9 a it a n 21
I
Ls
27 a 101
36 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 35 39 9 41 a 43 44 45 46 47 44 49 56 51 52 53 54 5$ 36 57 so 59 66
9 37
335
381
406
CI
453
.947
750
153
459 57
2
.179
961
991
3ea 01
.677
15 738
762
786
$o
.513
337
91 404
.96
5
.810
77 ON
11$
141
145
. MIS 21
2S
li26
1325
3
.513
07 330
354
MS
401
. 894
944
9
15 519
. 564
1356
759
061
463
7
. 565
61 9.1
7111
,
731
753
. 587
79
9491
511
19
882
165
911
.618
32 93 718
712
763
.617
48 731
714
6911 99
.895
414
719
161
An
, r
5
.31
.614
a
311
341
.413
27 3 ".1
12
191
174
.811
5. 1A
a . :.
.81
' I , ..
..
021
004
.9. O
r91
...
0.".
S
.. I
. 580
14 191
.311
31 134
1 301 ,. A
.
3..
-4
..
....
,
3..
. SO
N ,s.
...
53.
1
.9.
.100
1'. a
.601
0.80
002
815
97 $W 113)
.938
16 79 712
765
748
.110
7301
713
406
673
492
.505
44 VC
610
593'
576
Ans
aS
U53
450
71
351
3 261
71
. WM 1, 17 1
.601
091
05E
021 19
.796
51 931
9 681
. 798
41
am., 25
127
.32
134
4
.410
41
...0
.49
171
.407
61 .
.409
91.6
101 ,t, W
I
.611
07 1. IS 1 11
.612" 29
131
4
.613
37
.614
51 474
497
.61
0. 7
9864 .'
811
.74
1 A
' ' 671 `
'.7
9.
1
, .
.795
1 494
4 441
.794
21 388
371
3001
.
21t1
1 l76
.791
a 1 1 OE
S
(1 01.7
1
. 7R
491
87 81
.1
MI
6
.616
61 701
7 .
.61 S
I84
186
4
.61
....
.430
01
.620
24 IN 11
.621
38 1.1
I ...
.622
51 274
29a
411
430
454
.621
a 5 54.
5. 6 751
774
7.'
.623
19 SI-
661
own
.62J
0. 7
8/01 78
31
7631
747
729
. 787
11 694
67 6401
604
5861
5365
8i.7
8532
51.4
4 4
.784
4 424
405
357
369
.783
51 3331
31"
297
. 782
6121
31
L25- la
.751
70!
132'
134
111
015
.a 31
023
007
. MS
S 01
191
8, 861
gi 3
1
.
.715
'1
. 777
1
a.62
9321
9551
9771
.Ij
.630
15 113
136k
Aar 11 '6
3I
-.32
71 31 361
.433
83 06I
4301
451
.634
96 514
500
563.
.63
01
*7 74 78
71S
I
$771
.630
4416
61
I.6
4011
I10
0112
31
14S
f
.916
71 21 a
.642
79
amis
169
6167
81
611
.776
9
586
5:
.775
31 513
494
4 76
4
. 774
421
384
.773
4 31 273
.772
551
UV
218j
199'
1561
21.7
7114
112
$10
709
*770
701
051
031
OH
.789
96
.790
795
994
092
11
.701
14 4554
847
'M.7
6791
1
751 3 717
. 799
367
941
11
642
.796
01191 so 58 37 26 13
5
54 9 52 51 59 49 49 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 46 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 36 29 28 27 26 23 24 a 22 21 26 19 IS 17 16 IS H 13 17 II 16 9 I 7 4-1 1 4 3 1 II
C66
.
4'96
.
1
Ca4
.
ifIsk
i.
I
Cog
jaS
in.
I
Cos
.
irS
IR-
1
Cos
Sla
.
irIL
APP
EN
DIX
III
.--N
atur
al s
ines
and
cos
ines
-Con
M.
dr41
1042
.4:
rI
4.
.
'1 I
: ,ff
..-.-
.
Sin
,cm
I8
sin.
Coo
.S
m.
C05
.I
Sir.
'b.
a0.
MN
C.
'O
. 751
710.
091
30.
7431
4O
..-
, a0.
730.
411'
1 0.
7193
469
130
145
295
271
114.
211
$9
237
356
7I
433
2724
494
583
.41
4. .
264
67 .
M87
357
423
785
356
II
7651
1.6
371
.733
73.6
7021
. 742
1.7
1153
556
4173
809
101
141
813
547
47
337
064
141
'S
I8
4574
177
252
941
803
107
$01
9911
5475
251
10.6
901
..6
71.7
41I
4841
.09
.717
3256
11W
I"
1147
261
151
1 I 1
434
971
149
1261
621
11
II
489
771
789
143
1336
189
11-
1219
406
147
671
47
1491
3' '
215
041
497
650
46
15 16''
. 659
3519
6.7
5141 1.
.672
37.7
11.9
5 99.7
2137 97
..7
1630 61
045 44
171
561
590
4318
.11
301
669
4219
701
tOe.
unaz
757
.,54
941
29 21.6
4723
"
,.7
5006 ...,
.673
44 364
.739
24 904
..7
2737 71
e.8
1813 iill
.715
20 6444 39
227
1o
I35
716
597
125
484
3423
117
3I
If I
165
37
2413
101
144
7'A
23.6
931
.76
.061
53.7
.674
5, -
..
'.7
2637
,.7
1427
35
76II
175
473
175
161
7.
407
34
2709
719
749
574
7sn
386
3328
901
2193
461
'76
767
7.
.32
2901
574
414
5134
531
a.7
8911
..',
.741
96.6
7.7
3728
..7
2537
.101
9130
3194
767
.61
711
tzg
3200
330
611
5749
728
429
33.9
0'.7
5984
327
,.62
347
715
326
427
34or
.96
58
615
4517
424
326
33.6
5055
.759
46.0
6371
.7.6
7.6
8911
.701
95.7
1223
2536
077
927
417
213
203
2437
110
641
47
ItZ
34I
436
741
I5.
377
257
16,
2239
344
'45
5'
755
1.
-35
727
714
121
40.6
51.7
5151
.747
03.6
7773
.733
31.
.711
2129
411
,.50
166
379
551
106
731
731
119
4221
1113
573
644
616
491
4'
I .1
is43
794
614
837
4.
7/7
' -17
4425
477
562
525
731
1. ,
'16
43.4
6276
.757
.149
6.7
.601
51. -
.290
1.7
101
1646
61 a
901
4i
I34
I.
14
4771
',
567
393
1 ''
3 '
.a
1343
312
5-94
421
417
957
12
4935
32
484
467
II
50.7
5661
.73
233
110
9111
1
5140
861
71.6
5003
314
227
II9
5243
01as
741
4e 1
I ,41
294
878
5345
260
476
.45
105
127
431
077
311
174 I
431
a,
554
I.97
5
55.7
5566
.665
06.7
441.
a%
.732
34.6
6161
.770
35.7
1008
.708
111
5661
5I
547
527
1121
0157
528
1ai
s55
157
175
421
974
I75
269
4910
133
4I
131
1
91.7
5471
.649
13.7
4314
...,
.. 7
3135
.719
34.7
111
.702
315
OeL
sm.
au.
hi&
CM
a.C
.M
a.Q
at.
Ma.
M.
48'
44°
41Is
4r
AP
PE
ND
IX IV
.-N
AT
UR
AL
TA
NG
EN
TS
AN
DC
OT
AN
GE
NT
SS.
I°2° _
3°
'ran.
C,ot.
Iran.
I
Cot.
Iran.
Cot.
Tan.
CNA.
00.00000
00.01746
57.2900
0.03492
28.6363
0.05241
19.0611
60
1029
3437.75
775
56.3506
521
.3994
270
1869755
59
205
81718.87
804
55.4415
650
.1664
299
.8711
58
a08
711
45.9
283
354
. 561
357
927
. 937
232
6.7
678
574
116
850.
436
862
53. 7
086
609
.711
735
7.6
656
56
4.0
0145
687.
549
.013
91I
52. 8
821
.036
3827
.489
9.0
5387
18.5
645
556
175
672.
957
920
52. 0
807
667
.2715
416
.464
554
720
149
1. 1
0694
951
.303
269
6.0
566
445
.365
553
823
342
9. 7
1897
850
. 548
572
526
.845
047
4. 2
677
529
aca
361.
971
.020
0749
.815
775
4.6
367
603
1708
51
10.0
0291
343.
774
.020
3649
. 103
9.0
3783
26. 4
316
.055
3318
. 075
050
1132
031
2. 5
2106
648
. 412
181
2.2
296
562
17.9
602
4912
349
286.
cs
095
47. 7
395
842
.030
769
1.8
863
4813
378
264.
441
124
47. 0
853
871
25.8
348
620
. 793
447
1440
724
5. 6
5215
346
.448
990
9.6
418
549
. 701
546
15. C
0136
229.
182
.021
8245
. 821
4.0
3929
25.4
517
.056
7827
. 610
645
1646
521
4. 8
5821
145
. 228
195
8.2
644
708
. 520
544
1749
520
2. 2
1924
044
. 638
698
7.0
798
737
.431
443
1852
419
0. 9
6426
944
. 056
1.0
4010
24.8
978
766
.343
242
1965
318
0.93
269
843
. 508
104
6.7
185
795
.255
841
20.0
0610
171.
885
.023
2842
.964
1.0
4075
24. 5
418
.056
2417
.169
340
2161
116
3. 7
0035
742
. 433
510
4. 3
675
854
. 013
3739
22
640
156.259
366
41.9158
133
.1957
883
16.9990
38
23
660
149.465
415
41.4106
162
.0263
912
.9150
37
24
698
143.
237
444
40.9
174
191
23.8
693
941
.831
936
25.0
0727
137.
507
.024
7340
. 435
8.0
1220
23.6
945
.059
7016
.749
635
2675
613
2. 2
1960
239
. 965
525
0.5
321
999
.668
134
::: 2878
561
512
7. 3
2112
2.77
463
156
0I
39. 5
059
39. 0
568
279
308
. 371
8. 2
137
.050
63 038
. 587
460
7533 32
29
844
118.
540
689
38.6
177
337
.057
708
7.4
283
31
30.0
6873
114.
589
.026
1938
. 188
5.0
1366
22. 0
038
.061
1616
. 349
930
3190
211
0. 8
9264
837
. 766
339
5. 7
519
145
. 272
229
32
931
107.
426
677
37. 3
579
424
6020
175
1952
2833
960
101
171
706
36. 9
560
454
.454
120
4. 1
190
2734
469
101.
106
733
36. 5
627
483
3081
233
. 043
526
35.0
1018
98. 2
179
.027
6436
. 177
6.0
4512
22. 1
640
.062
6215
. 963
725
3604
795
. 489
579
335
. 800
654
1.0
217
231
.894
524
3707
692
. 908
582
235
. 431
357
021
. 881
332
1.8
211
2338
105
90. 4
633
851
35. 0
695
699
. 742
635
074
8322
8913
588
. 143
681
3a3.
715
162
3.6
056
379
.670
221
43.0
1164
86 9
3f.3
.029
1034
. 367
8.0
8658
21. 4
704
.064
0815
. 604
820
4119
383
. 843
593
934
. 027
368
7. 3
369
438
. 634
019
4222
281
. 847
096
1333
. 693
571
6. 2
049
467
.463
818
4325
179
. 943
499
733
. 366
274
5. 0
747
496
.394
317
4428
0a
1263
.030
2633
.045
277
420
. 946
062
5. 3
254
16
45.0
1309
76. 3
000
.030
5532
. 730
3.0
003
20. 8
188
.065
.54
15. 2
571
1546
338
74. 7
292
084
32. 4
213
833
.693
258
4. 1
893
14<7
367
73.1390
114
32.1181
862
.5691
613
.1222
13
48
396
71. 6
151
143
31. 8
205
891
.446
564
2.0
557
1249
425
70. 1
533
172
31. 5
X,.4
920
.325
367
114
.989
811
50.0
1455
68. 7
501
.032
0131
. 241
8.0
4949
20. 2
056
.067
0014
. 924
410
5148
467
. 401
923
030
. 959
997
8. 0
872
730
. 8.5
989
6251
366
. 105
525
930
. 633
3.0
5007
19. 9
702
759
.795
48
6364
264
. 858
028
830
. 411
603
7.8
546
788
. 731
77
64
671
63. 6
667
317
30.1
446
066
.740
381
7. 6
685
8
55.0
1600
62. 4
992
.033
4629
. 882
3.0
5095
19. 6
273
.068
4714
. 605
91
6662
961
.362
937
629
. 624
512
4.5
156
816
. 543
84
6765
860
. 305
840
529
. 371
115
3.4
051
905
.482
33
6868
759
. 265
943
429
. 122
018
229
6993
4. 4
212
269
716
68. 2
612
463
ZS
8771
212
.187
996
3.3
607
1
.017
4667
. 290
0.0
3492
213.
636
3.0
6241
19.0
611
.060
9314
.300
7
t.T
an.
Cot
.T
an.
Cot
.T
an.
Cot
.T
an.
14.
$6°
APP
EN
DIX
IV
.-N
atur
al ta
ngen
ts a
nd c
otan
gent
s-C
on.
M.
466°
6°
7°
Tan.
Cot.
Iran.
Cot.
Iran.
Cot.
gram
Cit.
0.06993
14.3007
0.08749
11.4301
0.10510
9.51436
0.12278
8.14415
60
1.07022
.2411
778
.3919
540
.43781
308
.12481
59
2051
.1821
807
.3540
5e9
.46141
334
.10536
53
3080
.1235
837
.3163
599
.43515
367
.0809
57
4110
.0655
866
.2789
623
.40904
397
.06674
56
5.07139
14.0079
.08895
11.2117
.10037
9.38307
.12426
8.04756
55
6168
13.9507
925
.2043
687
.35724
456
.02348
54
7107
.8940
954
.1681
716
.33155
485
.00948
53
8227
.8378
983
.1310
746
.30590
515
7.99058
52
9256
.7821
.09013
.0954
775
.261
5854
4.9
7176
51
10
.07285
13.7267
.09042
11.0594
.10805
9.25530
.12574
7.95302
50
11
314
.6719
071
.0237
634
.23016
603
.93438
49
12
344
.6174
101
10.9882
863
.20516
633
.91522
48
13
373
.563
4130
.9529
893
.12028
662
.89734
'7
14
402
.80e8
159
.9178
922
.15554
692
.87895
46
15
.07431
13.4566
.09189
10.8829
.10952
9.13093
.12722
7.66<64
45
16
461
.4039
218
.8463
951
.10646
751
.51242
44
17
490
.3515
247
.8139
.11011
.02211
781
.82458
43
18
619
.2996
277
.7797
040
.05789
810
.80622
42
19
648
.2460
306
.7457
070
.033
7984
0.7
8825
41
20.0
7578
13.1
969
.093
3513
.711
9.1
1099
9.06
463
.126
097.
7703
540
2160
7.1
461
365
.678
312
88.
9859
869
9.7
5254
3922
636
.095
639
4.6
450
158
.962
2792
9.7
3460
3823
665
.045
8423
.611t.
187
.03367
956
.71715
37
24
695
12.9962
453
.5789
217
.915
20932
.60957
36
25
.07724
12.9469
.00482
10.5462
.11246
8.89195
.13017
7.68208
35
26
753
.8981
611
.5136
276
.86362
047
.664
6634
27
782
.8496
641
.4813
305
.84551
076
.64732
33
28812
.8014
670
.4491
335
.82252
106
.63005
32
29
841
:7536
600
.4172
364
.79964
133
.61267
31
30
.07870
12.7062
.09629
10.3854
.11394
6.77689
.13165
7.69575
30
31
899
.6591
658
.3533
423
.75425
195
.57872
29
32
929
.6124
628
.3224
452
.73172
224
.56178
28
23
958
.5660
717
.2913
442
.70931
254
.54487
27
'4
987
.5199
246
.2602
511
.68701
294
.528
0626
15.08017
1: 4742
.097
7610
.229
4.1
1541
8.66
482
.133
137.
5113
225
3604
6.4
288
805
.198
857
0.6
4275
343
.494
6524
3707
5.3
828
831
.168
360
0.6
2078
372
.478
0623
3810
4.3
390
864
.138
162
9.5
9893
402
.461
6422
3913
4.2
916
893
.108
065
9.6
7718
432
.445
0921
40.0
8163
12.2
305
.099
2310
.078
0.11663
8.55555
.13401
7.42871
20
41
192
.206
795
2.0
463
718
.534
0249
1.4
1240
19
42
221
.1632
981
.0187
717
.51259
621
.39610
18
43
251
.1201
.10011
9.92931
777
.49128
550
.37999
17
4428
0.0
772
040
.960
0780
6.4
7007
560
.363
6916
45.0
8309
12.0
346
.100
699.
9310
1.1
1836
8.44
896
.136
097.
3476
615
4633
911
.992
309
9.9
0211
865
.427
9563
9.3
3190
1447
368
.950
412
8.8
7338
895
.407
0566
9.3
1600
1348
397
.908
713
8.1
4482
924
.386
2569
8.30018
12
4942
7.8
673
187
.816
4195
4.3
6555
728
.284
4211
80.0
8456
11.8
262
.102
169.
7881
7.1
1983
8.34
426
.137
587.
2687
310
61
485
.7253
246
.76009
.12013
.32446
787
.25310
P62
614
.7448
275
.73217
042
.30406
817
.23754
863
644
.704
530
5.7
0441
072
.283
7684
6.2
2204
764
573
.6645
334
.676E0
101
.26356
876
.2061
6
46.08602
11.6248
.10363
9.64935
.12111
8.24345
.13926
7.19125
5:2
632
.585
339
3.6
2205
160
.223
4493
5.1
7594
4bi
661
.646
142
2.5
9490
190
.203
5296
5.16071
368
690
.6072
452
.567
91219
.18370
995
.14553
259
720
.468
548
1. 5
4106
249
.163
98. 1
4024
.130
421
GO
.087
4911
.430
1.1
0510
9.51
436
.122
7i8.
144
35.1
4054
7.11
537
I0
Cnt.
TO
ILC
ot.
Tan
.C
ot.
Tan
.C
ot.
Tan
.M
.
U.
U.
63'
82°
A
APP
EN
DIX
IV
.-N
atur
al ta
ngen
tsan
d co
tang
ents
-Con
.
M.
ror
le1
r
Tan
.C
ot.
Tan
.C
ot.
Tan
.1
Cot
1
T2.
n.
Cot
.
00.
1405
47.
115
370.
158
386.
313
730.
176
335.
6712
80.
143
185.
144
5560
108
4.1
0038
866
.301
8966
3. 6
6165
468
. 136
65.5
9
211
3.0
8546
808
.290
0769
3.6
5205
408
. 123
3258
314
3.0
7059
928
2782
472
3.6
4248
529
. 120
6957
417
3.0
3579
958
.266
5525
3.3
3295
55'
. 112
7956
5.1
4232
7. 0
4105
.159
836.
2548
6.1
7783
6.62
344
.195
895.
104
9035
623
2.0
2637
.160
17.2
4321
313
.613
9761
9. 0
9704
64
726
2.0
1174
047
. 731
6013
.304
5264
9.0
8921
53
829
16.
9071
807
7.2
2003
873
. 595
1168
0. 0
3139
52
932
1. 9
8368
107
. 208
5190
3. 5
8573
710
.073
6051
1014
351
6. 9
6823
1613
76.
107
03. 1
7933
5. 5
7638
1974
05.
06.
334
60
1338
1.9
5385
167
. 185
.59
063
. 547
0677
0.0
5600
40
1241
0.9
3952
196
. 174
1999
3. 5
5777
801
. 0.5
037
44
1344
0.9
2525
225
.163
33.1
8023
. 548
5183
3.0
4267
47
1447
0.9
1104
236
.151
5105
3. 5
3927
861
. 034
9946
1521
4424
6.89
688
.162
8641
4023
.180
835.
530
07.1
9691
& 0
2734
45
1662
9.8
8278
316
1239
911
3. 5
2090
921
.019
7144
1765
9. 8
6874
346
. 112
7914
3. 5
1176
952
.062
1043
1856
3. 8
5475
376
. 106
6417
3. 5
6264
982
. 08.
3M.4
2
1961
8.8
4082
465
.005
3220
349
336
. 200
124.
9969
541
28.6
1548
6.82
644
.164
356.
0844
4.1
8233
3. 4
8451
. 200
424.
989
4040
2137
8.8
1312
465
.063
4026
3.4
7548
073
.981
8839
2220
7.7
9936
493
.032
4029
3.4
6648
103
. 974
1838
2373
7. 7
8564
622
.051
4332
3.4
5751
133
. 966
9037
2476
777
199
555
.040
5135
3.4
4837
,164
.953
4536
25.1
4798
6.75
638
.165
851
0296
2.1
8384
6. 4
3966
.201
944.
9520
195
7882
6. 7
44E
361
5.0
1478
414
.430
7722
4.9
4411
034
2785
673
133
645
.007
9744
4. 4
2192
254
. 937
2133
2888
8.7
1467
48.
997
2047
4. 4
1309
265
.929
8432
2991
5. 7
0450
791
.986
4860
4.4
0429
315
.922
4931
38.1
4215
6.69
116
.167
346.
9757
6.1
8534
6.39
552
. 203
454.
9151
630
3197
5.6
7787
764
.965
1056
4.3
8677
376
.907
8529
32.1
5005
.664
6179
4.9
3448
694
.378
0540
6. 9
0056
28
3343
4.6
5144
824
.943
9062
4.3
6036
436
. 893
3027
3406
4.6
3831
854
. 933
3565
4.3
6070
466
.886
0526
35.1
5094
6. 6
2323
.168
84&
925
83.1
r.64
46.
3520
6.2
0497
4. 8
7842
25
3612
4.6
1219
914
.912
3671
4. 3
4345
527
.87)
6224
3715
3. 5
9921
944
. 901
9174
5. 3
3487
557
. 864
4423
3818
3.3
8627
974
.891
5177
5.3
2631
583
.857
2722
3021
3. W
S. 1
700t
.881
1480
5.3
1778
618
. 850
1321
40.1
3313
6.56
055
.170
338.
870
80. 1
8835
1 30
628
.206
484.
843
0020
4127
2.5
4777
063
.860
5186
5.3
0380
679
8359
010
4210
2.5
3303
003
.850
3489
5. 2
9235
709
. 723
8218
4333
2.5
2234
123
.840
9192
5.2
8398
739
. 821
7517
4436
2. t
0670
153
.829
8295
5.2
7553
770
. 814
7116
45.1
5191
6 49
710
.171
135.
8198
8.1
8936
6. 2
5715
. 208
004.
807
6915
4642
1.4
E45
621
3.8
0953
.190
16. 2
5880
830
. 800
6814
4745
147
205
243
7994
404
6. 2
5043
361
. 793
7013
4848
1.4
5661
273
.782
3307
6.2
4218
291
7867
312
4251
1.4
4720
303
.779
3510
6. Z
391
WI
. 779
7811
12.1
550
6. 4
3434
.173
335.
769
37. 1
0138
1 21
566
. 302
524.
772
8610
5167
0.4
2253
363
.759
4116
6. 2
1744
982
. 765
959
5200
0. 4
1026
393
. 749
4919
7. 2
0925
. 210
13. 7
5906
8
5383
0.3
9804
423
.739
6022
7. 2
0107
043
. 752
197
14N
O.3
6587
453
.729
7425
7. 1
9213
073
.745
346
65.1
3VA
6.17
374
.174
113
1724
02.1
9267
8.18
480
.211
044.
738
516
se71
9.3
6161
361
3.7
1013
317
. 176
7113
4. 7
3170
4
sr
741
.349
6134
3.7
0037
347
. 166
6316
1. 7
2490
3
8877
9.3
3761
573
.690
6437
8.1
6058
195
. 718
132
3980
9.3
2566
On
.810
9430
1.1
5256
225
.711
371
GO
.158
386.
3137
5.1
7638
5 67
128
.124
381
1445
5. 2
1293
4. 7
0463
9
Cot
.T
an.
Cot
.T
axC
ot.
IT
an.
Cot
.T
an.
M.
O r
81°
ar77
16
APP
EN
DIX
- N
atur
al ta
ngen
tsan
d co
tang
ents
-Con
.
31.
sr14
°15
°
Tan
.co
t.C
c ..
Tao
.C
ot.
Too
.C
ot
00.
212
564.
704
630.
2263
74.
3315
30.
2493
34.
0107
80.
267
9..
3. 7
3205
GO
123
6.6
9791
137
. 325
7396
4.0
0582
826
.727
7159
231
6.6
9121
146
. 320
0199
5. 0
0086
657
. 721
38.3
4
334
7.6
3452
179
. 314
30.2
5026
3. 9
9502
&S
S.7
1907
.57
437
7.6
7786
206
.301
360
056
.930
9992
0.7
1476
56
5.2
14C
24.
6712
1.2
234.
302
9!.2
5037
3. 9
8607
. 269
513.
7104
6$s
643
866
433
1.2
9724
118
. 081
1798
2.7
0616
:4
746
9.6
5797
.291
5914
9.9
7627
. 270
13. 7
0188
53
840
9.6
5133
332
180
.971
3901
4.0
9761
52
952
9.6
4480
333
. 280
3221
1. 9
6651
076
.693
3551
10.2
1560
4.63
825
. =93
4.27
471
.252
423.
9616
5.2
7107
3.68
909
So
1159
0.6
3171
424
. 269
1127
3.9
5380
135
.684
3549
1262
1.6
2313
455
.263
5230
4. 9
3106
369
6806
34$
1365
1. 6
1862
495
2579
533
5. 9
4713
201
. 676
3347
1468
2. 6
1219
516
.252
3936
6.9
4232
232
.672
1740
15.2
1712
4.60
572
.235
474.
2468
5.2
5397
3. 9
3751
.272
631.
4679
645
1674
3. 5
9927
573
.241
3242
5.9
3721
294
.663
7644
1777
359
283
608
. 235
8043
9. 9
2793
326
.659
5743
1880
4. 5
8641
639
. 230
3049
0.9
2316
.357
. 0.5
53.3
42
1983
4. 5
8001
670
. 228
4152
1. 9
1839
388
. 651
2141
20.2
1884
4. 5
7363
.237
004.
2113
3.2
5552
3. 9
1364
-274
19a
6470
540
2189
5. 5
6726
731
.213
9758
3. 9
0890
451
. 642
8939
2292
5. 5
6091
762
. 208
4c61
490
417
482
.618
7438
2395
655
458
783
. 202
9a64
5. 8
9945
513
.634
4137
2498
8. 5
4826
823
1975
667
6. 8
9474
545
.630
4S36
.220
174.
541
96.2
3854
4. 1
9215
.257
073.
8900
4.2
7576
3.6%
36as
2604
7.5
3568
885
. 186
7373
8. 8
8536
607
.622
24:3
4
2707
8. 5
2941
916
.181
3776
9.8
8058
638
. 618
1433
2810
8. 5
23t6
946
1760
080
0.8
7601
370
.614
0532
216
139
. 516
931/
27. 1
7064
831
8713
670
1.6
0996
31
36.2
2169
4. 5
1071
.24m
s4.
1653
0.2
5862
3.86
671
.277
323.
wag
s30
3120
0.5
0451
039
. 159
9789
386
208
764
. 601
8129
3223
1.4
9832
69. 1
3465
924
. 857
4579
559
775
28
3326
1.4
9215
100
. 149
3495
5&
5234
826
. 593
7027
3429
2.4
8600
131
. 144
0598
6.8
4824
858
. 589
6626
311
.223
22&
-36
8.2
4162
4. 1
3877
.280
173.
843
64.2
7889
3. 5
8562
2$
3635
333
7412
3. 1
3350
048
.839
0692
1. 5
8160
373E
3-
46/6
422
3. 1
2325
079
. 634
4995
2. 3
7758
23
3841
4. 4
6155
234
. 123
0111
082
992
983
.573
5722
444
. 455
4828
5. 1
1778
141
.825
37. 2
8015
. 569
5721
40.Z
1475
4. 4
4942
. 243
164.
112
56.2
5172
3.82
083
2804
63.
4654
720
4123
5.4
4338
347
. 107
3520
3.8
1630
077
.661
5919
4263
6.4
3735
377
1021
623
5.8
1177
109
. 557
6113
4366
7.4
3134
408
.096
9926
6.8
0726
140
. 553
6417
4469
742
534
439
.031
8219
7.5
0776
172
.549
4816
45.2
2622
4.41
93G
2447
04.
086
65.2
6372
13.
7982
7. 2
4203
3.34
573
15
4865
8. 4
1340
501
. 081
5235
9. 7
0378
234
5417
914
476E
9.4
0745
632
.076
3939
0. 7
8931
266
. 537
8513
4$71
9.4
0132
562
. 071
2742
1. 7
8485
297
. 533
0312
4975
0.3
0560
603
0661
545
2. 7
8010
329
. 530
0111
86.3
2781
4.32
369
.246
244.
0610
7.2
6483
3. 7
7595
.283
80&
526
0910
6181
1.3
2181
655
. 055
9961
577
152
301
s221
99
5284
2:7
:779
368
6. 0
5092
846
. 767
0942
3. 5
1829
8
6387
2.3
7`,1
771
7. 0
4586
677
.762
5845
4. 5
1441
7
4490
3.3
66%
747
.040
8108
8.7
3828
486
.510
536
Si
. 229
344.
960
40.2
4778
4. 0
3578
.366
322.
7538
6.2
8art
a. S
OW
6
5696
4. 3
5459
800
0307
667
0.7
4930
644
. S07
794
934
.346
7984
0.0
2374
701
.745
12. 4
9894
3
as.2
3325
. 343
0087
102
074
733
.740
7561
2. 4
9509
2
066
.337
2390
2.0
1575
764
. 736
4084
3. 4
9135
1
.230
874.
3314
8.9
1933
4 01
071
.267
963.
7320
5.2
8676
8.48
741
0
Oot
.T
ao.
Cot
.I
Taa
.O
ot.
Tao
.C
OL
Tau
.
?le
16.
P74
$28%2 13220 Ittl4V 4320: MU* 318#R2 *RUN MORN MeRtOt MITUO0 200e-0 mwm40,* 0 i
hiiiii iiiii iiiii MP lila Mil iiiii NM killi 11111 Bill Mil 1 $
bsiltgl 131PR pas Illia pili Fa pig lome Ivan logn pica ref 1
d
h;WI WI Hill WI OBI Illil Mil Illif 11111 IWO T1' il'r 1.$r..-.. ..-:-: .-::. .-.-:-: .... ......-: :ie.-. . . . .. . . ... . . .. .. ..: .4 .14..g.
trun ine; pan iim VIER prii !Ail MO Mil RIPE MIR 1.120 ind n
h
S
.....
inn ilili Mil HUI Mil NM Mil MI 11111 Mil IRV Inn 1 1$Ileg0 pH inii 'gni ism INIIN ina pH Well pal re 11032
d ;
b
g
h
g Mil IMO PIMP RA Mil URI MI Hill BM Mil inn MI 1 4
i
Pkatto Illii plill 'gni plaii IMO HOU MI5 pH RIIII peg IOUS Id q
b
."." 2.41"." 2=g2= 22=0M 'max MIMI mamma men szoqs *141$s 2224:1 ItS4291 IR
SW= 2%22.1 SSfti UV= 111414%2 'UR= SIMMS 4242144 112tWA mmul !awe-. i.-.....- 01 A
bg Hill Mil Mil Mil Hill Mil CAI Hill Mg PIMP P1111 MAI 1 $
d
4oefai Inu Nall Viiill ItARN pila rall IliiR peg plil PM 11111 1! i I 1 2
g
b
A 1"11 EMI "=i3 111 "'li MI' filii "IP i'l'i 11211 Mil tglil 1A..,41E:13. (4.6. .. .34 .. Pzi .. .a A a.". r..*. aS. A . 4 .... a .... 741` .. ii j
pia linN Pil WU iNNI 1A110 IVU1 lil2A Fig pin 11ERN pats 1h
h
g SUR EM 1I 5111 ifaii MI Mg Hill HMI Ilile Mil MI filli 14.. .. **** 4.... 4.... 4.... 4.... 4.... 4.... 4.... 4.... 4.... 4.... A
dg
pall ref pan ilUM MIN Rem pal WO: Pill ism plail iglO1 id . . 1 4 n i . 1 . . . at
.1a
h
i. illil inn ROI Ill" 11111 Mg Ili13 IRO 11111 l'ill PIN 11'16 I.4 .... 4 . . . . 4Z. . . 4 . AV: ; . A . 4 . . . . 4 . . ./i ;i . . . i 4 . . . . 4;141.1 . 41 . . . 4 .1 .4 iig
a
gPali lam mai! HIRE INAIV IfIll 111U pH IIIII 101RA OMR itelg id 1 1
b
°-.." as"0 ummr. 22:14.21; *NM NAVAS 2gROX MU WM 'Use 112222 SUM* a
266
'269
8222$ 6322z 2444:4 WV= sama sung sums AARAn AtAtt .12wIt 2040,-0 weesco.
h
;,4 Pill iiiii Mil Big gin MU 11111 Hill Mg Rig MR Mil 1 4
tg$ pau ifiggi !um imi pp IBIAI rift !lin IOUS pill 'EAU 11143 1
4 . . .
k
g 014 PER NM! EUR IIIII Pilli MI Bill MI; MU 11111 EMI 1 $
REM 1111i itilln lama Imo rig lilli IMO Igl 5 11131 IREIS pit Ib
h
g filii Dill NM PAM M CI Alli liali till 11111 P1111 WAN 1A AA g AA A* ' A ' ' A
j
d
E4
inii ism ism pm ism pa pita pie Ira put pia lans 1d
b
h
g 11114 11111 Hill pip mil mil mil mil 111:1 CIO lum null 1A.. A * A.... A A... A. .. A.... A.. A ... A.. A.. A.... A 4
d FIERA 11641 11§Si OEM lifp pafil leili pia IERF5 Ingi ism IRV 1la
.-....... 00.-** -.....- ".-..c. 16-44RX MUNN sanax AIWA Ave4V; MAO AsAAA MAO AI
-----1 3M4tIS 12322g mu* ezczo *MIMI smug smns mum Attt2 mmnr.r. Aso... 0-me- A
glirill fall gill Bill IPA Mil Intl Iliki Rill 11411 Om mu i' A ' A"': 4 **** 455 a . as 4
j.4
OIIII 151111 Ism Iltis !ERNI pill liEIN ppll WIC IBM lam lista 1 g
1
J111:11 nisi poll colol 111:1 mil mil lieu um mil imi Iiiii 1. . e4 e4 i4 el el el .. .4 .4 ... .4 .. ei
A
s'llAline: pp lEIN pet pail 122OB litli ral pal pia pin 11281 Igld . . 5 . .
b
Winn Pip il MOsl itall ;2111 Rill PIM Min i
I
$
b13VBB rail WO lEARI pie pH pia psi; insa ins: itala lein 1
d
k
iliiii mil iral kW Nal 1113i Bin 51011 EOM UPI Mil Hai 1..... ..... . :441,1 s!... c... ".... 0.... 0.... 055. 056 .. 0... d
A.
b
INA rig imi ima lial pia IMO 1E351 11111 pas inn pill 1
iI -1».
*114.*91 Un2.14 MMUS MINNA NU= &WM Miss WI43 IMUss 4222* VS018 II
267
IR743
APP
EN
DIX
W.-
Nat
ural
tang
ents
and
cot
ange
nts-
Con
.
M.
sr33
0340
330
Tam.
Cot.
Tan.
Cot.
Tan.
Cot.
Tan.
Cot.
0.63487
1. 60033
0.64941
1. 53956
0.67451
1. 48256
0.70021
1. 42315
60
1527
.59930
982
.53552
403
.48163
064
.42726
59
2568
.59226
.63024
.53791
536
.48070
107
.42438
58
3808
.59723
065
53693
578
.47977
la
.42550
57
4649
.59620
106
.53595
620
.47885
194
.42462
56
6.62629
1.59517
.65148
1.53497
.67643
1.47792
.70238
1.42374
53
6730
.59114
189
.53400
705
.47499
251
.42286
54
7770
.59311
231
.5330?
749
.476U7
325
.42198
53
s811
.52208
272
.53205
790
.47314
368
.42110
52
9.852
.59105
314
.53107
832
.47422
412
.42022
51
10
.62992
1.59002
.63355
1-53010
.67875
1.47330
.70455
1.41934
59
11
933
.58900
297
.52913
917
.47233
499
41847
49
12
073
.58791
438
.52816
960
.47146
542
.41759
48
13
.6.0014
.58695
480
.52719
.663002
.47053
566
.41672
47
14
055
.58593
521
.52622
045
.40962
629
.41534
46
IS
.63095
1.58490
.655
631.
5252
5.e5058
1.46$170
.70673
1.41497
45
16
136
.583
65604
.52429
130
.46774
7,7
.41409
44
17
"17
.582
56646
.52332
173
.46666
766
.41322
43
18
217
.13184
688
.52235
215
.46595
504
.41235
42
19
268
.58023
729
.52139
253
.46503
843
.41143
41
20
.63299
1.37981
.65771
1.52043
.63301
1.46411
.70391
1.41061
40
21
340
.57879
813
.51946
343
.46310
935
.40974
39
22
380
.577
78854
.51250
356
.46529
979
.40837
38
23
421
.57676
896
.51754
429
.46137
.71023
.40300
37
24
462
.57575
938
.51058
471
.46046
068
.40714
36
22
.40503
1.57474
.65920
1.51562
.685/4
1.45955
.71110
1.40027
35
26544
.57372
.66021
.51460
537
.45864
154
.40540
34
27
684
.57271
063
.51370
600
.45773
193
.40454
33
23
625
.57170
105
.51275
642
.45652
242
.40347
32
29
666
.57069
147
.51179
655
.45592
235
.40281
31
20
.63707
3.56
969
.66189
1.51
084
.687
281.45501
.71329
1.40195
30
31
,748
.56868
239
.500
38771
.45110
373
.40109
29
32 '
789
.56767
272
.50593
814
4v,1
417
.40022
28
33
830
.56667
314
.50797
857
.43:
441
.39038
27
34
871
.565491
256
.50702
200
.451"
503
.30890
23
85
-65912
1-56466
-66592
1.50607
.63942
1.45049
.71549
1.39764
25
36
953
.56365
440
.50512
985
.44953
593
.39679
24
37
994
.56265
482
.50417
.69025
.44563
637
.39593
23
38
.6035
.46165
524
.58322
071
.44778
651
.39507
22
39
076
.56065
666
.50228
114
.44658
725
.39421
21
40
.04117
1.55986
.643205
1.93133
.69157
1.44598
.71769
1.39116
20
41
158
.555
66650
.50032
200
.44506
813
.79250
19
42
199
.55766
692
.49944
243
.44418
857
.39165
18
43
240
.55606
73t
.49349
236
.44329
901
.39079
17
44
281
.66567
776
.49755
329
.44239
th6
.38994
16
AS
.54322
1.28467
.86818
1.49861
.61372
1.44149
.11990
1.38909
15
46
363
.55368
860
.49546
416
.44040
.72054
.38824
14
47
404
.55269
902
.49472
459
.43970
078
.38733
13
48
446
.55170
944
.40378
502
.43581
122
.68653
12
49
487
.55071
986
.4934
545
.43792
167
.38568
11
SO
.64528
1.54972
.67023
1.49190
.69589
1.43703
.72211
1.36454
lc
51
569
.34873
071
.49097
634
.43614
255
.38399
062
610
.54774
1,3
.490
03675
.43625
299
.33314
823
652
.54675
155
.48900
712
.43436
344
.36229
764
693
.54576
197
.48816
781
.43347
388
.38145
6
SS
.64734
1.54478
.67239
1.48722
.69604
1.43253
.72432
:.38060
5se
775
.543
79292
.456
29847
.43169
477
.379
764
16
817
.54281
214
.48536
891
.43050
521
.37891
36
858
.54183
306
.45442
934
.42992
865
.37907
259
899
.54085
409
.48342
977
.42903
610
.37722
1
40
.64941
1.23966
.674E1
1.48256
.70021
1.42815
.72654
1,37638
0
Cot
.Ct6
1-6I.
Cot.
65°Tam
CNat.
'ran.
54°
MG
APP
EN
DIX
W.-
Nat
ural
tang
ents
and
cot
ange
nts-
Con
.SP
376
311°
U.
68.
Tea.
Cot.
Tao.
1
Cot.
Tao.
Cot
.T
an.
Cot
.
0.72
654
1.37
638
0.75
355
1.32
704
0. 7
8129
1.27
940.
1109
781.
234
9060
1099
.37554
401
.326
24175
.27917
.810
27.23416
59
2743
.37470
447
.325
44222
.27841
075
.23343
58
2788
.37336
492
.32464
269
.27764
123
.23270
57
4832
.37302
628
.32384
316
.27688
171
.23196
56
II
.72877
1.37218
.75564
1.32
304
.78363
1.57611
.81220
1.23123
511
921
.37134
629 p
.32224
410
.275
3526
8.13050
54
7966
.37060
675
.32144
457
.27458
316
.229
7753
8.73010
.36957
721
.32064
504
.27382
364
.22904
52
9053
.368
83767
.31984
551
.27306
413
.22821
SI
10
.73100
1.36
800
.75812
1.31904
.78396
3.27
230
.81461
1.22758
SO
11
144
.36716
856
.31825
615
.27153
510
.228
8549
12
189
.366
33904
.31745
692
.27077
558
.22612
48
13
234
.36549
980
.31605
739
.27001
606
.22539
47
14
278
.36466
996
.31586
786
.26925
655
.22467
49
15
.73323
1.36383
.76042
1.31507
.78934
1.26849
.81703
1.22394
48
16
368
.36300
088
.31427
831
.26774
752
.22321
44
17
413
.36217
134
.31348
928
.26698
800
.22249
43
18
457
.36134
180
.31259
975
.26622
819
.22176
42
19
602
.36051
226
.31190
.79022
.26546
892
.12104
41
20
.73547
1.35963
.76272
1.2110
.71070
1.26471
.81946
1.22031
40
21
692
.35855
318
.31031
117
.25395
995
.21959
39
22
637
.35802
364
.30912
164
.26319
.82044
.21986
38
23
681
.25719
410
.30673
212
.25244
092
.21514
37
24
726
.3.5
637
456
.30795
259
.26169
141
.21742
36
25
.737
711.3554
.76502
1.30716
.79306
1.26
091
.82190
1.21670
35
2081
6.3
5472
518
. 306
137
354
.260
18Z
S. 2
1598
3423
861
.353
6959
4. 3
05:8
401.
.259
4327
7.21526
33
...:.
29
906
951
.35307
.35244
640
15 66
.31 430
.30401
4 49
496
.25867
.25792
3 36
385
.21454
.21152
32
31
30
.73996
1.35142
.76733
1.30323
.79544
1.25717 ;
.82434
1.21310
30
31
.74041
.35060
779
.302:4
511
.21642
453
.21238
21
32
056
.34978
825
.30156
679
.25567
531
.21166
23
33
131
.34896
871
.30007
686
.25192
680
.21694
27
31
176
.34814
918
.90009
734
.25417
629
.21023
26
SS
.74221
1.34732
.70964
129
01.79781
1.25343
.82678
1.20951
28
39
267
.34650
.77010
.29653
829
.25266
727
.20879
24
37
312
.34568
057
.29775
877
.25193
776
.20808
23
as
257
.34161
103
.29696
964
.25118
825
.20736
22
39
402
.34405
149
.29618
972
.25044
874
.20665
21
40
.74447
1.34323
.77196
1.29541
.80020
1.24969
.82923
1.20593
20
41
492
.34242
242
.29403
067
.24895
972
.20522
19
42
638
.34160
289
.24185
115
.21820
.63022
.20451
14
43
533
.34079
335
.29307
163
.24746
071
.20379
17
44
628
.33996
382
.26229
211
.24872
120
.20308
16
45
.74674
1.33916
.77428
1.29152
.80238
1.24397
.83169
1.20237
15
46
719
.33835
476
.29074
306
.24523
218
.20166
14
47
764
.33754
521
.289
97354
.24449
268
.20095
13
48
810
.33673
568
.23919
402
.24375
1317
.20024
12
49
855
.33592
615
.28842
450
.24301
366
.19953
'1
60
.74900
1.33511
.77661
1.25764
.80499
1.24227
.83415
1.19582
10
51
946
.33430
708
.28687
546
.24153
465
.19911
952
991
.33349
754
.28610
594
.24072
514
.19740
853
.75037
.33258
801
.28533
642
.24405
564
.16669
784
082
.33187
848
.28456
690
.23931
813
.19529
6
65
.75128
1.33107
.77815
1.18371
.80728
1.22858
.113662
1.19528
556
173
.33026
941
.21302
786
.23784
712
.19457
457
219
.32946
988
.22225
834
.23710
.761
.19387
3as
264
.32665
.78035
.22148
882
.23637
811
.19316
252
310
.32785
082
.26071
930
.23524
860
.19246
1'
60
.76355
1.32704
.78129
1.27994
.80978
1.23490
.83010
1.19175
C
Cot.
'ran.
Cot.
1Tau.
Cot
.T
aa.
Cot.
Tan
.83
°62°
Sr
U.
APP
EN
DIX
IV
.-N
atur
al ta
ngen
ts a
nd c
otan
gent
s-C
on.
M.
460
41°
420
430
Tan.
IC
ot.
Tan
.C
ot.
Tan
.C
ot.
Tan
.C
ot.
410.
830
101.
191
730.
869
291.15037
0.90040
1.11061
0.93252
1.07/37
60
1960
.19105
980
.14969
093
.10996
306
.07174
89
2.84000
.19035
.87031
.11902
148
.10931
360
.07112
66
3059
.189
64.082
.14334
199
.10867
415
.07049
57
410
818
894
133
. 147
6725
1.1
0802
469
.06967
611
I.8
1138
1. 1
8924
.871
841.11699
.90304
1.10717
.93524
1.00925
66
0206
.18754
236
.14632
357
.10672
578
.06862
54
7258
.18684
237
.14565
410
.10607
633
.00800
63
B307
.10614
338
.14498
403
.10543
688
.06738
62
9237
.18544
289
.14430
616
.10478
742
.06676
61
19
.64407
1.18474
087441
1.14363
.90569
1.10414
.93797
1.06613
50
11
457
.18404
492
.14296
621
.10349
852
.06551
49
12
607
.18334
543
.14229
674
.1028,5
906
.05489
48
13
556
.18334
515
.11162
727
.10220
961
.06427
47
14
006
:18194
646
.14095
781
.10156
.64018
.00465
46
15
.84656
1.16125
.87098
1.14020
.90034
1.10091
.04071
1.06303
41
16
706
.18055
7!9
.13961
887
.10027
125
.06241
44
17
756
.17956
801
.11094
940
.09963
160
.06179
43
18
806
.17916
852
.10528
993
.09899
235
.06117
42
19
856
.17846
904
.13761
.01046
.09634
290
.011056
41
26
.84906
1.17777
.87955
1.13694
.91099
1.09770
.94345
1.05094
40
21
956
.17796
.81.017
.11627
153
.09706
400
.05932
39
22
.10006
.17638
059
.13561
206
.09642
455
.01070
38
23
057
.17569
110
.13494
239
.00578
510
.05809
37
24
ior
.17500
162
.13428
313
.09514
665
.05747
36
25
.85157
1.17430
.88214
1.13361
.91366
1.09450
.94620
1.05685
25
26
207
.17361
265
.13295
419
.00386
676
.05624
34
27
257
.17292
317
.13226
473
.09322
731
.05552
33
21
308
.17223
269
.13162
526
.09258
786
.05501
32
29
338
.17134
421
.13000
580
.09195
841
.05439
31
22
.22899
1.17065
.83473
1.13029
.91633
1.09131
.94896
1.05378
30
31
458
.17016
524
.12963
087
.09067
952
.05317
29
32
500
.16947
576
.12897
.740
.00003
.95037
.05255
28
33
559
.16878
628
.12831
794
.01040
03.
.05194
27
34
609
.16800
680
.12765
847
.08876
118
.05133
28
35
.85603
1.16741
.88732
1.12699
.91901
1.00813
.95173
1.05072
25
36
710
.10672
7S1
.12633
955
.06749
229
.05010
24
37
701
.16603
836
.125
67.92008
.05686
284
.04949
23
TS
811
.16535
838
.125
0108
2.0
8622
340
. 048
8822
39862
.26466
940
.12435
116
.08559
395
.01827
21
40
.65912
1.16398
.88902
1.12369
.6e170
1.08496
.95451
1.04766
20
41
963
.16329
.800:5
.02303
224
.08432
506
.01705
19
42
.66014
.16261
097
.12238
277
.05369
582
.64514
18
43
064
.16192
019
.12172
331
.118306
618
.04583
17
44
115
.16124
201
.12106
385
.08243
673
.04522
16
4$
.86146
1.16056
.89253
1.12041
.92439
1.08179
.95729
1.04461
15
46
216
.15987
306
.11975
493
.08116
735
.04401
14
47
267
.15919
353
.11909
547
.00053
841
.01340
13
43
318
.158
51410
.11344
601
.07990
897
.01279
12
49
368
.15783
463
.11778
655
.07927
952
.01218
11
66
.96419
1.15715
.59515
1.11713
.92709
1 07864
.96000
1.04158
10
51
470
.15647
547
.11643
703
.07501
064
04007
9
52
521
.15379
620
.11582
817
.07738
120
04035
8
63
572
.15511
672
.11517
872
.07676
176
03976
7
54
623
.15443
723
.11452
926
.07613
232
03915
6
SS
.866
741.15375
.897
771.11387
.92080
1.07550
.96268
1 03855
6
36725
.15308
800
.11321
.03034
.07487
344
03794
4
57
776
.15210
801
.11256
OiS
.07425
400
.03734
3
58
627
.15172
915
.11191
143
.07362
457
.03674
2
69
878
.15104
988
.11126
207
.07299
513
.03613
1
II.95929
1.15037
.90040
1.11061
.03252
1.07237
.96569
1.02553
0
Clo
t.T
an.
Cot
.T
an.
Cot
.T
Cot
.T
an.
M.
41,
OS°
-....
)
APP
EN
DIX
IV
.-N
atur
al ta
ngen
tsan
d co
tang
ents
-Con
.
M.
440
M.
440
M.
440
Tan.
Cot.
Tan.
Cot.
Tan.
Cot.
00.
9656
91.
0355
3G
O20
0.97
700
1. 0
2355
4040
0.98
843
L 0
1170
20
1625
.0393
59
21
756
.02295
39
41
901
.01112
19
2681
.00433
68
22
813
.022
3638
42
968
.01053
18
a73
8.0
3372
57
23
870
.02176
37
43
.69016
.009
9417
4794
.00312
66
24
927
.02117
36
44
073
.009
3516
6.56550
1.03252
55
25
.979
841.02057
35
45
.99131
1.00875
15
6907
.03192
54
26
.98041
.01998
34
46
100
.00018
14
7963
.03132
53
27
098
.01039
33
47
247
.00759
13
8.07020
.00072
52
28
155
.01079
82
48
304
00/0
112
9070
.03012
51
29
213
.01820
31
49
362
.00642
li
10
.97133
1.02952
50
30
.08270
1.01761
30
60
.994
201000583
10
II
189
.02892
49
31
327
.01702
29
51
478
.00525
9
12
246
.028
3248
32
384
.01642
28
52
536
.004
678
13
302
.02772
47
33
441
.015
8327
53
1591
.004
087
14
359
.02713
46
34
499
.01524
20
64
652
.00350
6
16
.07416
L02
653
45
35
.985
561.03465
26
55
.99710
1.00
291
6
16
472
.0e593
44
36
613
.01405
24
56
764
.00233
4
17
629
.02533
43
37
671
.01347
23
67
826
.00175
3
18
686
.024
7442
38
728
.01288
22
68
884
.00116
2
19
843
.02414
41
39
786
.01229
21
69
942
.00058
1
29
.97700
1 02355
40
40
.98843
1.01170
20
60
1.00000
1.00003
0
OA.
Tan.
Cot.
Tan.
Clot.
Tan.
M.
M.
m.
45°
45
45°
Abscissas, 122Acute angles, ratio for, 26Addition of vectors, 78Algebraic operatims, logarithms,Angle between two lines, 127Angles:
300 - 60°, 4245°, 43cofunctions, 53cosine of, 30, 47coterminal, 32degree system, 17greater than 90°, 47quadrantal, 45radians, 18reference, 36sine of, 47special, 42standard position, 31tangent of, 48
Angular velocity, 21Antilogrithms, 6Applications:
equilthrium, 100logarithms, 15probability, 255
Area:formula, 74of a sector, 22under a curve, 206
Basic concepts of probability, 244
INDEX
Common logarithms:characteristics, 3fractions, 4
14 integers, 3mantissa, 3
Complementary angles, 53Composite circle diagram, 50Compound probabilities, 248Computer operations, 255Constant:
derivation of, 193of integration, 210to a variable power, 226
Constant and variable, product of, 220Coordinates:
converting Cartesian to polar, 162polar, 83rectangular, 31
Cosine:graph of, 51law of, 56of an angle, 30, 47
Coterminal angles, 32Curve:
direction of, 165slope of, 165
Cartesian to polar coordinates, 162Center of gravity, 99Chain rule of differentiation, 201Changing bases, logarithms, 7Circle:
defined by three points, 140diagrams, composite of, 50general, 138motion in, 174
Cofunctions and complementary angles,Co logarithms, 12Combinations, 236Combining vectors, 78
Definite integrals, 214Definition of:
combinations and permutations, 234limit, 179
Derivative of a constant, 193Differentiation:
chain rule, 201general, 188implicit functions, 202inverse functions, 201powers of functions, 195products, 197quotients, 198radicals, 199sums, 196
53 trigonometric functions, 203variables, 194
Direction of a curve, 165Discontinuities, 186
270
273
INDEX
Distance:between two points, 122of a point from a line, 132
Division:logarithms, 11of a line segment, 123of vectors, 89
Ellipse:equation, 152general, 149locus of points, 152standard form, 153
Empirical probabilities, 252Equation:
ellipse, 152hyperbola, 157parametric, 174straight line, 128tangent and normal, 171trigonometric, 118
Equilibrium:applications, 100first condition, 92rotational, 98second condition, 98translational, 92
Events:dependent, 249independent, 248mutually exclusive, 250
Expectation:numerical, 247value, 247
First condition of equilibrium, 92Formula:
area, 74combinations, 236limit, 183parabola, 148permutations, 240reduction, 107
Free body diagrams, 95Frequency of success, relative, 252Functions, transcendental, 117Fundamental identities, 103
General differentiation, 188Graph of the:
cosine, 51sine, 51tangent, 51
Gravity, center of, 99
Hyperbola, 155
Identities, 103Implicit functions, differentiation, 202Inclination and slope, 124Increment and differentiation, 188Indefinite integrals, 210Independent events, 248Indeterminate forms, 182Infinitesimals:
conclusions, 186products, 185sums, 185
Integrand, 210Integration:
area und3r a curve, 206constant, 210definite integrals, 214definitions, 206evaluation of constant, 211general, 206indefinite, 210integrand, 210interpretation, 206limits, 215rules, 212
Integration of:constant to a variable power, 226power of a function of x, 222power of a variable, 220product of constant and variable, 220quotient, 223sums, 221trigonometric functions, 229, 232
Interpolation, logarithms, 9Inverse functions:
differentiation, 201relations, 111trigonometric, 108
Laws of:cosines, 56sines, 55tangents, 72
Length of subtangents and subnormals, 172Limit:
concept, 179definition of, 179formulas, 183lower, 215upper, 215
Limited solutions, trigonometric, 120Line:
equations:normal form, 130
MATHEMATICS, VOLUME 2
Line: (continued)equations: (continued)
parallel and perpendicular, 130point-slope form, 128slope-intercept form, 129
inclination and slope, 124midpoint, 124segment, division of, 123
Lines, parallel and perpendicular, 126Logarithmic solutions, triangles, 68Logarithms:
definitions, 1division, 2forms, 1multiplication, 1powers, 2rules, 1
Mantissa, 4Measures with radians, 20Measuring angles, 17Midpoint of a line, 124Mils, 19Motion in a:
circle, 174straight line, 174
Multiplication:logarithms, 9vectors, 88
Mutually exclusive events, 250
Natural logarithms, 7Negative characteristics, logarithms, 14Numerical expectation, 247Oblique triangles, solutions:
three sides, 61two angles and one side, 59two sides and an opposite angle, 64
sides and included angle, 63Operations, computer, 255Ordinate, 122
Parabola, 144Parallel and perpendicular lines, 126, 130Parametric equations, 174, 175Periodicity of functions, 51Permutations, 239Point-slope form, 128Polar coordinates, 83, 161Polar to Cartesian coordinates, 163Power of a:
function of x, 222variable, 220
Powers of functions, differentiation, 198Principal values, 108
Principle of choice, 238Probability:
application of, 255basic concepts, 244compound, 248of failure, 246of success, 244
Product of constant and variable, 220Products, differentiation, 197Properties of triangles, 23Pythagorean Theorem, 23
Quadrantal angles, 45Quadrant system, 35Quotients, differentiation, 196
Radians, 18, 20Radicals, differentiation, 199Raising to a power, logarithms, 13Ratios for acute angles, 26Reciprocals and ratios, 104Rectangular coordinates, 31Reduction formulas, 107Reference angle, 36Relations among inverse functions, 111Relative frequency of success, 252Right triangles, 25Rotation, 92Rotational equilibrium, 98Rules of integration, 212
Scalars, 77Second condition of equilibrium, 98Sector, area of, 22Similar triangles, 24Sine:
graph of, 55law of, 55of an angle, 47
SI, pe-intercept form, 129Slope of a curve at a given point, 165Special angles, 42Squared relationships, 105Standard position, angles, 31Statistical data, usage of, 255Straight line, motion of, 174Subnormal, length of, 172Subtangent, length of, 172Subtraction of vectors, 79Sums, difierentiation, 196
Tangent:graph of, 51law of, 72of an angle, 48
2'175
INDEX
Tangents:and normals, 171at a given point, 166
Transcendental functions, 117Translation, 92Translational equilibrium, 92Triangles:
logarithmic solutions, 68properties of, 23similar, 24
Trigonometric:equations, 118formulas:
addition and subtraction,double angle, 115halt angle, 116
functions:definition, 33differentiation, 203inverse, 108logarithms, 6
limited solutions, 120
ratios, 29reciprocals and ratios, 104square relationships, 105tables, 26, 39
Usage of statistical data, 255Use of:
tables, trigonometric, 39trigonometric ratios, 29
Value expectation, 247Variable, power of, 220Variables, differentiation, 194
112 Vectors:addition, 78combining, 78division of, 89multiplication, 88solutions, 80, 81subtraction, 79symbols, 77
Velocity, angular, 21
2
27673